Delta Ia-Plc As Hom en 20210225

AS Series Hardware and Operation Manual
Industrial Automation Headquarters

Delta Electronics, Inc.
Taoyuan Technology Center
No.18, Xinglong Rd., Taoyuan District,
Taoyuan City 33068, Taiwan
TEL: 886-3-362-6301 / FAX: 886-3-371-6301
Asia EMEA
Delta Electronics (Shanghai) Co., Ltd. Headquarters: Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.
No.182 Minyu Rd., Pudong Shanghai, P.R.C. Sales: [email protected]
Post code : 201209 Marketing: [email protected]
TEL: 86-21-6872-3988 / FAX: 86-21-6872-3996 Technical Support: [email protected]
Customer Service: 400-820-9595 Customer Support: [email protected]
Service: [email protected]
Delta Electronics (Japan), Inc. TEL: 31(0)40 800 3900
Tokyo Office
Industrial Automation Sales Department BENELUX: Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.
2-1-14 Shibadaimon, Minato-ku De Witbogt 20, 5652 AG Eindhoven, The Netherlands
Tokyo, Japan 105-0012 Mail: [email protected]
TEL: 81-3-5733-1155 / FAX: 81-3-5733-1255 TEL: 31(0)40 800 3900
DACH: Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.

Delta Electronics (Korea), Inc.
Coesterweg 45, D-59494 Soest, Germany
Seoul Office
Mail: [email protected]
1511, 219, Gasan Digital 1-Ro., Geumcheon-gu,
TEL: 49(0)2921 987 0
Seoul, 08501 South Korea
TEL: 82-2-515-5305 / FAX: 82-2-515-5302 France: Delta Electronics (France) S.A.
ZI du bois Challand 2, 15 rue des Pyrénées,
Delta Energy Systems (Singapore) Pte Ltd. Lisses, 91090 Evry Cedex, France
4 Kaki Bukit Avenue 1, #05-04, Singapore 417939 Mail: [email protected]
TEL: 65-6747-5155 / FAX: 65-6744-9228 TEL: 33(0)1 69 77 82 60
Delta Electronics (India) Pvt. Ltd. Iberia: Delta Electronics Solutions (Spain) S.L.U
Plot No.43, Sector 35, HSIIDC Gurgaon,
AS Series Hardware and

Ctra. De Villaverde a Vallecas, 265 1º Dcha Ed.
PIN 122001, Haryana, India Hormigueras – P.I. de Vallecas 28031 Madrid
TEL: 91-124-4874900 / FAX : 91-124-4874945 TEL: 34(0)91 223 74 20
Carrer Llacuna 166, 08018 Barcelona, Spain
Delta Electronics (Thailand) PCL.
Operation Manual
909 Soi 9, Moo 4, Bangpoo Industrial Estate (E.P.Z), Mail: [email protected]
Pattana 1 Rd., T.Phraksa, A.Muang, Italy: Delta Electronics (Italy) S.r.l.
Samutprakarn 10280, Thailand Via Meda 2–22060 Novedrate(CO)
TEL: 66-2709-2800 / FAX : 662-709-2827 Piazza Grazioli 18 00186 Roma Italy
Delta Electronics (Australia) Pty Ltd. TEL: 39 039 8900365
Unit 20-21/45 Normanby Rd., Notting Hill Vic 3168, Australia
TEL: 61-3-9543-3720 Russia: Delta Energy System LLC
Vereyskaya Plaza II, office 112 Vereyskaya str.
Americas 17 121357 Moscow Russia
Delta Electronics (Americas) Ltd.
TEL: 7 495 644 3240
Raleigh Office
P.O. Box 12173, 5101 Davis Drive, Turkey: Delta Greentech Elektronik San. Ltd. Sti. (Turkey)
Research Triangle Park, NC 27709, U.S.A. Şerifali Mah. Hendem Cad. Kule Sok. No:16-A
TEL: 1-919-767-3813 / FAX: 1-919-767-3969 34775 Ümraniye – İstanbul
Delta Electronics Brazil TEL: 90 216 499 9910
São Paulo Sales Office
Rua Itapeva, 26 - 3°, andar Edificio Itapeva, GCC: Delta Energy Systems AG (Dubai BR)
One - Bela Vista 01332-000 - São Paulo - SP - Brazil P.O. Box 185668, Gate 7, 3rd Floor, Hamarain Centre
TEL: 55-12-3932-2300 / FAX: 55-12-3932-237 Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Delta Electronics International Mexico S.A. de C.V. TEL: 971(0)4 2690148
Mexico Office
Gustavo Baz No. 309 Edificio E PB 103 Egypt + North Africa: Delta Electronics
Colonia La Loma, CP 54060 Unit 318, 3rd Floor, Trivium Business Complex, North 90 street,
Tlalnepantla, Estado de México New Cairo, Cairo, Egypt
TEL: 52-55-3603-9200 Mail: [email protected]
AS-0249420-10
*We reserve the right to change the information in this catalogue without prior notice. 2021/02/25 www.deltaww.com
AS Series Hardware and Operation
Manual
Revision History
Ve r s i o n Revision Date
1st The first version was published. 2 0 1 6 / 11 / 3 0
1.Added new models AS08AD-B, AS08AD-C and
UB-10-IO32D product information.
2nd 2018/02/09
2 . U p d a t e d m o d u l e w e i g h ts .
3.Updated Emergency Request Message information
3rd 1 . C h a p t e r 2 : Sp e c i f i c a t i o n C o r r e c t i o n s 2018/03/22
1.Updated new models AS08AD-B/C, AS02/04PU-A,
AS320T/P-B, AS300N-A, AS228R/T/P-A,
AS218RX/TX/PX-A, AS0 6RTD-A, AS08 TC-A, AS-FEN02
4th a n d A S 0 1 D N E T- A p r o d u c t i n f o r m a t i o n 2018/09/25
2.Chapter 9: Updated operation and monitor on the
webpage in section 9.10
3.Chapter 10: Updated AS200 series information
1.Updated digital output specifications in section 1.1.2.
2 . A d d e d s p e c i f i c a t i o n o f a m b i e n t a i r.
temperature-barometric pressure-altitude in section 2.1.
3.Added specifications of program capacity (step) and
Ethernet in section 2.2.1.
4.Added specifications of input impedance and leakage
current in section 2.2.2.
5.Added specifications of digital conversion range and
update input impedance for 04DA/06XA.
6.Added a note for the function specification in section
2.5.1.
7.Updated specifications of input impedance in section
2.9.1.
8.Updated the cable specification image in section 4.2.1.
9 . U p d a t e d t h e c o n t e n ts o f i n i t i a l i z i n g a m e m o r y c a r d i n
5th section 7.4.1 and added root directory of the memory 2 0 1 9 / 1 / 11
card in sections 7.6, 7.8 and 7.9.
1 0 . A d d e d a n e x a m p l e o f D a y l i g h t S a v i n g Ti m i n g i n s e c t i o n
8.2.2.1.
11.Added specification for AS-FEN02 in section 9.3.1 and
9.3.2.
12.Updated EIP Scanner/Adapter and data mapping
information, EIP Builder operations in section 9.4.
13.Updated assembly object, TCP/IP interface object and
Ethernet link object in section 9.8.
14.Added new EIP products in the EIP product list in
section 9.9.
15.Updated operation and monitor on the web information
in section 9.10.
16.Added AS200 series descriptions as well as application
e xamples and updated CANopen introduction as well
as troubleshooting.
17.Added descriptions on the Error LED Indicators in
section 12.3.1 and 12.3.2.
1 8 . A d d e d a n e w c h a p t e r, c h a p t e r 1 3 f o r D a t a Tr a c e r a n d
D a t a L o g g e r.
19.Updated the list of Function Codes and Number of
Devices Supported for Modbus Protocols in section
B.2.
1. Manual corrections in the response time of electrical
6th specification for the inputs on AS300 series in section 2019/06/04
2.2.2.
1. Added information of new products AS02PU-A,
AS04PU-A, AS02HC-A, AS04SIL-A, and AS-FPFN02.
2. Added AS200 analog input/output information in
section 2.2.5.
3. Updated electrical specification (24 VDC) for IO
module in section 2.3.
4. Updated A/D functional specification for AS04AD-A,
AS08AD-B, AS08AD-C and AS06XA-A in section 2.4.1.
5. Added electrical specification and parameter settings
for AS02PU-A and AS04PU-A in section 2.6.
6. Added specification for AS02HC-A in section 2.7.
7. Added specification for AS04SIL-A in section 2.8.
8. Updated specification for AS-F2AD, AS-F2DA and
AS-FPFN02 in section 2.10.
9. Added descriptions for S M204 and S M204 in section
5.1.3.
10.Updated device register range in section 5.1.4.
11.Added device function description for AS02HC-A in
s e c t i o n 5 . 2 . 11 .
7th 12.Updated data register description in section 5.2.12. 2019/12/20
13.Updated software setting description “Options - System
Information Page” in section 8.2.2.1.
14.Updated Send and Receive Length in section 8.2.2.4.
15.Updated description of “Options - Function Card 2
Setting” in section 8.2.2.6.
1 6 . U p d a t e d HW C O N F I G i m a g e f o r A S S e r i e s C P U m o d u l e
in section 8.2.3.
17.Updated description of “Options - Function Card 2
Setting” in section 8.3.1.
18.Added AS-FPFN02 product information and updated
socket information in section 9.3.
19.Updated operational description for EIP Builder in
section 9.4.
20.Added AS-FPFN02 product information in section 9.6.
2 1 . A d d e d i n s t a n c e a t t r i b u t e a n d o b j e c t e xa m p l e s i n
section 9.8.5.
22.Added object examples in section 9.8.8.
2 3 . A d d e d d a t a t y p e f o r i n s ta n c e 1 i n s e c t i o n 9 . 8 . 1 2 .
24.Added new product information AHCPU501-EN and
AHCPU560-EN2 in section 9.9.
25.Updated SR829 information in section 10.5.1.
26.Added descriptions of SM5=ON and SM0=ON in section
12.1.4.
27.Updated error codes 16#0102, 16#0202, 16#0302,
16#0D03, 16#0E05, and 16#200A in section 12.2.2.
28.Added error codes 16#19B0-16#19FC and updated
16#2001, 16#2003, 16#300B-200E, 16#2012-2014,
16#2017, 16#2027-2031 in section 12.2.9.
29.Added troubleshooting information for AS02PU-A,
AS04PU-A, AS02HC-A, and AS04SIL-A in section
12.3.2, 12.3.3 and 12.3.5.
30.Added error codes 16#1500 and16#1505 in section
12.3.7.2.
31.Updated error code #162003 and added 16#2030
and16#2031 and added information for AS02PU-A,
AS04PU-A, AS02HC-A, and AS04SIL-A in section 12.4.
1. Updated power supply information on all CPU Series,
added new product information, AS100 Series and
AS-FOPC02, updated model description on Positioning
Modules, Counter Modul es, AS-FEN02, and
AS-FPFN02 in section 1.1.2.
2. Added the durability information in general
specification in section 2.1.
3. Updated electrical input insolation information in
section 2.2.2, 2.3.1, and 2.7.1.
4. Updated the Software filter time setting range in
section 2.31.
5. Updated the general specification on Positioning
Module in section 2.6.1.
6. Updated the general specification on Counter Module
in section 2.7.1.
7. Updated the general specification of the Ethernet
Communication Interface on Network Module in section
8th 2.8.1. 2020/07/07
8 . U p d a t e d t h e d e s c r i p t i o n s o f t h e E r r o r L E D I n d i c a t o r,
function card slots 1&2 and mode switch for
A S 0 0 S C M- A i n s e c t i o n 2 . 8 . 2 .
9. Added information of Ethernet Communication Interface
for AS-FEN02 and AS-FPFN02 in section 2.10.1.
10.Added a description for the example of 16-bit counters
in section 5.2.10.
11.Added a description for the example of 32-bit counters
i n s e c t i o n 5 . 2 . 11 .
12.Added a description for data register range in section
5.2.12.
13.Added a notice in section 8.1.
14.Added a device range table for modules in section
8.1.2.2.
15.Updated the image and description in point 5 in section
8.2.2.2.
16.Updated the EtherNet/IP specification table in section
9.3.2.
17.Updated PROFINET specification in section 9.3.3.
18.Update a number in AS300 Series PLC master register
in section 10.6.
19.Added a new description in section 12.2.8.
20.Updated the table of ERROR LED Indicators Are ON in
section 12.3.3.1.
21.Added two ne w error co des in section 12.3.5.2.
1.AS Series Hard ware Ma nual and AS Series Operation
Manual are combined into AS Series Hardware and
Operation Manual to enhance more concise reading
e xperiences.
2 . A d d e d n e w p r o d u c t i n f o r m a t i o n , A S - P S 0 3 C , A S - AT X B ,
AS-FOPC02, AS100 and added power input
specifications for AS300 and AS200 series. Updated
specifications on AS02PU-A, AS04PU-A, AS02HC-A,
AS-FEN02, and AS-FPFN02.
3.Added contents from Chapter 3 of AS Series Hardware
Manual in Chapter 2.
4.Added contents from Chapter 2 and 5 of AS Series
Hard ware Manual in Chapter 4.
5.Added contents from Chapter 4 of AS Series Hardware
Manual in Chapter 5.
6 . U p d a t e d HW C O N F I G 4 . 0 o p e r a t i o n i m a g e s i n C h a p t e r 8 .
7.Added section 9.2.3 Network Communication Parameter
S e t t i n g . U p d a t e d m a xi m u m c o n n e c t i o n q u a n t i t y f o r
9th 2021/2/5
Client and Server in Mo dbus TCP specification in 9.3.1.
Updated PROFINET specification in section 9.3.3.
U p d a t e d TA G d e s c r i p t i o n i n s e c t i o n 9 . 5 . 2 . U p d a t e d
Delta EIP Products in section 9.9.
8.Added section 10.1.3 Refreshing Mechanism in the
I n p u t / O u t p u t M a p p i n g A r e a a n d u p d a t e d HW C O N F I G
4.0 operation images in Chapter 10.
9 . A d d e d E xe c u t i o n Ti m i n g o f I n t e r r u p t s i n s e c t i o n 11 . 1 . 3 .
1 0 . U p d a t e d 1 2 . 2 . 8 St a t u s a n d O p e r a t i o n u n d e r D i f f e r e n t
Operating Modes, and troubleshooting sections in
1 2 . 3 . 3 H i g h - Sp e e d C o u n t e r M o d u l e A S 0 2 H C , 1 2 . 3 . 4
Load Cell Module AS02LC, 12.3.5 the Module A S04SIL
as a Communication Module and 12.3.6 Module
AS00SC M as a Communication Module.
11.Added Delta Drive Parameters Backup and Restore in
section 13.3.
1 2 . A d d e d A p p e n d i x C t o i n t r o d u c e E M C St a n d a r d s a n d
Appendix D to illustrate Maintenance and Inspection.
10th 1.Manual correction in Chapter 1.3 presentation. 20210225
AS Series Hardware and Operation Manual
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Product Introduction
1.1 Overview ........................................................................................... 1-2

1.1.1 Related Manuals ............................................................................ 1-2
1.1.2 Models Descriptions........................................................................ 1-2
1.2 Overview ......................................................................................... 1-13
1.3 Characteristics ................................................................................. 1-14
Chapter 2 Specifications and System Configuration
2.1 General Specifications ....................................................................... 2-3
2.2 CPU Module Specifications ................................................................. 2-4

2.2.1 Functional specifications ................................................................. 2-4
2.2.2 Electrical specifications ................................................................... 2-5
2.2.3 CPU Module Profiles........................................................................ 2-9
2.2.4 CPU Module Input/Output Terminals ............................................... 2-14
2.2.5 AS200 Input/Output Terminals ...................................................... 2-17
2.3 Digital Input/Output Module Specifications .................................... 2-18

2.3.1 General Specifications .................................................................. 2-18
2.3.2 Digital Input/Output Module Profiles ............................................... 2-20
2.3.3 Digital Input/Output Module Terminals ........................................... 2-29
2.4 Analog Input/Output Module Specifications .................................... 2-36

2.4.2 Analog Input/Output Module Profiles .............................................. 2-42
2.4.3 Analog Input/Output Terminals ...................................................... 2-43
2.5 Temperature Measurement Modules Specifications ......................... 2-44

2.5.2 Temperature Measurement Module Profiles ..................................... 2-47
2.5.3 Temperature Measurement Module Dimensions ............................... 2-49
2.6 Positioning Module Specifications.................................................... 2-50

i
2.6.2 Positioning Module Profiles ............................................................. 2-52
2.6.3 Positioning Module Terminals ......................................................... 2-53
2.7 Counter Module Specifications ........................................................ 2-54

2.7.1 General Specifications ................................................................... 2-54
2.7.2 Counting Module Profiles................................................................ 2-57
2.7.3 Counting Module Terminals ............................................................ 2-58
2.8 Network Module Specifications ....................................................... 2-59

2.8.2 Network Module Profiles ................................................................ 2-63
2.9 Load Cell Module Specifications ....................................................... 2-67

2.9.2 Load Cell Module Profiles ............................................................... 2-68
2.9.3 Load Cell Module Dimensions ......................................................... 2-69
2.10 Extension Card Specifications.......................................................... 2-70

2.10.2 Extension Card Profiles .................................................................. 2-74
2.10.3 Function Card Weights .................................................................. 2-76
2.11 Power Supply Module Specifications ............................................... 2-77

2.11.2 Power Supply Module Profiles ......................................................... 2-78
2.11.3 AS-PS03C Communication Formats and Station ID Setups ................. 2-80
2.12 Power Supply Module Adapter Specification .................................... 2-83
Chapter 3 Installing Software
3.1 Installing and Uninstalling ISPSoft ................................................... 3-2

3.1.1 Installing ISPSoft ........................................................................... 3-2
3.1.2 Uninstalling ISPSoft ....................................................................... 3-9
3.2 Installing and Uninstalling COMMGR ................................................. 3-9

3.2.1 Installing COMMGR ....................................................................... 3-10
3.2.2 Uninstalling COMMGR .................................................................... 3-13
ii
Chapter 4 Installing Hardware and Wiring
4.1 AS Series Hardware Framework ........................................................ 4-2

4.1.1 AS Series Hardware Component ...................................................... 4-2
4.2 Installation Notes .............................................................................. 4-5
4.3 Installation ........................................................................................ 4-6

4.3.1 Installing Modules in a Control Box .................................................. 4-6
4.3.2 Installing a Module ......................................................................... 4-7
4.3.3 Installing a Removable Terminal Block .............................................. 4-9
4.3.4 Changing a Module....................................................................... 4-10
4.3.5 Installing and Removing an Extension Card ..................................... 4-10
4.3.6 Installing a Wiring Module ............................................................. 4-12
4.4 Wiring.............................................................................................. 4-13
4.5 Connecting Power Cables ................................................................ 4-15

4.5.1 Precautions ................................................................................. 4-15
4.5.2 Ground ....................................................................................... 4-15
4.5.3 Wiring Power Supply Modules ........................................................ 4-16
4.5.4 Communication Port of Power Module ............................................. 4-17
4.5.5 Power Consumption ..................................................................... 4-18
4.6 Wiring CPU Modules ........................................................................ 4-20

4.6.1 Wiring AS324MT-A ....................................................................... 4-21
4.6.2 Wiring AS332P-A ......................................................................... 4-24
4.6.3 Wiring AS332T-A ......................................................................... 4-26
4.6.4 Wiring AS320P-B ......................................................................... 4-28
4.6.5 Wiring AS320T-B ......................................................................... 4-29
4.6.6 Wiring AS228P-A ......................................................................... 4-30
4.6.7 Wiring AS228R-A ......................................................................... 4-31
4.6.8 Wiring AS228T-A ......................................................................... 4-32
4.6.9 Wiring AS218PX-A / AS218RX-A / AS218TX-A ................................. 4-33
4.6.10 Wiring ........................................................................................ 4-37
4.7 Wiring Digital Input/Output Modules .............................................. 4-39

4.7.1 Wiring AS08AM10N-A ................................................................... 4-39
4.7.2 Wiring AS08AN01P-A .................................................................... 4-40
4.7.3 Wiring AS08AN01R-A ................................................................... 4-41
4.7.4 Wiring AS08AN01T-A.................................................................... 4-42
4.7.5 Wiring AS16AM10N-A ................................................................... 4-43
4.7.6 Wiring AS16AN01R-A ................................................................... 4-44
iii
4.7.7 Wiring AS16AN01T-A .................................................................... 4-45
4.7.8 Wiring AS16AN01P-A .................................................................... 4-46
4.7.9 Wiring AS16AP11R-A..................................................................... 4-47
4.7.10 Wiring AS16AP11T-A ..................................................................... 4-48
4.7.11 Wiring AS16AP11P-A ..................................................................... 4-49
4.7.12 Wiring AS32AM10N-A .................................................................... 4-50
4.7.13 Wiring AS32AN02T-A .................................................................... 4-52
4.7.14 Wiring AS64AM10N-A .................................................................... 4-55
4.7.15 Wiring AS64AN02T-A .................................................................... 4-57
4.8 Wiring Digital Input/Output Terminals ........................................... 4-60

4.8.1 Wiring Digital Input Terminals ........................................................ 4-60
4.8.2 Wiring Digital Output Terminals ...................................................... 4-64
4.9 Wiring Analog Input/Output Modules ............................................. 4-68

4.9.1 Wiring AS04AD-A.......................................................................... 4-68
4.9.2 Wiring AS08AD-B.......................................................................... 4-69
4.9.3 Wiring AS08AD-C.......................................................................... 4-70
4.9.4 Wiring AS04DA-A.......................................................................... 4-71
4.9.5 Wiring AS06XA-A .......................................................................... 4-72
4.10 Wiring Temperature Measurement Modules .................................... 4-74

4.10.1 Wiring AS04RTD-A ........................................................................ 4-74
4.10.2 Wiring AS06RTD-A ........................................................................ 4-75
4.10.3 Wiring AS04TC-A / AS08TC-A ......................................................... 4-76
4.11 Wiring Positioning Modules and Counter Modules ........................... 4-77

4.11.1 Wiring AS02PU-A .......................................................................... 4-77
4.11.2 Wiring AS04PU-A .......................................................................... 4-78
4.11.3 Wiring AS02HC-A.......................................................................... 4-79
4.12 Load Cell Modules ............................................................................ 4-82

4.12.1 Wiring AS02LC-A .......................................................................... 4-82
4.13 Wiring Network Modules ................................................................. 4-83

4.13.1 AS00SCM-A ................................................................................. 4-83
4.13.2 Wiring AS00SCM-A ....................................................................... 4-83
4.13.3 AS01DNET-A ................................................................................ 4-84
4.13.4 Wiring AS01DNET-A ...................................................................... 4-85
4.13.5 AS04SIL-A ................................................................................... 4-86
4.13.6 Wiring AS04SIL-A ......................................................................... 4-86
4.14 Wiring Function Cards ..................................................................... 4-89
iv
4.14.1 Communicational Function Card Profiles and the Pin Definitions ......... 4-89
4.14.2 Wiring the Communicational Function Cards .................................... 4-90
4.14.3 Analog Function Card Profiles and the Pin Definitions ........................ 4-92
4.14.4 Wiring AS-F2AD ........................................................................... 4-93
4.14.5 Wiring AS-F2DA ........................................................................... 4-94
Chapter 5 Devices
5.1 Introduction of Devices ......................................................................... 5-2

5.1.1 Device Table ................................................................................. 5-2
5.1.2 Basic Structure of I/O Storages ....................................................... 5-3
5.1.3 Relation Between the PLC Action and the Device Type ........................ 5-4
5.1.4 Latched Areas in the Device Range .................................................. 5-5
5.2. Device Functions .................................................................................. 5-6

5.2.1 Values and Constants ..................................................................... 5-6
5.2.2 Floating-point Numbers .................................................................. 5-9
5.2.3 Strings ....................................................................................... 5-11
5.2.4 Input Relays (X) .......................................................................... 5-12
5.2.5 Output Relays (Y) ........................................................................ 5-13
5.2.6 Auxiliary Relays (M) ..................................................................... 5-13
5.2.7 Special Auxiliary Relays (SM) ........................................................ 5-13
5.2.8 Stepping Relays (S) ..................................................................... 5-14
5.2.9 Timers (T)................................................................................... 5-14
5.2.10 16-bit Counters ........................................................................... 5-16
5.2.11 32-bit Counters (HC) .................................................................... 5-18
5.2.12 Data Registers (D) ....................................................................... 5-20
5.2.13 Special Data Registers (SR)........................................................... 5-21
5.2.14 Index Register (E)........................................................................ 5-21
5.2.15 File Registers (FR)........................................................................ 5-21
5.3. Assigning I/O Addresses for Modules ................................................. 5-22
5.4 Module Addresses Defined by Software ............................................... 5-23

5.4.1 Starting Addresses for Digital Input/Output Modules ............................. 5-23
5.4.2 Starting Addresses for Analog Input/Output Modules ............................. 5-24
5.4.3 Starting Addresses for Temperature Measurement Modules .................... 5-25
5.4.4 Starting Addresses for Positioning/Counter Modules .............................. 5-25
5.4.5 Starting Addresses for Network Modules .............................................. 5-26
5.4.6 Starting Addresses for Load Cell Modules ............................................. 5-27
v
5.5 Remote Module Addresses Defined by Software .................................. 5-28
5.5.1 Starting Addresses for Digital Input/Output Modules .............................. 5-31
5.5.2 Starting Addresses for Analog Input/Output Modules .............................. 5-32
5.5.3 Starting Addresses for Temperature Measurement Modules ..................... 5-33
5.5.4 Starting Addresses for Load Cell Modules .............................................. 5-33
5.5.5 Starting Addresses for AS04SIL-A Modules ........................................... 5-34
Chapter 6 Writing a Program
6.1 Quick Start ........................................................................................ 6-2

6.1.1 Example ....................................................................................... 6-2
6.1.2 Hardware...................................................................................... 6-2
6.1.3 Program ....................................................................................... 6-3
6.2 Procedure for Creating a Project in ISPSoft....................................... 6-3
6.3 Creating a Project.............................................................................. 6-4
6.4 Hardware Configuration .................................................................... 6-5
6.5 Creating a Program ........................................................................... 6-6

6.5.1 Adding a Ladder Diagram ............................................................... 6-6
6.5.2 Basic Editing ─ Creating a Contact and a Coil ................................... 6-8
6.5.3 Basic Editing ─ Inserting a Network and Typing an Instruction ........... 6-11
6.5.4 Basic Editing ─ Selecting a Network and Operation ........................... 6-13
6.5.5 Basic Editing ─ Connecting a Contact in Parallel ............................... 6-16
6.5.6 Basic Editing ─ Editing a Comment ................................................. 6-17
6.5.7 Basic Editing ─ Inserting an Applied Instruction ............................... 6-18
6.5.8 Basic Editing ─ Creating a Comparison Contact and Typing a Constant6-20
6.5.9 Writing a Program......................................................................... 6-21
6.5.10 Checking and Compiling a Program ................................................. 6-22
6.6 Testing and Debugging a Program .................................................. 6-23

6.6.1 Creating a Connection ................................................................... 6-23
6.6.2 Downloading a Program and Parameters .......................................... 6-26
6.6.3 Connection Test ............................................................................ 6-28
6.7 Setting a Real-time Clock ................................................................ 6-36
vi
Chapter 7 Memory Card
7.1 Overview of Memory Cards ................................................................ 7-2

7.1.1 Appearances of Memory Cards ......................................................... 7-2
7.1.2 Memory Card Specifications ............................................................ 7-2
7.2 Before using a Memory Card .............................................................. 7-3

7.2.1 Formatting a Memory Card .............................................................. 7-3
7.3 Installing and Removing a Memory Card ........................................... 7-4

7.3.1 Memory Card Slot in a CPU Module .................................................. 7-4
7.3.2 Installing a Memory Card ................................................................ 7-4
7.3.3 Removing a Memory Card ............................................................... 7-4
7.4 Memory Card Contents ...................................................................... 7-5

7.4.1 Initializing a Memory Card .............................................................. 7-5
7.4.2 Folder Structure in a Memory Card ................................................... 7-5
7.5 Introduction to the CARD Utility ........................................................ 7-7
7.6 Backing Up a Project ....................................................................... 7-10
7.7 Restoring a Project .......................................................................... 7-15
7.8 Restoration Starts Once CPU is supplied with Power ....................... 7-19
7.9 CPU Error Log .................................................................................. 7-20
Chapter 8 Hardware Configuration and Data Exchange Setups
8.1 Hardware Configuration Tool for AS Series Modules - HWCONFIG ..... 8-2
8.1.1 Introduction of the HWCONFIG Environment .......................................... 8-2
8.1.2 Configuring a Module ........................................................................... 8-4
8.2 Setting the Parameters in an AS Series CPU Module ........................ 8-23

8.2.1 System Settings – System Information ................................................ 8-23
8.2.2 System Settings – System Parameter .................................................. 8-24
8.2.3 System Settings – Device Range Setting .............................................. 8-29
8.2.4 System Settings – Input Point Filter Time ............................................ 8-30
8.2.5 System Settings – Position Control Parameter ...................................... 8-31
8.2.6 System Settings – Daylight Saving Timing ........................................... 8-32
8.2.7 Options - COM1 Port Setting & COM2 Port Setting ................................. 8-33
8.2.8 Options - Ethernet Port Basic Setting ................................................... 8-34
8.2.9 Ethernet Port Advance Setting – IP Filter ............................................. 8-35
8.2.10 Ethernet Port Advance Setting – NTP ................................................. 8-35
8.2.11 Ethernet Port Advance Setting – Email ............................................... 8-36
vi i
8.2.12 Ethernet Port Advance Setting – Socket .............................................. 8-40
8.2.13 Ethernet Port Advance Setting – RTU Mapping ..................................... 8-42
8.2.14 Function Card 1 Setting .................................................................... 8-43
8.2.15 Function Card 2 Setting .................................................................... 8-44
8.2.16 Data Exchange ................................................................................ 8-47
Chapter 9 EtherNet/IP Specification and Operation
9.1 Introduction ...................................................................................... 9-4

9.1.1 EtherNet/IP ................................................................................... 9-4
9.1.2 Definitions of Common Network Terms ............................................. 9-4
9.1.3 Ethernet Features .......................................................................... 9-5
9.2 Installation........................................................................................ 9-7

9.2.1 EtherNet/IP Device ........................................................................ 9-7
9.2.2 Network Cable Installation .............................................................. 9-7
9.2.3 Network Communication Parameter Setting ..................................... 9-10
9.3 Specifications .................................................................................. 9-11

9.3.1 Ethernet Specification ................................................................... 9-11
9.3.2 EtherNet/IP Specification ............................................................... 9-12
9.3.3 PROFINET Specification ................................................................. 9-14
9.3.4 EtherNet Communication Port ........................................................ 9-14
9.4 EIP Builder ...................................................................................... 9-15

9.4.1 Run the EIP Builder ....................................................................... 9-15
9.4.2 Set up the IP Address.................................................................... 9-17
9.4.3 Network ...................................................................................... 9-25
9.4.4 Data Mapping ............................................................................... 9-34
9.4.5 Diagnosis..................................................................................... 9-42
9.5 Programming .................................................................................. 9-44

9.5.1 Explicit Message ................................................................................ 9-44
9.5.2 TAG ................................................................................................. 9-44
9.6 Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 9-49

9.6.1 Error Code Classification ..................................................................... 9-49
9.6.2 Error Codes & How to fix them ............................................................ 9-49
9.6.3 AS-FPFN02 Error Codes & How to fix them ............................................ 9-53
9.7 Studio 5000 Software Operation ..................................................... 9-54

9.7.1 Architecture ...................................................................................... 9-54
9.7.2 Create a New Project.......................................................................... 9-54
viii
9.7.3 Create a Scanner .............................................................................. 9-56
9.7.4 Connect to a Delta Adapter ................................................................ 9-58
9.7.5 Editing Corresponding Addresses for AS300 ......................................... 9-63
9.7.6 Download......................................................................................... 9-64
9.7.7 Data Mapping ................................................................................... 9-65
9.8 CIP Object ....................................................................................... 9-67

9.8.1 Object List ....................................................................................... 9-67
9.8.2 Data Type ........................................................................................ 9-68
9.8.3 Identity Object (Class ID: 01 Hex) ...................................................... 9-71
9.8.4 Message Router Object (Class ID: 02 Hex) ........................................... 9-73
9.8.5 Assembly Object (Class ID: 04 Hex) .................................................... 9-74
9.8.6 Connection Manager Object (Class ID: 06 Hex) .................................... 9-78
9.8.7 Port Object (Class ID: F4 Hex) ............................................................ 9-80
9.8.8 TCP/IP Interface Object (Class ID: F5 Hex) .......................................... 9-82
9.8.9 Ethernet Link Object (Class ID: F6 Hex)............................................... 9-85
9.8.10 X Register (Class ID: 350 Hex) ......................................................... 9-88
9.8.11 Y Register (Class ID: 351 Hex) ......................................................... 9-89
9.8.12 D Register (Class ID: 352 Hex) ......................................................... 9-90
9.8.13 M Register (Class ID: 353 Hex) ......................................................... 9-91
9.8.14 S Register (Class ID: 354 Hex) ......................................................... 9-92
9.8.15 T Register (Class ID: 355 Hex) ......................................................... 9-93
9.8.16 C Register (Class ID: 356 Hex) ......................................................... 9-94
9.8.17 HC Register (Class ID: 357 Hex) ....................................................... 9-95
9.8.18 SM Register (Class ID: 358 Hex) ....................................................... 9-96
9.8.19 SR Register (Class ID: 359 Hex) ....................................................... 9-97
9.9 Delta EIP Product List...................................................................... 9-98

9.9.1 Delta EIP Products ............................................................................ 9-98
9.9.2 Delta EIP Products, DLR (Device Level Ring) supported .......................... 9-98
9.9.3 Delta EIP Products, Scanner supported ................................................ 9-99
9.10 Operation and Monitor on the Web ................................................ 9-100

9.10.1 Getting Started .............................................................................. 9-100
9.10.2 Device Information ..................................................................... 9-104
9.10.3 Network configuration ................................................................. 9-104
9.10.4 Data Monitoring .......................................................................... 9-107
9.10.5 Diagnostic .................................................................................. 9-112
9.10.6 Configurations ............................................................................ 9-114
9.11 Delta EIP Product Application (with OMRON Products) ................. 9-114
9.11.1 Architecture ............................................................................... 9-114
ix
9.11.2 TAG Connection .......................................................................... 9-115
9.11.3 IO Connection ............................................................................ 9-131
Chapter 10 CANopen Funciton and Operation
10.1 Introduction to CANopen ................................................................. 10-2

10.1.1 CANopen Function Descriptions ...................................................... 10-2
10.1.2 The Input/Output Mapping Areas .................................................... 10-4
10.1.3 Refreshing Mechanism in the Input/Output Mapping Areas ................. 10-5
10.2 Installation and Network Topology ................................................. 10-9

10.2.1 The Dimensions of AS-FCOPM ........................................................ 10-9
10.2.2 AS-FCOPM on AS300 PLC ............................................................... 10-9
10.2.3 Configure the AS-FCOPM with HWCONFIG...................................... 10-10
10.2.4 The CAN Interface and Network Topology ...................................... 10-11
10.3 The CANopen Protocol ................................................................... 10-16

10.3.1 Introduction to the CANopen Protocol ............................................ 10-16
10.3.2 The CANopen Communication Object ............................................ 10-17
10.3.3 The Predefined Connection Set ..................................................... 10-22
10.4 Sending SDO, NMT and Reading Emergency Message through the Ladder
Diagram ......................................................................................... 10-24
10.4.1 Data Structure of SDO Request Message ....................................... 10-24
10.4.2 Data Structure of NMT Message .................................................... 10-27
10.4.3 Data Structure of EMERGENCY Request Message ............................ 10-28
10.4.4 Example of Sending SDO through the Ladder Diagram .................... 10-30
10.5 Troubleshooting ............................................................................ 10-32

10.5.1 CANopen Network Node State Display ........................................... 10-32
10.6 Application Example ...................................................................... 10-35
10.7 Object Dictionary........................................................................... 10-43
Chapter 11 CPU Module Operating Principles
11.1 CPU Module Operations ................................................................... 11-2

11.1.1 Procedure .................................................................................... 11-2
11.1.2 I/O Refreshing and Communication Service...................................... 11-3
11.1.3 Interrupts .................................................................................... 11-3
11.2 CPU Module Operating Modes .......................................................... 11-4

11.2.1 Operating Modes .......................................................................... 11-4
11.2.2 Status and Operation under Different Operating Modes ..................... 11-4
x
Chapter 12 Troubleshooting

12.1.1 Basic troubleshooting steps ........................................................... 12-3
12.1.2 Clear the Error States ................................................................... 12-3
12.1.3 Troubleshooting SOP .................................................................... 12-4
12.1.4 Viewing System Log and Error Step................................................ 12-5
12.2 Troubleshooting for CPU Modules .................................................... 12-7

12.2.1 ERROR LED Indicators Are ON ....................................................... 12-7
12.2.2 ERROR LED Indicators Blinking Every 0.5 Seconds ........................... 12-7
12.2.3 ERROR LED Indicators Blinking Rapidly Every 0.2 Seconds ................ 12-9
12.2.4 ERROR LED Indicators Slow Blinking Every 3 Seconds and Lighting up for
1 Second .................................................................................... 12-9
12.2.5 BAT. LOW LED Indicators Are ON ................................................... 12-9
12.2.6 BAT. LOW LED Indicators Blinking Every 0.5 Seconds ....................... 12-9
12.2.7 The LED RUN and ERROR Indicators are Blinking Simultaneously Every
0.5 Seconds ............................................................................... 12-10
12.2.8 The RUN and LED Indicators are Blinking One After Another Every
0.5 Seconds. .............................................................................. 12-10
12.2.9 Other Errors (Without LED Indicators) ........................................... 12-10
12.3 Troubleshooting for I/O Modules .................................................. 12-18

12.3.1 Troubleshooting for Analog Modules (AD/DA/XA) and Temperature Modules
(RTD/TC) ................................................................................... 12-18
12.3.2 Troubleshooting for the Positioning Module AS02/04PU .................... 12-19
12.3.3 Troubleshooting for the High-Speed Counter Module AS02HC ........... 12-19
12.3.4 Troubleshooting for the Load Cell Module AS02LC ........................... 12-20
12.3.5 Troubleshooting for the Module AS04SIL IO-Link as a Communication
Module ...................................................................................... 12-21
12.3.6 Troubleshooting for the Module AS00SCM as a Communication Module12-24
12.3.7 Troubleshooting for the Module AS00SCM as a Remote Module ......... 12-25
12.3.8 Troubleshooting for AS01DNET Modules ......................................... 12-26
12.4 Error Codes and LED Indicators for CPU Modules .......................... 12-27
12.4.1 Error Codes and LED Indicators for CPU Modules............................. 12-27
12.4.2 Error Codes and LED Indicators for Analog/Temperature Modules ..... 12-33
12.4.3 Error Codes and LED Indicators for Positioning Module AS02 / 04PU .. 12-34
12.4.4 Error Codes and LED Indicators for High Speed Counter Module
AS02HC ..................................................................................... 12-34
12.4.5 Error Codes and LED Indicators for Load Cell Module AS02LC ........... 12-34
xi
12.4.6 Error Codes and LED Indicators for Module AS04SIL IO-Link as
a Communication Module ............................................................. 12-35
12.4.7 Error Codes and LED Indicators for Module AS00SCM as a
Communication Module ............................................................... 12-36
12.4.8 Error Codes and LED Indicators for Module AS00SCM as a Remote
Module ...................................................................................... 12-36
12.4.9 Error Codes and LED Indicators for Module AS01DNET
(Master/Slave Mode) ................................................................... 12-36
(RTU Mode) ............................................................................... 12-38
Chapter 13 Data Tracer and Data Logger
13.1 Data Tracer......................................................................................... 13-2

13.1.1 About Data Tracer ........................................................................ 13-2
13.1.2 Example ...................................................................................... 13-4
13.2 Data Logger ..................................................................................... 13-5

13.2.1 About Data Logger ........................................................................ 13-5
13.2.2 Related SM Flags and SR Registors ................................................. 13-7
13.3 Delta Drive Parameters Backup and Restore ................................... 13-8

13.3.1 System Requirement ..................................................................... 13-8
13.3.2 The Architecture Overview for Backup and Restore ........................... 13-8
13.3.3 Steps to Backup Delta Device Parameters ........................................ 13-9
13.3.4 Steps to Restore Delta Device Parameters ..................................... 13-12
13.3.5 FAQ .......................................................................................... 13-17
Appendix A Installing a USB Driver
A.1 Installing the USB Driver for an AS Series CPU module in Windows XP
with SP3 ................................................................................................ A-2
A.2 Installing the USB Driver for an AS Series CPU module in Windows 7 ... A-6
A.3 Installing the USB Driver for an AS Series CPU module in Windows 8 . A-11
A.4 Installing the USB Driver for an AS Series CPU module in Windows 10A-13
A.5 Notes on Utilizing USB Communication ............................................... A-16
xi i
Appendix B Device Addresses
B.1 Standard Modbus Device Addresses ...................................................... B-2
B.2 Function Codes and Number of Devices Supported for Modbus ProtocolsB-3
Appendix C EMC Standards
C.1 EMC Standards for an AS Series System ................................................ C-2

C.1.1 AS Series System EMC Standards ....................................................... C-2
C.1.2 Installation Instructions to meet EMC Standards ................................... C-4
C.1.3 Cables ............................................................................................. C-5
Appendix D Maintenance and Inspection
D.1 Cautions ............................................................................................. D-2
D.2 Daily Maintenance ................................................................................ D-3

D.2.1 Required Inspection Tools .................................................................... D-3
D.2.2 Daily Inspection ................................................................................. D-3
D.3 Periodic Maintenance ........................................................................... D-4

D3.1 Required Inspection Tools ..................................................................... D-4
D.3.2 Periodic Inspection ............................................................................. D-5
xi i i
1
Table of Contents
1.1 Overview ........................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.1 Related Manuals ............................................................................ 1-2
1.1.2 Models Descriptions........................................................................ 1-2
1.2 Overview ......................................................................................... 1-13
1.3 Characteristics ................................................................................. 1-14
1-1
A S S e r i e s H a r d wa r e a n d O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l
1.1 Overview
_1 This manual introduces the AS Series PLC CPU functions, devices, module tables, basic instructions, applied
instructions, electrical specifications troubleshooting, as well as appearances, dimensions, and so forth.
1.1.1 Related Manuals
The related manuals for AS Series programmable logic controllers are listed below.
 AS Series Quick Start
This guides you in how to use the system before reading the related manuals.
 AS Series Programming Manual
This introduces programming for the AS Series programmable logic controllers, basic instructions, and
applied instructions.
 ISPSoft User Manual
This introduces the use of the ISPSoft software, programming language (Ladder, IL, SFC, FBD, and ST),
POUs, and tasks.
 AS Series Hardware and Operation Manual
This introduces electrical specifications, appearances, dimensions, CPU functions, devices, module
tables, troubleshooting, and so forth.
 AS Series Module Manual
This introduces special I/O modules such as network modules, analog I/O modules, temperature
measurement modules, motion control modules, and so forth.
1.1.2 Models Descriptions
Classification Model Name Description
Input: 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz

AS-PS02
Output: 24VDC/2A, 48W (for PLC internal use)
Input: 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
AS-PS02A Output: 24VDC/1.5A, 36W (for PLC internal use)
Power supply Output: 24VDC/0.5A, 12W (for external use)

module
Input: 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Output: 24VDC/3A, 72W (for PLC internal use)
AS-PS03C With RS-485 communication port, it can act as a slave,
providing information including power status. working hours
and so on.
AS CPU power For easier wiring, this adaptor allows wiring on the bottom of
AS-ATXB
module adaptor the module instead of on the left-side of the module.
CPU module, 24VDC power input, PNP output, 1x Ethernet

AS300 Series
AS332P-A port, 2x RS-485 ports, 1x USB port, 1x Micro SD interface,
CPU module
2x function cards (optional), supporting 32 I/Os
1-2
(16DI+16DO) and up to 1024 I/Os. Program capacity:128K 1_

steps, high-density terminal blocks
CPU module, 24VDC power input, NPN output, 1x Ethernet
port, 2x RS-485 ports, 1x USB port, 1x Micro SD interface,
AS332T-A 2x function cards (optional), supporting 32 I/Os
(16DI+16DO) and up to 1024 I/Os. Program capacity:128K
steps, high-density terminal blocks
CPU module, 24VDC power input, NPN differential output,
1x Ethernet port, 2x RS-485 ports, 1x USB port, 1x Micro
AS324MT-A SD interface, 2x function cards (optional), supporting 24
I/Os (12DI+12DO) and up to 1016 I/Os. Program
capacity:128K steps, high-density terminal blocks
port , 2x RS-485 ports, 1x USB port, 1x Micro SD interface,
AS320P-B 2x function cards (optional), supporting 20 I/Os (8DI+12DO)
and up to 1024 I/Os. Program capacity:128K steps,
removable terminal blocks
port, 2x RS-485 ports, 1x USB port, 1x Micro SD interface,
AS320T-B 2x function cards (optional), supporting 20 I/Os (8DI+12DO)
and up to 1024 I/Os. Program capacity:128K steps,

CPU module, 24VDC power input, no I/Os, 1x Ethernet port,
2x RS-485 ports, 1x USB port, 1x Micro SD interface, 2x

AS300N-A
function cards (optional), and supporting up to 1024 I/Os.
Program capacity:128K steps
AS228P-A CAN communication port, supporting 28 I/Os (16DI+12DO)
and up to 1024 I/Os. Program capacity: 64K steps,

AS200 Series
CPU module

AS228T-A
CAN communication port, supporting 28 I/Os (16DI+12DO)
and up to 1024 I/Os. Program capacity: 64K steps,
1-3
_1 removable terminal blocks
CPU module, 24VDC power input, Relay output, 1x
Ethernet port , 2x RS-485 ports, 1x USB port, 1x Micro SD
AS228R-A interface, CAN communication port, supporting 28 I/Os
(16DI+12DO) and up to 1024 I/Os. Program capacity: 64K
steps, removable terminal blocks
AS218PX-A CAN communication port, supporting 18 I/Os
(8DI+6DO+2AI+2AO) and up to 1024 I/Os. Program
capacity: 64K steps, removable terminal blocks
AS218TX-A CAN communication port, supporting 18 I/Os
CPU module, 24VDC power input, Relay output, 1x
AS218RX-A interface, CAN communication port, supporting 18 I/Os
CPU module, 100-240VDC power input, PNP output, 1x
AS132P-A interface, CAN communication port, supporting 32 I/Os
CPU module, 100-240VDC power input, NPN output, 1x

AS100 Series Ethernet port , 2x RS-485 ports, 1x USB port, 1x Micro SD
CPU module AS132T-A interface, CAN communication port, supporting 32 I/Os
CPU module, 100-240VDC power input, Relay output, 1x

AS132R-A
interface, CAN communication port, supporting 32 I/Os
1-4
steps, removable terminal blocks 1_

AS148T-A interface, CAN communication port, supporting 48 I/Os

AS164T-A interface, CAN communication port, supporting 64 I/Os
24VDC
Digital
5mA
input/output AS08AM10N-A
8 inputs
module
Spring-clamp terminal block
1-5
_1 5 - 30VDC
0.5A/output, 4A/COM
AS08AN01P-A 8 outputs
Sourcing output
240VAC/24VDC
2A/output, 8A/COM
AS08AN01R-A 8 outputs
Relay
5 - 30VDC
0.5A/output, 4A/COM
AS08AN01T-A 8 outputs
Sinking output
24VDC
5mA
AS16AM10N-A
16 inputs
5 - 30VDC
0.5A/output, 4A/COM
AS16AN01P-A 16 outputs
Sourcing output
240VAC/24VDC
2A/output, 8A/COM
AS16AN01R-A 16 outputs
Relay
5 - 30VDC
AS16AN01T-A 0.5A/output, 4A/COM
16 outputs
1-6
Sinking output 1_
24VDC
5mA
8 inputs
5 - 30VDC
AS16AP11P-A
0.5A/output, 4A/COM
8 outputs
Sourcing output
24VDC
5mA
8 inputs
240VAC/24VDC
AS16AP11R-A
2A/output, 8A/COM
8 outputs
Relay
24VDC
5mA
8 inputs
5 - 30VDC
AS16AP11T-A
0.5A/output, 4A/COM
8 outputs
Sinking output
24VDC
3.2mA
AS32AM10N-A
32 inputs
MIL connector
5 - 30VDC
AS32AN02T-A
0.1A/output, 3.2A/COM
1-7
_1 32 outputs
Sinking output
MIL connector
24VDC
3.2mA
AS64AM10N-A
64 inputs
MIL connector
5 - 30VDC
0.1A/output, 3.2A/COM
AS64AN02T-A 64 outputs
Sinking output
MIL connector
4-channel analog input module
Hardware resolution: 16 bits
AS04AD-A 0–10V, 0/1–5V, -5 to +5V, -10 to +10V, 0/4–20mA, -20–
+20mA
Conversion time: 2 ms/channel

AS08AD-B
0 to +10V, 0/1–5V, -5V to +5V, -10V to +10V

Analog
input/output
module AS08AD-C
0/4–20mA, -20mA–+20mA
4-channel analog output module

AS04DA-A
-10 to +10V, 0–20mA, 4–20mA
4-channel analog input
AS06XA-A Hardware resolution: 16 bits
0–10V, 0/1–5V, -5 to +5V, -10 to +10V, 0/4–20mA, -20 to
1-8
+20mA 1_
2-channel analog output
-10 to +10V, 0–20mA, 4–20mA
4-channel, 2-wire/3-wire RTD
Sensor type: Pt100 / Ni100 / Pt1000 / Ni1000 / JPt100 / LG-
AS04RTD-A Ni1000 / Cu50 / Cu100 / 0-300Ω / 0-3000Ω input impedance
Resolution: 0.1°C/0.1°F (16 bits)
Conversion time: 200ms/channel
6-channel, 2-wire/3-wire RTD
Sensor type: Pt100 / Ni100 / Pt1000 / Ni1000 / JPt100 / LG-
AS06RTD-A Ni1000 / Cu50 / Cu100 / 0-300Ω / 0-3000Ω input

Temperature impedance, Resolution: 0.1°C/0.1°F (16 bits)
measurement
module
4-channel thermocouple
Sensor type: J, K, R, S, T, E, N, B and -100 to +100 mV

AS04TC-A
8-channel thermocouple
Sensor type: J, K, R, S, T, E, N, B and -100 to +100 mV

AS08TC-A
2-channel, 4-wire/6-wire load cell sensor
Eigenvalues for a load cell: 1, 2, 4, 6, 20, 40, 80 mV/V

Load cell
AS02LC-A Highest precision 1/10000 @ 50ms of conversion time
module
ADC Resolution : 4 bits
Conversion time: 2.5–400ms (nine options to choose from)
2-axis motion control
Positioning 5-24 VDC, 1 differential input (A/B/Z phase), maximum

AS02PU-A
module hardware input frequency at 200 kHz
24 VDC, 5 mA, 5 inputs, maximum hardware input
1-9
_1 frequency at 1 kHz,
5 VDC, 2-axis (4 points) differential outputs, maximum
output frequency at 200 kHz
4-axis motion control
24 VDC, 5mA, 6 inputs, maximum hardware input frequency
AS04PU-A at 1 kHz
5-30 VDC, 0.1A, 4-axis (8 points) open collector output,
maximum output frequency at 100 kHz
2-channel high-speed counters
Input methods are pulse-input (max. at 200 kHz) and SSI

Counter
AS02HC-A communication interface input (max. at 1.25 MHz)
module
4-axis high-speed open collector output, 5-30 VDC, 0.1A,
can work with high-speed instructions to output
Serial communication module, 2x communication ports for

AS00SCM-A
communication cards, supporting Modbus protocols
Network
DeviceNet communication port, functioning as master or
module AS01DNET-A
slave
AS04SIL-A IO-Link module, built-in with 4 IO-Link communication ports
AS00SCM-A
+ For AS-FCOPM function cards
AS-FCOPM
AS00SCM-A
Remote I/O
+ For AS-FEN02 function cards
module
AS-FEN02
DeviceNet remote IO slave, its right side connectswith AS
AS01DNET-A (RTU) Series extension modules, including digital modules, analog
modules, temperature modules, etc.
Serial communication port, RS232, functioning as master or

AS-F232
slave

Function cards AS-F422
slave

AS-F485
slave
1-10
CANopen communication port, supporting DS301, AS 1_

AS-FCOPM
series remote modules and Delta servo systems
2-channel analog input
AS-F2AD 0-10V (12 bits), 4-20mA (11 bits)
2-channel analog output
AS-F2DA 0-10V, 4-20mA (12 bits)
Only available for AS300 Series PLC CPU, 2x Ethernet
AS-FEN02 ports, supporting switch function, Modbus TCP, EtherNet/IP
Adapter and AS Series remote control
AS-FPFN02 ports, , supporting switch function and PROFINET Device
(adapter)
AS-FOPC02 ports, supporting switch function, OPC UA Server and
Modbus TCP
UC-PRG015-01A Used for the connection between a PLC and a PC via a mini
(1.5M) USB port, use for AS332T-A, AS332P-A, and AS324MT-A
Use for the connection between a PLC and a PC with a mini

Programming UC-PRG030-01A (3M)
USB port, use for AS332T-A, AS332P-A, and AS324MT-A
cable
Use for the connection between a PLC and a PC with a
UC-PRG030-20A (3M) RJ45 port, use for AS332T-A, AS332P-A, AS324MT-A , AS-
FEN02 and AS-FPFN02
UC-ET010-24B (1M) MIL connector, 40Pin ↔ 40Pin, shielded, use for

UC-ET020-24B (2M) AS32AM10N-A, AS32AN02T-A, AS64AM10N-A and
I/O extension UC-ET030-24B (3M) AS64AN02T-A
cable UC-ET010-24D (1M) MIL connector, 40Pin↔ 2x 20Pin, shielded, use for AS332T-
UC-ET020-24D (2M) A, AS332P-A, AS324MT-A, AS32AM10N-A, AS32AN02T-A,
UC-ET030-24D (3M) AS64AM10N-A, and AS64AN02T-A
External 16 inputs/outputs, 20-Pin MIL connector, use for AS332T-A,
terminal UB-10-ID16A AS332P-A, AS324MT-A, AS32AM10N-A, AS32AN02T-A,
module AS64AM10N-A and AS64AN02T-A
1 - 11
_1 32 inputs, 40-Pin MIL connector, use for AS32AM10N-A and

UB-10-ID32A
AS64AM10N-A
Terminal block (spring clamp/MIL connector), MIL connector
UB-10-IO32D to 40-Pin spring clamp terminal block, use for AS332T-A,
AS332P-A, AS324MT-A, AS32AM10N-A, AS32AN02T-A
16 relay outputs, 20-Pin MIL connector, NPN, use for

UB-10-OR16A
AS332T-A, AS32AN02T-A and AS64AN02T-A
16 relay outputs, 20-Pin MIL connector, PNP, use for

UB-10-OR16B
AS332P-A
32 transistor outputs, 40-Pin MIL connector, NPN, use for

UB-10-OT32A
AS32AN02T-A and AS64AN02T-A
UC-CMC003-01A (0.3M) CANopen communication cable, use for AS-FCOPM series
UC-CMC010-01A (1M) CANopen communication cable, use for AS-FCOPM series
Ethernet communication cable, use for AS Series CPU

Network cables UC-EMC003-02A (0.3M)
modules, AS-FEN02 and AS-FPFN02

UC-EMC005-02A (0.5M)

UC-EMC010-02A (1M)

UC-EMC020-02A (2M)

UC-EMC050-02A (5M)

UC-EMC100-02A (10M)
1-12
Ethernet communication cable, use for AS Series CPU 1_

UC-EMC200-02A (20M)
1.2 Overview
An AS series CPU module is an advanced controller with built-in 6 high speed counters for inputs, up to 6-axis
(pulse), and can optionally work with a total of 8-axis (CANopen) position outputs. It provides a strong network
function for users, and users can create connection among devices on the network through software. An AS
series CPU module also provides structured programming. Users can assign programs to different tasks, and
write a program which is frequently executed in a function block. Besides, users can choose different
programming languages ladder diagrams (LD), structured texts (ST), sequential function charts (SFC),
continuous function chart (CFC) and C language dealt with by IEC 61131-3 according to their needs when
writing programs. They can create the AS series hardware configuration by means of hardware configuration
software. They can also restore or back up a system rapidly through the built-in SD interface in an AS series
CPU module. This manual introduces the basic operation of an AS series system, and help users familiarize
themselves with the AS series system.
1-13
1.3 Characteristics
_1 Characteristics of the AS series CPU module:
(1) High efficiency
 The AS Series CPU module uses a 32-bit high-speed processor. The module executes basic
instructions at 25 ns each and moving instructions at 150ns each. The module executes instructions
at a speed of 40k steps/ms (40% of the instructions are basic instructions, and 60% of the
instructions are applied instructions).
 The CPU of the AS Series uses the Soc architecture, built with six (or three) high speed counters.
The maximum frequency is 200 kHz for each counter (differential output models can reach 4 MHz);
six-axis high speed position output at 200 kHz (differential output models can reach 4 MHz).
(2) Supporting more inputs and outputs
 The AS series CPU module supports up to 1024 digital I/Os or 32 I/O modules (any type) or 16
analog I/O modules.
 The AS series works with SCM/DNETcommunication modules (AS-FCOPM, and AS-FEN02 included)
to create a remote connection, and you can connect up to 15 remote modules.
Note: For the connections between the CPU modules and the remote modules, the I/O points cannot
exceed 1024 I/Os, 32 I/O modules (any type), or 16 analog I/O modules.
(3) Multiple I/O modules
 The AS series CPU module supports the following I/O modules: digital input/output modules, analog
input/output modules, temperature measurement modules, positioning/counter modules, network
modules, and function cards. Refer to section 1.1.2 section for more details.
(4) Larger program capacity and memory
 The AS300 Series advanced CPU modules have 128k steps of program capacity. 60000 general
registers (30000 for specific use and 30000 for programming editing), and 64k words of memory (that
can be used for storing parameters).
 The AS200 Series advanced CPU modules have 64k steps of program capacity. 60000 general
registers (30000 for specific use and 30000 for programming editing), and 64k words of memory (that
can be used for storing parameters).
(5) Supporting IEC 61131-3
 The AS series CPU module supports IEC 61131-3.
 Supported programming languages are ladder diagrams (LD), sequential function chart (SFC),
structured text (ST), continuous function chart (CFC) (ISPSoft V3.01 or later) and C language
(ISPSoft V3.08 or later).
1-14
1_
 You can select a programming language according to your preference. Programming languages
support one another so that programs written by different users are compatible.
(6) Strong function block
 Both standard IEC61131-3 function blocks and convenient functions blocks provided by Delta
Electronics, Inc. are supported. You can use function blocks for frequently used programs for greater
structure and convenience.
 The symbol for a function block in a ladder diagram is similar to an integrated circuit (IC) in a circuit
diagram. Because the ladder diagram is based on the traditional circuit diagram, the operation of a
function block is similar to the function of an integrated circuit. You only need to send the signal to the
corresponding input of the function block. You do not need to consider the processing procedure
inside the function block.
 A function block is a program element equipped with the operation function. It is similar to a
subroutine, and is a type of POU (Program Organization Unit). It cannot operate by itself, and must
be called through the main program POU. The function defined by the function block is executed
after being called with the related parameters. The final result can be sent to the device or variable in
the superior POU after the function block completes.
 You can set passwords in ISPSoft to provide function block security. The program inside a function
block cannot be read, and business patents cannot be compromised.
1-15
(7) Task
_1
 You can assign 283 tasks at most to a program. Among these tasks, 32 are cyclic, 32 are I/O
interrupts, 4 are timer interrupts, two are communication interrupts, one is an external 24 V low-
voltage interrupt, and 212 are user-defined tasks.
 You can enable and disable a task when running a program by using the TKON and TKOFF
instructions.
(8) Increasing hardware configuration efficiency through a USB cable and ISPSoft
 The AS Series CPU module provides a standard USB 2.0 interface. USB 2.0 increases the data
transfer rate and decreases the time it takes to download the program, monitor the program, and
configure the hardware. You do not need to buy a special communication cable for the CPU module.
You can use a general USB cable to connect to the AS Series CPU module.
(9) Serial control interface with multiple functions
 AS Series CPU modules provide two RS-485 serial control interfaces, COM1 and COM2, which can
be set as a either master or slave.
 You use the communication cards to work with two extension serial communication ports and to set
the port as a master or slave.
(10) High-speed Ethernet communication interface
 AS Series CPU modules are equipped with a 10/100 M Ethernet communication interface and
support email, web, and socket services.
 System error messages can be sent to your email immediately. You do not need to be on location to
understand the problem.
1-16
(11) Memory card
 The memory card has the following functions.

1_
System backup: user program, CPU parameters, module table, and the device setting values
System recovery: user program, CPU parameters, module table, and device setting values
Parameter storage: device value
Log storage: system error log and system status log
(12) I/O module installation
 The AS Series PLC supports slide-and-lock installation on I/O modules when the power is off. After
the PLC is powered off, you can remove the defective module and replace it with a new one without
removing other modules.
(13) Supporting on-line debugging mode
 You can use the on-line debugging mode in the AS series CPU module after a single instruction step
completes, or after a breakpoint is specified, to find bugs in the program.
 The CPU module must be running to enter the debugging mode. After enabling the on-line monitoring
function, click . The debugging screen varies from programming language to programming
language, but the same operation applies to these programming languages. For the AS series PLC,
structured text does not support debugging mode, and sequential function charts supports debugging
mode during the action and the transition.
1-17
Step 1: Set the PLC to RUN
_1
Step 2: Entering the on-line mode
1-18
Step 3: Enter debugging mode
1_
(14) On-line editing mode
 You can use the on-line editing mode when the system is running to update the program without
affecting the system operation.
 When the system is in the on-line monitoring mode, enter the on-line editing mode by clicking .
1-19
 After the program is modified and compiled, you can update the program in the CPU module by
_1
clicking to download it to the CPU.
1-20
2
Chapter 2 Specifications and System
Configuration
Table of Contents
2.1 General Specifications ....................................................................... 2-3
2.2 CPU Module Specifications ................................................................. 2-4

2.2.1 Functional specifications ................................................................. 2-4
2.2.2 Electrical specifications ................................................................... 2-5
2.2.3 CPU Module Profiles ........................................................................ 2-9
2.2.4 CPU Module Input/Output Terminals ............................................... 2-14
2.2.5 AS200 Input/Output Terminals ...................................................... 2-17
2.3 Digital Input/Output Module Specifications..................................... 2-18

2.3.2 Digital Input/Output Module Profiles ............................................... 2-20
2.3.3 Digital Input/Output Module Terminals ........................................... 2-29
2.4 Analog Input/Output Module Specifications .................................... 2-36

2.4.2 Analog Input/Output Module Profiles .............................................. 2-42
2.4.3 Analog Input/Output Terminals ...................................................... 2-43
2.5 Temperature Measurement Modules Specifications ......................... 2-44

2.5.2 Temperature Measurement Module Profiles ..................................... 2-47
2.5.3 Temperature Measurement Module Dimensions ............................... 2-49
2.6 Positioning Module Specifications .................................................... 2-50

2.6.2 Positioning Module Profiles ............................................................ 2-52
2.6.3 Positioning Module Terminals......................................................... 2-53
2.7 Counter Module Specifications ......................................................... 2-54

2.7.2 Counting Module Profiles ............................................................... 2-57
2.7.3 Counting Module Terminals ........................................................... 2-58
2.8 Network Module Specifications ........................................................ 2-59

2.8.2 Network Module Profiles ................................................................ 2-63
2.9 Load Cell Module Specifications ....................................................... 2-67

2.9.2 Load Cell Module Profiles............................................................... 2-68
2.9.3 Load Cell Module Dimensions......................................................... 2-69
2.10 Extension Card Specifications .......................................................... 2-70

2.10.2 Extension Card Profiles ................................................................. 2-74
2-1
2.10.3 Function Card Weights...................................................................2-76
2.11 Power Supply Module Specifications ............................................... 2-77

2.11.1 General Specifications ...................................................................2-77
2.11.2 Power Supply Module Profiles .........................................................2-78
2.11.3 AS-PS03C Communication Formats and Station ID Setups .................2-80
2.12 Power Supply Module Adapter Specification .................................... 2-83

2_
2-2
2.1 General Specifications

Item Specifications
Operating temperature -20 to 60°C
Storage temperature -40 to 80°C
5–95%
Operating humidity
No condensation
5–95%
_2 Storage humidity
No condensation
Work environment No corrosive gas exists.
Installation location In a control box
Pollution degree 2
Ingress protection
IP20
(IP ratings)
EMC (electromagnetic
Refer to Appendix C for more information.
compatibility)
Tested with:
5 Hz ≦ f ≦ 8.4 Hz, constant amplitude 3.5 mm;
8.4 Hz ≦ f ≦ 150 Hz, constant acceleration 1g
Vibration resistance
Duration of oscillation: 10 sweep cycles
per axis on each direction of the three mutually perpendicular axes
International Standard IEC 61131-2 & IEC 60068-2-6 (TEST Fc)
Tested with:
Half-sine wave:
Strength of shock 15 g peak value, 11 ms duration;
Shock resistance
Shock direction: The shocks in each in direction per axis, on three mutually
perpendicular axes (total of 18 shocks)
International Standard IEC 61131-2 & IEC 60068-2-27 (TEST Ea)
Safety Conforms to IEC 61131-2, UL508
Ambient air
Operating: 1080 ~ 795hPa (-1000 ~ 2000 m)
temperature-barometric
Storage:1080 ~ 660hPa (-1000 ~ 3500 m)
pressure-altitude
Applicable to the removable terminal block, function card slot, SD card slot,
Ethernet port, USB port on the modules and the connecting ports between
modules.
Plugging: more than 100 times (Each plugging in is counted as 1 time and pins
Endurance inside the slots or ports should not be bent or crooked.)
Force used for plugging in: to plug in a removalbe terminal block, the force
used is around 70 g and for other slots and ports, the force is around 220 g.
Force used for plugging out: to plug out a removalbe terminal block, the force
used is around 1000 g and for other slots and ports, the force is around 20 g.
2-3
2.2 CPU Module Specifications

2.2.1 Functional specifications
AS228T-A / AS228P-A
AS324MT-A / AS332T-A /
Item AS228R-A / AS218TX-A Remark
AS332P-A
AS218PX-A / AS218RX-A
Execution The program is executed cyclically.
The inputs and
2_
outputs can be
Regenerated inputs/outputs
Input/Output control controlled through the
Direct inputs/outputs
direct inputs and
direct outputs.
IEC 61131-3
Programming language Ladder diagrams, continuous function charts,
structured text, and sequential function charts
Instruction execution speed 40K steps/ms
Number of instructions Approximately 666 instructions
1-32000
Constant scan cycle (ms) (The scan cycle can be increased by one Setting the parameter
millisecond.)
Program capacity (step) 128K steps (256K bytes) 64K steps (128K bytes)
Installation DIN rails or screws

Installation of a module No backplane installation; only module after module
Maximum number of
modules which can be 32 modules
installed
Refer to the AS Series

283 tasks (32 cyclic tasks; 16 I/O interrupts; four
Number of tasks Operation manual for
timed interrupts, etc.)
more information.
Number of
inputs/outputs
Number of inputs/outputs 1024
accessible to an actual
input/output module
Input relays [X] 1024
Output relays [Y] 1024
Internal relays [M] 8192 (M0–M8191)
Timers [T] 512 (T0–T511)
Counters [C] 512 (C0–C511)
32-bit counter [HC] 256 (HC0–HC255)
Data register [D] 30000 (D0–D29999)
Data register [W] 30000 (W0–W29999)
Stepping relay [S] 2048 (S0–S2047)
Index register [E] 10 (E0–E9)
Special auxiliary relay [SM] 2048 (SM0–SM2047)
Special data register [SR] 2048 (SR0–SR2047)
Serial communication port 2x RS-485
Ethernet port 10/100 M Refer to the section 9.3
2-4
AS228T-A / AS228P-A
AS324MT-A / AS332T-A /
Item AS228R-A / AS218TX-A Remark
AS332P-A
AS218PX-A / AS218RX-A
for more details on
Ethernet specificaitons
USB port Mini USB
Storage interface SD Card (Micro SD); maximum storage: 32G
_2 Real-time clock
Years, months, days, hours, minutes, seconds and *Batteries (CR1620) are
weeks not included.
2x function cards,
supporting
Function card interface communication card, None
AD/DA analog function
cards
CANopen DS301 (Master) Maximum node: 64; maximum bytes: 2000 *A function card AS-
FCOPM is required for
CANopen DS301 (Slave) Maximum PDO: 8; maximum bytes: 8 AS300 Series.
2.2.2 Electrical specifications

Model
AS332T-A/
AS320T-B/ AS228T-A/ AS218TX-A/ AS228R-A/
AS332P-A/ AS300N-A
AS320P-B AS228P-A AS218PX-A AS218RX-A
AS324MT-A
Item
Supply voltage 24 VDC (20.4 VDC–28.8 VDC) (-15% to +20%)
Power
3.6 3.6 3 3.6 4.32 4.56 / 4.8
consumption (W)
Weight (g) 260 285 235 285 290 325 / 310
USB, COM1, COM2, and CAN*1
ports: 500 VAC
Communication Ethernet: 1500 VAC:
port isolation *1: CAN port is not built-in for AS300 Series. You need to purchase a communication
card AS-FCOPM to have a CAN port.
 Electrical specifications for the inputs on digital input/output module. The signals passing
through the inputs are 24 VDC signals.
Model AS332T-A AS320T-B

AS324MT-A
Item AS332P-A AS320P-B
Number of inputs 16 (X0.0-X0.15) 8 (X0.0-X0.7) 12 (X0.0-X0.11)
Connector type MIL connector Removable terminal blocks MIL connector
Input type Digital input
X0.0+–X0.3+/X0.0- to
X0.3-: differential input
Input form Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
X0.4–X0.11: Direct current
(sinking or sourcing)
X0.0+–X0.3+/X0.0- to X0.3-:
Input voltage/ 24 VDC
5 VDC, 5 mA
current 5 mA
X0.4–X0.11: 24 VDC, 5 mA
X0.0+–X0.3+/X0.0- to X0.3-:
Action
OFF→ON >15 VDC >0.2VDC
level
X0.4–X0.11: >15VDC
2-5

AS324MT-A
X0.0+–X0.3+/X0.0- to
ON→OFF <5 VDC X0.3-: <-0.2VDC
X0.4–X0.11: <5VDC
X0.0+–X0.3+/X0.0- to
X0.0~X0.11: < 2.5μs
OFF→ON X0.3-： < 0.125 μs
Response
X0.12~X0.15: < 50μs
X0.4–X0.11: < 2.5μs 2_
time X0.0+–X0.3+/X0.0- to
X0.0~X0.11: < 2.5μs
ON→OFF X0.3-： < 0.125 μs
X0.12~X0.15: < 50μs
X0.4–X0.11: < 2.5μs
X0.0+–X0.3+/X0.0- to
Maximum input X0.0~X0.11: 200 kHz
X0.3-: < 4 MHz
frequency X0.12~X0.15: 10 kHz
X0.4–X0.11: < 200 kHz
Input impedance 5.6 k Ω
Voltage input
Input signal Sinking: The inputs are NPN transistors whose collectors are open collectors.
Sourcing: The inputs are PNP transistors whose collectors are open collectors.
Input isolation 500 VAC
Input display When the optocoupler is driven, the input LED indicator is ON.
Note: AS300N-A does not come with inputs/outputs.
 Electrical specifications for the outputs on AS300 Series.

AS324MT-A
Number of outputs 16 (Y0.0-Y0.15) 12 (Y0.0-Y0.11) 12 (Y0.0-Y0.11)
MIL connectorMIL Removable
Connector type MIL connector
connector terminal blocks
Y0.0+–Y0.3+/Y0.0- to Y0.3-: differential
Transistor-T (sinking)
Output form input
Transistor-P (sourcing)
Y0.4–Y0.11: Transistor-T (sinking)
Y0.0+–Y0.3+/Y0.0- to Y0.3- : 5 VDC
Voltage 5-30 VDC
Y0.4–Y0.11: 5-30VDC
Y0.0+-Y0.3+/Y0.0-Y0.3- : 20mA/output
0.1A/output, 0.1A/output, (+ and – as a group, e.g. Y0.0+ and
Resistance
Maximum 1.6A/COM 1.2A/COM Y0.0- is a group)
load Y0.4-Y0.11:0.1A/output, 0.8A/COM
Inductance N/A
Bulb N/A
Minimum load 1mA / 5V
Y0.0-Y0.11: 200 kHz Y0.0+–Y0.3+/Y0.0- to Y0.3- : 4 MHz
Maximum Resistance
Y0.12-Y0.15: 100 Hz Y0.4–Y0.11: 200 kHz
output
Inductance N/A
frequency*1
Bulb N/A
Maximum
Y0.0~Y0.11: 2.5μs Y0.0+–Y0.3+/Y0.0- to Y0.3-: 0.125 μs
Response OFF→ON
Y0.12~Y0.15: 0.5ms Y0.4–Y0.11: 2.5 μs
time
Output isolation 500 VAC
2-6
 Electrical specifications for the inputs on AS200 Series. The signals passing through the inputs
are 24 VDC signals.
Model
AS228P-A / AS228R-A / AS228T-A AS218PX-A / AS218RX-A / AS218TX-A
Item
Number of inputs 16 (X0.0-X0.15) 8 (X0.0-X0.7)
Connector type Removable terminal blocks
_2 Input type Digital input
Input voltage/ current 24 VDC, 5 mA
OFF→ON >15 VDC
Action level
ON→OFF <5 VDC
X0.0–X0.7: < 2.5μs
OFF→ON
X0.8–X0.15: < 50μs
Response time
X0.0–X0.7: < 2.5μs
ON→OFF
X0.8–X0.15: < 50μs
X0.0–X0.7: 200 kHz
Maximum input frequency
X0.8–X0.15: 10 kHz
X0.0~X0.7: 3.9 k Ω
X0.8~X0.15: 5.6 k Ω
Voltage direct input
Sinking: The inputs are NPN transistors whose collectors are open collectors.
Input signal
Sourcing: The inputs are PNP transistors whose collectors are open
collectors.
Digital input isolation 500 VAC
Analog inputs N/A 2
Analog input conversion
N/A 3 ms / channel
time*1
Analog input resolution N/A 12bits
-10V~10V (voltage mode) or
Analog input mode N/A
20mA~20mA (currentmode)
Analog linearity error N/A ±1% (full scale)
≧1 MΩ (Voltage mode)
Analog input impedance N/A
250 Ω (Current mode)
When there is isolation between alaog and digital electricals and there is no
isolation among analog channels.
Analog input isolation
Isolation between analog electrical and gronunding: 500 VAC
Isolation between analog and digital electrical: 500 VAC
*1: Analog input data updates automatically in every PLC program scan.
2-7
 Electrical specifications for the outputs on AS200 Series.
Model AS228R-A AS228T-A AS228P-A

Item AS218RX-A AS218TX-A AS218PX-A
AS228 Series: 12 outputs (Y0.0-Y0.11)
Number of outputs
AS218 Series 6 outputs (Y0.0-Y0.5)
Output form Relay Transistor-T (sinking)

Transistor-P 2_
(sourcing)
Voltage / current 240 VAC / 24 VDC 5-30 VDC 5-30 VDC
Leakage current 0uA <10uA
AS228 2A/output, 8A/COM 0.5A/output, 2A/COM 0.5A/output, 2A/COM
Resistance 0.5A/output,
AS218 2A/output, 6A/COM 0.5A/output, 1.5A/COM
Maximum 1.5A/COM
load Inductance Life cycle curve*2 N/A N/A
20W (24VDC)
Bulb N/A N/A
100W (230VAC)
Minimum load 1mA / 5V
Maximum Resistance 1Hz 200kHz 200kHz

output Inductance 0.5Hz N/A N/A
frequency Bulb 1Hz N/A N/A
Maximum OFF→ON
Response 10 μs 2.5 μs 2.5 μs
time ON→OFF
Analog outputs AS218 Series: 2 outputs
Analog output conversion
3 ms / channel (for AS218 PLC CPU)
time*1
Analog output resolution AS218 Series: 12bits
Analog output mode AS218 Series: -10V~10V (voltage mode) or 0mA~20mA (currentmode)
Electrical output isolaiton 1500 VAC 500 VAC
When there is isolation between alaog and digital electricals and there is
no isolation among analog channels.
Analog output isolation
Isolation between analog electrical and gronunding: 500 VAC
Isolation between analog and digital electrical: 500 VAC
*1: Analog output data updates automatically in every PLC program scan.
*2: Life cycle curve: The lifetime of a relay terminal varies with the working voltage, the load type (the power
factor cosψ, the time constant t(L/R)), and the current passing through the terminal. The relation is shown in
the life cycle curve below.
120VAC Resistive
3000
30VDC Inductive(t=7ms)
2000
240VAC Inductive(cosψ = 0.4)
1000
120VAC Inductive(cosψ =0.4)
Operation(X10 )
3
500
300
200
100
30VDC
50 Inductive
(t=40ms )
30
20
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1 2

Contact Current(A)
2-8
2.2.3 CPU Module Profiles

 AS324MT-A/AS332T-A/AS332P-A/AS300N-A
11 12 8 9 13
92
POWE R
1 RUN
_2
ERROR
BAT. LOW
COM1
COM2
2
40
AS324MT
0 8
98.3
1 9
2 10
88
3 11
IN
3 4
5
6
10 7
0 8
4
1 9
Ethernet
2 10
3 11
OUT
2 1
5
4
5
6
7
6
75
7 80
Unit: mm
 AS320T-B/AS320P-B
11 12 8 14 13
2
98 .3
88
3
10
4
5
6
75
7 80 9 5 .5
Unit: mm
Number Name Description
Power LED indicator Indicates the power status of the CPU module
Operating status of the module
Run LED indicator ON: the module is running.
OFF: the module is stopped.
Error status of the module
ON: a serious error occurs in the module.
Error LED indicator
1 OFF: the module is normal.
Blinking: a minor error occurs in the module.
BAT.LOW LED Indicates the battery status of the CPU module.
indicator (Enable/Disable this display in HWCONFIG in ISPSoft)
Indicates the communication status of the COM port.
COM1 LED
OFF: no communication over the COM port
COM2 LED
Blinking: communication over the COM port
2 Model name Shows the model name of the CPU module.
RUN: execute the programs
Run/Stop
3 STOP: stop the programs
USB port Mini USB communication port
2-9

SD card slot Provides an interface for an SD card
VR0: use the flag SM166 to activate the values in SR166
VR0/VR1
Input/Output LED If there is an input signal, the input LED indicator is ON.
4
indicator If there is an output signal, the output LED indicator is ON.
5 Ethernet port Provides an interface for a n Ethernet communication
6 COM1/COM2 Provides an interface for RS-485 communication
2_
7 DIN rail clip Secures the DIN rail
8 Extension card slot Provides an interface for an extension card
MIL connector Connects the module and the wiring module
9
AS300N-A does not come with inputs/outputs; no MIL connector for it.
10 Grounding clip For grounding
11 Power supply For power supply
12 Label Nameplate
13 External module port Connects the modules
Removable terminal Connects the module and the wiring module
14
blocks AS300N-A does not come with inputs/outputs; no MIL connector for it.
 AS200 Series (AS218PX-A/AS218RX-A/AS218TX-A/AS228R-A/AS228T-A/AS228P-A)

11 12 9 13
2
98 .3
88
3
10
4
5
6
75
7
9 5 .5
8 88
Unit: mm

Power LED indicator Indicates the power status of the CPU module
ON: the module is running.
Run LED indicator
OFF: the module is stopped.
Blinking: the module is detecting an error.
1 Error LED indicator
OFF: the module is normal.
BAT.LOW LED Indicates the battery status of the CPU module.
indicator (Enable/Disable this display in HWCONFIG in ISPSoft)
COM1 LED Indicates the communication status of the COM/CAN port.
COM2 LED OFF: no communication over the COM/CAN port
CAN LED Blinking: communication over the COM/CAN port
2-10

2 Model name Shows the model name of the CPU module.
RUN: execute the programs
Run/Stop
STOP: stop the programs
USB port Mini USB communication port
3
SD card slot Provides an interface for an SD card
VR0/VR1
_2 VR1: use the flag SM167 to activate the values in SR167
4
5 Ethernet port Provides an interface for a n Ethernet communication
6 COM1/COM2 Provides an interface for RS-485 communication
8 CAN port Provides an interface for CAN communication
Removable terminal
9 Connects the module and the wiring module
blocks
10 Grounding clip For grounding
11 Power supply For power supply
12 Label Nameplate
13 External module port Connects the modules
 MIL connector, extension cable, and wiring modules (for AS332T-A/AS332P-A/AS324MT-A)
1. Extension Cable UC-ET010-24D (1M) / UC-ET020-24D (2M) / UC-ET030-24D (3M)
Length
O UT 19 2 0
#1
3 9 40 2
1 2
1 IN 39 40
#2
2
1 2
21 2 2
500 -
+10m m
Unit: mm

Connects a digital input/output module and an external terminal
1 IDC 40-pin terminal
module.
Connects the external terminal modules UB-10-ID16A/UB-10-
OR16A/UB-10-OR16B
2 - 11
2. AS332T-A/AS332P-A/AS324MT-A and the external terminal module UB-10-ID16A

67.0
4
87.0
3
2
53.6 2_
Unit: mm
1 20-pin MIL connector Connects the external terminal module and a wiring module
2 Terminals Input/Output terminals for wiring
3 Clip Hangs the external terminal module on a DIN rail
4 Set screw Fixes the base
3. AS332T-A and the external terminal module UB-10-OR16A/AS332P-A, and UB-10-OR16B
113
1
3
4
87
5
55.3
7
2
Unit: mm 6

1 20-pin MIL connector Connects the external terminal module and a wiring module
3 2-pin power input terminal Power input terminal for wiring
4 Output LED indicator If there is an output signal, the output LED indicator is ON.
5 Relay output Relay output
2-12
 Spring clamp/MIL connector terminal block UB-10-IO32D for AS332T-A/AS332P-A/AS324MT-A

24 . 35
23. 6
1
_2
101
2 26.9
33.7
Unit: mm

1 Terminal block for output Terminal block
2 40-pin MIL connector Connects the module and the wiring module
Note: It is suggested to use simple test for input and output points. Its right-side cannot be conntected to
the same terminal block typed module, e.g. 64 points DIO module to prevent two terminal blocks from
interfering with each other.
2-13
2.2.4 CPU Module Input/Output Terminals
AS332P-A AS332T-A
- - - -
S/S S/S S/S S/S
X0.15 X0.14 X0.15 X0.14
X0.13 X0.12 X0.13 X0.12
X0.11 X0.10 X0.11 X0.10 2_
POWER
RUN
X0.9 X0.8 POWER
RUN
X0.9 X0.8
ERROR
BAT. LOW
X0.7 X0.6 ERROR
BAT. LOW
X0.7 X0.6
X0.5 X0.4 X0.5 X0.4
COM1 COM1
COM2 COM2
AS332P 40
AS332T 40
0 8 X0.3 X0.2 0 8 X0.3 X0.2

1 9 1 9
2
3
10
11
X0.1 X0.0 2
3
10
11
X0.1 X0.0
IN IN
C0 C0 - -
4 12 4 12
5 13 5 13
6 14 6 14
7 15 - - 7
0
15
8
C0 C0
0 8
Y0.15 Y0.14 Y0.15 Y0.14

1 9 1 9
Ethernet Ethernet
2 10 2 10
3 11 3 11
Y0.13 Y0.12 Y0.13 Y0.12

OUT OUT
4 12 2 1 4 12 2 1
5 13 5 13
Y0.11 Y0.10 Y0.11 Y0.10

6 14 6 14
7 15 7 15
Y0.9 Y0.8 Y0.9 Y0.8

Y0.7 Y0.6 Y0.7 Y0.6
Y0.5 Y0.4 Y0.5 Y0.4
Y0.3 Y0.2 Y0.3 Y0.2
Y0.1 Y0.0 Y0.1 Y0.0
AS324MT-A AS320T-B/AS320P-B
S/S S/S S/S S/S
X0.11 X0.10 X0 X1
X0.9 X0.8 X2 X3
X0.7 X0.6 X4 X5
X0.5 X0.4
POWER
X6 X7
X1
POWER
RUN
SG0 SG0 RUN
ERROR
C0 C0
X0.3- X0.3+ Y0 Y1
ERROR
BAT. LOW
BAT. LOW
COM1 X0
Y2 Y3
COM1
COM2
AS324MT 40 X0.2- X0.2+ COM2
AS320T X2
X3
0 8 X0.1- X0.1+ 0
1
X4
X6
X5
X7
Y4 Y5
1 9
2
3
10
11
X0.0- X0.0+
IN
2
3
C0 C0 Y6 Y7
IN
C0 C0 Y8 Y9
4 4 Y0 Y1
5 5
6 Y2 Y3
6
7
0 8
Y0.11 Y0.10 7 Y4 Y5 Y10 Y11
0 8
Ethernet
1
2
9
10
Y0.9 Y0.8 Ethernet
1 9
Y6 Y7
2 10 Y8 Y9
3 11
OUT
4
5
2 1
Y0.7 Y0.6 OUT
3
4
11
Y10 Y11
Y0.5 Y0.4
6 5
7 6
7
SG1 SG1
Y0.3- Y0.3+
Y0.2- Y0.2+
Y0.1- Y0.1+
Y0.0- Y0.0+
2-14
AS218RX-A/AS218TX-A/AS218PX-A
AIO DIO
V1+ V2+ S/S C0
POWER
R UN
ERROR
BAT. LOW
C OM1 I1+ I2+ X0.0 Y0.0
C OM2
VI1- VI2- X0.1 Y0.1

IN IN OUT OUT
C0 C1
0 8
1 9 1 4
- - X0.2 Y0.2
0 0
2 10
_2
2 3 1 5
3 11
IN
4 12 4 5 2 6
5
6
13
14
6 7 3 7
VO1 VO2 X0.3 -
7 15
IO1 IO2 X0.4 C1

8 9 ● ●
0 8
10 11 ●
C2
1 9
Et hernet
2 10 12 13 8 9
OUT
3
4
11
14 15 10 11
AG AG X0.5 Y0.3
5
6
7
- - X0.6 Y0.4
- X0.7 Y0.5
AS228R-A/AS228T-A/AS228P-A
IN OUT
S/S S/S C0 C1
POWER
R UN
ERROR
BAT. LOW
C OM1 X0.0 X0.1 Y0.0 Y0.4
C OM2
X0.2 X0.3 Y0.1 Y0.5

IN IN OUT OUT
C0 C1
0 8
1 9 1 4
X0.4 X0.5 Y0.2 Y0.6

0 0
2 10
2 3 1 5
3 11
IN
4 12 4 5 2 6
5
6
13
14
6 7 3 7
X0.6 X0.7 Y0.3 Y0.7
7 15
X0.8 X0.9 - -
8 9 ● ●
0 8
10 11 ●
C2
1 9
Et hernet
2 10 12 13 8 9
OUT
3
4
11
14 15 10 11
X0.10 X0.11 - C2
5
6
7
X0.12 X0.13 Y0.8 Y0.9
X0.14 X0.15 Y0.10 Y0.11
 MIL connector and the external terminal module UB-10-ID16A for AS332T-A / AS332P-A /
AS324MT-A
TB1
TB2
2-15
#1
#2
2_
AS332T-A
TB1 Y0.0 Y0.2 Y0.4 Y0.6 Y0.8 Y0.10 Y0.12 Y0.14 C0 -
#1
TB2 Y0.1 Y0.3 Y0.5 Y0.7 Y0.9 Y0.11 Y0.13 Y0.15 C0 -
TB1 X0.0 X0.2 X0.4 X0.6 X0.8 X0.10 X0.12 X0.14 S/S -
#2
TB2 X0.1 X0.3 X0.5 X0.7 X0.9 X0.11 X0.13 X0.15 S/S -
AS332P-A
TB1 Y0.0 Y0.2 Y0.4 Y0.6 Y0.8 Y0.10 Y0.12 Y0.14 - C0
#1
TB2 Y0.1 Y0.3 Y0.5 Y0.7 Y0.9 Y0.11 Y0.13 Y0.15 - C0
TB1 X0.0 X0.2 X0.4 X0.6 X0.8 X0.10 X0.12 X0.14 S/S -
#2
TB2 X0.1 X0.3 X0.5 X0.7 X0.9 X0.11 X0.13 X0.15 S/S -
AS324MT-A
TB1 Y0.0+ Y0.1+ Y0.2+ Y0.3+ SG1 Y0.4 Y0.6 Y0.8 Y0.10 C0
#1
TB2 Y0.0- Y0.1- Y0.2- Y0.3- SG1 Y0.5 Y0.7 Y0.9 Y0.11 C0
TB1 X0.0+ X0.1+ X0.2+ X0.3+ SG0 X0.4 X0.6 X0.8 X0.10 S/S
#2
TB2 X0.0- X0.1- X0.2- X0.3- SG0 X0.5 X0.7 X0.9 X0.11 S/S
 Spring clamp/MIL connector terminal block UB-10-IO32D for AS332T-A/AS332P-A/AS324MT-A
40 39
38 37
36 35
34 33
32 31
30 29
28 27
26 25
24 23
22 21
20 19
18 17
16 15
14 13
12 11
10 9
8 7
6 5
4 3
2 1
2-16
2.2.5 AS200 Input/Output Terminals

 Analog Input
Two analog signal input channels:
Item Voltage Input Current input

-20 to 20 mA
Analog Signal -10 to +10 V
4 to 20mA (for FW V1.08 or later)
_2 Resolution 12-bit 11-bit
Input impedance ≧1 MΩ 250 Ω
Conversion time 3 ms / CH
Analog to digital -1000 to 1000 (-20 to 20 mA)
-2000 to 2000
conversion range 0 to 1000 (4 to 20mA)
Digital value
SR168 (CH1) SR169 (CH2)
output
You can use the program to read the values in SR to obtain the corresponding A/D conversion value for the
channel.
 Analog Output
Two analog signal output channels:
Item Voltage output Current output

Analog Signal -10 to +10 V 0 to 20 mA
Resolution 12-bit 12-bit
Impedance
≥1 k Ω ≤500 Ω
allowance
Conversion time 2ms / CH
Analog to digital -2000 to 2000
0 to 4000
conversion range
Digital value
SR172 (CH1) SR173 (CH2)
output
You can use the instruction MOV to move the value to the SR to obtain the corresponding voltage output
value.
2-17
2.3 Digital Input/Output Module Specifications

2.3.1 General Specifications
 Electrical specifications for the inputs on digital input/output modules
(The signals passing through the inputs are 24 VDC signals.)
08AM10N 16AM10N 32AM10N 64AM10N 16AP11R 16AP11T 16AP11P
Module name
-A -A -A -A A -A -A
2_
Number of inputs 8 16 32 64 8 8 8
Removable terminal
Connector type MIL connector Removable terminal block
block
Input type Digital input
24 VDC
Input voltage/ current 24 VDC，5 mA 24 VDC，5 mA
3.2 mA
Input impedance 4.7 k Ω 7.5k Ω 4.7 k Ω
OFF→ON >15 VDC
Action level
ON→OFF <5 VDC
Response OFF→ON < 20 us
time ON→OFF < 200 us
Software filter time Setting range: 0 ~ 25 ms; default: 10 ms
Varies according to the filter time; for example when the filter is 1 ms, the
Maximum input
maximum input frequency is 500 Hz, when 2 ms, 250 Hz.
frequency
Note: CPU scan time also affects the maximum input frequency.
Voltage input
Sinking: The inputs are NPN transistors whose collectors are open
Input signal collectors.
Sourcing: The inputs are PNP transistors whose collectors are open
collectors.
Weight 100 g 117 g 100 g 140 g 138 g 120 g 120 g
 Electrical specifications for the outputs on a digital input/output module

Model 08AN01 16AN01 16AP11 08AN01 16AN01 16AP11 08AN01 16AN01 16AP11
Item R-A R-A R-A T-A T-A T-A P-A P-A P-A
Number of outputs 8 16 8 8 16 8 8 16 8
Connector type Removable terminal block
Output type Digital output
Output form Relay-R Transistor-T (sinking) Transistor-P (sourcing)
Voltage/ current 240 VAC/24 VDC 5–30 VDC 5–30 VDC *2
<250uA (@V1.00A0)
Leakage current 0uA <10uA
<10uA (@V1.00A1)
Resistance 2A/output, 8A/COM 0.5A/output, 4A/COM 0.5A/output, 4A/COM
Maximum Inductance Life cycle curve 12 W (24 VDC) 12 W (24 VDC)
load
20 W (24 VDC)
Bulb 2 W (24 VDC) 2 W (24 VDC)
100 W (230 VAC)
Minimum load 1 mA / 5V
2-18
Model 08AN01 16AN01 16AP11 08AN01 16AN01 16AP11 08AN01 16AN01 16AP11
Item R-A R-A R-A T-A T-A T-A P-A P-A P-A
Maximum Resistance 1 Hz 100 Hz 100 Hz

output Inductance 0.5 Hz 0.5 Hz 0.5 Hz
frequency*1 Bulb 1 Hz 10 Hz 10 Hz
Maximum OFF→ON < 10 ms < 0.5 ms < 0.5 ms
Response
_2 time ON→OFF < 10 ms < 0.5 ms < 0.5 ms
Output isolation 1500 VAC 500 VAC
Weight 120 g 158 g 138 g 100 g 122 g 120 g 100 g 123 g 120 g
Model
32AN02T-A 64AN02T-A
Item
Number of outputs 32 64
Connector type MIL connector
Output type Digital output
Output form Transistor-T (sinking)
Output voltage 5–30 VDC
Leadage current <10uA
Resistance 0.1A/output, 3.2A/COM
Maximum
Inductance N/A
load
Bulb N/A
Minimum load 1 mA / 5V
Maximum output
100 Hz (resistance)
frequency*1
Maximum OFF→ON
Response < 0.5 ms
ON→OFF
time
Weight 100 g 142 g
*1: The scan cycle affects the frequency. Here shows the maximum output frequency. The load type
should be taken into account while designing for the application.
*2: Life cycle curve: The lifetime of a relay terminal varies with the working voltage, the load type (the
power factor cosψ, the time constant t(L/R)), and the current passing through the terminal. The
relation is shown in the life cycle curve below.
120VAC Resistive
3000
2000
1000
Operation(X10 )
3
500
300
200
100
30VDC
50 Inductive
(t=40ms)
30
20
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1 2

Contact Current(A)
2-19
2.3.2 Digital Input/Output Module Profiles

 AS08AM10N-A/AS08AN01P-A/AS08AN01R-A/AS08AN01T-A
28.2 89
08AM 1
7
7
2_
IN
S/S
PWR
S/S
IN
0 0
1
2
98.3
1 2
88
3
2 4
5
3
6
3
4 7
6
4
7
8 5
6 75
25
08AN 08AN 08AN
OUT OUT OUT
C0 C0 C0
PWR PWR PWR
C0 C0 C0
OUT OUT OUT
0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1
1 2 1 2 1 2
3 3 3
2 4 2 4 2 4
5 5 5
3 3 3
6 6 6
7 4 7 7
4 4
5 5 5
6 6 6
7 7 7
Unit: mm

1 Model name Model name of the module
Input/output LED If there is an input signal, the input LED indicator is ON.
2
Removable terminal The inputs are connected to sensors.
3
block The outputs are connected to loads to be driven.
Arrangement of the
4 input/output Arrangement of the terminals
terminals
5 Terminal block clip Secures the terminal block
External module
7 Connects the modules
port
8 Label Nameplate
2-20
 AS16AM10N-A/AS16AN01P-A/AS16AN01R-A/AS16AN01T-A/AS16AP11P-A/AS16AP11R-A/
AS16AP11T-A
38.2 95
16AM 1
7
7
IN IN
S/S S/S
PWR
S/S S/S
_2 2
IN
0 1 0
98.3
1
88
2 3 2
3
4 5 4
5
6 7
8 9
6
7 3
10 11 8
9
10
4
12 13
11
14 15 12
13
8 14
15 5
6 75
35
16AN 16AN 16AN 16AP 16 AP 16AP
OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT
C0 C0 C0 C0 C0 C0 C0 C0 C0
PWR PWR PWR PWR PWR PWR

1 C0 C0 0 1 C0 C0 C0
0
OUT OUT OUT IN IN IN
0 0 1 0 2 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 3
1 1 1 1 1 1
2 3 4 5 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2
4 5 2 2
3 3 3 3 3
3
4 5 6 7 2 2 2 2 4 2 2 4
6 7 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5
5 3 3 3 3
C1 C1 6 7 C1 C1 3 3 6
6 6 6 6
6
7 7 7 7 7
7 8 9 8 9 4 4 4 4 4 4
8 9
OUT OUT OUT
8 0 5 5 0 5 5 0
8 8 10 11 5 5
10 11 10 11
9 1 1 1
9 9
12 13 10 2 6 6 2 6 6 2
12 13 10 12 13 10 6 6
11 3 3
11 11 3
14 15 12 7 7 4 7 4
14 15 12 14 15 12 7 7 4
13 5 5
13 13 5
14 6 6
14 14 6
15 7 7
15 15 7
Unit: mm

2
3
Arrangement of the
4 input/output Arrangement of the terminals
terminals
5 Terminal block clip Secures the terminal block
External module
port
8 Label Nameplate
2-21
 AS32AM10N-A
28.2 92
32AM
X0 LED
1
X1 LED
7 2
7
39
3
PWR
4
2_
IN
0
1
98.3
2
88
3
4
5
6
7
5
8
9
10
11
12
1
8 13
14
15
6 75
25
Unit: mm

X0/X1 LED
2 Switches the LED indicators to their represented inputs.
Indicator switch
For the external I/O connecting cables UC-ET010-24B, UC-ET020-24B,
3 ML connector
UC-ET030-24B
Power LED
4 Indicates the power status of the module
indicator
5 Input LED indicator LED indicator is ON during input.
External module
port
8 Label Nameplate
2-22
 AS32AN02T-A
28.2 92
32AN
Y0 LED
1
Y1 LED
7 2
7
39
3
PWR
OUT
0
4
_2
1
98.3
2
88
3
4
5
6
7
5
8
9
10
11
12
1
8
13
14
15
6 75
25
Unit: mm

Y0/Y1 LED
2 Switches the LED indicators to their represented outputs.
indicator switch
For the external I/O connecting cables UC-ET010-24D, UC-ET020-24D,
3 ML connector
UC-ET030-24D
Power LED
indicator
Output LED
5 LED indicator is ON during output.
indicator
External module
port
8 Label Nameplate
2-23
 AS64AM10N-A
38.2
92
64AM 1
0 1 0 1
0 1
2
8
3 8
40 2
P WR
4
2_
IN
X1 X2
0
1 5
98.3
2
88
3
4
5
6
7
6
X0 X3 8
9
10
11
12
2 40
9
13
14
15
7 75
35
Unit: mm

LED indicator
switch 1
LED indicator
switch 2
For the external I/O connecting cables UC-ET010-24B, UC-ET020-24B,
4 ML connector
UC-ET030-24B
Power LED
indicator
6 Input LED indicator If there is an input signal, the input LED indicator is ON.
External module
port
9 Label Nameplate
2-24
 AS64AN02T-A
38.2 92
64AN 1
0 1 0 1
0 1
2
8
3 8
40 2
P WR
4
O UT
Y1 Y2
0
1 5
_2
98.3
2
88
3
4
5
6
7
6
Y0 Y3 8
9
10
11
12
2 40
9
13
14
15
7 75
35
Unit: mm
LED indicator
switch 1
LED indicator
switch 2
For the external I/O connecting cables UC-ET010-24D, UC-ET020-24D,
4 ML connector
UC-ET030-24D
Power LED
indicator
Output LED
6 If there is an output signal, the output LED indicator is ON.
indicator
External module
port
9 Label Nameplate
 ML connector, extension cable, and wiring modules
1. Extension Cable UC-ET010-24D (1M) / UC-ET020-24D (2M) / UC-ET030-24D (3M)
Length
19 2 0
#1
3 9 40 2
1 2
1
39 40
#2
1 2 2
21 2 2
500 -
+10m m
Unit: mm

Connects a digital input/output module and an external terminal
module.
Connects the external terminal modules UB-10-ID16A/UB-10-
OR16A/UB-10-OR16B
2-25
2. I/O connecting cables UC-ET010-24B (1M) / UC-ET020-24B (2M) / UC-ET030-24B (3M)

Length
39 40 39 40
1 2 1 2 2_

Connects an external terminal module and a wiring module UB-10-
ID32A, and UB-10-OT32A
3. AS32AM10N-A/AS64AM10N-A and the external terminal modules UB-10-ID16A, UB-10-ID32A
 UB-10-ID16A
67.0
4
87.0
3
2
53.6
Unit: mm
 UB-10-ID32A
113
1
87
2
4 53.6
Unit: mm
UB-10-ID16A: 20-pin ML connector Connects the external terminal module and a
1
UB-10-ID32A: 40-pin ML connector wiring module
2-26
4. AS332T-A/AS64AN02T-A and the external terminal modules UB-10-ID16A, UB-10-OR16A, and UB-
10-OT32A.
 UB-10-ID16A
67.0
_2 6
87.0
7
2
53.6
Unit: mm
 UB-10-OR16A
113
1
3
4
87
5
55.3
7
2
6
Unit: mm
 UB-10-OT32A
113
1
87
2
7 53.6
Unit: mm

UB-10- ID16A /OR16A: 20-
pin ML connector Connects the external terminal module and a wiring
1
UB-10-OT32A: 40-pin ML module
connector
3 2-pin power input terminal Power input terminal for wiring
4 Output LED indicator LED indicator is ON during output.
5 Relay output Relay output
2-27
 Spring clamp/MIL connector terminal block UB-10-IO32D for AS32AM10N-A/AS32AN02T-A

24 . 35
23. 6
1 2_
101
2 26.9
33.7
Unit: mm

1 Terminal block for output Terminal block
2 40-pin MIL connector Connects the module and the wiring module
2-28
2.3.3 Digital Input/Output Module Terminals

AS08AM10N-A AS08AN01P-A
08AM 08AN
_2
IN OUT
C0
PWR PWR
C0
IN OUT
0 0 0 0
1 1
1 2 1 2
3 3
2 4
2 4
5 5
3 3
6 6
4 7 4 7
5 5
6 6
7 7
AS08AN01R-A AS08AN01T-A
08AN 08AN
OUT OUT
C0 C0
PWR PWR
C0 C0
OUT OUT
0 0 0 0
1 1
1 2 1 2
3 3
2 4 2 4
5 5
3 3
6 6
4 7 7
4
5 5
6 6
7 7
2-29
AS16AM10N-A AS16AN01P-A
16AM 16AN
IN IN OUT OUT 2_
C0 C0
PWR PWR
0 1
IN OUT
0 1 0 2 3 0
1 1
2 3 2 4 5 2
3 3
4 5 4 6 7 4
5 5
6 7 C1 C1
6 6
7 7
8 9 8 9
8 10 11
8
10 11
9 9
12 13 10 12 13 10
11 11
14 15 12 14 15 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
AS16AN01R-A AS16AN01T-A
16AN 16AN
OUT OUT OUT OUT
C0 C0 C0 C0
PWR PWR
C0 C0 0 1
OUT OUT
0 1 0 2 3 0
1 1
2 3 2 4 5 2
3 3
4 5 6 7 4
4
5 5
6 7 C1 C1
6 6
7 7
8 9 8 9
8 10 11 8
10 11
9 9
12 13 10 12 13 10
11 11
14 15 12 14 15 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
2-30
AS16AP11P-A AS16AP11R-A
16AP 16AP
IN OUT IN OUT
_2 C0 C0
PWR PWR
C0 C0
IN IN
0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1
1 1 2 1 1 2
3 3
2 2 2 2 4
4
5 5
3 3 3 3
6 6
7 7
4 4 4 4
OUT OUT
0 5 5 0
5 5
1 1
2 6 6 2
6 6
3 3
7 7 7 7 4
4
5 5
6
6
7
7
AS16AP11T-A AS32AM10N-A
- -
S/S S/S
32AM 1.15 1.14
16AP X0 LED
X1 LED
1.13 1.12
1.11 1.10
1.9 1.8
IN OUT
39 1.7 1.6
C0
PWR
PWR
1.5 1.4
C0
IN
IN
0 1.3 1.2
0 0 0 1
1 2 1.1 1.0
1 1 2
3
3
4
- -
2 2 4
5
5
6
S/S S/S
3 3
6
7
7 0.15 0.14
4 4
OUT
0
8 0.13 0.12
5 5 9
6
1
2
10 0.11 0.10
6 11
7
3
1
12 0.9 0.8
4
13
5
14 0.7 0.6
6
15
7 0.5 0.4
0.3 0.2
0.1 0.0
2-31
AS32AN02T-A AS64AM10N-A
- - - - 2.0 2.1
C0 C0 S/S0 S/S0 2.2 2.3
32AN 1.15 1.14 64AM 1.15 1.14 2.4 2.5
Y0 LED 0 1 01
Y1 LED 1.13 1.12 0 1 1.13 1.12 2.6 2.7
1.11 1.10 1.11 1.10 2.8 2.9
39
1.9 1.8
40 2
1.9 1.8 2.10 2.11
2_
1.7 1.6 PWR 1.7 1.6 2.12 2.13
PWR
1.5 1.4 IN 1.5 1.4 2.14 2.15
OUT 0
0
1
1.3 1.2 X1 X2
1 1.3 1.2 S/S S/S
2
2 1.1 1.0 3 1.1 1.0 - -
3 4
4 - - 5 - - 3.0 3.1
5 6
6 C0 C0 7 S/S0 S/S0 3.2 3.3
7
0.15 0.14 X0 X3 8 0.15 0.14 3.4 3.5
8 9
9
0.13 0.12 10 0.13 0.12 3.6 3.7
11
10
11
0.11 0.10 12 0.11 0.10 3.8 3.9
2 40
1
12 0.9 0.8 13
14
0.9 0.8 3.10 3.11
13
14 0.7 0.6 15
0.7 0.6 3.12 3.13
15
0.5 0.4 0.5 0.4 3.14 3.15
0.3 0.2 0.3 0.2 S/S1 S/S1
0.1 0.0 0.1 0.0 - -
AS64AN02T-A
- - 2.0 2.1
C0 C0 2.2 2.3
64AN 1.15 1.14 2.4 2.5
0 1 01
0 1 1.13 1.12 2.6 2.7

1.11 1.10 2.8 2.9
1.9 1.8 2.10 2.11
40 2
PWR 1.7 1.6 2.12 2.13

OUT 1.5 1.4 2.14 2.15
0
Y1 Y2
1 1.3 1.2 C1 C1
2
3 1.1 1.0 - -
4
5 - - 3.0 3.1
6
7 C0 C0 3.2 3.3
Y0 Y3 8 0.15 0.14 3.4 3.5
9
10 0.13 0.12 3.6 3.7
11
12 0.11 0.10 3.8 3.9
2 40
13
14
0.9 0.8 3.10 3.11
15
0.7 0.6 3.12 3.13
0.5 0.4 3.14 3.15
0.3 0.2 C1 C1
0.1 0.0 - -
2-32
 ML connector and the wiring module
1. AS32AM10N-A/AS64AM10N-A
 The wiring module: UB-10-ID16A
_2 TB1
TB2
#1
#2
AS32AM10N-A/ AS64AM10N-A
TB1 X0.0 X0.2 X0.4 X0.6 X0.8 X0.10 X0.12 X0.14 S/S -
#2
TB2 X0.1 X0.3 X0.5 X0.7 X0.9 X0.11 X0.13 X0.15 S/S -
 The wiring module: UB-10-ID32A
AS series terminals:
Upper
X0.0 X0.2 X0.4 X0.6 X0.8 X0.10 X0.12 X0.14 X1.0 X1.2 X1.4 X1.6 X1.8 X1.10 X1.12 X1.14 S/S S/S
row
Lower
X0.1 X0.3 X0.5 X0.7 X0.9 X0.11 X0.13 X0.15 X1.1 X1.3 X1.5 X1.7 X1.9 X1.11 X1.13 X1.15 S/S S/S
row
2-33
2. AS32AN02T-A/AS64AN02T-A and the wiring modules:
 UB-10-ID16A
TB1
TB2
2_
#1
#2
AS332T-A
TB1 Y0.0 Y0.2 Y0.4 Y0.6 Y0.8 Y0.10 Y0.12 Y0.14 C0 -
#1
TB2 Y0.1 Y0.3 Y0.5 Y0.7 Y0.9 Y0.11 Y0.13 Y0.15 C0 -
 UB-10-OT32A
Upper
Y0.0 Y0.2 Y0.4 Y0.6 Y0.8 Y0.10 Y0.12 Y0.14 Y1.0 Y1.2 Y1.4 Y1.6 Y1.8 Y1.10 Y1.12 Y1.14  
row
Lower
Y0.1 Y0.3 Y0.5 Y0.7 Y0.9 Y0.11 Y0.13 Y0.15 Y1.1 Y1.3 Y1.5 Y1.7 Y1.9 Y1.11 Y1.13 Y1.15 C0 C0
row
 UB-10-OR16A
Terminals:
GND +24
V
C0 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 C1 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 C2 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 C3 Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17
GND +24V
C0 Y0.0 Y0.1 Y0.2 Y0.3 C1 Y0.4 Y0.5 Y0.6 Y0.7 C2 Y0.8 Y0.9 Y0.10 Y0.11 C3 Y0.12 Y0.13 Y0.14 Y0.15
2-34
3. AS32AM10N-A/AS32AN02T-A and the wiring modules:
 UB-10-IO32D
_2
2-35
2.4 Analog Input/Output Module Specifications

 AS04AD-A / AS08AD-B / AS08AD-C
Electrical specifications
Module Name AS04AD-A AS08AD-B AS08AD-C

Number of Inputs 4 8 8
2_
Analog-to-Digital
Voltage input/Current input Voltage input Current input
Conversion
Supply Voltage 24 VDC (20.4 VDC–28.8 VDC) (-15% to +20%)
Connector Type Removable terminal block
Conversion Time 2 ms / channel
An analog circuit is isolated from a digital circuit by a digital integrated circuit/
optocoupler, but the analog channels are not isolated from one another.
Isolation between a digital circuit and a ground: 500 VAC
Isolation
Isolation between an analog circuit and a ground: 500 VAC
Isolation between an analog circuit and a digital circuit: 500 VAC
Isolation between the 24 VDC and a ground: 500 VAC
Weight 145g
Functional specifications
Analog-to-Digital
Voltage Input
Conversion
Rated Input Range -10 V ~ +10 V 0 V ~ 10 V ±5 V 0V~5V 1V~5V
K-32000 K0 K-32000 K0 K0
Rated Conversion
~ ~ ~ ~ ~
Range
K32000 K32000 K32000 K32000 K32000
-10.12V -0.12V -5.06V -0.06V 0.95V
Hardware Input
~ ~ ~ ~ ~
Limit*1
10.12V 10.12V 5.06V 5.06V 5.05V
K-32384 K-384 K-32384 K-384 K-384
Conversion Limit*2 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
K32384 K32384 K32384 K32384 K32384
Error Rate Room Temperature: ±0.2% ; Full Temperature Range: ±0.5%
Hardware
16 bits
Resolution
Input Impedance 2MΩ
Absolute Input
±15 V
Range*3
*1: If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, the module only shows the maximum value. If the
input signal is below the lower limit, it only shows the minimum value.
*2: If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, it also exceeds the conversion limit and a
conversion limit error appears. For example in the voltage input mode (-10 V to +10 V), when the input
signal is 10.15 V, exceeding the hardware upper limit, it also exceeds the conversion upper limit. The
module uses the upper limit value (32387) as the input signal and a conversion limit error appears.
*3: If an input signal exceeds the absolute range, it might damage the channel.
2-36
Analog-to-Digital
Current Input
Conversion
Rated Input Range ±20 mA 0 mA–20 mA 4 mA–20 mA
K-32000 K0 K0
Rated Conversion
~ ~ ~
Range
K+2000 K32000 K32000
Hardware Input
_2 Limit*1
-20.24 mA ~ 20.24 mA -0.24 mA ~ 20.24 mA 3.81 mA ~ 20.19 mA
K-32384 K-384 K-384

Conversion Limit*2 ~ ~ ~
K32384 K32384 K32384
Hardware Resolution 16 bits
Input Impedance 250Ω
Absolute Input
±32 mA
Range*3
*1: If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, the module only shows the maximum value. If the
input signal is below the lower limit, it only shows the minimum value.
*2: If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, it also exceeds the conversion limit and a
conversion limit error appears. For example in the voltage input mode (4 mA to 20 mA), when the input
signal is 0 mA, exceeding the hardware upper limit, it also exceeds the conversion upper limit. The
module uses the upper limit value (-384) as the input signal and a conversion limit error appears.
 AS04DA-A
Module name AS04DA-A

Number of outputs Four
Digital-to-analog
Voltage output/Current output
conversion
Supply voltage 24 VDC (20.4 VDC–28.8 VDC) (-15%–+20%)
Conversion time 2 ms/channel
An analog circuit is isolated from a digital circuit by a digital integrated circuit/an
Isolation
Weight 145 g
2-37
Digital-to-analog
Voltage output
conversion
Rated output
±10 V 0 V–10 V ±5 V 0 V–5 V 1 V–5 V
range
K-32000 K-32000
Conversion
Range
~ K0 ~ K32000 ~ K0 ~ K32000 K0 ~ K32000
2_
K+32000 K+32000
Hardware output -10.1V to -5.05V to -0.05V to

-0.1V to +10.1V 0.95V–5.05V
range +10.1V +5.05V +5.05V
Error rate (Room
±0.2%
temperature)
Error rate (Full
temperature ±0. 5%
range)
Linearity error
(Room ±0.05%
temperature)
Linearity error
(Full temperature ±0.05%
range)
Hardware
12 bits
resolution
Input impedance ≧1 k Ω ≧500 Ω
Digital-to-analog
Current output
conversion
Rated output
0 mA–20 mA 4 mA–20 mA
range
Conversion
K0 ~ K32000 K0 ~ K32000
Range
Hardware output
-0.2 mA to +20.2 mA 3.8 mA–20.2 mA
range
Error rate (Room
±0.2%
temperature)
Error rate (Full
temperature ±0.5%
range)
Linearity error
(Room
temperature) (Full ±0.03%
temperature
range)
Linearity error ±0.03%
Hardware
12 bits
resolution
Input impedance ≦550 Ω
2-38
 AS06XA-A
Module name AS06XA-A

Number of
Inputs: four; Outputs: two
inputs/outputs
Analog-to-digital
Voltage input/Current input; Voltage output/Current output;
conversion
_2 Supply voltage 24 VDC (20.4 VDC–28.8 VDC) (-15% to +20%)
Conversion time 2ms/channel
Isolation
Weight 145 g
Functional specifications for the analog-to-digital conversion
Analog-to-Digital
Voltage Input
Conversion
Rated Input Range -10 V ~ +10 V 0 V ~ 10 V ±5 V 0V~5V 1V~5V
K-32000 K0 K-32000 K0 K0
Rated Conversion Range ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
K32000 K32000 K32000 K32000 K32000
-10.12V -0.12V -5.06V -0.06V 0.95V
Hardware Input Limit*1 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
10.12V 10.12V 5.06V 5.06V 5.05V
K-32384 K-384 K-32384 K-384 K-384
Conversion Limit*2 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
K32384 K32384 K32384 K32384 K32384
Input Impedance 2MΩ
Absolute Input Range*3 ±15 V
*1: If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, the module only shows the maximum value. If the input
signal is below the lower limit, it only shows the minimum value.
*2: If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, it also exceeds the conversion limit and a conversion
limit error appears. For example in the voltage input mode (-10 V to +10 V), when the input signal is 10.15 V,
exceeding the hardware upper limit, it also exceeds the conversion upper limit. The module uses the upper
limit value (32384) as the input signal and a conversion limit error appears.
2-39
Analog-to-Digital
Current Input
Conversion
Rated Input Range ±20 mA 0 mA–20 mA 4 mA–20 mA
K-32000 K0 K0
Rated Conversion
~ ~ ~
Range
K+2000 K32000 K32000
Hardware Input
Limit*1
-20.24 mA ~ 20.24 mA -0.24 mA ~ 20.24 mA 3.81 mA ~ 20.19 mA 2_
K-32384 K-384 K-384
Conversion Limit*2 ~ ~ ~
K32384 K32384 K32384
Input Impedance 250Ω
Absolute Input
±32 mA
Range*3
signal is below the lower limit, it only shows the minimum value.
*2: If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, it also exceeds the conversion limit and a conversion
limit error appears. For example in the voltage input mode (4 mA to 20 mA), when the input signal is 0 mA,
exceeding the hardware upper limit, it also exceeds the conversion upper limit. The module uses the upper
limit value (-384) as the input signal and a conversion limit error appears.
Functional specifications for the digital-to-analog conversion
Digital-to-Analog
Voltage Output
Conversion
Rated Output Range ±10 V 0 ~ 10 V ±5 V 0~5V 1~5V
K-32000 K0 K-32000 K0 K0
Conversion Range ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
K32000 K32000 K32000 K32000 K32000
-10.1 V -0.1 V -5.05 V -0.05 V 0.95
Hardware Output Range ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
+10.1 V 10.1 V +5.05 V +5.05 V 5.05 V
Error Rate
±0.2%
(Room Temperature)
Error Range
±0.5%
(Full temperature range)
Linearity Error
±0.05%
(Room Temperature)
Linearity Error
±0.05%
(Full Temperature Range)
Permissible load
≧1k Ω ≧500Ω
impedance
2-40
Digital-to-Analog
Current Output
Conversion
Rated Output Range 0–20 mA 4–20 mA
K0 K0
Conversion Range ~ ~
K32000 K32000
Hardware Output Range -0.2 mA to 20.2 mA 3.8–20.2 mA
_2 Error Range
±0.2%
(Room Temperature)
Error Range
±0.5%
Linearity Error
±0.03%
(Room Temperature)
Linearity Error
±0.10%
Permissible Load
≦550 Ω
Impedance
2-41
2.4.2 Analog Input/Output Module Profiles

 AS04AD-A/AS08AD-B/AS08AD-C/AS04DA-A/AS06XA-A
38. 2 95
1
7
7
2_
- 2
98.3
88
-
3
8
4
9
5
6 75
35
Unit: mm

Indicates the status of the power supply
POWER LED indicator ON: the power is on
OFF: no power
2 ERROR LED indicator
Analog-to-digital / digital- Indicates the conversion status
to-analog conversion Blinking: conversion is taking place
indicator OFF: stop conversion
3
Arrangement of the
4 Arrangement of the terminals
input/output terminals
5 Terminal block clip Removal of the terminal block
6 DIN rail clip Secures the module onto the DIN rail
7 Module connecting set Connects the modules
8 Ground clip
9 Label Nameplate
2-42
2.4.3 Analog Input/Output Terminals

AS04AD-A AS08AD-B AS08AD-C
08AD 08AD
04AD
_2
V1+ V2+ I1+ I2+
V1+ V2+ PWR PWR
PWR V1- V2- I1- I2-
I1+ I2+
V3+ V4+ ERR I3+ I4+ ERR
VI1- VI2- ERR A D A D
A D V3- V4- I3- I4-
V3+ V4+
V5+ V6+ I5+ I6+
I3+ I4+
V5- V6- I5- I6-
VI3- VI4-
V7+ V8+ I7+ I8+
SLD SLD
V7- V8- I7- I8-
● ●
AG 24V AG 24V
AG 24V
0V 0V
0V
AS04DA-A AS06XA-A
04DA 06XA
VO1 VO2 V1+ V2+

PWR PWR
IO1 IO2 I1+ I2+
AG AG ERR VI1- VI2- ERR

D A A D
SLD SLD V3+ V4+
VO3 VO4 I3+ I4+
IO3 IO4 VI3- VI4-
AG AG VO1 VO2
SLD SLD IO1 IO2
●
24V AG 24V
0V 0V
2-43
2.5 Temperature Measurement Modules Specifications

 AS04RTD-A / AS06RTD-A
Number of analog
inputs
AS04RTD-A: four ; AS06RTD-A: six 2_
2-WIRE & 3-WIRE Pt100/Ni100/Pt1000/Ni1000/
JPt100/LG-Ni1000/Cu50/Cu100/0–300 Ω/0–3000 Ω
Pt100：DIN 43760-1980 JIS C1604-1989；100 Ω 3850 PPM/°C
Pt1000：DIN EN60751；1 k Ω 3850 PPM/°C
Applicable sensor
Ni100/Ni1000：DIN 43760
JPt100：JIS C1604-1989
LG-Ni1000
Cu50/Cu100
25°C/77°F: The error is ±0.1% of the
input within the range.
Pt100/Ni100/Pt1000/Ni1000/JPt100
-20 to +60°C/-4 to +140°F: The error is
±0.5% of the input within the range.
25°C/77°F: The error is ±0.2% of the
Overall accuracy LG-Ni1000
25°C/77°F: The error is 4°C of the
Cu50
25°C/77°F: The error is 2°C of the
Cu100
Conversion time Two-wire/three-wire configuration: 200 ms/channel
optocoupler, and the analog channels are isolated from one another by
optocouplers.
Isolation Isolation between a digital circuit and a ground: 500 VAC
Weight AS04RTD-A: 115g ; AS06RTD-A: 125g
2-44
Analog-to-digital
Centigrade (°C) Fahrenheit (°F) Input impedance
conversion
Pt100: -180°C to +800°C Pt100: -292°F to +1,472°F
Ni100: -80°C to +170°C Ni100: -112°F to +338°F
Pt1000: -180°C to +800°C Pt1000: -292°F to +1,472°F
Ni1000: -80°C to +170°C Ni1000: -112°F to +338°F 0–300 Ω
Rated input range*1
_2 JPt100: -180°C to +500°C JPt100: -292°F to +932°F 0–3000 Ω
LG-Ni1000: -50°C to +180°C LG-Ni1000: -58°F to +356°F
Cu50: -50°C to +150°C Cu50: -58°F to +302°F
Cu100: -50°C to +150°C Cu100: -58°F to +302°F
Average function Range: 1–100
Self-diagnosis Disconnection detection
*1: If the measured temperature exceeds the upper limit, it only shows the maximum value. If the
measured temperature is below the lower limit, it only shows the minimum value.
 AS04TC-A / AS08TC-A
Number of analog
AS04TC-A: four ; AS08TC-A: eight
inputs
Type J, K, R, S, T, E, N, B, C, U, L, TXK thermocouple;
Applicable sensor
input impedance: ±100mV
25°C/77°F: The error is ±0.5% of the input within the range.
Overall accuracy
-20 to +60°C/-4 to +140°F: The error is ±1% of the input within the range.
Conversion time 200 ms/channel
An analog circuit is isolated from a digital circuit by a digital integrated circuit,
and the analog channels are isolated from one another by optocouplers.
Isolation
Isolation between two group circuits: 500 VAC
Isolation between the analog channels: 120VAC
Weight AS04TC-A: 115g ; AS08TC-A: 125g
2-45
Analog-to-digital
Centigrade (°C) Fahrenheit (°F) Input impedance
conversion
Type J: -100°C~1200°C Type J: -148°F~2,192°F
Type K: -100°C~1,350°C Type K: -148°F~2,462°F
Type R: 0°C~1,750°C Type R: 32°F~3,182°F
Type S: 0°C~1,750°C Type S: 32°F~3,182°F 2_
Type T: -150°C~400°C Type T: -238°F~752°F
Type E: -150°C~980°C Type E: -238°F~1,796°F
Rated input range*1 ±100mV
Type N: -150°C~1,300°C Type N: -238°F~2,372°F
Type B: 200°C~1,800°C Type B: 392°F~3,272°F
Type C: 0°C~2,320°C Type C: N/A
Type U: -200°C~600°C Type U: -328°F~1,112°F
Type L: -200°C~900°C Type L: -328°F~1,652°F
Type TXK: -200°C~800°C Type TXK: -328°F~1,472°F
Average function Range: 1~100
Self-diagnosis Disconnection detection
*1: If the measured temperature exceeds the upper limit, it only shows the maximum value. If the
measured temperature is below the lower limit, it only shows the minimum value.
2-46
2.5.2 Temperature Measurement Module Profiles

 AS04RTD-A / AS06RTD-A
38.2 95
04RT D 1
7
7
_2 2
98.3
88
3
8
4
9
5
6 75
35
Unit: mm

OFF: no power
Indicates the analog to digital conversion status
Analog to digital
Blinking: conversion is taking place
conversion indicator
OFF: stop conversion
3
Arrangement of the
8 Ground clip
9 Label Nameplate
2-47
 AS04TC-A / AS08TC-A
38.2 95
04TC 1
7
7
2
2_
98.3
88
3
8
4
9 5
6 75
35
Unit: mm

OFF: no power
Analog to digital
3
Arrangement of the
8 Ground clip
9 Label Nameplate
2-48
2.5.3 Temperature Measurement Module Dimensions

AS04RTD-A AS04TC-A
0 4R T D 0 4 TC
_2
L1+ L1- I1 +
PWR PWR
S LD I 1- SLD I1-
L2+ L2- ERR I2 + ERR

A D A D
S LD I 2- SLD I2-
L3+ L3- I3 +
S LD I 3- SLD I3-
L4+ L4- I4 +
S LD I 4- SLD I4-
24V 2 4V
0V 0V
AS06RTD-A AS08TC-A
06RTD 08 TC
L1+ L1- I1+ I 1-

P WR PWR
L2+ L2- I2+ I 2-
SLD I12 - E RR I3+ I 3- ERR

A D A D
L3+ L3- I4+ I 4-
L4+ L4- I5+ I 5-
I 56- I34- I6+ I 6-
L5+ L5- I7+ I 7-
L6+ L6- I8+ I 8-
SLD 24V SLD 24V
0V 0V
Unit: mm
2-49
2.6 Positioning Module Specifications

Electrical specifications for the inputs
 AS02PU-A
Model
Item
High-speed Input Normal Input
2_
Number of inputs 3 (A+/A-, B+/B-, Z+/Z-) 5 (X0.0-X0.4)
Input form Differential input Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
Input current 5-24 VDC, 5 mA 24 VDC, 5 mA
Action OFF→ON >3 VDC >15 VDC

level ON→OFF <1.5 VDC <5 VDC
Response time 1.5 μs < 0.5 ms
Maximum input
200 kHz (A+/A-, B+/B-, Z+/Z-) 1 kHz
frequency
Weight 120 g
 AS04PU-A
Model
Normal
Item
Number of inputs Six
Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
Input form Sinking: The inputs are NPN transistors whose collectors are open collectors.
Sourcing: The inputs are PNP transistors whose collectors are open collectors.
Input current 24 VDC, 5 mA
Action OFF→ON >15 VDC

level ON→OFF <5 VDC
Response time < 0.5 ms
Maximum input
1 kHz
frequency
Weight 120 g
2-50
Electrical specifications for the outputs
Model
AS02PU-A AS04PU-A
Item
Number of outputs Four (2-axis) Eight (4-axis)
Output form differential output Transistor-T (sinking) (NPN)
Output current 5 VDC*1 5-30 VDC, 0.1A
_2 Leakage current < 10 uA
Minimum load 1 mA / 5 VDC
Resistance 10 mA 0.1A
Maximum
Inductance N/A
load
Bulb N/A
Maximum
output Resistance 200 kHz 100 kHz
frequency
Maximum OFF→ON 0.1 μs 1.5 μs
Response
time ON→OFF 0.1 μs 1.5 μs

Weight 120 g
Note *1: Acutal output 4 VDC (high input impedance) to 3.3 VDC (10 mA)/point
2-51
2.6.2 Positioning Module Profiles

 AS02PU-A / AS04PU-A
38.2 95
1
7
7
2_
2
98 .3
88
3
8
2
4
9
5
6 75
35

POWER LED indicator
ON: the power is on
(Blue)
OFF: no power
Run LED indicator
ON: the module is running and ready to accept instructions.
(Green)
OFF: the module is stopped and can NOT accept instrucitons.
2
Error LED indicator OFF: the module is normal.
(Red) Blinking (0.2 seconds ON/OFF): hardware error occurs in the
module, can NOT operate normally
Input LED indicator ON: Receives an input signal
(Red) OFF: Receives no input signal
Output LED indicator ON: Receives an output signal
(Red) OFF: Receives no output signal
3
Arrangement of the
8 Ground clip On the DIN reail for grounding
9 Label Nameplate
2-52
2.6.3 Positioning Module Terminals

AS02PU-A AS04PU-A
02PU 04PU
_2
IN IN IN OUT
A+ A- C0
B+ B- PWR 0 PWR
Z+ Z- RUN 0 1 RUN
ERR ERR
0 A 1 2 0
B 1
1 2 Z 2 3 2
IN
0 3
3 4 3 C1
IN 1 4
OUT OUT
2
0+ 0- 4 4
5
1+ 1- 3 0
5 5
4 1
2+ 2- ●
6 2
3
3+ 3- OUT
0 ●
7 4
1 5
OUT
2 6
3 7
AS02PU-A AS04PU-A
Wordings with the same indications that are used Wordings with the same indications that are used
on the terminal block and manual on the terminal block and manual
Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal

Manual Block Manual Block Manual Block Manual Block
(left) (right) (left) (right)
A+ A+ A- A- S/S S/S C0 C0
B+ B+ B- B- S/S S/S Y0.0 0
Z+ Z+ Z- Z- X0.0 0 Y0.1 1
S/S S/S X0.0 0 X0.1 1 Y0.2 2
X0.1 1 X0.2 2 X0.2 2 Y0.3 3
X0.3 3 X0.4 4 X0.3 3 C1 C1
Y0.0+ 0+ Y0.0- 0- X0.4 4 Y0.4 4
Y0.1+ 1+ Y0.1- 1- X0.5 5 Y0.5 5
Y0.2+ 2+ Y0.2- 2-  Y0.6 6
Y0.3+ 3+ Y0.3- 3-  Y0.7 7
2-53
2.7 Counter Module Specifications

Item Description
Number of channels 2
Input signal type Phase differential (A/B): x2, x4; CW/CCW; Pulse/Direction
Pulse Input
Max. transmission
distance
200 kHz at 30 m 2_
Counter type Circular counter, linear encoder
32-bit (The single-turn, multi-turn, and status data length can
Max. data length
be set.)
Coding method Binary code, gray code
SSI Input Max. transmission 250 kHz at 150 m, 500 kHz at 50 m, 625 kHz at 40 m,
distance 1 MHz at 20 m, 1.25 MHz at 10 m
Parity check bit None, odd parity, even parity
Counter type Circular counter, absolute counter
Counting range -2147483648 ~ 2147483647 (32-bit)
Reset, preset, gate, capture,
Counter control
offset correction for absolute position
Counter Direction to count, counting overflow/underflow, linear
counting beyond the lower and upper limit values, SSI
Output state check feedback, SSI position exceeding the protection limit, SSI
parity checking, SSI communication status, a zero point is
set beyond SSI encoder resolution
Input point 2 (one for each channel)
Function Reset, gate, capture
External input
Digital filtering OFF, 100 μs, 200 μs to 20 ms
point (phase Z)
Min. software interrupt
20 μs (hardware response time included)
response time
External output Output point 4
point Output type NPN transistor (sinking)
General comparison output instruction, table comparision
Comparison Instruction
output instruction
function
Interrupt Using comparision to achieve the interrupt function
Measurement Measured item Input frequency and revolution
function Average times 1 to 10 times
2-54
Electrical specifications for the inputs
Model
Pulse input External input
Item
Number of inputs 4 (A+/B+, A-/B-) 2 (Z+/Z-)
Connector type D-sub 15
Input current 5-24 VDC, 6-15 mA
OFF→ON 3V
_2 Action
level ON→OFF 1V
Maximum input
200 kHz 20 kHz
frequency
Input impedance 4.7 kΩ
Input signal Signal signal: 5 – 24 VDC (sinking or sourcing) ; differential signal: 5 V
Weight 138 g
Electrical specifications for the SSI input and output
Model
SSI input SSI output
Item
Number of inputs /
2 (DATA+/DATA-) 2 (CLK+/CLK-)
outputs
Voltage / Current 5 VDC, 1 mA 5 VDC, ±60 mA (max.)
Action OFF→ON VID*1 ≧ 0.2V -

level ON→OFF VID ≦ 0.2V -
Maximum
input/output 1.25 MHz
frequency
Input impedance 12 kΩ (terminal resistor 120 Ω) -
Input signal RS-422
*1: VID is the voltage difference between DATA+ and DATA-.
2-55
Electrical specifications for the external outputs
Model
AS02HC-A
Item
Number of outputs 4
Ouptut type NPN transistor (sinking)
Voltage 5 – 30 VDC 2_
Minimum load 1 mA / 5 VDC
Resistance 0.1A/output
Maximum load Inductance -
Bulb -
Maximum
output Resistance 10 kHz
frequency*1
Maximum OFF→ON
25 μs
Response time ON→OFF
Electrical specifications for the +5 V encoder power supply
Model
AS02HC-A
Item
Number of outputs 2 (+5 VO/GND)
Voltage / Current 5 VDC (±5%), ±100 mA (max.)
2-56
2.7.2 Counting Module Profiles

7 5
1
5
98.3
_2
88
2
6
4 75
35

POWER LED indicator
ON: the power is on
(Blue)
OFF: no power
Error LED indicator ON: a serious error occurs in the module.
(Red) OFF: the module is normal.
2 Counting status of the module
OFF: the counter is disabled.
Counter LED indicator
ON: the counter is enabled but the result of counting is not changed.
for Ch1 Act. & Ch2 Act.
Blinking: the result of counting is updating.
(Green)
When SSI input:
Blinking: the counter is enabled and the position value is updating.
Input / output LED ON: Receives an input / output signal
indicator OFF: Receives no input / output signal
Input: connected for pulse input and encoder
3 D-sub 15 Output: connected to loads to be driven
Power: providing external encoder +5 VDC
6 Ground clip On the DIN reail for grounding
7 Label Nameplate
2-57
2.7.3 Counting Module Terminals
Pin No. CH1 CH2

02HC
CH1 8 A1+ A2+
3 A1- A2-
2_
PWR
7 B1+ B2+
ERR
CH1 Act.
CH1 A
2 B1- B2-
CH1 B
CH2
CH1 Z
6 Z1+ Z2+
Y0.0
Y0.1
CH2 Act.
1 Z1- Z2-
CH2 A
CH2 B
CH2 Z
Y0.2
Y0.3
10 CLK1+ CLK2+
5 CLK1- CLK2-
9 DATA1+ DATA2+
D-sub15 pin
4 DATA1- DATA2-
14 +5VO1 +5VO2
15
5
10
15 GND1 GND2
12 Y0.0 Y0.2
11
1
6
11 Y0.1 Y0.3
13 COM0 COM1
2-58
2.8 Network Module Specifications

 AS00SCM-A
RS-485/RS-422/RS-232 communication interface
Item Specifications
Connector type
_2 European-style terminal block, spring-clamp terminal block
Electronical isolation 500 VAC
Stop bit: 1 stop bit or 2 stop bits
Communication
Parity bit: none, an odd parity bit, or an even parity bit
format
Data bit: 7 data bits or 8 data bits
Communication
CAN
protocol
CAN communication interface
Item Specifications
Connector type RJ-45
Transmission speed 10K, 20K, 50K, 125K, 250K, 500K, 1000 Kbps
Communication AS special remote mode (for RTU mode)
protocol CANopen (available for models with firmware V2.0 or later)
Ethernet communication interface
Item Specifications
Connector type RJ-45
Transmission speed 10M, 100 Mbps
Communication EtherNet/IP (available for models with firmware V2.02 or later),
protocol PROFINET (available for models with firmware V2.06 or later)
Item Specifications
Supply voltage 24 VDC
Electric energy
0.6 W
consumption
Weight 169 g
2-59
 AS01DNET-A
CAN communication interface
Item Specifications
Connector type Removable terminal blocks (enclosed with fastening screws, 5.08 mm )
Transmission cables Communication cable *2, power cable *2, shield cable *1
2_
Communication
DeviceNet
protocol
Communication interface
Item Specifications
Data type I/O polling, explicit message
Standard mode: 125K, 250K, 500Kbps
Transmission speed Extension mode: 10K, 20K, 50K, 125K, 250K, 500K, 1000K, 800Kbps and 1M
bps
Item Specifications
Voltage 11~25 VDC supplied by power cable of the network
Current Ttypical value: 28 mA; rush current: 125 mA (24 VDC)
2-60
 AS04SIL-A
Unit Specifications
Item Specifications
Model type IO-Link master

Model name AS04SIL-A
Number of ports
_2 4
Baud rate 4.8 kbps；38.4 kbps；230.4 kbps
Topology 1:1
Communication
Compliant  IO-Link Interface and System Specification Version 1.1.2
standards  IO-Link Test Specification Version 1.1.2
IO-Link Yes
Modes SIO (DI) Yes
SIO (DO) Yes, up to 100 mA / channel
Cyclic communications 2 ms min. ; dynmatic, according to the valid data length
Input: data size in each
32 bytes max.
communication port
Output: data size in each
32 bytes max.
communication port
Input: data size in each module 128 bytes max.
Output: data size in each module 128 bytes max.
Input PDO data size 100 words max.
Output PDO data size 100 words max.
Back up Yes
Type Unshielded (can also apply to shielded ones)
Length 20 m max.
Electrostatic
Cable specification capacity 3 nF max.
between lines
Loop
6 Ω max.
resistance
External connection terminals Clamping terminal block
2-61
Item Specifications
Rated voltage 24 VDC (20.4 VDC~ 28.8 VDC) (9-15%~+20%)

Power supply to
device in IO-Link Maximum load
0.2A/port
mode or SIO (DI) current
mode Short-circuit 2_
Yes
protection
Internal I/O
NPN, PNP
common
Input voltage /
24 VDC, 5 mA
Digital inputs in current
SIO (DI) mode ON voltage >15 VDC
OFF voltage <5 VDC
No filter, 1 ms (default), 2 ms, 4 ms, 8 ms, 16 ms, 32 ms, 64 ms,
Input filter time
128 ms, 256 ms
Internal I/O
NPN, PNP
common
Output voltage /
24 VDC (20.4 VDC~ 28.8 VDC), 0.1A/port
current
Digital outputs in
Short-circuit
SIO (DO) mode Yes
protection
Leakage current <0.1 mA
Residual
<1.5 VDC
voltage
Internal I/O
NPN, PNP
common
Input voltage /
Digital inputs for 24 VDC, 2 mA
current
pin 2 in IO-Link
ON voltage >15 VDC
mode
OFF voltage <5 VDC
No filter, 1 ms (default), 2 ms, 4 ms, 8 ms, 16 ms, 32 ms, 64 ms,
Input filter time
128 ms, 256 ms
Power consumption 0.8 W
Weight 133g
2-62
2.8.2 Network Module Profiles

 AS00SCM-A
1 SCM
PO WER
7 ER RO R
7
2 CA RD 1
CA RD 2
_2
98 .3
ID 1
88
3
FOR M AT 1
4
8
ID 2
9 5
F OR MA T 2
C OM . RTU
6 75
10 56
Unit: mm
POWER LED indicator ON: The power is on
OFF: No power or the power is low
ERROR LED indicator OFF: The module is normal.
Blinking: Error occurs now or error had occurred before
2
Extension card 1
Blinking: Communication is taking place in card 1
indicator
OFF: No communication in card 1
(orange)
Extension card 2
Blinking: Communication is taking place in card 2
indicator
OFF: No communication in card 2
(orange)
Address and function
3 2 sets for setting up the address and function in card 1 and 2
setting knobs
Slot of function card 1 COM mode: Available for AS-F232, AS-F422, AS-F485
COM mode: Available for AS-F232, AS-F422, AS-F485,
4
Slot of function card 2 AS-FCOPM
RTU mode: AS-FCOPM, AS-FEN02, AS-FPFN02
5 Mode switch COM: Serial communication mode; RTU: remote module mode
8 Ground clip
9 Label Nameplate
Input for supplying power
10 Power supply for the remote module (NOT for COM mode)
to remote modules
2-63
 AS01DNET-A
2_
Unit: mm

Master/slave mode:
 NS LED
OFF: no power or duplicate ID check has not been
completed.
Green light blinking every 0.5 seconds: the connection
to the DeviceNet network failed.
Green light ON: online; the connection to the DeviceNet
network is normal.
Red light blinking every 0.5 seconds: communication
error
Red light ON: Network trouble, duplicate node ID, no
network power or Bus-OFF.
 MS LED
OFF: no power
Green light blinking every 0.5 seconds: no module is
configured.
2 State LED indicator
Green light ON: input and output data are normal.
Red light blinking every 0.5 seconds: when AS01DNET
works as the master, the slave in Scan List can not work
normally. When AS01DNET works as the slave, an error
occurs in the configuration.
Red light ON: hardware error
 Combination of NS LED and MS LED

NS LED OFF & MS LED OFF: no power
NS LED OFF & MS LED green light ON: duplicate ID
check has not been completed.
NS LED red light ON & MS LED green light ON: duplicate
ID check failed or Bus-OFF.
NS LED red light ON & MS LED red light blinking every
0.5 seconds: no network power
NS LED red light ON & MS LED red light ON: hardware
error
2-64

RTU mode:
 NS LED
OFF: no power or duplicate ID check has not been
completed.
Green light blinking every 0.5 seconds: the connection
to the DeviceNet network failed.
Green light ON: online; the connection to the DeviceNet
_2 network is normal.
Red light blinking every 0.5 seconds: I/O connection
timeout between AS01DNET (RTU) and DeviceNet master
Red light ON: Network trouble, duplicate node ID, no
network power or Bus-OFF.
 MS LED
OFF: no power
Green light blinking every 0.5 seconds:
- AS01DNET (RTU) is waiting for the I/O data from
DeviceNet master.
- No I/O data transmission between AS01DNET(RTU) and
DeviceNet master
- The PLC connected to DeviceNet master is in STOP state.
Green light ON: normal transmission of I/O data between
AS01DNET (RTU) and DeviceNet master
Red light blinking every 0.5 seconds: no network power
supply; configuration error; module alarms.
Red light ON: hardware error
3 Address switch Setting up the address
Setting up the funcitons, including the work mode and baud rate
4 Function switch of
DeviceNet network
DeviceNet communication Connects the modules via DeviceNet communication.
5
port Use AS01DNET-A connector for wiring.
Master/Slave mode: the port does not need an external
Mode switch 24VDC power supply connected
6 (RTU/DNET; RTU mode: the power input port of the network module is
Master/Slave) required to connect an external 24VDC power supply only.
You can connect
7 Left-side extension port Connects the modules
8 Label Nameplate
9 Right-side extension port Connects the modules
Input for supplying power
10 Power supply for the remote module
to remote modules
2-65
 AS04SIL-A
38.2 95
04 SI L 1
7
7
CQ 1 L1+
PWR
DI 1 L1-
CQ2 L2+ MS 2
2_
98.3
NS
88
DI2 L2- C1
Q1
CQ3 L3+
E1
C2
3
DI3 L3 -
Q2
CQ4 L4+ E2
DI4 L4- C3
Q3
4
●
24 V E3
C4
0V Q4
8
E4
5
6 75
35
Unit: mm
OFF: no power or the power is low
OFF: The module is normal.
Module LED indicator Blinking:
 Module setting or communication error (blinks every 1 second)
 Hardware or low power error (blinks every 0.2 second)
Error status of the network
ON: No external power supply
Network LED indicator Blinking: Scanning is under going or the module is configured and the
diagnosis is done.
2
OFF: The module is configured but the diagnosis has not done yet.
IO-Link connection status of each communication port
ON: The communication port is in IO-Link mode and a device is
C1, C2, C3, C4 LED connected.
indicator (orange) Blinking: The communication port is in IO-Link mode but no device is
connected or thhe device connected is not configured.
OFF: The communication port is disabled or in SIO mode.
Indicates the status of input / output in SIO mode
Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 LED ON: The input/output is working in SIO mode.
indicator (orange)
OFF: The communication port is disabled or in IO-Link mode.
Indicates if any warning or error occurs in the IO-Link connection
E1, E2, E3, E4 LED
Blinking: A warning or error occurs
indicator (red) OFF: No warnings or errors
Removable terminal
3 IO-Link
block
Arrangement of the
8 Label Nameplate
2-66
2.9 Load Cell Module Specifications

 AS02LC-A
Item Description
Rated supply voltage/Power
24 VDC (-15 to +20%) / 5W
consumption
_2 Minimum/maximum voltage 18~31.2VDC
Maximum current consumption 150 mA
Input signal range ±40mVDC
Sensibility +5 VDC +/-10%
ADC resolution 24 bits
Highest precision 0.04%
Applicable sensor type Four-wire or six-wire load cell
Expanding a temperature
≤ ± 50 ppm/K v. E
coefficient
Reducing a temperature
≤ ± 0.4 μV/K
coefficient to zero
Linearity error ≤ 0.02%
Response time 2.5, 10, 16, 20, 50, 60, 100, 200, and 400ms
Eigenvalue applicable to a load
0–1, 0–2, 0–4, 0–6, 0–20, 0–40 and 0–80 mV/V
cell
Maximum distance for
100 meters
connecting a load cell
Maximum output current 5 VDC * 160 mA
Allowable load 40–4,010 Ω
Common-mode rejection ratio
≥100 dB
(CMRR @50/60 Hz)
Dynamic range K1–K5
Averaging weights K1–K100
Between a digital circuit and the ground: 500 VAC
Isolation Between an analog circuit and the ground: 500 VAC
Between an analog circuit and a digital circuit: 500 VAC
Weight 140 g
2-67
2.9.2 Load Cell Module Profiles

 AS02LC-A
38.2 95
1
7 7
2_
2
98.3
88
3
4
9
5
6 75
35
Unit: mm

OFF: no power
Analog to digital
3
Arrangement of the
8 Ground clip
9 Label Nameplate
2-68
2.9.3 Load Cell Module Dimensions

 AS02LC-A
02LC
_2
EX C+ EX C -
SI G+ SI G -
C H1
SE N+ SE N-
SL D
EX C+ EX C-
SI G+ SI G-
C H2
SE N+ SE N-
SL D
2 4V
0V
Unit: mm
2-69
2.10 Extension Card Specifications

 AS-F2AD
Two DC analog signal input channels:
Item Voltage Input Current Input

2_
Rated Input Range 0 V - 10 V 4 mA - 20 mA

Digital Conversion
0 - 4000 0 - 2000
Range
Hardware Input 4mA ~ 20.37mA (FW V1.00)
0V ~ +10.24V
Limit*1 3.63mA ~ 20.37mA (FW V1.20 or later)
Digital Conversion 0 ~ 2047 (FW V1.00)
0 ~ 4095
Limit*2 - 48 ~ 2047(FW V1.20 or later)
Error Rate room temperature: ±0.5% ; full temperature range: ±1.0%
Isolation The isolation between digital and analog is 500 VAC; no isolation between channels.
Input Impedance 2 MΩ 250 Ω
Conversion Time*3 3 ms / CH
2000
Digital Value O utput
4000
Digital Value Output
Characteristic
Curve
0 10V 4 20mA
Voltage input Curr ent input
Digital Value Card 1 SR168 (CH1), SR169 (CH2)

Output*4 Card 2 SR170 (CH1), SR171 (CH2)
*1: The input signal should NOT exceed the limit. If exceeding the limit, damage may occur.
signal is below the lower limit, it only shows the minimum value. If the input signal exceeds the hardware input
limit, it also exceeds the digital conversion limit and a conversion limit error appears. For example in the
current input mode (4 mA to 20 mA), when the input signal is 0 mA, exceeding the hardware lower limit, it also
exceeds the conversion lower limit. The module uses the lower limit value (-48) as the input signal. If a
disconnected analysis is required, you can check if the digital conversion value is -48.
*3: The conversion time is the time for each channel to convert signals to hardware input signals. If you need
to calculate a complete conversion time, you need to add the PLC scan time.
*4: Use the program to read the values in SR to obtain the corresponding A/D conversion value for the
channel.
*5: Refer to section 2.2.16 SM/SR notes for more information on descriptions of SM27/SR27 analog input
error codes.
2-70
 AS-F2DA
Two DC analog signal output channels:
Item Voltage Output Current Output
Analog Signal 0 V - 10 V 4 mA - 20 mA

Digital Conversion
_2 Limit 0 - 4000 0 - 4000
Error Rate room temperature: ±0.5% ; full temperature range: ±1.0%
Isolation The isolation between digital and analog is 500 VAC; no isolation between channels.
Impedance
≥1 kΩ ≤500 Ω
Allowance
Conversion Time*1 2ms / CH

10V 20mA
Voltage Output
Curr ent Output

Characteristic
Curve
4
0 4000 4000
Digital Value Input
Di gital Value Input
Digital Value Card 1 SR172 (CH1) SR173 (CH2)

Output*2 Card 2 SR174 (CH1) SR175 (CH2)
*1: The conversion time is the time for each channel to convert signals to hardware input signals. If you need
to calculate a complete conversion time, you need to add the PLC scan time.
*2: Use the MOV instruction to move the value to the SR to obtain the corresponding voltage output value.
 AS-F232
The AS series PLC is built with COM1 (RS-485), and COM2 (RS-485). You can use this extension card for
communication with different interfaces such as RS-232 and a PC. The communication functions and isolation
levels are the same as the PLU CPU built-in ones. It can be used in slave or master mode. After installing the
extension card, go to the HWCONFIG in the ISPSoft for communication setup.
 Wiring example
AS-F232
(DB9 female) + + Superior
machine
DB9 male to DB9 female (standard cable)
2-71
 AS-FCOPM
With its own standalone communication port, the extension card can work independently and can act as a
master or a sloave. After installing the extension card, go to the HWCONFIG in ISPSoft to set up the
communication.
 Wiring example
Master node Slave node Slave node 2_

CAN _H CAN _L GND CAN _H CAN _L GND GND CAN _H CAN _L
Terminal Terminal
resistor Shielded resistor
(120 ohm) cable (120 ohm)
 AS-F422
You can use this extension card for communication with Delta HMI series or other devices through the RS-422
communication port. You can use this extension card for communication with different interfaces such as RS-
232 and a PC. The communication functions and isolation levels are the same as the PLU CPU built-in ones.
It can be used in slave or master mode. After installing the extension card, go to the HWCONFIG in the
ISPSoft for communication setup.
 Wiring example of the communication with Delta HMI DOPA series via COM2
AS-F422 Delta HMI DOPA series

1 R+ Tx+ 3 6 RT S-
2 R- Tx- 4 7 RT S+
3 T+ Rx+ 2 8
4 T- Rx- 1 9 CT S+
CT S-
COM2/DB-9
 AS-F485
With its own standalone communication port, the extension card can work independently. You can use this
extension card for communication with different interfaces such as RS-232 and a PC. The communication
functions and isolation levels are the same as the PLU CPU built-in ones. It can be used in slave or master
mode. After installing the extension card, go to the HWCONFIG in the ISPSoft for communication setup.
 Wiring example
Master node Slave node Slave node
D+ D- SG D+ D- SG SG D+ D-
Terminal Terminal
resistor resistor
(120 ohm) (120 ohm)
Shielded Shielded
cable cable
2-72
 AS-FEN02
With its own standalone communication port, the extension card can work independently and can be set as a
MODBUS TCP server, Client or EtherNet/IP Adapter. After installing the extension card, go to the HWCONFIG
in ISPSoft to set up the communication.
Item Specifications
_2 Connector type RJ-45*2
Transmission speed 10/100BASE-T (X) full duplex, switched Ethernet
Cable CAT5e (up to 100 m)
Communication protocol Modbus TCP Server, Client and EtherNet/IP Adapter
Isolation 1500 VAC
 AS-FOPC02
Modbus TCP Server and OPC UA Server. After AS-FOPC02 is installed on the PLC, you need to go to
HWCONFIG to edit the parameters.
Item Specifications
Connector type RJ-45*2
Communication protocol Modbus TCP Server and OPC UA Server
Isolation 1500 VAC
 AS-FPFN02
PROFINET slave to connect to PROFINET network and exchange data with PROFINET master. After
installing the extension card, go to the PROFINET Configurator to set up the communication and download
the configurations to the master and then the master sends the configurations to the function card.
Item Specifications
Connector type RJ-45*2
Communication protocol PROFINET RT
Isolation 1500 VAC
2-73
2.10.2 Extension Card Profiles

 AS-F2AD/AS-F2DA/AS-F422/AS-F485
1 5
2_
59.3
37 60.8 23.9
Unit: mm
Pin no. AS-F2AD AS-F2DA AS-F422 AS-F485
1 V1+ VO1 R+ -
2 I1+ IO1 R- -
3 V2+ VO2 T+ D+
4 I2+ IO2 T- D-
5 COM COM SG SG
 AS-F232/AS-FCOPM
AS-F232 AS-FCOPM
6 9
5
8 7 6 54 3 21
1
8 1
61.3
66.3
59.3
59.3
37 23.9 37 23.9
Unit: mm
Pin no. AS-F232 AS-FCOPM
1 - CAN_H
2 TX CAN_L
3 RX GND
4 - -
5 GND -
6-9 - -
2-74
 AS-FEN02
42 25.2
1
2
88
_2 4
3
61.5 6

Indicates if the module has been set
ON: the setting is complete
1 MS indicator
Blinking: the setting is not complete
OFF: no power
Indicates the status of Ethernet connection
Green lignt ON: a CIP connection is established
Green lignt BLINKING: a CIP connection is not established
2 NS indicator Red light ON: duplicated IP address
Red light BLINKING: communication timeout / DLR conection
lost / IP address change
OFF: no power / network cable is not connected
3 RJ-45 port X1/X2 Use for network connections
Indicate the status of Ethernet connection
4 LINK indicator X1/X2 Green light ON: a network connection is established
OFF: a network connection is not established
Indicate the status of Ethernet communication
5 ACT indicator X1/X2 Orange BLINKING: data transmission
OFF: no data transmission
6 Clip ring Secures AS series
RJ-45 Pin Definition

1 TX+ 2 TX- 3 RX+ 4 N/C
5 N/C 6 RX- 7 N/C 8 N/C
2-75
 AS-FPFN02
42 25.2
1
2
88
3 2_
4
61.5 6

System Fail Indicator
Red light ON: an error occurs in the system
1 SF indicator Example: the parameters downloaded to the Controller are different from
the actual placement, connecting port 2, instead of connecting to port 1
OFF: no system error
Bus Fail Indicator
Red light ON: the connection with PROFINET Controller is OFF.
2 BF indicator Red light BLINKING: the connection is working fine but the communication
with PROFINET Controller is NOT normal.
OFF: the connection with PN-Controller is working fine.
3 RJ-45 port X1/X2 Uses for network connections
Indicates the status of Ethernet connection
4 LINK indicator X1/X2 Green light ON: a network connection is established
OFF: a network connection is not established
Indicates the status of Ethernet communication
5 ACT indicator X1/X2 Orange BLINKING: data transmission
OFF: no data transmission
6 Clip ring Secures AS series
RJ-45 Pin Definition

1 TX+ 2 TX- 3 RX+ 4 N/C
5 N/C 6 RX- 7 N/C 8 N/C
2.10.3 Function Card Weights

AS-
AS- AS- AS- AS- AS- AS- AS- FEN02 /
F2AD F2DA F422 F485 F232 FCOPM FEN02 AS-
FOPC02
Weight 30 g 30 g 22 g 29 g 26 g 29 g 51 g 51 g
2-76
2.11 Power Supply Module Specifications

 AS-PS02/AS-PS02A
Item Specifications
100–240 VAC (-15% to +10%)
Supply voltage
50/60 Hz±5%
_2 Action If the input power supply is larger than 85 VAC, the power supply module can
specifications function normally.
Allowable
If the instantaneous power failure time is less than ten milliseconds, the power
instantaneous
supply module keeps running.
power failure time
Fuse 2.5A/250 VAC
Inrush current ＜70A@115 VAC
AS-PS02: 2 A for internal use: the CPU and the modules.
24 VDC output AS-PS02A: 1.5 A for internal use: the CPU and the modules;
0.5 A for external use.
The 24 VDC output is equipped with the short circuit protection and the
Power protection
overcurrent protection.
1,500 VAC (Primary-secondary),
Electronical
1,500 VAC (Primary-PE),
isolation
500 VAC (Secondary-PE)
Above 5 MΩ
Insulation voltage
The voltage between all inputs/outputs and the ground is 500 VAC.
The diameter of the ground should not be less than the diameters of the
Ground
cables connected to the terminals L and N.
AS-PS02 270 g
Weight
AS-PS02A 310 g
2-77
 AS-PS03C
Item Specifications
100–240 VAC (-15% to +10%)
Supply voltage
50/60 Hz±5%
Action If the input power supply is larger than 85 VAC, the power supply module can
specifications function normally.
Allowable
If the instantaneous power failure time is less than ten milliseconds, the power
2_
instantaneous
supply module keeps running.
power failure time
Fuse 5 A / 250 VAC
Inrush current ＜50A typ. @230 VAC
24 VDC output 3 A for internal use: the CPU and the modules.
The 24 VDC output is equipped with the short circuit protection and the
Power protection
overcurrent protection.
3,000 VAC (Primary-secondary),
Electronical
2,500 VAC (Primary-PE),
isolation
500 VAC (Secondary-PE)
Above 5 MΩ
Insulation voltage
The voltage between all inputs/outputs and the ground is 500 VAC.
The diameter of the ground should not be less than the diameters of the
Ground
cables connected to the terminals L and N.
Weight 310 g
2.11.2 Power Supply Module Profiles

 AS-PS02
POWER
1
P S 02 2
98.3
3
88
IN PUT
L
N
4
LG WAR NIN G
4
Ri sk o f e lect rical shock.
Wai t 5 seconds a f ter removing
power bef ore servi ci ng.
70 75
74.2 91.5
77.9
2-78
 AS-PS02A
POWER
1
PS02A 2
98.3
88 3
+2 4 V
O UT P UT
24G
_2 L IN PU T
N 4
LG WA RN IN G 4
Ris k o f e le c tr ic al s h oc k.
Wa it 5 s e co nd s a f te r r e m o vi ng
po w er b ef o re s er v icin g .
70 75
74.2 91.5
77.9

POWER LED
1 Indicates the status of the power supply
indicator (green)
2 Model name Model name of the power supply module
+24V: connecting external 24VDC +
24G: connecting external 24G
Arrangement of the
3 LG: Line ground
terminals
L: AC power input (Line)
N: AC power input (Neutral)
4 Power output Connected with AS series
2-79
2.11.3 AS-PS03C Communication Formats and Station ID Setups

AS-PS03C supports Modbus communication protocol. You can read the power status, working hours and so
forth by connecting through the RS-485 port. There are three methods to set up the communication format
and station ID. All the methods for setting up the communication formats and station IDs are involved with the
16-way knobs on the device. See the detailed descriptions below.
Setting value for the 2_

16-way knob Modbus Station ID Communication Format Delay Time (ms)
(decimal format)*1
00 (0) Previous saved settings Previous saved settings Previous saved settings
1~247
01-F7 (1-247) Same as the settings by 16- Previous saved settings Previous saved settings
way knob on the device
F8-FD (248-253) Reserved Reserved Reserved
FE (254) 247 ASCII/9600/8/N/1 10
FF (255) 247 ASCII/9600/7/E/1 10
Note: the value of the 16-way knobs is a combination of two knobs: 161 x setting value + 160 x setting value.
For example, if the setting value in 161 is F, and the setting value in 160 is E, the value in 16-way knob is 254 =
F x 161 + E x 160.
 Use hardware to set up
Set the 16-way knobs to FE (254) or FF (255). This way of setting is only availbe for applicaiton of one adapter
(slave). And you can only work with the default communication format and station ID, but this is very useful
when it is your first time to use this device.
 Use software to set up
Before using this method to set up, you need to know the current communication settings in AS-PS03C and
make sure the communication settings of PLC CPU are the same as the settings in AS-PS03C. If you do not
know the current communication settings in AS-PS03C, you can use the two 16-way knobs to read the
settings and then use software to set up. Free Modbus protocol software can be found on the internet.
Step 1: Set the 16-way knobs to 0 (0).
Step 2: Through PLC CPU to change the setting values in Modbus (0x33~0x37 in hexadecimal format). Refer
to the following Modbus addresses for more information.
Step 3: Through PLC CPU to set the setting values in Modbus (0x38 in hexadecimal format) to 2 to confirm
and save the above settings.
Step 4: If the communication format or other communicational related settings are changed, be sure to change
the PLC CPU settings to be the same as the settings in AS-PS03C.
 Use both hardware and software to set up

Step 1: First, use software to set up the communication format as the previous method showed. If using the
default values, this step can be skipped.
Step 2: Set the 16-way knobs to 01-F7 (1-247).
After that instead of going through the communication set up, you can use the 16-way knobs to change the
station ID directly. For an easier setup, use the default communication format (ASCII/9600/7/E/1) to complete
the multiple connections of AS-PS03C.
2-80
 Modbus Addresses
Address
Hex- Data
Decimal Function Setting Value Default Unit Attr. Retainable
decimal type
format
format
Bit0: True = OVP alarm
(over voltage protection)
_2 Bit1: True = OCP alarm
(over current protection)
Bit2: True = OTP alarm
(over temperature
protection)
Bit3: True = UVP alarm (under
voltage protection)
Bit4: True = ambient
temperature continues to
40001 0x0000 Module status WORD exceed alarm (>30 min.) 0 - R N
Bit5~7: Reserved
Bit8: True = Approaching the
end of its life cycle
(suggested to change for
a new one)
Bit9: True = Approaching 50%
of the end of its life cycle
Bit10~14: Reserved
Bit15: True = Enter safety
mode (Power-off and
then power-on again)
40002 0x0001 Output voltage INT 0~28000 0 mV R N
40003 0x0002 Output current INT 0~10000 0 mA R N
Output courrent
40004 0x0003 INT 0~10000 0 mA R N
(peak value)
Continuous
40005 0x0004 working hours
(Low Word)
DINT 0~26280000 0 Min R N
Continuous
(High Word)
Accumulated
(Low Word)
DINT 0~876000 0 Hr R Y
Accumulated
(High Word)
Estimated
40009 0x0008 INT 0~1000 0 0.1% R Y
lifetime
Ambient
40010 0x0009 INT -400~1000 0 0.1℃ R N
temperature
Accumulated
40011 0x000A times of Power- INT 0~32767 0 Times R Y
On
40012~ 0x000B~
Reserved - - - - - -
40032 0x001F
40033 0x0020 Accumulated INT 0~32767 0 Times R Y
2-81
Address
Hex- Data
Decimal Function Setting Value Default Unit Attr. Retainable
decimal type
format
format
times of OVP
Accumulated Times
40034 0x0021 INT 0~32767 0 R Y
times of OCP
Accumulated Times 2_
40035 0x0022 INT 0~32767 0 R Y
times of OTP
Accumulated Times
40036 0x0023 INT 0~32767 0 R Y
times of UVP
0x0024~
40037 Reserved - - - - - -
0x002F
40038 0x0030 Module name WORD 0x0001：AS-PS03C - - R Y
Firmware –
40039 0x0031 WORD - - - R Y
main version
Firmware –
40040 0x0032 WORD - - - R Y
subversion
40041 0x0033 Station ID INT 1~247 247 - R/W Y
0: Modbus ASCII
40042 0x0034 Modbus modes INT 0 - R/W Y
1: Modbus RTU
0: 1200
1: 2400
2: 4800
3: 9600
Transmission 4: 19200
40043 0x0035 INT 3 bps R/W Y
speed 5: 38400
6: 57600
7: 76800
8: 115200
9: 230400
0: 7/E/1
1: 7/E/2
2: 7/O/1
3: 7/O/2
4: 7/N/1
Communication 5: 7/N/2
40044 0x0036 INT 0 - R/W Y
format 6: 8/E/1
7: 8/E/2
8: 8/O/1
9: 8/O/2
10: 8/N/1
11: 8/N/2
Delays in
40045 0x0037 INT 0~10000 10 ms R/W Y
response time
Bit0: Reset peak value of the
output current
40046 0x0038 Actions to take WORD Bit1: Apply and save the - - R/W N
current settings
Bit2~15: Reserved
40047~ 0x0039~ Reserved - - - - - -
* R indicates read-only and W write-only.
2-82
2.12 Power Supply Module Adapter Specification

For easier wiring, this adaptor allows wiring on the bottom of the module instead of on the left-side of the
module. If you already purchased AS-PS02 or AS-PS02A, you do not need this adaptor to have an easier
wiring.
_2
75
88 18
104 26
2-83
MEMO
2_
2-84
3
Chapter 3 Installing Software
Table of Contents
3.1 Installing and Uninstalling ISPSoft .................................................... 3-2
3.1.1 Installing ISPSoft ........................................................................... 3-2
3.1.2 Uninstalling ISPSoft........................................................................ 3-9
3.2 Installing and Uninstalling COMMGR ................................................. 3-9

3.2.1 Installing COMMGR ...................................................................... 3-10
3.2.2 Uninstalling COMMGR ................................................................... 3-13
3-1
A S S e r i e s H a r d wa r e a n d O p e r a t i o n O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l
Before developing an AS Series system, install ISPSoft and COMMGR. ISPSoft is a software platform for integrating
the hardware, network configuration, and program development for a system. COMMGR functions as middleware
between a computer and devices. It functions as a communication management interface between ISPSoft and AS
Series hardware.
3.1 Installing and Uninstalling ISPSoft

 System requirements
Item System requirement
_3 Operating system Windows XP / 7 / 8 / 10
CPU Pentium 1.5 G or above
Memory 256 MB or above (512 MB or above is recommended.)
Hard disk drive Capacity : 500 MB or above
CD-ROM drive This is optional for installing ISPSoft.
Resolution: 800×600 or above

Monitor
(suggested setting: 1024x768/96 dpi)
Keyboard/Mouse A general keyboard/mouse or devices compatible with Windows
Printer A printer with a driver for Windows. This is needed to print projects.
RS-232 port For connecting to a PLC

One of them is used, but a PLC that is
USB port For connecting to a PLC
connected must have a corresponding port. (*1)
Ethernet port For connecting to a PLC
Communication
COMMGR, a communication manager, must be installed. (*2)
software
AH500 series PLCs/DVP series PLCs (exclusive of DVP-PM series PLCs)/ AS series, AC
Supported Models
motor drives: VFD with PLC built-in series, and Text panel HMI with PLC built-in series.
*1. ISPSoft supports several ways to connect a computer to a PLC. Make sure the port and the mode supported by
the PLC are correct before you connect a computer to the PLC.
*2. Please refer to section 3.2 for more information about COMMGR.
*3. The functions and specifications mentioned above are only applicable to ISPSoft version 3.00 or above. The older
versions are not equipped with complete functions.
3-2
C h a p t e r 3 I n s ta l l i n g S o ft wa r e
3.1.1 Installing ISPSoft
If an older version of ISPSoft has been installed on a computer, uninstall it before you install ISPSoft. Refer to section
3.1.2 for more information about uninstalling ISPSoft. The following are the steps to install ISPSoft.
(1) Start the Windows operating system and then install ISPSoft. You may need administrative privileges to install the
software.
(2) Put the ISPSoft CD in the CD-ROM drive, or download the installation program from the official Delta website
http://www.delta.com. Before you install the installation program downloaded from the website, you must
decompress the file.

3_
(3) Click Start, and then click Run… to open the Run window. Specify the path to the file called setup.exe in the
Open box, and then click OK. You can also double-click the setup icon to execute the installation program.
(4) When a previous version of the ISPSoft is found, click OK then Yes to uninstall that version shown in the
pop-up windows (see below).
3-3
(5) Click Install once Shield Wizard window appears.
_3
(6) The installation program detects if your computer has installed Microsoft Visual C++ 2013 or not. If not, the
following installation steps will show up. Click Install to install and after the installation is done, click Close.
3-4
(7) After the ISPSoft x.xx – Install Shield Wizard window appears, click Next.
3_
(8) Select I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next.
(9) Type the necessary information in the User Name and Organization boxes, and then click Next.
3-5
(10) Check if the installation information is correct and then click Install.
_3
(11) After ISPSoft is installed, click Finish to complete the installation.
3-6
(12) Next the HWCONFIG is about to be installed. If there is a previous version of HWCONFIG installed in your
computer. The following image appears. Click Yes to replace the previous version of HWCONFIG with a newer
version.
3_
(13) Click Install, once the installation window appears.
3-7
(14) After HWCONFIG is installed, click Finish to complete the installation.
_3
(15) After installation is done, the installation program creates shortcuts on the desktop and the Start menu. Click
Close to complete the installation.
3-8
3.1.2 Uninstalling ISPSoft
(1) Generally, you can click ISPSoft Uninstall or select Programs under Control Panel to remove the ISPSoft;
when ISPSoft Uninstall is not found, there are two methods to uninstall the software:
 Method 1: Select ISPSoft x.xx from the Windows list, click More then select Open file location.
 Method 2: Place %ProgramData%\Microsoft\Windows\Start Menu\Programs\Delta Industrial
Automation\PLC\ in the address box and press Enter. Then, double click ISPSoft x.xx file.
3_
(2) Remove the software by double-click the ISPSoft UnInstall.
3-9
(3) To uninstall ISPSoft, click Yes shown in the pop-up window. The window will automatically close once the
software is removed.
_3
3.2 Installing and Uninstalling COMMGR
3.2.1 Installing COMMGR
COMMGR is a software independent of ISPSoft. It must be installed separately. When the previous version of
COMMGR is detected in a computer, that version is advised to be uninstalled first before the latest COMMGR can be
installed.
(1) Start a computer and enter the Windows operating system. You need to log on to the system as a system
administrator before installing COMMGR.
(2) Put a COMMGR CD in the CD-ROM drive, or download the installation program from official Delta website
http://www.deltaww.com/. Before you install the program downloaded from the website, you must decompress
the file.
(3) Click Start, and then click Run… to open the Run window. Specify the path to the file called setupComm.exe in
the Open box, and then click OK. Alternatively, you can double-click the icon which is used to install COMMGR
to execute the installation program.
3-10
(4) When the previous version of COMMGR is installed, click OK to remove that version shown in the pop-up
window (see below) and when uninstall is complete, click OK again.
3_
(5) Click Next after the Setup window appears.
(6) Use default setup in the destination folder. Click Install to start the installation.
3 - 11
(7) After you install COMMGR, the installation program creates a shortcut to the program on the Start menu. Click
Finish to complete the installation.
_3
3-12
3.2.2 Uninstalling COMMGR

(1) Enter the settings of Apps & features in Windows, select COMMGR x.xx and click Uninstall.
3_
(2) Click Yes and then OK to complete COMMGR uninstallation.
3-13
MEMO
_3
3-14
4
Chapter 4 Installing Hardware and Wiring
Table of Contents
4.1 AS Series Hardware Framework ........................................................ 4-3
4.1.1 AS Series Hardware Component ...................................................... 4-3
4.2 Installation Notes .............................................................................. 4-6
4.3 Installation ........................................................................................ 4-7

4.3.1 Installing Modules in a Control Box .................................................. 4-7
4.3.2 Installing a Module ......................................................................... 4-8
4.3.3 Installing a Removable Terminal Block ............................................ 4-10
4.3.4 Changing a Module....................................................................... 4-11
4.3.5 Installing and Removing an Extension Card ..................................... 4-11
4.3.6 Installing a Wiring Module ............................................................. 4-13
4.4 Wiring.............................................................................................. 4-14
4.5 Connecting Power Cables ................................................................ 4-16

4.5.1 Precautions ................................................................................. 4-16
4.5.2 Ground ....................................................................................... 4-16
4.5.3 Wiring Power Supply Modules ........................................................ 4-17
4.5.4 Communication Port of Power Module ............................................. 4-18
4.5.5 Power Consumption ..................................................................... 4-19
4.6 Wiring CPU Modules ........................................................................ 4-21

4.6.1 Wiring AS324MT-A ....................................................................... 4-22
4.6.2 Wiring AS332P-A ......................................................................... 4-25
4.6.3 Wiring AS332T-A ......................................................................... 4-27
4.6.4 Wiring AS320P-B ......................................................................... 4-29
4.6.5 Wiring AS320T-B ......................................................................... 4-30
4.6.6 Wiring AS228P-A ......................................................................... 4-31
4.6.7 Wiring AS228R-A ......................................................................... 4-32
4.6.8 Wiring AS228T-A ......................................................................... 4-33
4.6.9 Wiring AS218PX-A / AS218RX-A / AS218TX-A ................................. 4-34
4.6.10 Wiring ........................................................................................ 4-38
4.7 Wiring Digital Input/Output Modules .............................................. 4-40

4.7.1 Wiring AS08AM10N-A ................................................................... 4-40
4.7.2 Wiring AS08AN01P-A .................................................................... 4-41
4.7.3 Wiring AS08AN01R-A ................................................................... 4-42
4.7.4 Wiring AS08AN01T-A.................................................................... 4-43
4.7.5 Wiring AS16AM10N-A ................................................................... 4-44
4.7.6 Wiring AS16AN01R-A ................................................................... 4-45
4.7.7 Wiring AS16AN01T-A.................................................................... 4-46
4.7.8 Wiring AS16AN01P-A .................................................................... 4-47
4.7.9 Wiring AS16AP11R-A .................................................................... 4-48
4.7.10 Wiring AS16AP11T-A .................................................................... 4-49
4.7.11 Wiring AS16AP11P-A .................................................................... 4-50
4.7.12 Wiring AS32AM10N-A ................................................................... 4-51
4-1
4.7.13 Wiring AS32AN02T-A .................................................................... 4-53
4.7.14 Wiring AS64AM10N-A .................................................................... 4-56
4.7.15 Wiring AS64AN02T-A .................................................................... 4-58
4.8 Wiring Digital Input/Output Terminals ........................................... 4-61

4.8.1 Wiring Digital Input Terminals ........................................................ 4-61
4.8.2 Wiring Digital Output Terminals ...................................................... 4-65
4.9 Wiring Analog Input/Output Modules ............................................. 4-69

4.9.1 Wiring AS04AD-A.......................................................................... 4-69
4.9.2 Wiring AS08AD-B.......................................................................... 4-70
4.9.3 Wiring AS08AD-C.......................................................................... 4-71
4.9.4 Wiring AS04DA-A.......................................................................... 4-72
4.9.5 Wiring AS06XA-A .......................................................................... 4-73
4.10 Wiring Temperature Measurement Modules .................................... 4-75

4.10.1 Wiring AS04RTD-A ........................................................................ 4-75
4.10.2 Wiring AS06RTD-A ........................................................................ 4-76
4.10.3 Wiring AS04TC-A / AS08TC-A ......................................................... 4-77
4.11 Wiring Positioning Modules and Counter Modules ........................... 4-78

4.11.1 Wiring AS02PU-A .......................................................................... 4-78
4.11.2 Wiring AS04PU-A .......................................................................... 4-79
4.11.3 Wiring AS02HC-A.......................................................................... 4-80
4.12 Load Cell Modules ............................................................................ 4-83

4.12.1 Wiring AS02LC-A .......................................................................... 4-83
4.13 Wiring Network Modules ................................................................. 4-84

4.13.1 AS00SCM-A ................................................................................. 4-84
4.13.2 Wiring AS00SCM-A ....................................................................... 4-84
4.13.3 AS01DNET-A ................................................................................ 4-85
4.13.4 Wiring AS01DNET-A ...................................................................... 4-86
4.13.5 AS04SIL-A ................................................................................... 4-87
4.13.6 Wiring AS04SIL-A ......................................................................... 4-87
4.14 Wiring Function Cards ..................................................................... 4-90

4.14.1 Communicational Function Card Profiles and the Pin Definitions ................
.................................................................................................. 4-90
4.14.2 Wiring the Communicational Function Cards ..................................... 4-91
4.14.3 Analog Function Card Profiles and the Pin Definitions......................... 4-93
4.14.4 Wiring AS-F2AD ............................................................................ 4-94
4.14.5 Wiring AS-F2DA ............................................................................ 4-95
4-2
C h a p t e r 4 I n s ta l l i n g H a r d wa r e a n d W i r i n g
4.1 AS Series Hardware Framework

4.1.1 AS Series Hardware Component
The AS series programmable logic controller is a medium-to-small programmable logic control (PLC). The
execution speed and memory capacity are increased. Use of function blocks is also supported. In order to meet
your more advanced application requirements, the AS series programmable logic controllers provide more
flexible system extension frameworks. Under such system frameworks, you do not need to use several CPU
modules to control the system because there are too many I/O points or the equipment is too far away. This
retains system completeness, and you can be more efficient in developing projects.
The minimum framework requirement for the AS series system is one CPU module and one power supply
module to operate the CPU module.
Power supply module + AS series PLC (AS-PS02 + AS332T-A)
4_
The following lists the limits for setting up a common framework of the AS PLC system. Exceeding any one of
the limits causes the PLC to send an error message.
Limit 1: You can connect up to 32 extension modules to the PLC, not including the power module, CPU module,
and remote module.
Limit 2: The maximum number of digital I/O points is 1024. The built-in digital I/O points of the CPU module are
included.
Limit 3: You can connect up to 16 analog modules (AD, DA, XA, RTD, TC and LC) to the PLC.
Limit 4: You can connect up to 4 communication modules (AS00SCM, AS01DNET-A, and AS04SIL-A) to the
PLC.
Limit 5: You can connect up to 8 positioning modules (AS02PU-A, AS04PU-A and AS02HC-A) to the PLC.
Limit 6: You can connect up to 15 remote modules (AS00SCM+AS-FCOPM) to the PLC. The remote modules
can work with up to eight digital/analog modules.
4-3
Limit 7: You can connect up to 15 remote modules (AS00SCM+AS-FEN02) to the PLC. The remote modules
can work with up to eight digital/analog modules.
Limit 8: You can connect up to 8 extension modules (digital modules, analog modules, temperature
measurement module, etc.) to AS01DNET-A (RTU mode).
Limit 9: You can connect remote modules to digital/analog modules (temperature measurement and load cell
modules), but not to communication or positioning modules.
4.1.1.1 Necessary Components
A complete AS Series system consists of the following four necessary components.
 Power supply module

_4
A power supply module converts alternating current to direct current or directly provides direct current. It
provides power to the modules connected to it.
POWER
POWER
PS02 PS02A
+24V
OUTPUT
24G
INPUT
L L INPUT
N N
LG WARNING LG WARNING
Risk of electrical shock. Risk of electrical shock.
Wait 10 minutes after removing Wait 5 seconds after removing
power before servicing. power before servicing.
4-4
 CPU module
A CPU module is the nucleus of a complete AS Series system. It is responsible for controlling and
managing the whole system. Delta Electronics, Inc. provides businesses with several types of CPU
modules. You can select a CPU module according to your needs.
POWER POWER
POWER
RUN RUN
RUN
ERROR
ERROR ERROR
BAT. LOW BAT. LOW BAT. LOW
COM1 COM1 COM1
COM2 COM2 COM2

AS332T 40
AS324MT 40
AS332P 40
0 8 0 8 0 8
1 9 1 9 1 9
2 10 2 10 2 10
3 11 3 11 3 11
IN IN IN
4 12 4 4 12
5 13 5 5 13
6 14 6 6 14
7 15 7 7 15
0 8 0 8 0 8
1 9 1 9 1 9
Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet
2 10 2 10 2 10
3 11 3 11 3 11
OUT OUT OUT
4 12 2 1 4 2 1 4 12 2 1
5 13 5 5 13
6 14 6 6 14
7 15 7 7 15
4_
 Communication cable
Several communication interfaces are included in a CPU module, and many types of network modules are
available. You can select a suitable communication cable according to the actual situation.
The following table lists information about communication interfaces and main applications.
Interface Connector Application
Communication Five-pin removable Computer/HMI communication/Industrial control network
port terminal block (2x RS-485)
Computer/HMI communication/Remote control/Data

Ethernet RJ45
exchange/Industrial control network
USB Mini USB Computer communication
4.1.1.2 Modules
Various kinds of modules can be purchased according to your needs. Refer to section 1.1.2 for detailed
information on the modules that can be used with your AS Series System.
 Extension module
AS Series CPU module is equipped with standard communication ports but not with other kinds of I/O
functions. If you want to use other I/O functions, you can select suitable modules according to the actual
situation.
4-5
4.2 Installation Notes

 To ensure you have sufficient installation space for AS Series System, before installation begins, be sure to
measure the size of your AS Series System and the size of the communication cable connectors and the
space between devices should also be taken into account.
 Make sure that the work environment conforms to the specifications for the products. It is necessary to
consider the basic temperature/humidity control and dust/corrosion prevention.
 Electromagnetic interference can result in system malfunction. Therefore, you must design the EMC
carefully. Refer to Appendix C in this manual for more information on EMC standards.
 If components such as screws and washers are specified in the manual, do use components conforming to
the specifications.
_4  If a cable is connected to a communication port, make sure the cable connector is properly joined to the
port on the module.
 For the installation of DIN Rail, use a 35 mm wide rail or use the one that complies with EN 60715.
35mm
4-6
4.3 Installation
4.3.1 Installing Modules in a Control Box
A PLC has to be installed in a closed control box. In order to ensure that the PLC radiates heat normally, the
space between the PLC and the control box must be larger than 50 millimeters.
＞50mm
＞50mm ＞50mm
＞50mm 4_
 Keep the PLC away from high-voltage equipment, high-voltage wires, and high-voltage motors.
 In order to prevent the PLC from overheating, please do not install the PLC vertically on the bottom or top
of the control box.
 Please install the PLC horizontally in the control box, as shown above.
 If you intend to increase the number of modules, you must leave some space for installing the modules in
the control box.
4-7
4.3.2 Installing a Module
1. Press the clip rings if they are out as the image 1 shown. Push the module to the desire position until you
hear a click to finish installation.
2. Link the I/O modules on the right side of the PLC and make sure they are hooked together. Push the
modules into the DIN rail until you hear a click.
3. After you installed the module, fasten the screws on the modules to secure the module on the DIN rail.
1 2
_4
If there is a vibration source near the installation site, install anti-vibration baffles on the sides of the AS
Series modules for better stabilization, such as the gray baffles show below.
4-8
 Install the baffles:

 Hook the baffle onto the DIN rail and press it down as the directional arrow shows below.
4_
 Use screws to secure the baffle.
a. The completed baffle installation is shown below.
4-9
4.3.3 Installing a Removable Terminal Block
Install the removable terminal block on the module as shown below.

 Installation
1. Align the terminal block at the printed circuit board, and press it into the module.
_4
 Removal
1. Pull the clips down in the direction shown by the arrow, and then pull the terminal block up
as shown below.
4-10
4.3.4 Changing a Module
1. Take the removable terminal block out of the module and pull the clip out from the DIN rail as the
image shown below.
2. Remove the module to be changed out.
3. Slide the new module in as the image shows below. 4_
4.3.5 Installing and Removing an Extension Card

A. AS-F232/AS-F422/AS-F485/AS-F2AD/AS-F2DA/AS-FCOPM
 Installation
Push the extension card into the extension card slot until you hear a click.
4 - 11
 Removal
Press the PUSH button to release the extension card and then take the extension card out.
B. AS-FEN02 / AS-FPFN02
 Installation
_4
Push the extension card into the extension card slot until you hear a click.
 Removal
Press the buttons on the upper and lower ends to release the extension card and then take the extension
card out.
4-12
4.3.6 Installing a Wiring Module
Put a communication cable in the port on a CPU module, and make sure the connector of the cable is properly
joined to the port.
 Installation
1. One side of the wiring module has to be fixed first.
2. Press the driver board in the direction indicated by arrow 1, and make sure the groove is
aligned with the DIN rail.
4_
 Removal
1. Push the wiring module in the direction indicated by arrow 1.
2. Pull the wiring module in the direction indicated by arrow 2.
4-13
4.4 Wiring
 Please pay attention to the following warnings.
 Before installing or wiring a module, you must verify that the external power supply is turned
off. If the power supply is not turned off, you may get an electric shock, or the product may be
damaged.
 After you complete installing or wiring the module, make sure that a terminal block cover is
installed on the module before turning on the power supply or operating the module. If the
terminal block cover is not installed properly, you may get an electric shock, or the module
may not operate normally.
 Be sure to connect the terminals FG and LG with protective grounding conductors. Otherwise,
you may get an electric shock, or the module may not operate normally.
_4  To ensure that a PLC is wired correctly, you must check the rated voltage of the product and
the arrangement of the terminals. If the PLC is connected to a power supply that does not
conform to the rated voltage, or the product is not wired correctly, a fire may occur, or the
product may be damaged.
 The external connections should be crimped, press-welded by specific tools, or soldered
correctly. Improper connections may result in a short circuit, fire, or malfunction.
 Tighten the terminal screws to the specified torque. If the terminal screws are loose, a short
circuit, fire, or faulty operation may occur. Tightening the terminal screws too far may cause
damage to the terminal screws or the module, resulting in a short circuit or malfunction.
 Make sure there are no foreign substances such as iron filings or wiring debris inside the
module. Foreign substances may result in a fire, damage, or malfunction.
 I/O module wiring notes
(1) Terminal definitions
◆ Two-/three-wire (passive sensor): the sensor and the system share the same power circuit.
◆ Four-wire (active sensor): the sensor uses an independent power supply and should not share the
same power circuit with the system.
(2) Terminals with insulation sleeves cannot be used as a terminal block. It is recommended that the
terminals be covered with insulation tubes.
(3) Use single-wire cables or two-wire cables with a diameter of 24 AWG to 22 AWG and with less than
1mm pin-type terminals. Only use copper conducting wires with a temperature rating of 60/75°C.
< 1m m 8-10m m 24-22AWG
4-14
(4) Keep the input cables, output cables, and power cable separate from one another.
(5) If the main circuit and the power cable cannot be separated from each other, use a shielded cable,
and ground it at the side of the I/O module. In some cases, the shielded cable can be grounded at the
opposite side.
Load through which the

Shielded cable
alternating current passes
AC power
supply
(6) If you wire a module through conduit, you must ground the conduit correctly.
(7) Keep 24 VDC input cables separate from 110 VAC input cables and 220 VDC input cables. 4_
(8) If the wiring length is more than 200 meters (656.19 feet), leakage current can result from parasitic
capacitance, and the system will not function properly.
 Power cable wiring notes
(1) Use 110 V/220 V power cable and the 24 VDC power cable with a diameter of 22-18AWG and with
less than 2 mm pin-type terminals. Be sure to twist the power cables at the terminal screws. To
prevent a short circuit from loose screws, you must use solderless terminals with insulation sleeves.
< 2mm 11-12mm 22-18AWG
(2) If cables are connected to the terminals LG and FG, you must ground the cables. Do not connect LG
and FG to any devices. If LG and FG are not grounded, the PLC will be susceptible to noise. Since
LG carries electric potential, you will get an electric shock if you touch the metal parts.
4-15
4.5 Connecting Power Cables

4.5.1 Precautions
 Connecting AC power cables
(1) The cables carrying the 110 VAC, 220 VAC, and 24 VDC should be single or two-wire cables.
(2) Do not bundle 110 VAC cable, 220 VAC cable, 24 VDC cable, the (high-voltage high-current) main
circuit, and the I/O signal cable together. The distance between adjacent cables should be more than
100 millimeters (3.94 inches).
(3) To prevent electrical surge from lightning, install a surge protector as shown below.
Surge absorber
AS Series
AC power supply Power Module
_4 100-240V
Points for attention:
1. Ground the surge protector and the PLC system.
2. Select the surge protector with a working voltage that is not less than the maximum allowable input
voltage.
4.5.2 Ground
 The diameter of the ground should not be less AS Series Another pie ce of
than the diameters of the cables connected to the Power Module eq uipment
terminals L and N.
 If using multiple pieces of equipment, use a
single-point ground. The single-poi nt ground i s better.
 If you cannot use a single-point ground, use a Another piece of
AS Series
common-point ground. Power Mod ule equipment
The common-point ground is permitted.

 Do not connect equipment ground wires together AS Seri es Another piece of
as shown on the right. Power Module equipment
T he equipment can not be grounded in this way.
4-16
4.5.3 Wiring Power Supply Modules
 Connecting an AC power cable
AS-PS02
Control Box
P S02 AS S eries
L
N
1 00~240 V LG
4_
AS-PS02A
Control Box
PS 02A A S Series 06XA
+ 24V
24G
L
N
1 00~24 0V LG
24V
0V
AS-PS03C
Control Box
AS -PS03C AS -ATXB AS Series 06XA
+24V
24G
L
N +
LG +
-
1 00~240V -
SG
24V
0V
24V 0V
4-17
*1. The live wire and the neutral wire in the AC power cable are connected to L and N on the power
supply module respectively. To prevent incorrect system operation, the ground in the AC power
cable must be connected to LG on the power supply module.
The power input is the AC input. You must pay attention to the following points when using the AS power
modules.
 The alternating-current input voltage is between 100 VAC–240 VAC. Connect the power supply to the
terminals L and N. If you connect the 110 VAC or the 220 VAC power supply to the input terminals +24V
and 24G, you will damage the PLC.
 If a power outage lasts for less than 10 milliseconds, the PLC keeps running without being affected. If the
power outage lasts longer, or if the voltage of the power supply decreases, the PLC stops running, and
there is no output. When the power supply returns to normal, the PLC resumes operating. Note that there
_4 are latched auxiliary relays and registers in the PLC when you write the program.
 Use single-wire cables or two-wire cables in a diameter of 22 AWG to 18 AWG and with less than 2 mm
pin-typed terminals. Only use copper conducting wires with a temperature rating of 60/75°C.
< 2mm 11-12mm 22-18AWG
4.5.4 Communication Port of Power Module

 AS-PS03C Wiring
Master Slave Slave

+
Terminal resistor
+
(120 ohm) - Terminal resistor

+
SG
- -
(120 ohm)
- -
SG SG
There are two sets of terminals + and – on the RS485 port of AS-PC03C; instead of connecting the signal cable
to the same terminal, connecting to the next slave can be through the terminal + and - directly. And when
AS-PS03C acts as the last slave, the terminal + and – can be used to connect to the terminal resistor.
4-18
4.5.5 Power Consumption
The following table lists the power consumption for AS Series modules.
Internal power
consumption Internal power External power
Classification Model name
consumption (W) consumption (W)
(mA)
AS332P-A 150 3.6 N/A
AS332T-A 150 3.6 N/A
AS324MT-A 150 3.6 N/A
AS320P-B 150 3.6 N/A
AS320T-B 150 3.6 N/A
AS300N-A 125 3 N/A
CPU module
AS228T-A 150 3.6 N/A
AS228P-A 150 3.6 N/A
AS228R-A 190 4.56 N/A
AS218TX-A 180 4.32 N/A
AS218PX-A 180 4.32 N/A
AS218RX-A 200 4.8 N/A
AS08AM10N-A 20 0.5 N/A 4_
AS08AN01T-A 30 0.72 N/A
AS08AN01P-A 60 1.4 N/A
AS08AN01R-A 70 1.7 N/A
AS16AM10N-A 20 0.5 N/A
AS16AP11T-A 30 0.7 N/A
AS16AP11P-A 30 0.7 N/A
Digital I/O
AS16AP11R-A 80 1.9 N/A
module
AS16AN01T-A 60 1.4 N/A
AS16AN01P-A 60 1.4 N/A
AS16AN01R-A 140 3.4 N/A
AS32AM10N-A 20 0.48 N/A
AS32AN02T-A 30 0.72 N/A
AS64AM10N-A 30 0.72 N/A
AS64AN02T-A 60 1.44 N/A
AS04AD-A 50 1.2 2.16
AS08AD-B 50 1.2 2.5
Analog I/O
AS08AD-C 50 1.2 2.5
module
AS04DA-A 50 1.2 2.64
AS06XA-A 50 1.2 2.16
AS04RTD-A 30 0.75 2
Temperature AS06RTD-A 30 0.75 2
measurement
module AS04TC-A 30 0.75 2
AS08TC-A 30 0.75 2
Load cell
AS02LC-A 30 0.75 3
module
Positioning AS02PU-A 62.5 1.5 N/A
module AS04PU-A 62.5 1.5 N/A
AS00SCM-A 25 0.6 N/A
Network
AS01DNET-A 33 0.8 N/A
module
AS04SIL-A 33 0.8 0.5
AS-F232 20 0.48 N/A
Function AS-F422 30 0.72 N/A
cards AS-F485 20 0.48 N/A
AS-FCOPM 20 0.48 N/A
4-19
Internal power
consumption Internal power External power
Classification Model name
consumption (W) consumption (W)
(mA)
AS-F2AD 15 0.36 N/A
AS-F2DA 50 1.2 N/A
AS-FEN02 50 1.2 N/A
AS-FPFN02 50 1.2 N/A
AS-FOPC02 50 1.2 N/A
_4
4-20
4.6 Wiring CPU Modules

 When you use open collector NPN/PNP outputs to activate AS300 high speed inputs, you need to
have the pull up/pull down resistor connected to X point and S/S. Only use 3 W / 470 ohm or 2 W / 1
Kohm resistors.
 When you use Push-Pull outputs to activate AS300 high speed inputs, you don’t need to use any pull
up/pull down resistor connected to X point and S/S.
Note:
 In case open collector NPN/PNP outputs are used to activate AS300 high speed inputs, you need to
have the pull up/pull down resistor connected to X point and S/S.
 In case Push-Pull outputs are used to activate AS300 high speed inputs, you don’t need to use any
pull up/pull down resistor connected to X point and S/S.
 It is recommended to use the resistor of 3W/470ohm or 2W/1Kohm.

4_
Through the following wiring you can increase the resistance of a resistor. See the illustration below for
reference.
NPN PNP
24V
S/S 24V
X
X
S/S
0V 0V
4-21
4.6.1 Wiring AS324MT-A
X0.0+ to X0.3+/X0.0- to X0.3- : Differential input

Input form
X0.4–X0.11: Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
X0.0+ to X0.3+/X0.0- to X0.3- : 5V DC, 5 mA

Input current/voltage
X0.4–X0.11: 24 VDC, 5 mA
Y0.0+ to Y0.3+/Y0.0- to Y0.3- : Differential input

Output form
Y0.0+ to Y0.3+/Y0.0- to Y0.3-: 5V DC, 20mA/output
Output current/voltage (+ and – as a group, e.g. Y0.0+ and Y0.0- is a group)
Y0.4 to Y0.11: 5 to 30V DC, 0.1A/output, 0.8A/COM
_4 40 39 S/S S/S
38 37 X0.11 X0.10
36 35 X0.9 X0.8
POWE R
RUN
34 33 X0.7 X0.6
ERROR 32 31 X0.5 X0.4
BAT. LOW
COM1 30 40 29 SG0 SG0
COM2
AS324MT
40 28 27 X0.3- X0.3+
26 25 X0.2- X0.2+
0 8
1 9 24 23 X0.1- X0.1+
2 10
3 11 22 21 X0.0- X0.0+
IN
4
20 19 C0 C0
5
6 18 17 Y0.11 Y0.10
7
0 8
16 15 Y0.9 Y0.8
Ethernet
1 9 14 2 1 13 Y0.7 Y0.6
2 10
3 11 12 11 Y0.5 Y0.4
OUT
4 2 1
5
10 9 SG1 SG1
6
8 7 Y0.3- Y0.3+
7
6 5 Y0.2- Y0.2+
4 3 Y0.1- Y0.1+
2 1 Y0.0- Y0.0+
4-22
S/ S C0
X0. 11 Y0. 11
X0 .10 Y0 .10
X0 .9 Y0 .9
X0. 8 Y0.8
X0 .7 Y0 .7
X0 .6 Y0 .6
X0 .5 Y0 .5
X0 .4 Y0 .4
Diffe re ntial AS DA - A2
Inp ut
Shi eld ed cabl e *1 10k
Shiel ded c ab le *1
5V
SG 2k
X0 .3+ Y 0.3+
4 .7 k FP
X0 .3- Y0. 3-
1 00k
5V
GN D 10k 2 k
5V
Shi elded c abl e *1 1 0k Shiel ded c ab le *1
2k
SG
X0 .2+ FP Y 0.2+
4. 7k
Y0. 2-
1 00k
X0 .2-
5 V
GN D 2 k
1 0k
5V
Shi elded c abl e *1 10k
SG
Y 0.1+
2k
4_
X0 .1+ FP
4. 7k
X0 .1- Y0. 1-
1 00k
5 V
GND 10k 2 k
5V
Shi elded c abl e *1 10 k
2k
SG
X0 .0+ FP Y 0.0+
4. 7k
X0 .0- Y0. 0-
1 00k
5 V
GN D
10k 2 k
Y0.
SG0 0- Y0.
S G10- GND
 Wiring the External Terminal Module UB-10-ID16A
X0.0+ to X0.3+/X0.0- to X0.3-: Differential input

Input form
X0.4–X0.11: Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
X0.0+ to X0.3+/X0.0- to X0.3- : 5 VDC, 5 mA

Input current/voltage
X0.4–X0.11: 24 VDC, 5 mA
Y0.0+ to Y0.3+/Y0.0- to Y0.3- : Differential input

Output form
Y0.0+ to Y0.3+/Y0.0- Y0.3-: 5 VDC, 20 mA

Output current/voltage
Y0.4–Y0.11: 5 to 30 VDC, 0.1 A
4-23
Length
19 20
39 40 #1
1 2
19 20
TB1
1 2 #2
TB2
500+10mm 1 2
-
Length:
UC-ET010-24D(1M)(28AWG)
UC-ET020-24D(2M)(28AWG)
UC-ET030-24D(3M)(28AWG)
TB1 Y0.0+ Y0.1+ Y0.2+ Y0.3+ SG1 Y0.4 Y0.6 Y0.8 Y0.10 C0
#1
TB2 Y0.0- Y0.1- Y0.2- Y0.3- SG1 Y0.5 Y0.7 Y0.9 Y0.11 C0
TB1 X0.0+ X0.1+ X0.2+ X0.3+ SG0 X0.4 X0.6 X0.8 X0.10 S/S
#2
TB2 X0.0- X0.1- X0.2- X0.3- SG0 X0.5 X0.7 X0.9 X0.11 S/S
_4
4-24
4.6.2 Wiring AS332P-A
Input current/voltage 24 VDC, 5 mA
Output form Transistor-P (souring)
Output current/voltage 5 to 30 VDC, 0.1A/output, 1.6A/COM
POWER
RUN S/S S/S
ERROR X0.15 X0.14

BAT. LOW X0.13 X0.12
COM1 X0.11 X0.10 4_
COM2 X0.9 X0.8
AS332P 40
X0.7 X0.6
X0.5 X0.4
0 8
1 9 X0.3 X0.2
2 10 X0.1 X0.0
3 11 C0 C0
IN
4 12
5 13
Y0.15 Y0.14
6 14
Y0.13 Y0.12
7 15
Y0.11 Y0.10
0 8
Y0.9 Y0.8
1 9
Ethernet
2 10
Y0.7 Y0.6
3 11 Y0.5 Y0.4
OUT
4 12 2 Y0.3 Y0.2
5 13 Y0.1 Y0.0
6 14
7 15
OUT
4-25
Input current/voltage 24 VDC. 5 mA
Output
5 to 30 VDC. 0.1A
current/voltage
Length
19 20
39 40 #1
1 2
19 20
TB1
1 2 #2
TB2
500+10mm 1 2
-
Length:
UC-ET010-24D(1M)(28AWG)
_4 UC-ET020-24D(2M)(28AWG)
UC-ET030-24D(3M)(28AWG)
TB1 Y0.0 Y0.2 Y0.4 Y0.6 Y0.8 Y0.10 Y0.12 Y0.14 - C0

#1
TB2 Y0.1 Y0.3 Y0.5 Y0.7 Y0.9 Y0.11 Y0.13 Y0.15 - C0
TB1 X0.0 X0.2 X0.4 X0.6 X0.8 X0.10 X0.12 X0.14 S/S -
#2
TB2 X0.1 X0.3 X0.5 X0.7 X0.9 X0.11 X0.13 X0.15 S/S -
 Wiring the External Terminal Module UB-10-OR16B
For cables that can only be connected to the cables of group #1, see below.
Output form Relay
Output voltage Less than 250 VAC, 30 VDC
Length
19 20
39 40 #1 Length:
1 2 UC-ET010-24D(1M)(28AWG)
19 20 UC-ET020-24D(2M)(28AWG)
UC-ET030-24D(3M)(28AWG)
1 2 #2
500+10mm 1 2
-
GND +24V
4-26
4.6.3 Wiring AS332T-A
Output current/voltage 5 to 30 VDC, 0.1A/output, 1.6A/COM
POWER
RUN
ERROR S/S S/S
BAT. LOW X0.15 X0.14
COM1 X0.13 X0.12
COM2 X0.11 X0.10
AS332T 40
X0.9 X0.8
X0.7 X0.6
0 8 X0.5 X0.4
1 9 X0.3 X0.2
2
3
10
11
X0.1 X0.0
4_
IN
4 12 C0 C0
5 13 Y0.15 Y0.14
6 14 Y0.13 Y0.12
7 15 Y0.11 Y0.10
0 8 Y0.9 Y0.8
1 9 Y0.7 Y0.6
Ethernet Y0.5
2 10 Y0.4
3 11 Y0.3 Y0.2
OUT Y0.1
4 12 2 1 Y0.0
5 13
6 14
7 15
OUT
Output current/voltage 5 to 30 VDC, 0.1 A

Length
19 20
39 40 #1
1 2
19 20
TB1
1 2 #2
TB2
500+10mm 1 2
-
Length:
UC-ET010-24D(1M)(28AWG)
UC-ET020-24D(2M)(28AWG)
UC-ET030-24D(3M)(28AWG)
TB1 Y0.0 Y0.2 Y0.4 Y0.6 Y0.8 Y0.10 Y0.12 Y0.14 C0 -
#1
TB2 Y0.1 Y0.3 Y0.5 Y0.7 Y0.9 Y0.11 Y0.13 Y0.15 C0 -
TB1 X0.0 X0.2 X0.4 X0.6 X0.8 X0.10 X0.12 X0.14 S/S -
#2
TB2 X0.1 X0.3 X0.5 X0.7 X0.9 X0.11 X0.13 X0.15 S/S -
4-27
 Wiring the External Terminal Module UB-10-OR16A
Output form Relay
Output voltage Less than 250 VAC, 30 VDC

Length
19 20
39 40 #1 Length:
1 2 UC-ET010-24D(1M)(28AWG)
19 20 UC-ET020-24D(2M)(28AWG)
UC-ET030-24D(3M)(28AWG)
1 2 #2
500+10mm 1 2
-
GND +24V
_4
Note: UB-10-OR16A can be used with AS Series and DVP Series. The indications on the UB-10-OR16A board
is for DVP Series. For the definitions of terminal connections for AS Series, you can see the reference table
below. Or refer to the enclosed sticker for AS Series.
AS C0 Y0.0 Y0.1 Y0.2 Y0.3 C1 Y0.4 Y0.5 Y0.6 Y0.7 C2 Y0.8 Y0.9 Y0.10 Y0.11 C3 Y0.12 Y0.13 Y0.14 Y0.15
DVP C0 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 C1 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 C2 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 C3 Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17
4-28
4.6.4 Wiring AS320P-B
Output
5 to 30 VDC, 0.1A/output, 1.2A/COM
current/voltage
IN
POWER X1 S/S
RUN S/S
ERROR X0
BAT. LOW X1
COM1 X2
X0
COM2 X3
AS 320P X2
X3
X4
X5
X4 X5
0 X6
1
2
X6
C0
X7
C0 C0
X7
4_
3 C0
IN
4 Y0 Y1 Y0
5 Y1
Y2 Y3
6 Y2
7 Y4 Y5 Y3
Y4
0 8
Y6 Y7 Y5
1 9
Ethernet Y6
2 10 Y8 Y9
Y7
3 11
OUT Y10 Y11 Y8
4
Y9
5
6 Y10
Y11
7
OUT
4-29
4.6.5 Wiring AS320T-B
Output
current/voltage
IN
S/S
POWER X1 S/S
RUN X0
ERROR X1
BAT. LOW X2
COM1 X0 X3
_4
COM2 X4
AS320T X2
X3 X5
0
X4 X5 X6
1 X6 X7
X7
2
C0 C0 C0
3 C0
IN
4 Y0 Y1 Y0
5 Y1
Y2 Y3
6 Y2
7 Y4 Y5 Y3
0 8 Y4
Y6 Y7
1 9 Y5
Ethernet
2 10 Y8 Y9 Y6
3 11 Y7
OUT Y10 Y11
4 Y8
5 Y9
6
Y10
7 Y11
OUT
4-30
4.6.6 Wiring AS228P-A
Output form Transistor-P (sourcing) (PNP)
Output
5 to 30 VDC, 0.5A/output, 2A/COM
current/voltage
IN OUT
C0
POWER
C1
RUN S/S
Y0.0
ERROR
S/S
BAT. LOW Y0.4
X0.0
COM1
Y0.1
COM2 X0.1
AS228P IN IN OUT OUT
X0.2 Y0.5
0 8
C0 C1
X0.3 Y0.2
4_
1 9 0 1 0 4
X0.4 Y0.6
2 10
3 11
2 3 1 5 X0.5 Y0.3
IN
4 12 4 5 2 6 X0.6 Y0.7
5 13
6 14
6 7 3 7 X0.7
7 15 8 9 ● ●
X0.8
0 8
10 11 ●
C2
X0.9
1 9
Ethernet
2 10 12 13 8 9 X0.10 C2
3 11 X0.11 Y0.8
OUT 14 15 10 11
4
5
X0.12 Y0.9
6 X0.13 Y0.10
7
X0.14 Y0.11
X0.15
4-31
4.6.7 Wiring AS228R-A
Output form Relay
Output
240VAC/24VDC, 2A/output, 8A/COM
current/voltage
IN OUT
POWER
C0
RUN
ERROR C1
S/S Y0.0
BAT. LOW
COM1
S/S Y0.4
X0.0
COM2 Y0.1
AS228R IN IN OUT OUT X0.1
Y0.5
C0 C1 X0.2
_4
0 8 Y0.2
X0.3
1 9 1 4
0 0
Y0.6
2 10 X0.4
3 11
2 3 1 5
X0.5 Y0.3
IN
4 12 4 5 2 6 X0.6
Y0.7
5 13
6 7 3 7
X0.7
6 14
7 15 X0.8
8 9 ● ●
X0.9
0 8
10 11 C2
X0.10 C2
●
1 9
Ethernet
2 10 12 13 8 9 X0.11 Y0.8
OUT
3 11
14 15 10 11
X0.12 Y0.9
4
5
X0.13 Y0.10
X0.14 Y0.11
6
7 X0.15
4-32
4.6.8 Wiring AS228T-A
Output form Transistor-T (sinking) (NPN)
Output
5 to 30 VDC, 0.5A/output, 2A/COM
current/voltage
IN OUT
C0
POWER C1
RUN S/S
Y0.0
ERROR
S/S
BAT. LOW Y0.4
X0.0
COM1 Y0.1
COM2 X0.1
AS228T IN IN OUT OUT X0.2
Y0.5
C0 C1 X0.3
Y0.2
0 8
Y0.6
X0.4
4_
1 9 0 1 0 4
2 10
2 3 1 5 X0.5 Y0.3
3 11
IN
4 12 4 5 2 6 X0.6 Y0.7
5 13
6 7 3 7 X0.7
6 14
7 15 8 9 ● ● X0.8
0 8 X0.9
10 11 ●
C2
1 9
Ethernet
2 10 12 13 8 9
X0.10 C2
3 11 X0.11 Y0.8
OUT 14 15 10 11
4
X0.12 Y0.9
5
6 X0.13 Y0.10
7 X0.14 Y0.11
X0.15
4-33
4.6.9 Wiring AS218PX-A / AS218RX-A / AS218TX-A
4.6.9.1 Wiring AS218PX-A
Output form Transistor-P (sourcing) (PNP)
Output
current/voltage
Analog input*1 12bits, -10V-10V (voltage), -20mA-20mA (current)
Analog output*1 12bits, -10V-10V(voltage), 0- 20mA (current)
*1. Refer to section 4.6.9.4 for more details on wiring analog input and output.
_4 IN OUT
POWER
S/S
RUN
C0
ER ROR
X0.0
BAT. LOW
COM1 AIO DIO Y0.0
COM2 X0.1
AS 218PX IN OUT
Y0.1
V1+ V2+ C0
0 X0 .2
1 I1+ I2+ 0 0
2 Y0.2
VI1- VI2- 1 1
IN
3 X0.3
4 ● ● 2 2
5
VO1 VO2 3
X0.4
●
6
7 IO1 IO2 4 C1
C1
0
1
AG AG 5 3 X0.5
Ethernet
OU T
2 ● ● 6 4 Y0.3
3
4
●
7 5 X0.6
5 Y0.4
X0.7
Y0.5
4-34
4.6.9.2 Wiring AS218RX-A
Output form Relay
Output
240 VAC / 24 VDC, 2A/output, 6A/COM
current/voltage
Analog input*1 12 bits, -10V-10V (voltage), -20mA-20mA (current)
Analog output*1 12 bits, -10V-10V(voltage), 0- 20mA (current)
IN OUT
S/S
4_
POWER
RUN
ER ROR
C0
X0.0
BAT. LOW
COM1 AIO DIO Y0.0
COM2 X0.1
A S218RX IN OUT
V1+ V2+ C0
Y0.1
0 X0 .2
1 I1+ I 2+ 0 0
2 Y0.2
VI1- VI2- 1 1
IN
3 X0.3
4 ● ●
2 2
5
VO1 VO2 3
X0.4
●
6
7 IO1 I O2 4 C1
C1
0
1
AG AG 5 3 X0.5
Ethernet
2 ● ● 6 4 Y0.3
OU T
3
●
7 5 X0.6
4
5
Y0.4
X0.7
Y0.5
4-35
4.6.9.3 Wiring AS218TX-A
Output form Transistor-T (sinking) (NPN)
Output
current/voltage
Analog input*1 12 bits, -10V-10V (voltage), -20mA-20mA (current)
Analog output*1 12 bits, -10V-10V(voltage), 0- 20mA (current)
IN OUT
POWER S/S
RUN
C0
_4
ER ROR
X0.0
BAT. LOW
COM1 AIO DIO Y0.0
COM2 X0.1
AS218TX IN OUT
C0
Y0.1
V1+ V2+
0 X0 .2
1 I1+ I2+ 0 0
2 Y0.2
VI1- VI2- 1 1
IN
3 X0.3
4 ● ●
2 2
5
6 VO1 VO2 3 ●
X0.4
7
IO1 IO2 4 C1
C1
0
1
AG AG 5 3 X0.5
Ethernet
2 ● ● 6 4 Y0.3
OU T
3
●
7 5 X0.6
4
5
Y0.4
X0.7
Y0.5
4-36
4.6.9.4 Wiring Details on AS218PX-A/AS218RX-A/AS218TX-A
AG
4-wi re: vol tage i nput *6
-1 0V~ +10 V CH X-I
Shi elded c abl e * 1 1M
+ V1+
+2 4V
*3 I 1+ 25 0
-
0V 1M
VI 1-
*6 AG
4-wi re: curr ent i nput CH X-I
-2 0mA~ +2 0mA 1M
Shi elded c abl e * 1 V2 +
+ *2 2 50
+ 24 V I 2+
- 1M
0V VI2 -
2-wire: c urrent i nput

4m A~+ 20m A
*6 AG
+2 4V Shi elded c abl e * 1 C HX-I
+ 1M
V2 +
- *2
2 50
I 2+
1M
4_
0V VI2-
3-wire: v oltage i nput

-10V~ +1 0V Shi elded c abl e * 1
*6 AG
+ 24V CH X-I
+ 1M
V1+
250
0V - I1 +
1M
VI 1-
2-wire: c urrent i nput

*6 AG
-20 mA~ +20 mA Shi elded c abl e * 1 CH X-I
+ 24V 1M
+ *2 V2 +
25 0
I2+
0V - 1M
VI 2-
Vol tage o utput

-10V ~+ 10V *6
CH X-O
VO1
*5
IO1
AC motor dri ve, AG
AG
rec order, Shi elded c abl e * 4
proportioning v alve *6
Current output C HX-O
0mA~ 20 mA
VO2
I O2
AG
AG
AC motor dri ve,
rec order, Shi elded c abl e * 4
proportioning v alve
4-37
4.6.10 Wiring
AS300/AS200 Series AS300 Series AS200 Series
PO WE R
RU N
ER RO R
BAT. L O W
CO M 1
CO M 2
USB IN
SD card RS-485
RS-485
E th e rn e t
O UT
Ethernet
CAN
 USB port
Pin Function
_4 1 VBUS (4.4–5.25 V)
2 D−
3 D+
4 Ground
5 Ground
 Refer to Appendix A : Installing a USB Driver, if it is the first time for AS Series to use USB port to
communicate.
 Time to use USB port: uploading/downloading PLC programs, monitoring during calibration and
upgrading firmware.
 NOT suggested to use USB port: applications that require a long and un-interruptible
communication.
 What to do when a communication failure occurs: unplug any communication connector from the
USB port and then plug the connector back. After that reconnect and try communication again.
 Ethernet port
Pin Signal Description
1 TX+ Transmitting data (positive pole)
2 TX- Transmitting data (negative pole)
3 RX+ Receiving data (positive pole)
4 -- N/C
5 -- N/C
6 RX- Receiving data (negative pole)
7 -- N/C
8 -- N/C
4-38
 RS485

1 + COM1 D+ 1
2 - COM1 D- 2
3
3 SG Signal Ground
4
4 + COM2 D+ 5
5 - COM2 D-
 RS485 Wiring
Master Slave Slave
Terminal D+ D- SG D+ D- S G SG D+ D-
resistor
(120 ohm)
Shielded
Shielded
cable cable
4_
 CAN
1 CAN+ CAN_H 1
2 CAN- CAN_L 2
3
3 GND GROUND
4
4 5
120Ω Terminal resistor
5
Note: Pin4 and Pin5 must be short-circuited to activate the built-in terminal resistor 120Ω and work as an
impedance to reduce noise inference when signal reflections occur and ensure signal can be transmitted
normally.
 CAN Wiring
Master Slave Slave

CA N+ CA N- GN D P in 4 P in 5 C AN + C AN - GN D P in 4 Pi n5 GN D CA N+ CA N- P in 4 P in 5
Shielded
cable
1. It is recommended to use Daisy Chain for connection and be sure to use terminal resistor in the
beginning and the end of the terminal arrangement.
2. Pin4 and Pin5 must be short-circuited to activate the built-in terminal resistor 120Ω.
4-39
4.7 Wiring Digital Input/Output Modules

This section illustrates how to wire digital input/output modules. The wiring diagrams below also illustrate how
the power supplies are connected to S/S, and COM. If you need more information about wiring of digital
input/output terminals, refer to Section 4.8 in this manual.
4.7.1 Wiring AS08AM10N-A
Voltage specifications 24 VDC, 5 mA
IN
08AM S/S
S/S
_4 IN
0
PWR
IN
1
0 0
1
1 2 2
3
2 4
3
5 3
6
4 7
4
5
6
5
7
4-40
4.7.2 Wiring AS08AN01P-A

Voltage specifications 5 to 30 VDC, 0.5A/output, 4A/COM
OUT
08AN C0
C0
OUT
0
C0
PWR
C0
1
OUT
0 0
1
1 2 2
3
2 4
3
5
6
3 4_
4 7
4
5
6
5
7
4-41
4.7.3 Wiring AS08AN01R-A
Output form Relay
Voltage specifications 5 to 30 VDC, 2A/output, 8A/COM
OUT
08AN C0
C0
OUT
0
C0
PWR
C0
1
OUT
0 0
1
1 2 2
3
_4
2 4
3
5 3
6
4 7
4
5
6
5
7
4-42
4.7.4 Wiring AS08AN01T-A
Output type Transistor-T (sinking)
OUT
08AN C0
C0
OUT
0
C0
PWR
C0 1
OUT
0 0
1
1 2 2
3
4_
2 4
3
5 3
6
4 7
4
5
6
5
7
4-43
Input type Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
IN
16AM S/S
S/S
S/S
S/S
IN IN
0
PWR 1
IN 2
0
0 1
3
1
4
_4
2 3 2
3
4 5 4
5
6 7
5 6
6
7 7
8 9
8
8
10 11
9 9
12 13 10
11
10
14 15 12 11
13
14 12
15
13
14
15
4-44
4.7.6 Wiring AS16AN01R-A
Output type Relay
Voltage specifications 240 VAC/24 VDC, 2A/output, 8A/COM
OUT
16AN
C0
C0
C0
OUT OUT C0
C0 C0 0
PWR 1
C0 C0
OUT 2
0 1 0
1
3
2 3 2 4
4_
3
4 5 4
5
6 7
5 6
6
7
7
8 9
8
8
10 11
9
9
12 13 10 10
11
14 15 12
11
13 12
14
15
13
14
15
4-45
OUT
16AN C0
C0
0
1
OUT OUT
2
C0 C0
3
PWR
0 1 4
OUT
2 3 0 5
1
6
_4
4 5 2
3 7
6 7 4
5 C1
C1 C1
6 C1
7
8 9 8
10 11 8 9
9
12 13 10 10
11 11
14 15 12
13 12
14 13
15
14
15
4-46
4.7.8 Wiring AS16AN01P-A
Output type Transistor-P (souring)
OUT
16AN C0
C0
0
1
OUT OUT
2
C0 C0 3
PWR
0 1 4
2 3
OUT
0 5
1
6
4_
4 5 2
3 7
6 7 4
5 C1
C1 C1
6 C1
7
8 9 8
10 11
8 9
9
12 13 10 10
11 11
14 15 12
13 12
14 13
15
14
15
4-47
4.7.9 Wiring AS16AP11R-A
Output type Relay
Voltage specifications 240 VAC/24 VDC, 2 A/inputs, 8 A/COM
IN OUT
16AP S/S
C0
S/S
C0
IN OUT
0
C0
0
_4
PWR
C0 1
IN
0 0 0 1
1
2
1 1 2
3 2
2 2 4
3
5
3 3
6 3
7
4 4 4
OUT
5 5 0
4
1
2
5
6 6
3
5
7 7 4
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
4-48
4.7.10 Wiring AS16AP11T-A
IN OUT
16AP S/S
C0
S/S
C0
IN OUT
0
C0
0
4_
PWR
C0 1
IN
0 0 0 1
1
2
1 1 2
3 2
2 2 4
3
5
3 3
6 3
4 4
7
4
OUT
5 5 0 4
1
5
6 6 2
3 5
7 7 4
6
5
6 6
7
7
7
4-49
4.7.11 Wiring AS16AP11P-A
Output type Transistor-P (sourcing)
IN OUT
16AP S/S
C0
S/S
C0
IN OUT
0
_4 0
C0
PWR
C0 1
IN
0 0 0 1
1 2
1 1 2
3 2
2 2 4
3
5
3 3
6 3
7
4 4 4
OUT
0
5 5
1
4
6 6 2 5
3
7 7 4 5
5 6
6
7 6
7
7
4-50
Input current 24 VDC, 5 mA
32AM
X0 LED S/S S/S
X1 LED
1.15 1.14
1.13 1.12
1.11 1.10
39 1.9 1.8
PWR 1.7 1.6
IN 1.5 1.4
0
1.2
4_
1
1.3
2 1.1 1.0
3
4
5 S/S S/S
6
0.15 0.14
7
0.13 0.12
8
9
0.11 0.10
10 0.9 0.8
11
0.7 0.6
12
1
13 0.5 0.4
14
0.3 0.2
15
0.1 0.0
Length
19 20
39 40 #1
1 2
19 20
1 2 #2
500+10mm 1 2
TB1 -
TB2 Length:
UC-ET010-24D(1M)(28AWG)
UC-ET020-24D(2M)(28AWG)
UC-ET030-24D(3M)(28AWG)
4-51
TB1 X0.0 X0.2 X0.4 X0.6 X0.8 X0.10 X0.12 X0.14 S/S -
#2
TB2 X0.1 X0.3 X0.5 X0.7 X0.9 X0.11 X0.13 X0.15 S/S -
Length
39 40 39 40
Length:
UC-ET010-24B(1M)
UC-ET020-24B(2M)
1 2 1 2 UC-ET030-24B(3M)
_4
Upper row X0.0 X0.2 X0.4 X0.6 X0.8 X0.10 X0.12 X0.14 X1.0 X1.2 X1.4 X1.6 X1.8 X1.10 X1.12 X1.14 S/S S/S
Lower row X0.1 X0.3 X0.5 X0.7 X0.9 X0.11 X0.13 X0.15 X1.1 X1.3 X1.5 X1.7 X1.9 X1.11 X1.13 X1.15 S/S S/S
24 V DC, 5 mA
Note: UB-10-ID32A can be used with AS Series and DVP Series. The indications on the UB-10-ID32A board is
for DVP Series. For the definitions of terminal connections for AS Series, you can see the reference table below.
Or refer to the enclosed sticker for AS Series.

Upper
AS X0.0 X0.2 X0.4 X0.6 X0.8 X0.10 X0.12 X0.14 X1.0 X1.2 X1.4 X1.6 X1.8 X1.10 X1.12 X1.14 S/S S/S
row
DVP X0 X2 X4 X6 X10 X12 X14 X16 X20 X22 X24 X26 X30 X32 X34 X36 S/S S/S
Lower
row
4-52
Voltage specifications 5 to 30 VDC, 0.1A/output, 3.2A/COM
OUT
32AN
Y0 LED
Y1 LED
C0 C0
1.15 1.14
1.13 1.12
39
1.11 1.10
PWR 1.9 1.8
OUT
1.7 1.6
0 1.5 1.4
1
1.3 1.2
2
1.1 1.0
3
4
5 C0 C0
6 0.15 0.14
7
0.13 0.12 4_
8 0.11 0.10
9 0.9 0.8
10
0.7 0.6
11
0.5 0.4
12
1
13 0.3 0.2
14 0.1 0.0
15
Voltage specifications 5 to 30 VDC, 0.1 A
Length
19 20
39 40 #1
1 2
19 20
1 2 #2
500+10mm 1 2
TB1 -
TB2 Length:
UC-ET010-24D(1M)(28AWG)
UC-ET020-24D(2M)(28AWG)
UC-ET030-24D(3M)(28AWG)
TB1 Y0.0 Y0.2 Y0.4 Y0.6 Y0.8 Y0.10 Y0.12 Y0.14 C0 -

#1
TB2 Y0.1 Y0.3 Y0.5 Y0.7 Y0.9 Y0.11 Y0.13 Y0.15 C0 -
4-53
Output form Relay
Voltage specifications Less than 250 VAC, 30 VDC, 2 A

Length
19 20
39 40 #1 Length:
1 2 UC-ET010-24D(1M)(28AWG)
19 20 UC-ET020-24D(2M)(28AWG)
UC-ET030-24D(3M)(28AWG)
1 2 #2
500+10mm 1 2
-
GND +24V
_4
 Wiring the External Terminal Module UB-10-OT32A
Length
39 40 39 40
Length:
UC-ET010-24B(1M)
UC-ET020-24B(2M)
1 2 1 2 UC-ET030-24B(3M)
Upper
row Y0.0 Y0.2 Y0.4 Y0. 6 Y0.8 Y0.10 Y0. 12 Y0.14 Y1.0 Y1.2 Y1.4 Y1 .6 Y1.8 Y1.10 Y1.12 Y1.14
Lower
row Y0.1 Y0.3 Y0.5 Y0. 7 Y0.9 Y0.11 Y0. 13 Y0.15 Y1.1 Y1.3 Y1.5 Y1 .7 Y1.9 Y1.11 Y1.13 Y1.15 C0 C0
4-54
Note: UB-10-OT32A can be used with AS Series and DVP Series. The indications on the UB-10-OT32A board

Upper
AS Y0.0 Y0.2 Y0.4 Y0.6 Y0.8 Y0.10 Y0.12 Y0.14 Y1.0 Y1.2 Y1.4 Y1.6 Y1.8 Y1.10 Y1.12 Y1.14  
row
DVP Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y10 Y12 Y14 Y16 Y20 Y22 Y24 Y26 Y30 Y32 Y34 Y36  
Lower
DVP Y1 Y3 Y5 Y7 Y11 Y13 Y15 Y17 Y21 Y23 Y25 Y27 Y31 Y33 Y35 Y37 C0 C0
row
AS Y0.1 Y0.3 Y0.5 Y0.7 Y0.9 Y0.11 Y0.13 Y0.15 Y1.1 Y1.3 Y1.5 Y1.7 Y1.9 Y1.11 Y1.13 Y1.15 C0 C0
4_
4-55
Input type Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
64AM
0 1 01
2.0 2.1
0 1 2.3
S/S S/S 2.2
1.15 1.14 2.4 2.5
1.13 1.12 2.6 2.7
40 2 1.11 1.10 2.8 2.9
PWR 1.9 1.8 2.10 2.11
1.7 1.6 2.12 2.13
IN
0 1.5 1.4 2.14 2.15
X1 X2
1 1.3 1.2 S/S S/S
2
1.1 1.0
_4
3
4 3.0 3.1
5 S/S S/S 3.2 3.3
6
0.15 0.14 3.4 3.5
7
0.13 0.12 3.6 3.7
X0 X3 8 3.9
0.11 0.10 3.8
9
0.9 0.8 3.10 3.11
10
11 0.7 0.6 3.12 3.13
2 40
12 0.5 0.4 3.14 3.15
13
0.3 0.2 S/S S/S
14
15 0.1 0.0
Length
19 20
39 40 #1
1 2
19 20
1 2 #2
500+10mm 1 2
TB1 -
TB2 Length:
UC-ET010-24D(1M)(28AWG)
UC-ET020-24D(2M)(28AWG)
UC-ET030-24D(3M)(28AWG)
TB1 X0.0 X0.2 X0.4 X0.6 X0.8 X0.10 X0.12 X0.14 S/S -
#2
TB2 X0.1 X0.3 X0.5 X0.7 X0.9 X0.11 X0.13 X0.15 S/S -
4-56
Voltage specifications 24VDC, 5mA
Length
39 40 39 40
Length:
UC-ET010-24B(1M)
UC-ET020-24B(2M)
1 2 1 2 UC-ET030-24B(3M)
Upper row X0.0 X0.2 X0.4 X0.6 X0.8 X0.10 X0.12 X0.14 X1.0 X1.2 X1.4 X1.6 X1.8 X1.10 X1.12 X1.14 S/S S/S
Lower row X0.1 X0.3 X0.5 X0.7 X0.9 X0.11 X0.13 X0.15 X1.1 X1.3 X1.5 X1.7 X1.9 X1.11 X1.13 X1.15 S/S S/S
4_
24 V DC, 5 mA
Note: UB-10-ID32A can be used with AS Series and DVP Series. The indications on the UB-10-ID32A board is
for DVP Series. For the definitions of terminal connections for AS Series, you can see the reference table below.
Or refer to the enclosed sticker for AS Series.

Upper
row
Lower
row
4-57
Voltage specifications 5 to 30 VDC, 0.1A/output, 3.2A/COM
OUT
2.0 2.1
64AN C0 C0 2.2 2.3
0 1 01
1.15 1.14 2.4 2.5
0 1
1.13 1.12 2.6 2.7
1.11 1.10 2.8 2.9
1.9 1.8 2.10 2.11
40 2 1.7 1.6 2.13
2.12
PWR 1.5 1.4 2.14 2.15
OUT
1.3 1.2 C1 C1
0 1.0
Y1 Y2 1.1
_4
1
2 3.0 3.1
3 C0 C0 3.2 3.3
4
0.15 0.14 3.4 3.5
5
6 0.13 0.12 3.6 3.7
7 0.11 0.10 3.8 3.9
Y0 Y3 8 0.9 0.8 3.10 3.11
9 0.7 0.6 3.12 3.13
10
0.5 0.4 3.14 3.15
11
12 0.3 0.2 C1 C1
2 40
13 0.1 0.0
14
15
Length
19 20
39 40 #1
1 2
19 20
1 2 #2
500+10mm 1 2
TB1 -
TB2 Length:
UC-ET010-24D(1M)(28AWG)
UC-ET020-24D(2M)(28AWG)
UC-ET030-24D(3M)(28AWG)
TB1 Y0.0 Y0.2 Y0.4 Y0.6 Y0.8 Y0.10 Y0.12 Y0.14 C0 -

#1
TB2 Y0.1 Y0.3 Y0.5 Y0.7 Y0.9 Y0.11 Y0.13 Y0.15 C0 -
4-58
Output form Relay
Voltage specifications Less than 250 VAC, 30 VDC, 2 A
Length
19 20
39 40 #1 Length:
1 2 UC-ET010-24D(1M)(28AWG)
19 20 UC-ET020-24D(2M)(28AWG)
UC-ET030-24D(3M)(28AWG)
1 2 #2
500+10mm 1 2
-
GND +24V
4_
4-59
 Wiring the External Terminal Module UB-10-OT32A
Length
39 40 39 40
Length:
UC-ET010-24B(1M)
UC-ET020-24B(2M)
1 2 1 2 UC-ET030-24B(3M)
_4 Upper
row Y0.0 Y0.2 Y0.4 Y0. 6 Y0.8 Y0.10 Y0. 12 Y0.14 Y1.0 Y1.2 Y1.4 Y1 .6 Y1.8 Y1.10 Y1.12 Y1.14
Lower
row Y0.1 Y0.3 Y0.5 Y0. 7 Y0.9 Y0.11 Y0. 13 Y0.15 Y1.1 Y1.3 Y1.5 Y1 .7 Y1.9 Y1.11 Y1.13 Y1.15 C0 C0
Note: UB-10-OT32A can be used with AS Series and DVP Series. The indications on the UB-10-OT32A board
Upper
AS Y0.0 Y0.2 Y0.4 Y0.6 Y0.8 Y0.10 Y0.12 Y0.14 Y1.0 Y1.2 Y1.4 Y1.6 Y1.8 Y1.10 Y1.12 Y1.14  
row
DVP Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y10 Y12 Y14 Y16 Y20 Y22 Y24 Y26 Y30 Y32 Y34 Y36  
Lower
DVP Y1 Y3 Y5 Y7 Y11 Y13 Y15 Y17 Y21 Y23 Y25 Y27 Y31 Y33 Y35 Y37 C0 C0
row
AS Y0.1 Y0.3 Y0.5 Y0.7 Y0.9 Y0.11 Y0.13 Y0.15 Y1.1 Y1.3 Y1.5 Y1.7 Y1.9 Y1.11 Y1.13 Y1.15 C0 C0
4-60
4.8 Wiring Digital Input/Output Terminals

4.8.1 Wiring Digital Input Terminals
4.8.1.1 Sinking and Sourcing
The input signal is the 24 VDC power input. Sinking and sourcing are the current driving capabilities of a circuit.
They are defined as follows.
 Sinking  Sourcing
Souring=The current flows from the common

Sinking=The current flows into the common
terminal S/S.
terminal S/S.
4_
4.8.1.2 Relay Type
 Sinking
I/O
X0.0
Internal circuit
Internal
circuit
S/S
24VDC
 Sourcing
I/O
X0.0
Internal circuit
Internal
circuit
S/S
24VDC
4-61
4.8.1.3 Open-collector Input Type
 Sinking
(NPN transistor whose collector is open)
I/O
X0.0
Internal circuit
Internal
circuit
S/S
24VDC
NPN
 Sourcing
_4 (PNP transistor whose collector is open)
I/O
+Vcc
X0.0
Internal circuit
Internal
circuit
0V S/S
PNP 24VDC
4.8.1.4 Two-wire Proximity Switch
Use the two-wire proximity switch whose leakage current IL is less than 1.5 mA when the switch is OFF. If the
leakage current is larger than 1.5 mA, connect the divider resistance Rb using the formula below.
6
Rb ≤ (k Ω)
IL − 1.5
 Sinking
I/O
IL X0.0
Rb Internal
circuit
S/S
24VDC
Two-wire proximity switch
4-62
 Sourcing
I/O
IL X0.0
Rb Internal
circuit
S/S
24VDC
Two-wire proximity switch
4.8.1.5 Three-wire Switch
 Sinking
I/O
X0.0 4_
Three-wire switch
Internal
circuit
S/S
24VDC
 Sourcing
I/O
X0.0
Three-wire switch
Internal
circuit
S/S
24VDC
4.8.1.6 Optoelectronic Switch
 Sinking
I/O
X0.0
Above Internal
15 V DC circuit
S/S
24VDC
Optoelectronic switch
4-63
 Sourcing
I/O
X0.0
Above Internal
15 V DC circuit
S/S
24VDC
Optoelectronic switch
4.8.1.7 Differential Input
5V Shielded c able * 1 10k

SG
X0.3+
4.7k
X0 .3-
GND 5V
10k
_4 SG0
4-64
4.8.2 Wiring Digital Output Terminals
4.8.2.1 Output Circuits
There are three types of output units. They are relay outputs, transistor outputs, and differential outputs.
1. Relay output
I/ O Rel ay
Y 0. 0
I/ O Rel ay
Y 0. 0
250V AC
C0 2A 30V DC
C0 2A
2. Transistor output
4_
I / O( S ink ) I /O (Sou rce )
C0
Y 0. 0
+ 5~3 0VDC + 5~3 0VDC
0. 5A 0. 5A
C0 Y 0. 0
3. Differential output
ASDA-A2 ASDA-A2
Shiel ded c ab le *1 Shiel ded c ab le *1
2k
Y0 .3+ H SI GN 4 6 Y 0. 0+ SIGN 36
FP 100k FP
Y0. 3- / HS IGN 4 0 Y0 .0 - /SIGN 37
2k
4-65
4.8.2.2 Relay Output Circuit
Relay terminals have no polarity. They can be used with alternating current that passes through a load, or with
direct current that passes through a load. The maximum current that can pass through every relay terminal is 2
A, and refer to each product specification for the maximum current that can pass through every common
terminal. Life cycle curve: The lifetime of a relay terminal varies with the working voltage, the load type (the
power factor cosψ, the time constant t(L/R)), and the current passing through the terminal. The relation is
shown in the life cycle curve below.
120VAC Resistive
3000
2000
1000
Operation(X10 )
3
500
300
_4 200
100
30VDC
50 Inductive
(t=40ms )
30
20
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1 2

Contact Current(A)
 Relay output circuit
① Direct-current power supply
② Emergency stop using an external switch.

Fuse: to protect the output circuit, a fuse having a breaking capacity between 5 A to 10 A is connected
③
to the common terminal.
④ Alternating-current power supply
4-66
A relay or a solenoid valve is used as a DC load. A diode is connected in parallel to absorb the surge
voltage that occurs when the load is OFF.
⑤
V D C pow er s upply
An electromagnetic contactor is used as an AC load. A resistor and a capacitor are connected in

parallel to absorb the surge voltage that occurs when the load is OFF.
Electromagnetic contac tor
Y0.7
4_
A bulb (incandescent lamp) is used as a DC load. A thermistor is connected in series to absorb the
surge current that occurs when the load is ON.
V DC power supply
⑦ A bulb (neon lamp) is used as an AC load. A thermistor is connected in series to absorb the surge
current that occurs when the load is ON.
Mutually exclusive output: For example, Y0.3 controls the clockwise rotation of the motor, and Y0.4
○
8 controls the counterclockwise rotation of the motor. This interlock circuit and the program in the PLC
ensure that there are protective measures if an abnormal condition occurs.
4-67
4.8.2.3 Transistor Output Circuit (NPN)
High - powe r
Low -p owe r
Fre qu en tl y ON / OF F
Y +
D VDC Y +
VDC
ZD D
C C
_4 D : 1N4001 di ode
[ Figu re 1 ]
D: 1N 4001 d io de
ZD : 9V Zen er, 5W
[ F ig ur e 2 ]
① Direct-current power supply
② Emergency stop
③ Fuse
The output terminals of a transistor module are open-collector output terminals. If Y0.0/Y0.1 is a pulse
train output terminal of a transistor module, the output current passing through its output pull-up resistor
must be greater than 0.1 A to ensure that the transistor module operates normally.
④ 1. A diode is connected in parallel to absorb the surge voltage: used in low-power situations (refer to
Figure 1).
2. A diode and Zener are connected in parallel to absorb the surge voltage: used in high-power and
power-on/off frequently situations (refer to Figure 2).
A bulb (incandescent lamp) is used as a DC load. A thermistor is connected in series to absorb the
⑤
surge current which occurs when the load is ON.
Mutually exclusive output: For example, Y0.2 controls the clockwise rotation of the motor, and Y0.3
⑥ controls the counterclockwise rotation of the motor. This interlock circuit and the program in the PLC
ensure that there are protective measures if an abnormal condition occurs.
Connected to a NTC thermistor (negative temperature coefficient), when a bulb (incandescent lamp) is
⑦
used as a DC load and a thermistor is connected in series to absorb the surge current.
4-68
4.9 Wiring Analog Input/Output Modules

Definitions of the terminals
◆ Two/three-wire (passive sensor): the sensor and the system share the same power circuit.
◆ Four-wire (active sensor): the sensor uses an independent power supply and should not share the
same power circuit with the system.
◆ Note: use cables with the same length (less than 200 m) and use terminal resistors of less than 100
ohm.
4.9.1 Wiring AS04AD-A
AG
*6
4-wir e: v ol tage inp ut
CHX
-10 V~ + 10 V Shi eld ed cabl e *1 1M
+ V I+
+ 2 4V 250 CH1
- *3 I1 +
0V 1M
*4
VI 1-
4_
FE
*6 AG
4-wir e: c urr ent inp ut CHX
-20 mA ~ +2 0 mA Shi eld ed c abl e *1 1M
V 2+
+ *2 25 0 CH2
+ 24 V I2 +
- 1M
0V V I2 -
*4
FE
2-wi re: cu rrent i np ut
4 mA ~ +2 0m A
*6 AG
+ 2 4V CHX
Shi eld ed c abl e *1
+ 1M
V 3+
- *2 25 0 CH3
I3 +
1M
0V V I3 -
*4
FE
3-wi re: vo ltag e inpu t
-1 0 V~ + 10 V Shi eld ed c abl e *1 *6 AG
+ 2 4V CH X
+ 1M
V4 +
25 0 CH4
0V - I 4+
1M
*4 V I4 -
FE
3-wi re: cur rent i npu t

-2 0m A~ + 20 m A *6 AG
Shi eld ed c abl e *1 CHX
+ 24 V 1M
+ *2 V 1+
25 0 CH1
I1 +
0V -
1M
V I1 -
*4
FE
*5
+ 15 V
0V D C /D C
24 VD C AG
24 V C on ve rt e r
-15 V
*1. Use shielded cables to isolate the analog input signal cable from other power cables.
*2. If the module is connected to a current signal, the terminals Vn and In+ (n=1–4) must be short-circuited.
4-69
*3. If noise in the input voltage results in noise interference in the wiring, connect the module to a capacitor with
a capacitance between 0.1–0.47 μF with a working voltage of 25 V.
*4. Connect FE of the shielded cable to ground.
*5. Connect the terminal to ground.
*6. Every channel can work with the wiring shown above.
4.9.2 Wiring AS08AD-B
4-w ir e: vol tage in put *5 AG

Shi eld ed c abl e *1 CHX
-10 V~ + 10 V
1M
+ 2 4V + V 1+
_4 0V
- *2
V1 -
1M
*3
FE
3-wi re: vo lt ag e inp ut
-10 V~ + 10 V
Shi eld ed c abl e *1 AG
*5
+ 2 4V + CHX
1M
V 2+
0V - 1M
V2 -
*3
FE
*4
+ 1 5V
0V D C/ D C
2 4 VD C C on ve rte r AG
2 4V
-1 5V
4-70
4.9.3 Wiring AS08AD-C
4-wi re: cur rent in put AG

*4
-2 0m A~ + 2 0m A Shi elded c abl e *1 CHX
1M
+ 2 4V +
I1 +
- 2 50 1M
0V I1 -
*2
FE
2-w ir e: c urr en t inp ut
4m A~ + 20 m A
+ 24 V Shi elded c abl e *1
*4 AG
+
CHX
- 1M
I2 +
250 1M
0V I2 -
*2
FE
3-w ire: cu rrent i np ut

-20 mA ~ +2 0 mA Shi elded c abl e *1
AG
+2 4 V +
*4
CH X 4_
1M
I 3+
0V - 25 0 1M
I3 -
*2
FE
*3
+ 1 5V
0V D C/ D C
2 4 VD C Co n vert er AG
2 4V
-1 5V
4-71
4.9.4 Wiring AS04DA-A
Voltage output
- 10V~+1 0V *4
CHX
VO1 CH1
*2
IO1
AC m otor driv e, Shielded c able* 1 AG
AG
recorder, SL D
proportioning v alv e
Current output *4
CHX
0 mA ~20 mA
VO4 CH4
IO4
AG
AG
AC motor driv e, Shielded cable*1 SLD
recorder,
proporti oni ng v al ve *3
FE
_4
+15 V
0V DC/DC
24VDC AG
2 4V C on ve rte r
-15V
*3. Connect the SLD to FE. Connect FE and the terminal to ground.
4-72
4.9.5 Wiring AS06XA-A
AG
4-wire: v ol tage inp ut *8
-1 0V~+ 10 V Shiel ded c ab le *1 CH X-I
1M
+ V1 +
+2 4V C H1
*3 I1+ 2 50
-
0V 1M
VI1 -
*6
FE
*8 AG
4-wire: c urr en t inp ut CH X-I
-2 0mA~ +2 0mA Shiel ded c ab le *1 1M
V 2+
+ *2 250 CH 2
+ 24V I 2+
- 1M
0V VI 2-
*6
FE
2-wi re: cu rrent i npu t
4m A~+ 20m A
*8 AG
+2 4V Shiel ded c ab le *1 C HX-I
+ 1M
4_
V 3+
- *2
250 CH 3
I 3+
VI 3- 1M
0V
*6
FE
3-wi re: vo ltag e inpu t
-1 0V~ +10 V
Shiel ded c ab le *1 *8 AG
+ 24V CH X-I
+ 1M
V4+
25 0 C H4
0V - I 4+
1M
VI4-
*6
FE
3-wi re: cur rent i npu t
*8 AG
-20 mA~+ 20 mA Shiel ded c ab le *1 CH X-I
+ 24V 1M
+ *2 V 1+
25 0 C H1
I1 +
0V - 1M
VI1-
*6
FE
AC motor dr ive,
rec order, Vo lt ag e outp ut
-10V ~+ 10V *8
proportioning v alv e CH X-O
VO1 C H5
*5
IO1
Sh ield ed cabl e *4 *6 AG
AG
FE
AC motor dr ive, *8
rec order, Cur rent ou tpu t CHX -O
proportioning v alv e 0mA~ 20 mA
VO2 CH 6
IO2
AG
AG
*6
Sh iel ded cab le *4
FE
*7
+ 15V
0V DC /D C
2 4VD C AG
24V C on ve rte r
-15 V
4-73
*1. Use shielded cables to isolate the analog input/output signal cable from other power cables.
*3. If noise in the input voltage results in noise interference with the wiring, connect the module to a capacitor
with a capacitance between 0.1–0.47 μF with a working voltage of 25 V.
*4. Use shielded cables to isolate the analog output signal cable from other power cables.
*5. If noise in the output voltage results in noise interference in the wiring, connect the module to a capacitor
with a capacitance between 0.1 μF–0.47 μF with a working voltage of 25 V.
_4 *8. CHX-I: Every channel can work with the input wiring shown above. CHX-O: Every channel can work with the
output wiring shown above.
4-74
4.10 Wiring Temperature Measurement Modules

4.10.1 Wiring AS04RTD-A
0~ 300Ω, 0~ 3000Ω
N i100 /Ni1000/ Pt 100/ Pt 1000 Ni 10 0 Pt1 00 ,J Pt1
, 00 ,
C u50/C u100/ J Pt 100/ LG -Ni1000 Cu 5 0, C u 1 00 /
Ni 10 0 0, P t1 0 00 ,
C H1 L G -N i 10 00 * 3
L1 +
L 1- ADC
*2 INA
I1-
S hielded cab le * 1 S LD
2 -Wi re AG
C H2 4_
L2+
L2-
I2-
S hielded cab le * 1 AG
3 -Wi re
*1. Use shielded twisted pair cables for temperature sensors, and keep them away from power cables and
other cables that generate noise.
*2. If you use two-wire temperature sensors, Ln- and In- must be short-circuited (where n is between 1–4).
*3. There are two different internal excitation currents. If you are using a Ni100 temperature sensor, a
Pt100 sensor, a JPt100, a Cu50/Cu100, or a 0~300 Ω resistance sensor, the internal excitation current
is 1.5 mA. If you are using a Ni1000 temperature sensor, a Pt1000 temperature sensor, a LG-Ni1000
sensor, or a 0~3000 Ω resistance sensor, the internal excitation current is 0.2 mA.
Note: use cables with the same length (less than 200 m) and use terminal resistors of less than 200 ohm.
4-75
4.10.2 Wiring AS06RTD-A
0~ 300Ω, 0~ 3000Ω
N i100 /Ni1000/ Pt 100/ Pt 1000 Ni 10 0 Pt1 00 ,J Pt1
, 00 ,
C u50/C u100/ J Pt 100/ LG -Ni1000 Cu 5 0, C u 1 00 /
Ni 10 0 0, P t1 0 00 ,
C H1 L G -N i 10 00 * 3
L1 +
L 1- ADC
S LD INA
2 -Wi re S hielde d c able *1
CH2
L2+
L2 -
*2
I12-
_4
3 -Wi re S hielde d c able *1 AG
*1. Use shielded twisted pair cables for temperature sensors and keep them away from power cables and
other cables that generate noise.
*2. Terminal “I12-“ indicates “ I1- & I2-“, terminal “I34-“ indicates “ I3- & I4-“, and terminal “I56-“ indicates
“ I5- & I6-“. If you use two-wire temperature sensors, Ln- and In- must be short-circuited (where n is
between 1–6).
*3. There are two different internal excitation currents. If you are using a Ni100 temperature sensor, a
Pt100 sensor, a JPt100, a Cu50/Cu100, or a 0~300 Ω resistance sensor, the internal excitation current
is 1.0 mA. If you are using a Ni1000 temperature sensor, a Pt1000 temperature sensor, a LG-Ni1000
sensor, or a 0~3000 Ω resistance sensor, the internal excitation current is 0.2 mA.
Note: use cables with the same length (less than 200 m) and use terminal resistors of less than 200 ohm.
4-76
4.10.3 Wiring AS04TC-A / AS08TC-A
J ,K,R,S,T, E, N, B
CH 1
+ I1 +
- I1-
A DC
Shiel ded cable * 1 S LD INA
- 1 0 0m V ~10 0 mV C H3
+
I 3+
- Col d - c on ju nc t io n
I3 - c om pe ns a ti on
SLD
*1. The cable connected to the input terminal should be the cable or the shielded twisted pair cable connected
to a type J, K, R, S, T, E, N, B thermocouple. It should be kept separate from other power cables and cables
that generate noise.

4_
Note1: do not wire empty terminals.
Note2: only use copper conducting wires with a temperature rating of 60/75°C and the length must be less
than 50 m.
Note3: TC modules must run for 30 minutes before they start to take any temperature measurement.
4-77
4.11 Wiring Positioning Modules and Counter Modules

4.11.1 Wiring AS02PU-A
X0. 4
Delta s er vo d rive
A SD A - A2 Series
X0.3
Y 0.0+ P LS 43
Y 0.0- /P LS 41
X0.2 Y 0.1+ SI GN 36
Y 0.1- /S I GN 37
X0.1
X0. 0
_4 + 24V
S /S
Delta s er vo d rive
A SD A - A2 Series
Y0 .2+ PL S 43
MPG Shielded
cable Y0 .2- / PLS 41
A+
Y0 .3+ SI G N 36
Phase A
A- Y0 .3- / SI G N 37
B+
Phase B
B-
Z+
Phase Z
Z-
Note: Refer to API1402 from Chapter 6 in AS Series Programming Manual and Delta Servo Manual for more
details on the output modes and operations.
4-78
4.11.2 Wiring AS04PU-A
Delta s erv o driv e ASD A-A2

24V
*1 VD D 17
9 1kΩ
PU L L_ HI_ P 339 Ma x.
2 00Kpps
PU LS E 43
X0.5 51Ω
Y0.0 /PU L SE 41
51Ω
C0 COM- 45
X0.4
*3 0V
Delta s erv o driv e ASD A-A2

X0.3
24V
*1 V DD 17
X0.2 5 1 kΩ
PU LL _ HI_ S 339 Max.
200 Kpps
SI GN 36
51Ω
4_
X0.1 Y0.1 /S IGN 37
51Ω
C0 C OM- 45
*3 0V
X0.0
5~30VD C, 0.1A
+ 24V Y0.4
S/ S
C1 *2
*3
*1: VDD and COM are seen as a group and its power is provided by Delta servo drive.
*2: Load or input point.
*3: Use a single power supply for the same COM port.
4-79
4.11.3 Wiring AS02HC-A
4.11.3.1 Pulse Input
 NPN output encoder

AS 02HC-A
NPN out put encoder

Shield cable A+
Phase A OUT A-
B+
Phase B
OUT
B-
Z+
Phase Z OUT
Z-
_4 COM
0V + 24V
External power 5V, 12V, 24VDC
 PNP output encoder
AS02HC-A
NPN output enco der

Shield c able
Phas e A OUT A+
A-
Phase B OUT B+
Phase Z B-
OUT
Z+
Z-
COM
+24V 0V
External power 5V, 12V, 24VDC
4-80
 5V differential output encoder

AS 02HC-A
5V dif ferential output enc oder

Shield c able A+
A
Phase A
A A-
B B+
Phase B
B B-
Z Z+
Phase Z
Z Z-
4_
4.11.3.2 SSI Input / Output Encoder
AS02HC-A
SSI encoder
Shield cable
+5V
+V
0V GND
CLK+ CLK+
CLK- CLK-
DATA+ DATA+
DATA- DATA-
Note: The power supply of the SSI encoder you are using may NOT be 5 VDC, check for the actual
power supply of your SSI encoder.
4-81
4.11.3.3 External Output
AS02 HC-A
5~30V DC, 0.1 A

Y0. 0
*1
CO M0
*2
5~30 VDC, 0. 1A
Y0. 2
*1
CO M1
*2
_4
*1: A load or an input point

*2: The same COM should use power from the same supply.
4-82
4.12 Load Cell Modules

4.12.1 Wiring AS02LC-A
4-w ire
6-wi re
4_
Co nne c t the te rm in al
t o th e groun d te rm ina l
S y s t em gr oun d
Converter
T he 3rd gro und in g

(g roun d res is ta nc e of
le s s tha n 100 Ω)
 Multiple load cells connected to one load cell module:
Load Cell
Load Cell
AS02LC Load Cell
CH1
Load Cell
CH2 Load Cell
Load Cell
Load Cell
Load Cell
*1. Connect the of the power module and the of the load cell module to the system ground terminal.
Use the system ground as the third grounding or connect it to the control box.
*2. When connecting multiple load cells, the total resistance of the load cells should be greater than 40 Ω.
4-83
4.13 Wiring Network Modules

4.13.1 AS00SCM-A
SCM
POWER
ERROR
CARD 1
CARD 2
ID 1
FORMAT 1
ID 2
FORMAT 2
_4 COM. RTU
4.13.2 Wiring AS00SCM-A
4.13.2.1 AS00SCM-A module wiring for communication
 COM communication mode
AS00SCM-A module has with two function card slots, CARD1 and CARD2, supporting function cards
AS-F232, AS-F422, and AS-F485. Refer to Section 4.14 for wiring.
 RTU remote control mode
The card slot CARD2 supports AS-FCOPM and both CARD1 & CARD2 support AS-FEN02 and
AS-FPFN02. Refer to Section 4.14 for wiring.
4.13.2.2 AS00SCM-A module wiring for power
 COM: extension via serial ports
Switch the dip switch of the AS00SCM-A module to COM and install the module on the right side of the
AS300 series CPU module. To avoid errors, do not supply extra power to this module.
 RTU remote control mode
Switch the dip switch of the AS00SCM-A module to RTU. This module uses an independent
direct-current power supply. Note the following when wiring.
(1) Keep the input cables, the output cables, and the power cable separate from one another as shown
in the following illustration. Use an independent power supply for this module.
(2) The 24 VDC cable should be twisted and connected to a module within a short distance. Do not
4-84
bundle 110 VAC cable, 220 VAC cable, 24 VDC cable, the (high-voltage high-current) main circuit,
and the I/O signal cable together. The distance between adjacent cables should be more than 100
millimeters.
(3) Use single-wire cables or two-wire cables with a diameter of 20 AWG to 14 AWG. Only use copper
conducting wires with a temperature rating of 60/75°C.
SC M AS IO
DC P owe r S up p ly
2 4V DC
Mi n 1.5 A
Gr ounding 0 V 24 V
Grounding
2 4V
DC Po we r Su p pl y
2 4 VDC
0V 4_
Grounding
Grounding
24V
DC Po we r Supp ly O ther
24VDC dev ice s
0V
Grounding
4.13.3 AS01DNET-A
01 D NE T
MS
NS
1
x10
I N0
I N1 No d e Ad d re ss
x100
RT U Mast er/Slave
4-85
4.13.4 Wiring AS01DNET-A
The network requires one or multiple supply powers to supply the power to each piece of network equipment
via the bus cable. Delta DeviceNet communication cable consists of five wires, among which the power cable
and signal cable occupy two wires respectively and the one on the left is the shielded wire as the above figure
shows. The supply power for the bus is optional and could be a single supply power or multiple supply powers
according to the actual demand.
 Single Supply Power
_4
 Multiple Supply Powers
4-86
4.13.5 AS04SIL-A
04S IL
CQ1 L1 +
P WR
DI 1 L1 -
CQ 2 L2 + MS
NS
D I2 L2 - C1
Q1
CQ 3 L3 +
E1
C2
D I3 L3 -
Q2
CQ 4 E2
L4 +
L4 -
D I4 C3
Q3
● 2 4V E3
C4
0V Q4
E4
4_
4.13.6 Wiring AS04SIL-A
4.13.6.1 IO-Link mode communication and power wiring
(1) Keep the input cables, output cables, and power cable separate from one another. It is suggested to use
independent power for AS04SIL-A. See the example below.
I O-Link Sensor
IO-Link (Mast er) ( wit h DI)
AS 04SI L-A 1 B rown
CQ1 . L1+ . 2 Whit e
DI1
. L1- . 3 B lue
4 Black
CQ2 L2+
DI2 L2-
CQ3 . L3+ . 1 B rown
DI3 L3- .
CQ4 L4+ 3 Blue
4 Black
DI4 L4-
. 24V I O-Link Sensor

(w it hout DI )
0V
0V 24V
D C Power S upply
24VDC
4-87
(2) The 24 VDC cable should be twisted and connected to a module within a short distance.
(3) Do not bundle 110 VAC cable, 220 VAC cable, 24 VDC cable, the (high-voltage high-current) main circuit,
and the I/O signal cable together. The distance between adjacent cables should be more than 100
millimeters.
(4) Connect a cable with a diameter of 14 AWG or higher to ground.
(5) Use single-wire cables or two-wire cables with a diameter of 20 AWG to 14 AWG. Only use copper
conducting wires with a temperature rating of 60/75°C.
4.13.6.2 Digital Input Wiring (SIO Mode)
When the connected device is a PNP type When the connected device is a NPN type
_4 AS 04SI L-A AS 04SI L-A
24 V 24 V
Ln+ Ln+
CQn CQn
Ln- Ln-
0V 0V
2 4V 2 4V
0V 0V
Note: n=1~4
4.13.6.3 Digital Output Wiring (SIO Mode)
A S04S I L-A A S04S I L-A

24 V 24 V
Ln+ + Ln+ +
R
signal signal
CQn CQn
R Load Load
Ln- - Ln- -
0V 0V
2 4V 2 4V
0V 0V
Note: n=1~4
4-88
4.13.6.4 Digital Input Wiring
AS 04SI L-A A S04S I L-A

24 V 24 V
Ln+ Ln+
DI n DI n
Ln- Ln-
0V 0V
2 4V 2 4V
0V 0V
Note: n=1~4
4_
4-89
4.14 Wiring Function Cards

4.14.1 Communicational Function Card Profiles and the Pin Definitions
AS-F232 AS-FCOPM AS-F422/AS-F485
6 9 1 5
8 7 6 54 3 21
1 5
8 1
61.3
59.3
66.3
59.3
59.3
60.8
37 23.9 37 23.9 37 23.9
_4
Pin no. AS-F232 AS-FCOPM AS-F422 AS-F485
1 - CAN_H R+ -
2 TX CAN_L R- -
3 RX GND T+ D+
4 - - T- D-
5 GND - SG SG
6-9 - -
AS-FEN02 / AS-FPFN02
42 25.2
88
61.5
1 TX+ 2 TX- 3 RX+ 4 N/C
5 N/C 6 RX- 7 N/C 8 N/C
4-90
4.14.2 Wiring the Communicational Function Cards
 AS-F232 wiring example:
AS-F232
(DB9 female) + + Superior
machine
DB9 male to DB9 female (standard cable)
AS-F422 Delta HMI DOPA series

1 R+ Tx+ 3 6 RT S-
2 R- Tx- 4 7 RT S+
3 T+ Rx+ 2 8 4_
4 T- Rx- 1 9 CT S+
CT S-
COM2/DB-9

D+ D- SG D+ D- SG SG D+ D-
Terminal Terminal
resistor resistor
(120 ohm) (120 ohm)
Shielded Shielded
cable cable
 AS-FCOPM wiring example:

CAN _H CAN _L GND CAN _H CAN _L GND GND CAN _H CAN _L
Terminal Terminal
resistor Shielded resistor
(120 ohm) cable (120 ohm)
4-91
 AS-FEN02 wiring example:
 Linear Topology
 Star Topology
 Ring Topology
A DLR function is required to create a ring topology. When a switch is needed for topology, the switch
_4 should support the DLR function. If not, the
connection might fail.
 AS-FPFN02 wiring example:
 Linear Topology
 Star Topology
4-92
4.14.3 Analog Function Card Profiles and the Pin Definitions
1 5
59.3
60.8
37 23.9
4_
Pin no. AS-F2AD AS-F2DA
1 V1+ VO1
2 I1+ IO1
3 V2+ VO2
4 I2+ IO2
5 COM COM
4-93
4.14.4 Wiring AS-F2AD
AG
*5
4-w i re v ol tag e in p ut
Shi el de d c abl e * 1 C HX
0V~ +10V 1M
+ V1+
+24V 25 0 CH 1
- *3 I1+
0V 1M
C OM
*4
FE
*5 AG
4-w i re cu r ren t in p ut C HX
4mA~ +20m A Shi el de d c abl e * 1 1M
V2 +
+ *2 250 C H2
+ 24V I2+
- 1M
0V C OM
*4
FE
2 -w ir e cu rr ent i np u t
4mA~ +20m A
*5 AG
+24 V Shi el ded cab l e * 1 CH X
1M
_4
+
V1 +
- *2 250 C H1
I1+
1M
0V C OM
*4
FE
3 -w ir e vo lt ag e inp u t
0V~ +10V Shi el de d c abl e * 1 AG
*5
+ 24V C HX
+ 1M
V 2+
250 C H2
0V - I2+
1M
*4 C OM
FE
3 -w ir e cur re nt i np u t
4mA~ +20m A Shi el de d c abl e * 1 *5 AG
CH X
1M
+2 4V + V1+
*2
250 CH 1
I1+
0V - 1M
C OM
*4
FE
*5. CHX: Every channel can work with the input wiring shown above.
4-94
4.14.5 Wiring AS-F2DA

AC motor dri ve,
rec order, Vol tag e o utp ut
proportioning v alve 0V~+1 0V *4
CHX
VO1 CH1
*2
IO1
Shielde d ca ble*1
COM
*3 AG
FE
AC motor driv e,
recorder, Cu rr en t o u tpu t *4
propor tioning v al ve CHX
4 mA~20 mA
VO2 CH2
IO2
COM
AG
Shie lded cable *1 *3
FE
*2. If noise in the input voltage results in noise interference in the wiring, Connect the module to a capacitor with
a capacitance between 0.1–0.47 μF with a working voltage of 25 V. 4_

*4. CHX: Every channel can work with the input wiring shown above.
4-95
5
Chapter 5 Devices
Table of Contents
5.1 Introduction of Devices ......................................................................... 5-2
5.1.1 Device Table ................................................................................. 5-2
5.1.2 Basic Structure of I/O Storages ....................................................... 5-3
5.1.3 Relation Between the PLC Action and the Device Type ........................ 5-4
5.1.4 Latched Areas in the Device Range .................................................. 5-5
5.2. Device Functions .................................................................................. 5-6

5.2.1 Values and Constants ..................................................................... 5-6
5.2.2 Floating-point Numbers .................................................................. 5-9
5.2.3 Strings ....................................................................................... 5-11
5.2.4 Input Relays (X) .......................................................................... 5-12
5.2.5 Output Relays (Y) ........................................................................ 5-13
5.2.6 Auxiliary Relays (M) ..................................................................... 5-13
5.2.7 Special Auxiliary Relays (SM) ........................................................ 5-13
5.2.8 Stepping Relays (S) ..................................................................... 5-14
5.2.9 Timers (T)................................................................................... 5-14
5.2.10 16-bit Counters ........................................................................... 5-16
5.2.11 32-bit Counters (HC) .................................................................... 5-18
5.2.12 Data Registers (D) ....................................................................... 5-20
5.2.13 Special Data Registers (SR)........................................................... 5-21
5.2.14 Index Register (E)........................................................................ 5-21
5.2.15 File Registers (FR)........................................................................ 5-21
5.3. Assigning I/O Addresses for Modules ................................................. 5-22
5.4 Module Addresses Defined by Software ............................................... 5-23

5.4.4 Starting Addresses for Positioning/Counter Modules .............................. 5-25
5.4.5 Starting Addresses for Network Modules .............................................. 5-26
5.5 Remote Module Addresses Defined by Software .................................. 5-28

5.5.5 Starting Addresses for AS04SIL-A Modules ........................................... 5-34
5-1
5.1 Introduction of Devices

This section describes the values and strings processed by the PLC. It also describes the functions of devices
that include input, output, and auxiliary relays, as well as timers, counters, and data registers. The PLC
simulates external devices in the PLC’s internal memory, so the word “device” is a generic name that refers to
all the internal memory locations in the PLC. A device can be a bit device or a word device. Bit devices
simulate coils, contacts and flags, while word devices simulate registers.
5.1.1 Device Table
Type Device name Number of devices Range
Input relay X 1024 X0.0–X63.15
Output relay Y 1024 Y0.0–Y63.15
D 48,0000 D0.0–D29999.15
Data register
W 48,0000 W0.0–W29999.15 *4
Auxiliary relay M 8192 M0–M8191

Bit device
Special auxiliary relay SM 4096 SM0–SM4095
_5
Stepping relay S 2048 S0–S2047
Timer T 512 T0–T511
Counter C 512 C0–C511
32-bit counter HC 256 HC0–HC255
Input relay X 64 X0–X63
Output relay Y 64 Y0–Y63
D 30000 D0–D29999
Data register
W 30000 W0–W29999 *4
Special auxiliary relay SR 2048 SR0–SR2047
Word device File register FR 65536 FR0–FR65535
Timer T 512 T0–T511
Counter C 512 C0–C511
32-bit counter HC 256（512 words） HC0–HC255
10 E0–E9
Index register E
5 E10–E14 *4
16 bits: -32768 to 32767

Constant*1 Decimal system K
32 bits: -2147483648 to 2147483647
5-2
C h a p t e r 5 D e vi c e
Type Device name Number of devices Range
16 bits: 16#0–16#FFFF
Hexadecimal system 16#
32 bits: 16#0–16#FFFFFFFF
Constant*2
Single-precision floating-
F 32 bits: ±1.17549435-38 to ±3.40282347+ 38
point number
String*3 String “$” 1–31 characters
*1: Constants are indicated by K in the device lists in Chapter 5 and Chapter 6 in the AS Series Programming
Manual. An example when “K50” appears in the AS Series Programming Manual, enter only the number 50 in
ISPSoft.
*2: Floating-point numbers are indicated by F/DF in the device lists in Chapter 5 and Chapter 6 in the AS
Series Programming Manual, but they are represented by decimal points in ISPSoft. For example, for the
floating-point number F500, enter 500.0 in ISPSoft.
*3: Strings are indicated by “$” in Chapter 5 and Chapter 6 in the AS Series Programming Manual, but they
are represented by quotes (“ ”) in ISPSoft. For example, for the string 1234, enter “1234”in ISPSoft.
*4: This is used for editing in ISPSoft only. 5_

5.1.2 Basic Structure of I/O Storages
Access by Access by Modify by

Device Function Force the bit ON/OFF
bits words ISPSoft
X Input relay OK OK OK OK
Y Output relay OK OK OK OK
M Auxiliary relay OK - OK -
Special auxiliary
SM OK - OK -
relay
S stepping relay OK - OK -
T Timer OK OK OK -
C Counter OK OK OK -
HC 32-bit counter OK OK OK -
D Data register OK OK OK OK
SR Special data register - OK OK -
FR File register - OK*1 - -
E Index register - OK OK -
*1: Use an instruction for writing to an FR.
5-3
5.1.3 Relation Between the PLC Action and the Device Type
Device type Non-latched area Latched area
Other File Other

Device Y
PLC action devices register devices
Power: OFF→ON Cleared Cleared Retained Retained
Restore to defaults Cleared Cleared Cleared Cleared
This clears the non-latched area

STOP Cleared Cleared Retained Retained
state.
↓
This retains the non-latched
RUN*1 Retained Retained Retained Retained
area state.
This clears the

SM203 = OFF Cleared Retained Retained Retained
device Y.
This retains the

RUN SM203 = OFF Retained Retained Retained Retained
device Y.
↓
This clears the
_5 STOP*1 SM203 = ON*3 Cleared Cleared Retained Retained
device Y.
This retains the

SM203 = ON Retained Cleared Retained Retained
device Y.
SM204 is ON.This clears all non-latched

Cleared Cleared Retained Retained
areas.*2
SM205 is ON.This clears all latched

Retained Retained Retained Cleared
areas.*2
*1: For state setups, see HWCONFIG in ISPSoft. The PLC STOP->RUN default is “clear the non-latched area
state”. The PLC RUN->STOP default is “clear the state of device Y”.
*2: The timing for clearing the SM is when SM turns from OFF to ON. After PLC completes clearing, the
system turns SM from ON to OFF.
*3: When SM203 is ON, the system clears all non-latched area once when PLC is from RUN to STOP,
available for AS PLC CPU with FW V1.08.30 or later.
5-4
5.1.4 Latched Areas in the Device Range
Device Function Device range Latched area
X Input relay X0–X63 All devices are non-latched.
Y Output relay Y0–Y63 All devices are non-latched.
M*1 Auxiliary relay M0–M8191 The default range is M6000–M8191.
Some devices are latched and cannot be
changed.
SM Special auxiliary relay SM0–SM2047
Refer to the list of special auxiliary relays for more
information.
S*1 Stepping relay S0–S1023 The default range is S512–S1023
T Timer T0–T511 All devices are non-latched.
C*1 Counter C0–C511 The default range is C448–C511
HC*1 32-bit counter HC0–HC255 The default range is HC128–HC255
D0–D29999 The default range is D20000–D23999

D*1 Data register 5_
W0–W29999 Use this for editing in ISPSoft only.
FR File register FR0–FR65535 All devices are latched.
Some are latched and cannot be changed. Refer
SR Special data register SR0–SR2047 to the list of special data registers for more
information.
E0–E9 All devices are non-latched.

E Index register
E10–E14 Use this for editing in ISPSoft only.
*1: For the latched area setups, see HWCONFIG in ISPSoft. Setting the latched area means the other areas
show as non-latched areas. The range of latched areas cannot exceed the device range. For example, if
you set the M600–M7000 as latched areas, M0–M5999 and M7001–M8191 become non-latched areas.
5-5
5.2. Device Functions

Procedure for processing the program in the PLC:
 Regenerating the input signal
1. Before executing the program, the external input
signal state is read into the memory for the input
signal.
Input ter minal X

2. When the program is executed, the state in the
Regener ating the input signal memory location for the input signal does not change
even if the input signal changes from ON to OFF or

Device memory
from OFF to ON. The input signal is not refreshed
Device memory
Proc es s in g th e prog ram until the next scan begins.
 Processing the program
Device memory After the input signal is refreshed, the instructions in the
program are executed in order from the starting address

Regener ating the output s ignal of the program. The results are stored in the device
and sending it to the output ter minal
_5 memories.
 Regenerating the state of the output
After the instruction END is executed, the device memory
state in the device memory is sent to the specified output
terminal.
5.2.1 Values and Constants
Name Description
Bit A bit is the basic unit in the binary system. Its state is either 1 or 0.
A nibble is composed of four consecutive bits (for example b3–b0). Nibbles

Nibble
can represent 0–9 in the decimal system or 0–F in the hexadecimal system.
A byte is composed of two consecutive nibbles (i.e. 8 bits, b7–b0). Bytes can
Byte
represent 00–FF in the hexadecimal system.
A word is composed of two consecutive bytes (i.e. 16 bits, b15–b0). Words

Word
can represent 0000–FFFF in the hexadecimal system.
A double word is composed of two consecutive words (i.e. 32 bits, b31–b0).
Double word Double words can represent 00000000–FFFFFFFF in the hexadecimal
system.
5-6
The relation among bits, nibbles, bytes, words, and double words in the binary system is shown below.
DW D ouble w ord
W1 W0
W ord
BY3 BY2 BY1 BY0 B yt e
N B7 N B6 N B5 N B4 N B3 N B2 N B1 N B0
N ib ble
b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 B it
The PLC uses four types of values to execute the operation according to different control purposes. The following
illustrates the values of these functions.:
1. Binary number (BIN)
The PLC uses the binary system to operate the values.
2. Decimal number (DEC)
The PLC uses decimal numbers for;
 The setting value of a timer (T) or the setting value of a counter (C/HC); for example, TMR C0 50 5_
(constant K).
 The device number; for example, M10 and T30 (device number)
 The number before or after the decimal point; for example, X0.0, Y0.11, and D10.0 (device number).
 The constant K: used as the operand in an applied instruction. For example, MOV 123 D0
(constant K).
3. Binary-coded decimal (BCD)
A decimal value is represented by a nibble or four bits, so that sixteen consecutive bits represent a
four-digit decimal value.
4. Hexadecimal number (HEX)
The PLC uses hexadecimal numbers for;
 the constant 16#: used as the operand in an applied instruction; for example, MOV 16#1A2B D0
(hexadecimal constant).
5-7
The following table shows the corresponding values.
Binary Number Decimal Number Binary Code Decimal Hexadecimal Number
(BIN) (DEC) (BCD) (HEX)
Constant K, Instant 16#,

PLC internal execution BCD related instruction
Device number Device number
0000 0 0000 0
0001 1 0001 1
0010 2 0010 2
0011 3 0011 3
0100 4 0100 4
0101 5 0101 5
0110 6 0110 6
0111 7 0111 7
1000 8 1000 8
_5
1001 9 1001 9
1010 10 - A
1011 11 - B
1100 12 - C
1101 13 - D
1110 14 - E
1111 15 - F
10000 16 0001 0000 10
10001 17 0001 0001 11
5-8
5.2.2 Floating-point Numbers
The floating-point numbers are represented by decimal points in ISPSoft. For example, the floating-point number
of 500 is 500.0. Refer to Section 2.2.2 in the AS Series Programming Manual for more information.
5.2.2.1 Single-precision Floating-point Numbers
Floating-point numbers are represented by the 32-bit register. The representation adopts the IEEE754 standard,
and the format is as follows.
8 -b it 2 3- bi t
S E xpo ne nt Ma nti ssa
b 31 b0
S ig n b it
0 : Po siti ve
1 : Neg ati ve
Equation:
(− 1)S × 2 E − B × 1.M ; B = 127
The single-precision floating-point numbers range from ±2-126 to ±2+128, and correspond to the range from
±1.1755×10-38 to ±3.4028×10+38.
The AS series PLC uses two consecutive registers to form a 32-bit floating-point number. Take (D1, D0) for 5_
example.
D1 (b 15 ~b 0) D0 (b 15 ~b 0)
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
S E7 E6 E5 E1 E0 A22 A21 A20 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0
b31 b30 b29 b28 b24 b23 b22 b21 b20 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
E xp on en t ( 8 b its ) Ma nt iss a (2 3b it s )
T he pos ition w here the d eci mal point is hid den
Ma nt iss a s ign b it (0 : Po s it iv e; 1: Ne ga tiv e)

W hen b 0~ b3 1 a re z eros , t he c on te nt is z ero .
Example 1:
23 is represented by a single-precision floating-point number.
Step 1: Convert 23 into the binary number, i.e. 23.0=10111.
Step 2: Normalize the binary number, i.e. 10111=1.0111 ×24 (0111 is the mantissa, and 4 is the exponent.).
Step 3: Get the value of the exponent.
∵ E-B=4→E-127=4 ∴ E=131=100000112
Step 4: Combine the sign bit, the exponent, and the mantissa to form the floating-point number.
0 10000011 011100000000000000000002=41B8000016
5-9
Example 2:
-23 is represented by a single-precision floating-point number.
Converting -23.0 into the floating-point number uses the same steps as converting 23.0 into the floating-point
number, except that the sign bit is 1.
1 10000011 011100000000000000000002=C1B8000016
5.2.2.2 Decimal Floating-point Numbers
-23 is represented by a single-precision floating-point number.
Converting -23.0 into the floating-point number uses the same steps as converting 23.0 into the floating-point
number, except that the sign bit is 1.
1 10000011 011100000000000000000002=C1B8000016
5.2.2.2 Decimal Floating-point Numbers
 Single-precision floating-point numbers and double-precision floating-point numbers can be converted

_5
into decimal floating-point numbers so people can read them. However, the PLC uses single-precision
floating-point numbers and double-precision floating-point numbers internally.
 A 32-bit decimal floating-point number is represented by two consecutive registers. The constant is
stored in the register whose number is smaller while the exponent is stored in the register whose
number is bigger. Take (D1, D0) for example.
[Ex ponent D1]

D eci mal f lo ati ng -po in t nu mb er=[C on sta nt D 0 ]* 1 0
Base number D0=±1,000 to ±9,999
Exponent D1=-41–+35
The base number 100 does not exist in D0 because 100 is represented by 1,000×10-1. 32-bit decimal floating-
point numbers range from ±1175×10-41 to ±402×10+35.
5-10
5.2.3 Strings
The PLC can process strings composed of ASCII codes (*1). A complete string begins with a start character and
ends with an ending character (NULL code). Strings can be a maximum of 31 characters, and the ending
character 16#00 is added automatically in ISPSoft.
1. No string (NULL code) is moved.
D0=0 (NULL)
2. The string has an even number of characters.
5_
D0 16#62 (b) 16#61 (a)
D1 16#64 (d) 16#63 (b)
D2 0 (NULL)
3. The string has an odd number if characters.
D0 16#62 (b) 16#61 (a)
D1 16#64 (d) 16#63 (b)
D2 0 (NULL) 16#65 (e)
5 - 11
*1: ASCII code chart
Hex 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
ASCII                
Hex 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F
ASCII                
Hex 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F
ASCII SP ! " # $ % & （） * + ， - . /
Hex 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F
ASCII 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ： ; < = > ?
Hex 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F
ASCII @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
Hex 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F
ASCII P Q R S T U V W X Y Z     
Hex 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F
ASCII ` a b c d e f g h i j k l M n o
Hex 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F
_5 ASCII p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~ 
Note:  represents an invisible character. Please do not use it.
5.2.4 Input Relays (X)
 Input function
The input is connected to the input device (external devices such as button switches, rotary switches, and
number switches), and PLC reads the input signal. You can use input contact A or contact B several times
in the program, and the ON/OFF input state varies with the ON/OFF input device state.
 Input number (the decimal number):
For the PLC, the input numbers start from X0.0. The number of inputs varies with the number of inputs on
the digital input/output modules. The inputs are numbered according to the order in which the digital
input/output modules are connected to the CPU module. The maximum number of inputs for the PLC is
8192, and the input number range is between X0.0 and X511.15.
 Input type: Inputs are classified into two types.
1. Regenerated inputs: PLC reads the state of a regenerated input before the program is executed. For
example, LD X0.0.
2. Direct input: The state of a direct input is read by the PLC during the execution of the instructions. For
example, LD DX0.0.
5-12
5.2.5 Output Relays (Y)
 Output function
The output sends the ON/OFF signal to drive the load connected to the output, such as an external signal
lamp, a digital display, or an electromagnetic valve. There are four types of outputs: relays, transistors (NPN
and PNP), and TRIACs (thyristors). You can use the output contact A or contact B several times in the
program. Use output Y only once in the program; otherwise, according the PLC’s program-scanning
principle, the state of the output depends on the circuit connected to the last output Y in the program.
 Output number (the decimal number)
For the PLC, the output numbers start from Y0.0. The number of outputs varies with the number of outputs
on the digital input/output modules. The outputs are numbered according to the order in which the digital
input/output modules are connected to the PLC. The maximum number of outputs on the PLC is 1024, and
the range is between Y0.0 and Y63.15.
An output that is not used as an output device can be used as a general device.
 Output types
Outputs are classified into two types.
1. Regenerated output: The state of a regenerated output is not written until the program executes the
instruction END according to the states of the outputs. For example, OUT Y0.0. 5_
2. Direct output: The state of a direct output is written by the PLC during the execution of the instructions
according to the states of the outputs. For example, OUT DY0.0.
5.2.6 Auxiliary Relays (M)
The auxiliary relay has contact A and contact B. It can be used several times in the program. You can combine
the control loops with the auxiliary relay, but you cannot drive the external load with the auxiliary relay. You can
use the auxiliary relays in either of two ways.
1. For general use: In general use, if an electrical power interruption occurs when the PLC is running,
the auxiliary relay is reset to OFF. When the power is restored, the auxiliary relay
remains OFF.
2. For latched use: In latched use, if an electrical power interruption occurs when the PLC is running,
the state of the auxiliary relay states for latched use is retained. When the power
supply is restored, the state remains the same as before the power interruption.
5.2.7 Special Auxiliary Relays (SM)
Every special auxiliary relay has its own specific function. Refer to section 2.2.7 in the AS Series Programming
Manual for more information.
5-13
5.2.8 Stepping Relays (S)
You can easily see the stepping relay in industrial automation to set the procedure. It is the most basic device
in sequential function chart (SFC) programming. Refer to the ISPSoft User Manual for more information on
using sequential function charts.
There are 2048 stepping relays, (S0–S2047). Every stepping relay is like an output relay in that it has an
output coil, contact A, and contact B. You can use it several times in the program, but the relay cannot directly
drive the external load. You can use the stepping relay as a general auxiliary relay when it is not used in a
sequential function chart.
5.2.9 Timers (T)
• 100 millisecond timer: The timer specified by the instruction TMR takes 100 milliseconds as the timing
unit.
• 1 millisecond timer: The timer specified by the instruction TMRH takes 1 millisecond as the timing unit.
• The accumulative timers are ST0–ST511. If you want to use the device-monitoring function, these timers
_5
can monitor T0–T511.
• If you use the same timer repeatedly in a program, including in different instructions TMR and TMRH, the
timer setting value is the one that the timer matches first.
• If you use the same timer repeatedly in a program, the timer is OFF when one of the conditional contacts
is OFF.
• If you use the same timer in a program as the timer for a subroutine’s exclusive use and an accumulative
timer in the program, it is OFF when one of the conditional contacts is OFF.
• When the timer is switched from ON to OFF and the conditional contact is ON, the timer is reset and
counts again.
• When the instruction TMR is executed, the specified timer coil is ON and the timer begins to count. When
the value of the timer matches the timer setting value (value of the timer ≧ setting value), the contact
state is ON.
5-14
A. General-purpose timer
When the instruction TMR is executed, the general-purpose timer begins to count. When the value of the
timer matches the timer setting value, the output coil is ON.
 When X0.0=ON and the timer takes 100 ms as the timing unit, the output coil T0 is ON when the
value of the timer = setting value100.
 When X0.0=OFF or the power is off, the value of the timer is 0 and the output coil T0 is OFF.
10 sec
5_
X0. 0
SV: K100
T0(PV)
Y0. 0
B. Accumulative timer
When the instruction TMR is executed, the accumulative timer begins to count. When the value of the
timer matches the timer setting value, the output coil is ON. As long as you add the letter S in front of the
letter T, the timer becomes an accumulative timer. When the conditional contact is OFF, the value of the
accumulative timer is not reset. When the conditional contact is ON, the timer counts from the current
value.
 When X0.0=ON and the timer T250 takes 100 ms as the timing unit, the output coil T250 is ON
when the value of the timer = timer setting value100.
 When X0.0=OFF or the power is off, the timer T250 stops counting, and the value of the timer
stays the same. When X0.0=ON, the value of the timer is accumulating value When the
accumulated value = timer setting value 100, the output coil T250 is ON.
5-15
T1 T2 T1+T2=10 sec
X0. 0
SV: K100
T250(PV)
Y0. 0
C. Timer used in the function block
Use the T412–T511 timers for the function block or the interrupt.
_5
When the instruction TMR or END is executed, the timer used in the functional block begins to count.
When the value of the timer matches the timer setting value, the output coil is ON.
If you use the general-purpose timer is used in the function block or the interrupt, and the functional or
interrupt is not executed, the timer cannot count correctly.
5.2.10 16-bit Counters
 Characteristics of the 16-bit counter
Item 16-bit counter
Type General type
Number C0–C511
Direction Counting up
Setting value 0–32,767
Specificying the counter setting The setting value can be either the constant or the value in the data
value register.
The counter stops counting when the value of the counter matches the
Change of the current value
setting value.
Output contact The contact is ON when the value of the counter matches the setting value.
5-16
Item 16-bit counter
When the instruction RST is executed, the current value is cleared to zero,
Reset
and the contact is reset to OFF.
Action of the contact After the scan completes, the contact acts.
 Counter function
Each time the input switches from OFF to ON, the value of the counter is the same as the output coil. Use
either the decimal constant or the value in the data register as the counter setting value.
 16-bit counter:
1. Setting range: 0–32,767. The setting values 0 and 1 both mean the same thing in that the output contact
is ON when the counter counts for the first time.
2. For the general-purpose counter, the current value of the counter is cleared when there is a power
interruption. If the counter is latching, the current value of the counter and the state of the contact before
the power interruption are retained. The latched counter counts from the current value when the power
supply is restored.
5_
3. If you use the instruction MOV or ISPSoft to transmit a value bigger than the counter setting value to the
current value register C0, the contact of the counter C0 is ON and the current value becomes the same
as the counter setting value next time X0.1 switches from OFF to ON.
4. Use either the constant or the value in the data register as the counter setting value.
5. The counter setting value can be a positive or negative value. If the counter counts up from 32,767, the
next value is 0.
6. Here we uses the most common application as an example. You can use this counter with API 1003 CNT
instruction; refer to CNT instruction for more description.
Example:
5-17
1. When X0.0=ON, the instruction RST will be executed and the current value of C0 will be reset to zero and
the output contact of the counter C0 will be FF.
2. When X0.1 is from OFF to ON, the value of the counter increases by one increment.
3. When the value of the counter C0 reached the setting value 5, the contact of the counter C0 will be ON
(the current value of C0 = the setting value = 5). After that the trigger from X0.1 will not be accepted by
C0 and the current value of C0 will stay at the value 5.
X 0.0
X 0.1
5
4 (SV)
C0 ( PV ) 3
2
1
0 0
Y 0.0 ,C0
_5
5.2.11 32-bit Counters (HC)
 Characteristics of the 32-bit counter
Item 32-bit counter
Type Up/down counter Up counter High-speed counter
Number HC0–HC63 HC64–HC199 HC200–HC255
Direction Counting up/down Counting up Counting up/down
Setting value -2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
Specification of the The setting value can be either the constant or the value occupying two data
setting value registers (32-bit).
Change of the current The counter keeps counting even after the value of the counter matches the setting
value value.
The contact is ON when the value of the addition counter matches the setting value.
Output contact The contact is reset to OFF when the value of the subtraction counter matches the
setting value.
When the RST instruction is executed, the current value is cleared to zero, and the
Reset
contact is reset to OFF.
5-18
Item 32-bit counter
Action of the contact After the DCNT instruction scan is complete, the contact activates.
 32-bit general-purpose addition/subtraction counter
1. Setting range: -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647
2. The switch between the 32-bit general-purpose addition counters and the 32-bit general-purpose
subtraction counters depends on the states of the special auxiliary relays SM621–SM684. For example,
the counter HC0 is the addition counter when SM621 is OFF, but HC0 is the subtraction counter when
SM621 is ON. Use either the constant or the value in the data registers as the setting value for the
counter, and the setting value can be a positive or a negative number. If you use the value in the data
registers as the setting value of the counter, the setting value occupies two consecutive registers.
3. For the general-purpose counter, the current value of the counter is cleared when there is a power
interruption. If the counter is latched, the current value of the counter and the state of the contact before
the power interruption are retained. The latched counter counts from the current value when the power
supply is restored.
4. If the counter counts up from 2,147,483,647, the next current value is -2,147,483,648. If the counter 5_
counts down from -2,147,483,648, the next current value is 2,147,483,647.
5. Here we uses the most common application as an example. You can use this counter with API 1004
DCNT instruction; refer to DCNT instruction for more description.
 32-bit high speed addition/subtraction counter
Refer to the DCNT instruction description (API 1004) in the AS Series Programming Manual for more details.
Example:
5-19
1. X10.0 drives SM621 to determine counting direction (up/down) of HC0.
2. When X11.0 goes from OFF to ON, RST instruction executes, the PV in HC0 is cleared to 0, and its
contact is OFF.
3. When X12.0 goes from OFF to ON, PV of HC0 counts up (plus 1) or down (minus 1).
4. When PV in HC0 changes from -6 to -5, the contact HC0 goes from OFF to ON. When PV in HC0
changes from -5 to -6, the contact HC0 goes from ON to OFF.
Accu mul ati vel y Accu mul ati vel y

X10.0 i ncr ea sin g P rog re ssive ly i ncr ea sin g
d ecre asi ng
X11.0
X12.0
5
4 4
3 3
HC0 2 2
1 1
(PV )
0 0 0
-1
-2
-3 -3
-4 -4
_5 -5
-6 -6
-5
Wh en t he o u tpu t c on tact w as O N -7 -7
-8
Y0.0,
HC0 Con tacts
5.2.12 Data Registers (D)
The data register stores 16-bit data. The highest bit represents either a positive sign or a negative sign, and
the values that you can store in the data registers are between -32,768 to +32,767. Two 16-bit registers can
be combined into a 32-bit register, that is, (D+1, D) in which the register whose number is smaller represents
the lower 16 bits. The highest bit represents either a positive sign or a negative sign, and the values that you
can store in the data registers are between -2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647. Four 16-bit registers can be
combined into a 64-bit register; that is, (D+3, D+2, D+1, D) in which the register whose number is smaller
represents the lower 16 bits. The highest bit represents either a positive sign or a negative sign, and the
values which can be stored in the data registers are between -9,223,372,036,854,776 to
+9,223,372,036,854,775,807. You can also use the data registers to refresh the values in the control registers
in the modules other than digital I/O modules. Refer to the ISPSoft User Manual for more information about
refreshing the values in the control registers.
5-20
The registers can be classified into three types according to their properties.
1. General-purpose register: when the PLC begins to run or is disconnected, the value in the register
clears to zero. To retain the data when the PLC begins to RUN, refer to the ISPSoft User Manual for more
information. Notice that the value still clears to zero when the PLC is disconnected.
2. Latched register: if the PLC is disconnected, the data in the latched register is not cleared. In other words,
the value before the disconnection is still retained. To clear the data in the latched area, use the RST or
ZRST instruction.
3. Data exchange area: When the PLC is connected with a module, the PLC exchanges data with the
connected module at every scan cycle. And the data is stored in data registers D26000 to D29999. Refer
to the ISPSoft > HWCONFIG > Module > Device Setting > Normal Exchange Area to see the data register
range and refer to Chapter 8 for more descriptions.
5.2.13 Special Data Registers (SR)
Every special data register has its definition and specific function. Refer to section 2.2.14 in the AS Series
Programming Manual for more information. 5_
5.2.14 Index Register (E)
The index register is a 16-bit data register. Like the general register, you can read data from it and write data
into it. However, it is mainly used as the index register. The index registers range from E0–E9. Refer to section
4.4 in the AS Series Programming Manual for more information about using index registers.
5.2.15 File Registers (FR)
The AS Series PLC provides you with file registers for storing larger numbers of parameters. You can edit,
upload, and download the system parameters with ISPSoft. You can read the values in a file register can be
read while operating the PLC. Refer to the MEMW instruction (API 2303) in the AS Series Programming
Manual for more information about how to write to a file register.
5-21
5.3. Assigning I/O Addresses for Modules

This chapter explains how to assign input and output devices to an AS Series input/output module.
Using HWCONFIG in ISPSoft
The following picture shows the HWCONFIG window in ISPSoft. Please refer to Chapter 8 for more
information on the hardware configuration.
_5
 Module addresses defined by software
Through HWCONFIG, the system automatically assigns a starting address to every slot of an input/output
module in ISPSoft.
 Remote module addresses defined by software
You use HWCONFIG to assign a starting address to a remote module in ISPSoft. Double-click the CPU
module and select Function Card 2. Change the Card 2 Detect mode to Manual and then select AS-FCOPM
from the Manual Select Card. You can assign a starting address to the first remote module installed on the
right side of the I/O module slot. Then the following I/O modules are assigned addresses automatically and
consecutively.
5-22
5.4 Module Addresses Defined by Software

5.4.1 Starting Addresses for Digital Input/Output Modules
HWCONFIG automatically assigns input/output devices to a digital input/output module in ISPSoft according
to the number of inputs and outputs in the digital input/output module (X0.0–X0.15, X1.0–X1.15, X2.0–
X2.15…; Y0.0–Y0.15, Y1.0–Y1.15, Y2.0–Y2.15). The default starting addresses are shown below.
Note: each digital I/O module reserves 20 words of data devices and it assigns consecutive data devices
automatically starting from D28000.
 AS332T/AS332P: There are 16 inputs. The input and output device range occupies 16 bits. (Xn.0–Xn.15),
(Yn.0–Yn.15) and 20 words of data devices.
 AS324MT: There are 16 outputs. The input and output device range occupies 16 bits. (Xn.0–Xn.15),
(Yn.0–Yn.15) and 20 words of data devices.
 08AM: There are eight inputs. The input device range occupies 16 bits (Xn.0–Xn.15) and 20 words of
data devices.
 08AN: There are eight outputs. The output device range occupies 16 bits (Yn.0–Yn.15) and 20 words of
data devices. 5_
 16AM: There are 16 inputs. The input device range occupies 16 bits (Xn.0–Xn.15) and 20 words of data
devices.
 16AN: There are 16 outputs. The output device range occupies 16 bits (Yn.0–Yn.15) and 20 words of
data devices.
 16AP: There are eight inputs and eight outputs. The input and output device range occupies 16 bits.
(Xn.0–Xn.15), (Yn.0–Yn.15) and 20 words of data devices.
 32AM: There are 32 inputs. The input device range occupies 32 bits (Xn.0–Xn+1.15) and 20 words of
data devices.
 32AN: There are 32 outputs. The output device range occupies 32 bits (Yn.0–Yn+1.15) and 20 words of
data devices.
data devices.
data devices.
5-23
Note: though there is no information on the occupied data devices in the image shown above, the CPU
reserves 20 words of data devices.

_5
5.4.2 Starting Addresses for Analog Input/Output Modules
HWCONFIG automatically assigns consecutive input and output data registers starting from D28000 to an
analog input/output module in ISPSoft according to the number of registers defined for the analog input/output
module.
1. 04AD: There are four input channels. The input device range occupies 20 data registers.
2. 08AD: There are eight input channels. The input device range occupies 20 data registers.
3. 004DA: There are four output channels. The input device range occupies two data registers and the
output device range occupies 18 data registers.
4. 06XA: There are four input channels and two output channels. The input device range occupies 10 data
registers, and the output device range occupies 10 data registers.
5-24
5.4.3 Starting Addresses for Temperature Measurement Modules
HWCONFIG automatically assigns consecutive input and output data registers starting from D28000 to a
temperature measurement module in ISPSoft according to the number of registers defined for the temperature
measurement module.
1. 04RTD: There are four input channels. The input device range occupies 20 data registers.
2. 06RTD: There are six input channels. The input device range occupies 20 data registers.
3. 04TC: There are four input channels. The input device range occupies 20 data registers.
4. 08TC: There are eight input channels. The input device range occupies 20 data registers.
5_
5.4.4 Starting Addresses for Positioning/Counter Modules
network module in ISPSoft according to the number of registers defined for the network module.
1. 02PU: The input device range occupies 20 data registers.
2. 04PU: The input device range occupies 20 data registers.
3. 02HC: The input device range occupies 20 data registers.
5-25
5.4.5 Starting Addresses for Network Modules
network module in ISPSoft according to the number of registers defined for the network module.
• SCM, as a general COM communication module:

Communication status and communication method; the input device range occupies 20 data registers,
and the output device range occupies 20 data registers.
• Remote module SCM: the input device range and output device range each occupy 10 data registers.
_5
• AS01DNET-A: when selecting the COM communication mode, its communication status and
communication method: the input device range occupies 20 data registers, and the output device range
occupies 20 data registers.
5-26
• AS04SIL-A: when selecting the COM communication mode, its communication status and communication
method: the input device range occupies 20 data registers.
5.4.6 Starting Addresses for Load Cell Modules
HWCONFIG automatically assigns consecutive input and output data registers starting from D28000 to a load
cell module in ISPSoft according to the number of registers defined for the load cell module.
• 02LC: The input device range occupies 7 data registers and the output device range occupies 13 data
registers.
5_
5-27
5.5 Remote Module Addresses Defined by Software

Double-click the CPU module to see the setting page where you can set up the PLC parameters. Select
options on the left under the General or Data Exchange tab, you can see the setting items on the right under
the tab of the option you have selected.
• Click Function Card2 on the left to see the Function Card 2 Setting tab on the right and find setting
items under the tab.
_5
• For Card 2 Detect mode, select Manual. For Manual Select Card, select AS-FCOPM Card.
5-28
• For AS-FCOPM Working mode, select AS Remote Communication, and then enter the number of the
connected AS Remote module. Click Upate and then close the setting page.
• You can see the new remote module on the main page. For the configurations of remote modules, refer
to the configurations of modules.
Note: You can add up to 15 modules in the remote group. The total number of I/O modules and
connected remote modules cannot exceed 32. Only digital I/O modules, analog I/O modules, 5_
temperature measurement modules, load cell modules and AS04SIL-A can be used for remote modules.
5-29
• Change the address of the remote module

You can change the remote module address by simply double-click the behind the Input Device Range and
then you can see the Manual Assignment window. Define the starting address of your remote module and click
OK to confirm and save the change.
_5
5-30
5.5.1 Starting Addresses for Digital Input/Output Modules
The remote module AS00SCM-A can connect to up to eight modules on its right side. HWCONFIG
automatically assigns input and output devices to a digital input/output module in ISPSoft according to the
number of inputs/outputs in the digital input/output module (X1.0–X1.15, X2.0–X2.15…；Y0.0–Y0.15, Y1.0–

Y1.15, Y2.0–Y2.15). The default starting addresses are shown below.
Note: each digital I/O module reserves 20 words of data devices and it assigns consecutive data devices
automatically starting from D29000.
 08AM: There are eight inputs. The input device range occupies 16 bits (Xn.0–Xn.15) and 20 words of
data devices.
 08AN: There are eight outputs. The output device range occupies 16 bits (Yn.0–Yn.15) and 20 words of
data devices.
 16AM: There are 16 inputs. The input device range occupies 16 bits (Xn.0–Xn.15) and 20 words of data
devices.
 16AN: There are 16 outputs. The output device range occupies 16 bits (Yn.0–Yn.15) and and 20 words of
data devices.
5_
 16AP: There are eight inputs and eight outputs. The input and output device range occupies 16 bits.
(Xn.0–Xn.15), (Yn.0–Yn.15) and 20 words of data devices.
data devices.
data devices.
data devices.
data devices.
5-31
5.5.2 Starting Addresses for Analog Input/Output Modules
HWCONFIG automatically assigns input and output data registers to an analog input/output module in ISPSoft
according to the number of registers defined for the analog input/output module. The default starting address
is D29000.
_5 1. 04AD: There are four input channels. The input device range occupies 20 data registers.
2. 08AD: There are eight input channels. The input device range occupies 20 data registers.
3. 004DA: There are four output channels. The input device range occupies two data registers and the
output device range occupies 18 data registers.
4. 06XA: There are four input channels, and two output channels. The input device range occupies 10 data
registers, and the output device range occupies 10 data registers.
5-32
5.5.3 Starting Addresses for Temperature Measurement Modules
You can use HWCONFIG to assign input registers to a temperature measurement module in ISPSoft. The
default starting address is D29000.
1. 04RTD: There are four input channels. The input device range occupies 20 data registers.
2. 06RTD: There are six input channels. The input device range occupies 20 data registers.
3. 04TC: There are four input channels. The input device range occupies 20 data registers.
4. 08TC: There are eight input channels. The input device range occupies 20 data registers.
5_
5.5.4 Starting Addresses for Load Cell Modules
HWCONFIG automatically assigns input data registers to a load cell module in ISPSoft according to the
number of registers defined for the load cell module. The default starting address is D29000.
• 02LC: The input device range occupies 7 data registers and the output device range occupies 13 data
registers.
5-33
5.5.5 Starting Addresses for AS04SIL-A Modules
• AS04SIL-A: when selecting the COM communication mode, its communication status and communication
method: the input device range occupies 20 data registers.
_5
5-34
6
Chapter 6 Writing a Program
Table of Contents
6.1 Quick Start ........................................................................................ 6-2
6.1.1 Example ....................................................................................... 6-2
6.1.2 Hardware ...................................................................................... 6-2
6.1.3 Program ....................................................................................... 6-3
6.2 Procedure for Creating a Project in ISPSoft ....................................... 6-3
6.3 Creating a Project .............................................................................. 6-4
6.4 Hardware Configuration .................................................................... 6-5
6.5 Creating a Program ........................................................................... 6-6

6.5.1 Adding a Ladder Diagram ................................................................ 6-6
6.5.2 Basic Editing ─ Creating a Contact and a Coil .................................... 6-8
6.5.3 Basic Editing ─ Inserting a Network and Typing an Instruction .......... 6-11
6.5.4 Basic Editing ─ Selecting a Network and Operation .......................... 6-13
6.5.5 Basic Editing ─ Connecting a Contact in Parallel .............................. 6-16
6.5.6 Basic Editing ─ Editing a Comment ................................................ 6-17
6.5.7 Basic Editing ─ Inserting an Applied Instruction .............................. 6-18
6.5.8 Basic Editing ─ Creating a Comparison Contact and Typing a Constant6-20
6.5.9 Writing a Program ........................................................................ 6-21
6.5.10 Checking and Compiling a Program ................................................ 6-22
6.6 Testing and Debugging a Program ................................................... 6-23

6.6.1 Creating a Connection .................................................................. 6-23
6.6.2 Downloading a Program and Parameters ......................................... 6-26
6.6.3 Connection Test ........................................................................... 6-28
6.7 Setting a Real-time Clock ................................................................ 6-36
6-1
6.1 Quick Start

This chapter provides a simple example showing you how to create a traditional ladder diagram in ISPSoft.
Because you may not be familiar with IEC 61131-3 and may not understand the functions provided by ISPSoft,
the chapter does not introduce programming concepts related to IEC 61131-3. For example, the chapter
does not include POUs, function blocks, variables, and so on.
6.1.1 Example
When the equipment in this example operates, the parts on the conveyor move from left to right. If a sensor
senses that a part is under an injector, the PLC sends a trigger signal to the injector, and the injector injects
the glue. The injection length is set externally and is not controlled by the PLC program . However, the PLC
program must be able to turn the trigger signal OFF so that the trigger signal can be sent next time. There are
two injectors above the conveyor, and the two injectors inject glue in the same way.
There is a sensor at the left side of the conveyor. When a part passes the sensor, the sensor value increases
by one increment. When the sensor value is 100, the internal completion flag is set to ON. The flag state can
be used by other procedures later. However, this example does not introduce the use of flag states.
_6
6.1.2 Hardware
In this example, the AS series CPU module used is the AS332T-A.
Type ID Description
Digital input X0.0 START button
Digital input X0.1 STOP button
Digital input X0.2 In position sensor 1
Digital input X0.3 In position sensor 2
Digital input X0.4 Counting sensor
Digital output Y0.0 Conveyer
Digital output Y0.1 Trigger signal for injector 1
Digital output Y0.2 Trigger signal for injector 2
6-2
Chapter 6 W riting a Program
6.1.3 Program
(1) When the START button (X0.0) switches from OFF to ON, the internal operation flag is set to ON, and the
conveyor (Y0.0) starts. When the STOP button (X0.1) switches from OFF to ON, an error occurs (the
error flag is ON), the operation flag is reset to OFF, and the conveyor stops.
(2) When the in position sensor 1 (X0.2) is ON, the trigger signal for injector 1 (Y0.1) is set to ON. When the
in position sensor 1 is OFF, the trigger signal for injector 1 is reset to OFF.
(3) When the in position sensor 2 (X0.3) is ON, the trigger signal for injector 2 (Y0.2) is set to ON. When the
in position sensor 2 is OFF, the trigger signal for injector 2 is reset to OFF.
(4) When the counting sensor (X0.4) switches from OFF to ON, the sensor value increases by one
increment. If the sensor value is larger than or equal to 100, the internal completion flag is set to ON.
6.2 Procedure for Creating a Project in ISPSoft

This section shows you the procedure for creating a project in ISPSoft. You can adjust the procedure
according to your needs.
 Hardware configuration
You set the parameters such as a range of latched devices and a port number in a PLC. You configure
the modules with an AS Series CPU module, and set the parameters in these modules.
6_
 Network configuration
If a system uses a network architecture, or devices need to exchange data, use the network configuration
tool NWCONFIG in ISPSoft to configure a network and exchange data with COM as well as Ethernet.
 Programming
After you write a program in ISPSoft, compile the program. If the compiling is unsuccessful, messages in
the Compile Message page show where the errors occur.
 Testing and debugging
Download the compiled program, the hardware configuration, and the network configuration to a PLC.
You can then test and debug the program online with the functions provided by ISPSoft.
Because the example introduced in this chapter does not discuss a network configuration, you only perform
the following procedure.
6-3
6.3 Creating a Project

After you start ISPSoft, on the File menu, point to New, and then click New to create a new project. You can
also create a new project by clicking on the toolbar after you start ISPSoft.
In the Create a New Project dialog box, type a project name in the Project Name box and a path in the
Drive/Path box, select a PLC in the PLC Type drop-down list box, and then click OK. The PLC in this
example is the AS332T.
_6
After you create the project, a project management area appears at the left side of the main screen. The
relation between the items listed in the project management area is represented by a hierarchical tree
structure. If the project management area does not appear, on the View menu, click Workspace , or click
on the toolbar.
6-4
6.4 Hardware Configuration

After you double-click HWCONFIG in the project management area, the HWCONFIG window appears.
In the HWCONFIG window, the default setting is for a CPU module. Refer to Chapter 8 for more information
on settings for other types of modules.
When the hardware configuration is complete, download the configuration and the settings to the CPU module
to take effect. Save the configuration and settings now, and you can download them with the program later in
the project. After that close the HWCONFIG window.

6_
6-5
6.5 Creating a Program

The following sections show you how to create a traditional ladder diagram in ISPSoft. The sections include
creating a POU, editing a traditional diagram, and compiling a program.
6.5.1 Adding a Ladder Diagram
(1) Right-click Programs in the project management area, point to POU (program organization unit), and
then click New….
_6
(2) In the Create Program dialog box, type a program name in the POU Name box, select Ladder Diagram
(LD) in the Language section, and keep the other default values. Click OK after the setting is complete. A
new program organization unit (POU) appears under Programs in the project management area.
6-6
(3) After you add the POU, a program editing window appears in the main working area.
Loc al s ymbol table
Program editing area
After the program editing window opens, the corresponding toolbar appears in the window. The list below
describes the functions.
6_
Icon Keyboard shortcut Function
None Switches to the address mode
Shift+Ctrl+C Display/hides the comments on the networks
None Displaying/hides the commands on the devices
Adds a bookmark to the selected network selected or

Shift+Ctrl+B
deletes a bookmark from the selected network
Shift+Ctrl+P Goes to the previous bookmarked position
Shift+Ctrl+N Goes to the next bookmarked position
Ctrl+I Puts a network above the selected network
Shift+Ctrl+I Put a network under the selected network
ESC Selects an item
Typing an instruction Inserts a contact
6-7
Icon Keyboard shortcut Function
Typing an instruction Inserts a coil
Typing an instruction Inserts a comparison contact
Typing an instruction Selects a type of comparison contact
Inserts a block logic instruction

Typing an instruction
(NP/PN/INV/FB_NP/FB_PN)
Selects a type of block logic instruction

Typing an instruction
(NP/PN/INV/FB_NP/FB_PN)
Shift+Ctrl+U Inserts an instruction or a function block
*. Refer to Section 6.5.3 for more information about typing an instruction.
6.5.2 Basic Editing ─ Creating a Contact and a Coil
(1) Click on the toolbar, and then move the mouse cursor to the red frame in Network 1. The mouse
cursor changes to a contact when the mouse cursor is moved to the left, right, or bottom of the red frame.
Decide where to insert a contact. If you edit a ladder diagram, the mouse cursor must be near a position
you want to edit. The system automatically arranges an inserted object; you cannot move the object.
In this example, you do not need to decide where to insert the contact. Place the mouse cursor near the
red frame and click the left mouse button.

_6
6-8
(2) Click on the toolbar, or press Esc on the keyboard. After you double-click the contact, a list appears.
The items on the list are Normally Open, Normally Close, Rising-edge Trigger, and Falling-edge
Trigger. In this example, click Rising-edge Trigger.
(3) Click the line at the right side of the contact, click on the toolbar, and then move the mouse cursor to
the red frame. The mouse cursor changes to a coil when the mouse cursor is above or under the red
frame. Decide where to insert the coil.
In this example, you do not need to decide where to insert the coil. Place the mouse cursor near the red
frame and click the left mouse button. 6_
6-9
(4) Click on the toolbar, or press Esc on the keyboard. After you double-click the coil, a list appears.
The items on the list are Out, Set, and Reset. In this example, click Set.
(5) Click ??? above the contact, type a device address in the box, and then press Enter on the keyboard to
jump to the next box in the network. After you type a device address in the box, press Esc on the
keyboard to complete the editing. In this example, type X0.0 in the box for the contact, and type M0 in the
box for the coil.
_6
6-10
Additional remark
After you click a network and press Enter on the keyboard, you can edit a box. Press Enter on the keyboard to
edit the next box in the network. Press Tab on the keyboard to select the next network. Use the keyboard to
edit boxes. After you finish the editing, press Enter on the keyboard to jump to the next box. Press Esc on the
keyboard to exit editing.
If you have declared symbols, click in a box, or press Page Down on the keyboard when you edit the box.
The symbols on the drop-down list are the symbols that you can assign to the object. Select a symbol with the
mouse or the up/down key on the keyboard. Refer to Chapter 6 in the ISPSoft User Manual for more
information about symbols.
6.5.3 Basic Editing ─ Inserting a Network and Typing an Instruction
Click on the toolbar to select a network. Click on the toolbar to place another network above the
selected network. In this example, Network 2 is under Network 1.
6_
Create a contact and a coil by clicking and on the toolbar or by typing instructions.
(1) Click the line in Network 2.
6 - 11
(2) Type the IL instruction “LD M0”. This instruction is not case-sensitive. As soon as you type the IL
instruction, a box which you can edit appears. After you finish typing the IL instruction, press Enter on
the keyboard or click OK at the right side of the box.
(3) Type the IL instruction “OUT Y0.0”, and write the program shown below.
_6
Additional remark
You create a contact and a coil by typing simple instructions. Refer to the description below. The instructions
typed are not case-sensitive.
 To Insert a normally-open contact (contact A), type “A <device address>”
6-12
 To insert a normally-closed contact (contact B), type “B <device address>”
 To insert an output coil (OUT), type “O <device address>”
6.5.4 Basic Editing ─ Selecting a Network and Operation
Before you select an object in a network, press Esc on the keyboard, or click on the toolbar. After the
cursor appears as a small arrow, click the object in the network. The basic selection shows below.
6_
 Select the network

 Select the input contact
 Select the network
 Select the output coil
 Select the block
To select a group of devices, click a device and drag it to draw a frame around the group of devices. You can
also select the group of devices by clicking the first device, pressing Ctrl+B on the keyboard, clicking the last
device, and then pressing Ctrl+B on the keyboard. You must draw a frame around devices that are in the
same network, and the devices must be adjacent to one another. Input and output devices cannot be in the
same frame.
6-13
To select several networks, press and hold the Ctrl key on the keyboard and click the networks. You can also
select a range of networks by pressing and holding Shift on the keyboard, clicking the first network within the
range, and then clicking the last network within the range.
Right-click an object after selecting it to show the context menu.
Item Function
Undo the last action.

Undo
You can undo up to 20 previous actions.
_6
Redo You can redo an action that has been undone.
Cut Cut a device, block, or network.
Copy Copy a device, block, or network.
Paste Paste an object that has been copied or cut into the present position.
Paste an object at the right side of the selected position.

Paste right
The object is connected in series to the selected position.
Paste an object under the selected position.

Paste under
The object is connected in parallel to the selected position.
Delete Delete a device, block, or network.
Activate/Inactivate Activate or deactivate the selected network.
Network The deactivated network is ignored when you compile the program.
Fold/Unfold Network Fold or unfold the network section.
Auto Generate
Used on the contacts of the function block to generate symbols automatically.
Symbols
6-14
Item Function
Add to Device Monitor

Used on the selected contacts to quickly add the device to the Monitor Table.
Table
Proceed with the steps in the example below.
(1) Select Network 1, then right-click Network 1, and then click Copy.
(2) Select Network 2, right-click Network 2, and then click Paste. A copy of Network 1 is put above Network
2, and Network 2 becomes Network 3.
6_
6-15
6.5.5 Basic Editing ─ Connecting a Contact in Parallel
(1) Click on the toolbar, and then move the mouse cursor to the input contact in Network 2. The mouse
cursor changes to a contact. Move the mouse cursor to the input contact in Network 2. After the mouse
cursor changes to , click the left mouse button. This connects a contact in parallel with the input
contact in Network 2.
(2) Write the program in Network 2 shown below.
_6
Additional remark
After you select a group of contacts, connect a contact to the group of contacts as described above.
6-16
6.5.6 Basic Editing ─ Editing a Comment
(1) Press on the toolbar. Click the position above a device name, type a comment in the box, and then
press Enter on the keyboard.
(2) Press on the toolbar. Click the position under a network number, and then type a comment in the
box. To start a new line of text, press Shift+Enter on the keyboard. Press Enter on the keyboard after the
you complete the editing.
(3) Write the program shown below.
6_
6-17
6.5.7 Basic Editing ─ Inserting an Applied Instruction
Add Network 6 under Network 5, and then write the program shown below. Insert an applied instruction in one
of the three ways described below.
 Method 1
Click the position where you want to insert an instruction, type the instruction (INC in this example), and
then press Enter on the keyboard.
 Method 2
Click APIs in the project management area and find the instruction type.
_6
Click the instruction (INC in this example) that you want to insert, and then drag it to the desired position.
6-18
 Method 3
Click the position where you want to insert an instruction, click on the toolbar, select the instruction
(INC in this example) to insert in the API/FB dialog box, and then click Insert.
After you insert the instruction, assign a device address to the operand, and write the program shown 6_
below.
6-19
6.5.8 Basic Editing ─ Creating a Comparison Contact and Typing a

Constant
You can insert a comparison contact with the following steps. Add Network 7 under Network 6, and write
the program shown below.
(1) Click on the toolbar, and then select a operator (>= in this example).
(2) Click on the toolbar, and then move the mouse cursor to the position where you want to insert the
comparison contact. The mouse cursor changes to a comparison contact when you move the mouse to
the left, right, or bottom of the red frame. Decide where to insert the comparison contact, and then click
the left mouse button to insert the comparison contact.
_6
Write the program shown below. In ISPSoft, K precedes a decimal value and H precedes a hexadecimal
value. To type a decimal value in ISPSoft, type it directly. To type a hexadecimal value in ISPSoft, type “16#”
and the hexadecimal value; e.g. 16#7FFF. In ISPSoft, 8# precedes an octal value, and 2# precedes a binary
value.
6-20
6.5.9 Writing a Program
The previous sections introduced creating a traditional ladder diagram in ISPSoft. Write the program shown
below. Because the program is not yet compiled for the PLC, the mother line at the left side of the ladder
diagram is colored red while you write the program. The following sections show how to compile and
download the compiled program for testing.
6_
*1. The program above saves in the folder …\ISPSoft x.xx\Project\Example\Gluing_System_C.
*2. Refer to Chapter 10 in the ISPSoft User Manual for more information about creating a ladder diagram.
6-21
6.5.10 Checking and Compiling a Program
After you write a program, check the syntax of the programming language or compile the program. The syntax
and structure in the present window are checked after you run the Check function. The system checks the
entire project after you run the Compile function. If the system does not find any errors in the project, it
automatically generates execution code. After you successfully compile the program, the mother line at the left
side of the ladder diagram becomes black.
 Check
From the Compile menu, click Check, or on the toolbar.
 Compile
From the Compile menu, click Compile, or on the toolbar.
After you complete the check, the Compile Message page shows the check result. If there are any errors in
_6 the project, the Compile Message window shows the related message. After you click the message, the
system automatically shows you where the error occurs. You can run the Check function or the Compile
function after you correct the error.
6-22
6.6 Testing and Debugging a Program

6.6.1 Creating a Connection
Before you download a program and parameters to a PLC or monitor them online, connect ISPSoft to the
PLC. In this example, connect ISPSoft to the CPU module AS332T-A with a USB cable. Refer to Section 2.4 in
the ISPSoft User Manual for more information about connecting ISPSoft to a PLC in other ways. Refer to the
AS Operation Manual for more information about wiring.
You can skip this section if you have connected ISPSoft to a PLC successfully as described in Section
2.4 in the ISPSoft User Manual.
(1) Install the modules on the main backplane to match the hardware configuration in HWCONFIG. Make
sure that the wiring is correct, and then power on the CPU module.
(2) Connect the CPU module to the computer with a USB cable. If the USB driver for the AS series CPU
module is installed on the computer, Delta PLC appears in the Device Manager window, and a port
number is assigned to Delta PLC. Refer to Appendix A for more information about installing a USB driver.
(3) Make sure that COMMGR is started and the icon representing COMMGR is displayed on the system tray.
If the icon representing COMMGR is not displayed on the system tray, start COMMGR by clicking the
shortcut on the Start menu (Start > Programs > Delta Industrial Automation > Communication >
COMMGR).
6_
(4) Double-click the icon representing COMMGR on the system tray to open the COMMGR window. Click
Add in the COMMGR window to create a driver.
6-23
(5) Set the parameters in the Driver Properties dialog box, and then click OK.
Type a driver name in the Driver Name box.
Select USB (Virtual COM) in the Type list in the Connection Setup section.
Select a communication port in the COM Port list. If the first two steps are complete, the connected
PLC and its communication port display in the COM Port list.
_6
Select the number of times to retry the sending of a command if a connection error occurs in the Time
of Auto-retry box, and select a retry interval in the Time Interval of Auto-retry box.
(6) After you finish the setup, USB_Driver appears in the COMMGR window. When the connection is normal,
OK appears in the Status column.
(7) Click the driver you created in the COMMGR window, and then click Start. Start ISPSoft, and then on the
Tools menu, click Communication Settings…. In the Communication Setting dialog box, select the
driver you created in the Driver list, select 0 in the Station Address list, and then click OK. The driver
information displays in the ISPSoft status bar.
6-24
(8) On the PLC menu, click System Information. ISPSoft retrieves related information from the PLC. If the
computer communicates with the CPU module normally, the related information retrieved from the PLC
displays in the System Information dialog box.

6_
6-25
6.6.2 Downloading a Program and Parameters
If ISPSoft is correctly connected to a PLC, you can download the parameters and program in the project to the
PLC. First, start ISPSoft and open the project you created in the previous sections. In this example, you
download two types of parameters to the CPU module: hardware configuration and the program itself.
 Downloading the hardware configuration
(1) Double-click HWCONFIG in the project management area to open the HWCONFIG window.
(2) The hardware configuration displays in the window. Before you download the hardware configuration
to the CPU module, make sure the actual hardware configuration is the same as the hardware
configuration in the window.
(3) Click Download under the Communication tab to see the Download page. Select the PLC
parameters that you’d like to download to the PLC and then click OK to download.
_6
6-26
Download Not Download Run Stop
(4) After you successfully download the hardware configuration to the CPU module, the BUS FAULT
LED indicator on the CPU module is OFF. Close the HWCONFIG window. If the BUS FAULT LED
indicator on the CPU module is still ON or blinking, the CPU module is in an abnormal state. Make 6_
sure the actual hardware configuration is the same as the hardware configuration in the HWCONFIG
window, and refer to the operation manual for more information about eliminating the error. Refer to
Chapter 8 for more information about HWCONFIG.
6-27
 Downloading the program
After the program is compiled, select Transfer under the PLC tab and click Download to see the
Download page. You can also click on the toolbar to see the Download page. Select the Program
and the Comments so that you can upload the program in the CPU module later, and then click Transfer
again.
_6
6.6.3 Connection Test
After you download a program to a PLC, you can monitor the execution status of the PLC through ISPSoft.
ISPSoft provides two monitoring modes; device monitoring mode and program monitoring mode.
Monitoring mode Description
You can monitor the status of the devices in the PLC through the
monitoring table. In this mode, ISPSoft updates only the status of the
Device monitoring mode devices. The current program in ISPSoft does not have to be the same as
the program in the PLC.
In this mode, the operating status of the program is displayed in the
program editing window. The present program in ISPSoft must be the

Program monitoring mode
same as the program in the PLC.
*. You can enable the device monitoring function without program monitoring; however, if you enable the program
monitoring function, the device monitoring function is also enabled.
6-28
On the PLC menu, click Online Mode, or on the toolbar, to enable the online monitoring function. The
system also enables device monitoring mode and program monitoring mode.
In the online monitoring mode, you can view the present scan time, the communication status, and the status
of the PLC in the status bar in ISPSoft.
The present status of the devices display in the original program editing window after you enable the program
monitoring function.
6_
You can change the operating state of a PLC with the RUN/STOP switch on the PLC. You can also change the
operating status of a PLC with the functions provided by ISPSoft. On the PLC menu, click Run or on the
toolbar to start the PLC. On the PLC menu, click Stop or on the toolbar to stop the PLC.
6-29
In the online monitoring mode, you can select a device, then right-click the device, and the click a command
on the context menu. During a test, you can change the status of a device or the value in a device by clicking
an item on the context menu.
Before you change the status of a device, make sure the operation does not cause damage to
equipment or personnel.
The table below describes the items in the context menu. The Force command only applies to input and
output contacts.
Item Description
Set On Set the contact selected to ON
Set Off Set the contact selected to OFF
No matter what the state of the selected contact is, the system sets the contact
_6 Rising-edge Trigger
to OFF, and then sets it to ON.
No matter what the state of the selected contact is, the system sets the contact
Falling-edge Trigger
to ON, and then sets it to OFF.
Force Force an input contact or output contact ON or OFF
Force Device List Force several input contacts or output contacts in the tables ON or OFF
To change the value in a device, right-click the device, click Change Present Value, and set a present value
in the Enter Present Value dialog box.
6-30
The list below describes the Enter Present Value dialog box.
 Message
 Type a 16-bit, 32-bit or 64-bit value.
 Type a value in the Present Value box.
 Type the name of a device or a symbol whose present value you want to change
6_
 Value change history (Format: Device name Value)
 In binary mode, use the mouse to set the bit states.
 Click OK to apply the setting values. Click Cancel to close the window without applying the values.
 Display or hide binary mode.
In this example, X0.0–X0.15 and Y0.0–Y0.15 are input and output devices assigned to the digital I/O module
AS332T-A. After you download the hardware parameters to the CPU module, the states of X0.0–X0.15 are the
same as the states of the inputs on the actual module. Even if you set X0.0–X0.15 to ON or OFF in the
program editing window, the actual input signals update the states of X0.0–X0.15.
6-31
However, you can force an input contact ON or OFF during a test. Click an input or output contact to set, right-
click the contact, point to Force, and click On (X/Y), Off (X/Y), Release (X/Y), or Release All. If you force an
input or output contact ON or OFF, a lock symbol appears at the left side of the contact.
Force Description
On (X/Y) Force the selected input or output contact ON
Off (X/Y) Force the selected input or output contact OFF
Release (X/Y) Release the contact from the locked state
Release All Release all the contacts from the locked states
If you force an output contact in the program ON or OFF, the program execution result does not affect the
output state of this contact.
_6
*. If you disable the online monitoring function, the contacts are not automatically released from the locked states.
You must check whether the contacts need to be released from the locked states after you complete the test.
You can create a monitoring table online or offline.
 Method 1
On the PLC menu, click New Devices Table, or on the toolbar.
6-32
 Method 2
Right-click Device Monitoring Table in the project management area, and click New.
Type a table name in the Add Monitor Table dialog box, and then click OK. An item appears under Device
Monitor Table in the project management area. Double-click the item to open the monitoring table. You can
create several monitoring tables in the project, and the monitoring tables are saved with the project.
6_
After you double-click the item, a item monitoring window appears. You can add items to be monitored to the
window. To add an item to the window, double-click the blank space in the monitoring table, type a device
name, type a start address, and the number of devices to be monitored in the Device Monitor Input dialog
box. You can add up to 100 items to a monitoring table.
6-33
Press Insert on the keyboard to switch between inserting and replacing an item in the monitoring table. The
selected mode displays in the status bar in ISPSoft.
If you select insert mode, the new item is added above the selected item in the monitoring table. If you select
replacement mode, the new item overwrites the selected item in the monitoring table.
To hide certain columns in the monitoring table, right-click the monitoring table, point to Set the Fields, and
clear certain items. After you clear an item, the corresponding column disappears.
_6
6-34
The following describes the columns in the monitoring table.
Column Description
Source Source of a symbol
Identifier Identifier of a symbol
Device name Name of a monitored device
Status State of a monitored bit device or a contact (ON or OFF).
Data type Data type of a monitored symbol.
Value (16 bits) In online mode, displays a 16-bit value.
Value (32 bits) In online mode, displays a 32-bit value.
Value (32-bit
floating-point In online mode, displays a 32-bit floating-point number.
value)
Value (64-bit
floating-point In online mode, displays a 64-bit floating-point number.
value)
Radix Select a format to represent a value.
Comment Display the comments on a device or on a symbol.

After you create the monitoring table, you can monitor the items in the monitoring table in online mode. Right- 6_
click an item in the monitoring table in online mode to display a context menu which is the same as the context
menu in the program editing window. You can change the item state or the item value by clicking an item in
this context menu.
You can text and debug the program you created in this chapter through the monitoring table you created in
this section. Refer to Chapter 18 in the ISPSoft User Manual for more information about testing and debugging
a program.
6-35
6.7 Setting a Real-time Clock
After you connect an AS Series CPU module to a computer, you can set the real-time clock in the CPU
module through ISPSoft.
(1) On the Tools menu, click Set RTC.
(2) Select Computer, and then click Synchronize to complete setting the real time clock.
_6
6-36
7
Chapter 7 Memory Card
Table of Contents
7.1 Overview of Memory Cards ................................................................ 7-2
7.1.1 Appearances of Memory Cards ......................................................... 7-2
7.1.2 Memory Card Specifications ............................................................ 7-2
7.2 Before using a Memory Card .............................................................. 7-3

7.2.1 Formatting a Memory Card .............................................................. 7-3
7.3 Installing and Removing a Memory Card ........................................... 7-4

7.3.1 Memory Card Slot in a CPU Module .................................................. 7-4
7.3.2 Installing a Memory Card ................................................................ 7-4
7.3.3 Removing a Memory Card ............................................................... 7-4
7.4 Memory Card Contents ...................................................................... 7-5

7.4.1 Initializing a Memory Card .............................................................. 7-5
7.4.2 Folder Structure in a Memory Card ................................................... 7-5
7.5 Introduction to the CARD Utility ........................................................ 7-7
7.6 Backing Up a Project ....................................................................... 7-10
7.7 Restoring a Project .......................................................................... 7-15
7.8 Restoration Starts Once CPU is supplied with Power ....................... 7-19
7.9 CPU Error Log .................................................................................. 7-20
7_
7-1
7.1 Overview of Memory Cards

The AS Series CPU modules support standard MicroSD cards that meet the specifications in this chapter. This
chapter describes the specifications and usage for the MicroSD cards supported by the AS series CPU
modules.
7.1.1 Appearances of Memory Cards
SD cards are classified into three types according to size: SD cards, MiniSD cards, and MicroSD cards. AS
Series CPU modules support MicroSD cards.
7.1.2 Memory Card Specifications
SD cards are also classified into three types according to capacity: SD cards, SDHC cards, and SDXC cards.
The AS Series currently only supports a maximum of 32GB in FAT32 format. SD card families are shown in
the table below. The Micro SDHC in the SDHC column indicates the specifications supported by the AS
Series. Be sure to purchase products that meet these specifications.
_7  SD card families
Type SD SDHC SDXC
Capacity 32MB~2GB 4GB~32GB 32GB~2TB
File
FAT16/FAT32 FAT32 exFAT（FAT64）
system
Size SD SDHC Mini SDHC Micro SDHC SDXC Micro SDXC
Speed CLASS 2 (Min. 2MB/Sec.) CLASS 2 (Min. 2MB/Sec.)

CLASS 4 (Min. 4MB/Sec.) CLASS 4 (Min. 4MB/Sec.)
class N/A
CLASS 6 (Min. 6MB/Sec.) CLASS 6 (Min. 6MB/Sec.)
rating CLASS 10 (Min. 10MB/Sec.) CLASS 10 (Min. 10MB/Sec.)
7-2
C h a p t e r 7 Me m o r y C a r d
7.2 Before using a Memory Card

7.2.1 Formatting a Memory Card
You may need to format a new SDHC memory card with the FAT32 file system before you use it for the first
time. You cannot use an unformatted SDHC memory card in an AS Series CPU module.
The following example introduces the most common way to format an SDHC card: formatting an SDHC card
through a card reader. Also carefully read the documents provided by the SDHC card manufacturer.
When you format a memory card, you also delete all the data in the memory card. Verify whether you
need to back up the data in a memory card before you format the memory card.
(1) Insert the SDHC card into a card reader. The operating system detects a new storage device.
(2) Right-click the new storage device, and then click Format.
(3) You must format the memory card with the FAT32 file system. Do not change any other default settings.
Click Quick Format, and then click Start.
(4) After you click OK in the warning window, the SDHC card formats.
7_
7-3
7.3 Installing and Removing a Memory Card

7.3.1 Memory Card Slot in a CPU Module
The memory card slot is on the front side of the AS Series PLC.
Memory Card Slot
7.3.2 Installing a Memory Card
Insert a memory card into the CPU module memory card slot and push it in until it clicks. Be sure the memory
card is fixed firmly in the slot; if the memory card is loose, it is not installed correctly. The memory card can
only be inserted in one direction. Do not force the memory card or you may damage the CPU module. The
correct way to insert the memory card is shown below.
_7
7.3.3 Removing a Memory Card
You can remove a memory card by pushing it in. The card then springs from the slot.
7-4
7.4 Memory Card Contents

7.4.1 Initializing a Memory Card
When you insert an SDHC card into a CPU module that is powered on, and use ISPSoft -> CARD Utility to
back up a project, the system initializes the SDHC card, and creates a default folder named according to the
model of the CPU module. (If the folder is already existed, the system does not create a second folder for the
same model.)
When the system initializes an SDHC card, it automatically adds any missing folders to the directory structure.
However, if the initialization of a SDHC card fails, you cannot initialize the SDHC card again until you reformat
it.
When you initialize a memory card, the SYSTEM indicator in the software blinks.
7.4.2 Folder Structure in a Memory Card
The image below shows the default folder group created by an AS System. The folder name is AS200/300.
Several subfolders are contained inside the AS200/300 folder. Related files created by you and the AS system
are stored in the subfolders.
SDCard PLC CARD AS300 Firmware
Log 7_
SysDup
DevMem
Setup
UserProg
7-5
Folder Description
Firmware Stores firmware files (.ext)
You can store firmware file here for a firmware upgrade; after that use
the USB port on the computer to connect to the USB port of the AS
Series PLC CPU for a firmware upgrade.
Log Stores Log files (.log)
SysDup Stores backup files (.dup)
UserProg Stores device memory files (.txt, .dmd, .csv)
DevMem, Setup Reserved for the system use
_7
7-6
7.5 Introduction to the CARD Utility

The AS Series CPU modules include SDHC slots, and you can back up and restore PLC CPU data with a
memory card. ISPSoft includes the CARD Utility for the AS Series CPU modules. With this utility, you can back
up and restore data in an AS Series CPU module or backup and restore an ISPSoft project. The backup can
include the program code, parameter settings, hardware configuration, network configuration, and the values
in the latched area in an AS series CPU module. Refer to AS Series Manuals for more information about the
specifications and usage of SDHC cards with AS Series CPU modules.
For AS Series PLC CPU firmware V1.08.20 or previous versions, the PLC CPU backs up and restores the
following data:
 Programs includes PLC execution code, PLC programs, project password, and PLC ID.
 Parameters includes HWCONFIG settings, configurations of CPU module and modules, data exchange
table, and positioning planning table.
 Retainable data includes device setting range, values in retainable devices.
Note: Ethernet/IP and CANopdn DS301 data exchange tables created by the network planning tool cannot be
backed up or restored.
For AS Series PLC CPU firmware V1.10.00 or later versions, the PLC CPU backs up and restores the above-
mentioned data and the following data:
 User Language C execution code
 Device default value table
 E-CAM table
 Data Logger parameters
 Ethernet/IP Tag
 Ethernet/IP data exchange table
 OPC UA Tag
7_
 IOLINK device parameters of AS04SIL
 CANopen DS301 data exchange table
NOTE: if the backup file created by the PLC CPU whose firmware is different from the one you are going to
perform restoring, things will be like one of the followings:
* Backing up on the older firmware version of the PLC CPU and restoring to a later firmware version of the
PLC CPU: Backup file can be restored on the later firmware version of the PLC.
* Backing up on the later firmware version of the PLC CPU and restoring to an older firmware version of the
PLC CPU: Backup file can NOT be restored on the older firmware version of the PLC. It is suggested to
upgrade the PLC firmware or use a backup file created by the same firmware version of the PLC CPU to
perform restoring.
7-7
The list below describes the functions supported by the CARD Utility, including a flowchart.
 If you export data from an AS Series CPU module as a backup file (*.dup), you can save the exported data
in the memory card in the module or in a folder on the computer. You can also decide whether to back up
the values in the devices in the AS Series CPU module.
 If you export an ISPSoft project for an AS Series CPU module as a backup file (*.dup), you can only save
the exported ISPSoft project in a folder in the computer. You can see data such as register editing (*.dvl),
device status editing (*.dvb), file register editing (*.wft) for the AS Series as values in the device and back
them up. You can put a memory card with the backup file into the AS series CPU module. You can copy a
backup file (*.dup) saved on the computer into the AS series CPU module connected to the computer, or
restore the backup file to an ISPSoft project. If you choose to restore the backup file to an ISPSoft project,
the system automatically skips the values in the devices and the hardware configuration in the backup file.
 If you restore the backup file (*.dup) from the PC to an ISPSoft project for an AS Series CPU module, you
can also restore data such as register editing (*.dvl), device status editing (*.dvb), and file register editing
(*.wft) for the AS Series.
_7
Double-click CARD Utility in the project management area to open the CARD Utility wizard. After selecting
the controller type, click “Next” to proceed.
7-8
7_
7-9
7.6 Backing Up a Project

If the backup source or backup destination is an AS Series CPU module or memory card, make sure that
ISPSoft is connected to the AS Series CPU module. During backup, the CPU LED and Error LED blinks
alternatively and SM452 flag is ON. After the backup is done, the CPU LED and Error LED stops blinking and
SM452 flag is OFF. Refer to Section 2.4 in the ISPSoft User Manual for more information.
(1) Select the Backup (To DUP File) option button in the CARD Utility wizard and then click Next.
(2) Select a backup source, and then click Next.
a. If you select the CPU (Need Connection), the backup file is stored in the memory card.
_7
7-10
b. If you select the ISP Project (Compiled and saved), the backup file is stored in your computer. Click
and select an isp file in the Open dialog box. If the program in the isp file selected is not compiled, a
message appears when you back up the isp file. Open the isp file with ISPSoft, compile the program in
the isp file, and then save the isp file. After the program in the isp file is compiled, you can back up the isp
file.
(3) After you select CPU (Need Connection) / ISP Project (Compiled and saved), click Next,
a. If you select the CPU (Need Connection), a prompted window appears. And you need to decide
whether to back up the values in devices on the AS Series CPU module that is connected to ISPSoft.
7_
7 - 11
b. If you select the ISP Project (Compiled and saved), the backup file is stored in your computer. Click
and select an isp file in the Open dialog box and then decide the file path where you’d like to store
the backup file in your computer and then define its file name.
(4) Select a backup destination. If the backup source is an ISPSoft project, the backup destination must be a
computer.
a. If you select Memory Card (PLC Side), the filename of the backup file is AUTOEXEC.dup, and the
backup file paths for AS200 and AS300 are shown below.
AS200: Root directory of the memory card\SDCard\PLC CARD\AS200\SysDup\AUTOEXEC.dup
AS300: Root directory of the memory card\SDCard\PLC CARD\AS300\SysDup\AUTOEXEC.dup
_7
7-12
b. If you select PC (DUP File), click , select a folder in the Save in list in the Save As dialog box,
and type a filename in the File name box. When you select the backup source for the ISPSoft
Project, set the PLC password. You can set the password to be the same as the Project password,
set a new PLC password, or not set a PLC password. If you do not set a password for the Project,
the PLC password is also not set. When you select Setting new PLC password, the wizard looks
like the following image. And you can set new PLC password and number of the attempt times.
(5) After that you can see the summary. Make sure that the summary in the CARD Utility wizard is consistent
with the data backup you want to perform, and then click Execute.
7_
7-13
(6) The AS Series CPU module still performs the data backup even if you click Cancel. You can turn off the
AS Series CPU module to stop the data backup; however, the backup file produced is not a complete
backup file, and you must delete the backup file from the memory card.
If you select Memory Card (PLC Side), the filename of the backup file is AUTOEXEC.dup, and the
backup file path is Root directory of the memory card\AS300\SysDup\AUTOEXEC.dup. If there is an
old backup file in the memory card, the Warning message appears. Click Replace, Archive, or Cancel in
the Warning message.
If the backed up data is protected by passwords, these passwords are also backed up.
Data backup Description
The backed up data includes the PLC ID and the PLC password set
CPU module  Memory card
in the CPU module.
The backed up data includes the program ID and the project

ISPSoft project  Computer
password set in the ISPSoft project.
(7) After you perform the data backup, click Home or Close in the CARD Utility wizard.
_7
7-14
7.7 Restoring a Project

If the restoration source or restoration destination is an AS Series CPU module or memory card, make sure
that ISPSoft is connected to the AS Series CPU module. During restoration, the CPU LED and Error LED
blinks alternatively and SM452 flag is ON. After restoration is done, the CPU LED and Error LED stops
blinking and SM452 flag is OFF. Refer to Section 2.4 in the ISPSoft User Manual for more information.
(1) Select Restore (From DUP File) in the CARD Utility wizard and then click Next.
(2) Select a restoration source, click and then select a backup file to be restored.
a. If you select Memory Card (PLC side) (Need Connection), the backup files in the memory card
display in a window after you click . Double-click a backup file in the window to choose it.
7_
7-15
b. If you select PC (Need Connection), the backup files in the PC display in a window after you click
. Double-click a backup file in the window to choose it.
_7
7-16
(3) Select a restoration destination, and then click Next.
a. To put the selected backup file into the AS Series CPU module, select CPU (Need Connection). If
the restoration source is the CPU (Need Connection), the restoration destination must be the AS
Series CPU module.
b. If you select ISP Project, click , and then specify a filename and a path. If the path specified point
to a file that already exists, the file is overwritten when you restore the data.
7_
7-17
(4) Make sure that the summary in the CARD Utility wizard is consistent with the data restoration you want
to perform and then click Execute.
If you click Cancel in the process of restoring data to the AS Series CPU module, the data is not
completely restored. The AS Series CPU module still performs the data restoration even if you click
Cancel in the process of restoring a backup file in the memory card. You can turn off the AS Series CPU
module to stop the data restoration from being performed. To prevent the AS Series CPU module from
operating incorrectly, restore the AS Series CPU module to the factory setting, or perform the data
restoration again.
The restoration source or restoration destination may contain a password and an ID. The following table
describes the password and the ID process.
Data restoration Description

_7
a. The ID in the backup file must be the same as the ID in the CPU module;
otherwise the data is not restored.
b. If there is a PLC password in the CPU module, the password in the backup
Memory card file must be the same as the PLC password in the CPU module. Otherwise
 PU module the data is not restored.
c. If there is no PLC password in the CPU module, and there is a password in
the backup file, the system restores the data, and the password in the backup
file becomes the PLC password in the CPU.
Computer The ID and the password in the backup file become the program ID and the
ISPSoft project project password in the ISPSoft project.
(5) After you perform the data restoration, click Home or Close in the CARD Utility wizard.
7-18
7.8 Restoration Starts Once CPU is supplied with Power

When the backup file in the memory card is consistent with the specific path and file name, the CPU can
perform restoration once it is supplied with power. During restoration, the CPU LED and Error LED blinks
alternatively and SM452 flag is ON. After restoration is done, the CPU LED and Error LED stops blinking and
SM452 flag is OFF.
Operation Steps:
(1) Set up the backup file path and file name for the memory card backup file. The filename of the backup file
is BACKUP.dup and the backup file paths for AS200 and AS300 are shown below.
AS200: Memory card root directory\SDCard\PLC CARD\AS200\SysDup\AS300_BACKUP.dup
AS300: Memory card root directory\SDCard\PLC CARD\AS300\SysDup\AS300_BACKUP.dup
Insert the memory card into the card slot when the CPU power is off.
(2) When the CPU power is on, it automatically checks if the memory card data is consistent with the PLC
data. If not, the restoration begins. The data check is specifically on the data in CPU programs and
HWCONFIG parameters.
(3) During the restoration, the CPU LED and Error LED blinks alternatively. Once the restoration is done, the
blinking stops.
7_
7-19
7.9 CPU Error Log

The system stores CPU error messages in the memory card whenever the quantity of the error messages
reached to 20. You can also use special flag SM36 and special device SR36 to read the CPU error messages
and state change logs. If there is error logs recorded in the memory card, the memory card keeps storing the
error logs. You can change the file path to store other error logs or change the file name to store other error
logs.
Special Device Function Code Description
a. when the value is 0, it indicates there is no recording.

b. when the value is 1234, it indicates the logs are stored in the memory card.
SR36
c. when the value is 3456, it indicates the error logs and state change logs are stored
in the memory card.
Operation Steps to read CPU error logs and state change logs:
Make sure the memory card is in the slot before reading the CPU error logs and state change logs.
(1) Set SM36 to ON and the value in SR36 to 1234 or 3456 to read the CPU error logs and state change
logs.
(2) The root directory path of the memory card for the error log is
AS200: Memory card root directory\SDCard\PLC CARD\AS200\Log\Error.log
AS300: Memory card root directory\SDCard\PLC CARD\AS300\Log\Error.log
Use ISPSoft to read the error logs. ISPSoft Tools -> Review Error Log File -> Open Log File
The root directory path of the memory card for the status log is
AS200: Memory card root directory\SDCard\PLC CARD\AS200\Log\STATUS.log
AS300: Memory card root directory\SDCard\PLC CARD\AS300\Log\STATUS.log
(3) Use ISPSoft to read the status logs. ISPSoft Tools -> Review Error Log File -> Open Log File
_7
7-20
8
Chapter 8 Hardware Configuration and Data
Exchange Setups
Table of Contents
8.1 Hardware Configuration Tool for AS Series Modules - HWCONFIG ..... 8-2
8.1.1 Introduction of the HWCONFIG Environment .......................................... 8-2
8.1.2 Configuring a Module ........................................................................... 8-4
8.2 Setting the Parameters in an AS Series CPU Module ........................ 8-23

8.2.1 System Settings – System Information ................................................ 8-23
8.2.2 System Settings – System Parameter .................................................. 8-24
8.2.3 System Settings – Device Range Setting .............................................. 8-29
8.2.4 System Settings – Input Point Filter Time ............................................ 8-30
8.2.5 System Settings – Position Control Parameter ...................................... 8-31
8.2.6 System Settings – Daylight Saving Timing ........................................... 8-32
8.2.7 Options - COM1 Port Setting & COM2 Port Setting ................................. 8-33
8.2.8 Options - Ethernet Port Basic Setting ................................................... 8-34
8.2.9 Ethernet Port Advance Setting – IP Filter ............................................. 8-35
8.2.10 Ethernet Port Advance Setting – NTP ................................................. 8-35
8.2.11 Ethernet Port Advance Setting – Email ............................................... 8-36
8.2.12 Ethernet Port Advance Setting – Socket ............................................. 8-40
8.2.13 Ethernet Port Advance Setting – RTU Mapping .................................... 8-42
8.2.14 Function Card 1 Setting ................................................................... 8-43
8.2.15 Function Card 2 Setting ................................................................... 8-44
8.2.16 Data Exchange................................................................................ 8-47
8.1 Hardware Configuration Tool for AS Series Modules -

HWCONFIG
HWCONFIG is a built-in hardware configuration tool in ISPSoft. You can configure CPU and module parameters,
download/upload parameters, detect a hardware configuration online, and make a diagnosis through HWCONFIG.
The examples used below are from HWCONFIG 4.0 (ISPSoft V3.11). Refer to previous versions of ISPSoft Manual or
AS Series Operation Manual for the operation examples on the previous versions of HWCONFIG.
You must download all parameters set in HWCONFIG to the CPU module for them to take effect.
The data exchange area set in HWCONFIG for modules cannot be used repeatedly for other communication
data and vise versa.
8.1.1 Introduction of the HWCONFIG Environment
In ISPSoft, double-click HWCONFIG in the project management area to start HWCONFIG.
_8
8-2
Chapter 8 Hardware Configuration
 Window Title: Here shows the current project name and the program name.
 Tool Bar: There are 6 tabs on the tool bar.
 Project Tree: Tree-structured projects for easier management
 Output Message Section: Here shows project related information.
 Status Bar: Here shows the connection status and the communication parameters.
 Hardware Configuration Area: You can set up hardware configuration here.
 Edit Area: You can set up parameters for PLC CPU and modules.
 Product list: Available hardware is listed in the catalog.
_8
8-3
8.1.2 Configuring a Module
8.1.2.1 Adding a Module
 Method 1
Double-click the module you want to add in the project or select it from the Product List and drag that module to the
desired position. There will be a suggestive dotted line to indicate the legitimate position for the selected module.
_8
8-4
 Method 2
(1) Double-click a vacant slot or right-click the slot and choose Add.
(2) Double-click the selected module to add. You can repeat these two steps to add more
modules in.
_8
8-5
 Method 3
In the Product List section, double-click the selected module or select the desired module and press Enter on the
keyboard to add the selected module in the hardware configuration area.
_8
8-6
 Add More Modules at the Same Time
In the Product List section, right-click the selected module that you need for more than one, and you will see the
context menu showing three options Expand All, Collapse All, and Add Multiple. Click Add Multiple, and then an
Add Multiple Modules (your desired module name) window appears, use the up and down arrows to increase or
decrease the quantity number that you need and then click OK to confirm the setting.
_8
8-7
8.1.2.2 Replacing the Module
The following steps show you how to replace the module.

(1) Select and right-click the module for replacement in Hardware Configuration area or from CPU Group
Information section.
(2) Choose Replace on the context menu. After that you can see two different types of replacements for selection,
Same Type and All Type.
 Same Type
Replace only the selected module with the same type module. The new module Input/Output Device
Range will be the same, while other parameters may return to system defaults if they cannot be matched.
 All
Replace selected module to be any type of module. The result is similar to deleting the original module by
adding a new one, so the new module Input/Output Device Range will be re-configured and other
_8 parameter settings will also return to system defaults.
8-8
(3) Once the replace type is selected, the Module Selection window appears with modules available for the
selected replace type. Double click or select the module you want to replace with and click OK.
8.1.2.3 Rearrange Module Position by Drag and Drop
Except CPU modules, you can drag and drop all module graphics in Hardware Configuration area to rearrange their
positions.
AS Series PLC is non-backplane designed. When the module is dragged to a position between two modules, a red
arrow mark appears indicating the position where the module will be after dropping.
* When rearranging the module position, the input/output device range, comment, internal parameters, corresponding
_8
device D and advanced parameters for intelligent modules are also rearranged with the module.
8-9
8.1.2.4 Remarks and Comments
 Remarks for the project
Click Remarks field on the top of the Hardware Configuration area and a blank box appears for you to leave
remarks for the project. After typing the remarks, press Enter on the keyboard or click Close to save the remarks.
_8
8-10
 Comments for PLC CPU and Modules
Click the module graphic and you can see its details in the Edit Area. You can leave comments for the PLC CPU and
Modules. After typing the comments, it saves the comments automatically.
_8
8 - 11
8.1.2.5 Hardware Configuration Area – Reset Configuration
Use the functional button Reset Configuration to set the PLC configurations back to default values
_8
8-12
8.1.2.6 Hardware Configuration Area – Show Information
Use the functional button Show Information to show / hide the hardware configurations
8.1.2.7 Hardware Configuration Area – Input / Output Device Rearrange
Use the functional button Input / Output Device Rearrange to rearrange the device ranges and assign the devices to
the very beginning of the range.
_8
8-13
8.1.2.8 Assigning I/O Addresses
The AS Series does not support manually assigned addresses. Addresses are automatically assigned to an
input/output module through HWCONFIG in ISPSoft. You assign a start address to the first remote module installed
on the right side of the I/O module slot (SCM module). The following I/O module is automatically assigned with the
next address. For remote module configuration, refer to Section 8.1.2.9 for more details.
The following table shows the addresses (devices) that are automatically assigned to an input/output module through
HWCONFIG in ISPSoft. Refer to the following table to see the actual allowable range for program design, while
editing a PLC program. Below, local indicates the IO module is connected on the right side of the CPU and Remote
indicates the IO module is connected on the right side of remote module.
X/Y
Module type D device range Remark
device range
Input points: Data device number will not be
X1.0 ~ X63.15 Local: D28000 ~ D28999 shown; it is only for PLC internal use.
Digital module
Remote: D29000 ~ D29999#1 Maximum points in total: 1024 points.
(DIO)
Output points: Each module takes 20 devices. For modules with less than 16 points,
Y1.0 ~ Y63.15 they will be counted as 16 points.
Local: D28000 ~ D28999

Analog module Up to 16 AIO modules are
N/A Remote: D29000 ~ D29999#1
(AIO) configurable.
Each module takes 20 devices.
Positioning Local: D28000 ~ D28999

Up to 8 PIO modules are configurable
module (PIO) N/A PU module takes 40 devices.
locally, but not available remotely.
HC module takes 20 devices.
Local: D28000 ~ D28999 Up to 4 NIO modules are
Remote: D29000 ~ D29999#1 configurable locally. SCM module can
Each module takes 20 devices. be used as remote module but not on
Network the right-side of the remote module.

_8 module (NIO)
N/A
DNET modules can only be
Communication data area:
D26000 ~ D27599 connected locally.
Each module takes 400 devices. SIL modules can either be used
locally or remotely.
Note: #1: the remote module itself also takes 20 devices.
8-14
8.1.2.9 Hardware Configuration Area - Change Input Device Range of the Remote
Modules
Click the remote module and then you can see in the column of Input Device Range. Double-click it to see the
Manual Assignment window and start editing your desired input device range.
_8
8-15
8.1.2.10 Hardware Configuration Area - Resize
Use the functional buttons , or to rearrange the size of the device images in
Hardware Configuration Area. Use to set the display of the configuration area back to its default values
(shown at 100% and in the center).
8.1.2.11 Edit Area – Import and Export
You can import/export the module parameters in .dep format. Click the Import button and then choose a file to import.
Click the Export button and then choose a path and enter a file name for the exported file. Click the Import button to
import. When importing, the system checks if the file format and the module name are matched. If not, an error message
shows up. If the addresses of the imported data device are already taken, the addresses will be assigned to other
available addresses.
_8
8-16
8.1.2.12 Edit Area – Update
To update the module parameters, first you need to be in the online mode. Select the module that you want to update
its parameters and then click the Update button. This functionality is only available for digital IO modules, analog IO
modules and network modules.
8.1.2.13 Show or Hide the Display
Click or to hide the display area and after that only its tab remains shown. Move your cursor to the tab to
have the hidden display area shown. Click to pin and lock the display area to keep it shown.
_8
8-17
8.1.2.14 Module State and Diagnosis
To check the module state and diagnosis, first you need to be in the online mode. Right-click the module that you want
to check its module state and diagnosis and then a context menu appears.
After you click Diagnosis, you can see a table with three tabs. On the Diagnosis tab, you can see the Current Error Log
table. When the error is cleared, you can use to clear the error log stored in the module and the module state
can be restored to normal. Use to update the module state.
8.1.2.15 Change Module State in Online Mode
You can change the module state in online mode.
Before changing the module state, make sure no personnel or system will be affected.
 Change the module operation state
Right-click the PLC CPU to see the context menu and click Run for the PLC CPU and module to start running (RUN
LED ON) or click Stop for the PLC CPU and module to stop running.
_8
8-18
 Change the module I/O state
This functionality is only available for digital IO modules, analog IO modules and temperature modules. Right-click the
module to see the context menu and click Module State and then you can see an IO state table shows up. For digital
IO modules, you can right-click to set the input/output channel to ON or OFF, when the PLC CPU and the module are
on the RUN state.
 Force to ON：Force to set the channel state to ON
 Force to OFF：Force to set the channel state to OFF
 Release：Release the selected channel from the force
 Release all：Release all channels from the force
_8
8-19
8.1.2.16 Configure a Remote Module
Drag AS-FCOPM from the Product List to the Function Card Slot 2 of the PLC CPU. After that you can set the Working
Mode for the AS-FCOPM as AS Remote Communication and then you can set the quantity of the Remote Modules that
you want to connect.
If you set the Remote module count to 2 and click OK, you can see two remote modules connected to the PLC CPU.
_8
8-20
You can add more digital IO modules or analog modules to the remote module.
_8
8-21
And then you can click the module to open its configuration page to configure.
8.1.2.17 Open Communication Software from HWCONFIG
Right-click the PLC CPU and click Communication Software to see which software is available for this PLC CPU. If
the software option is grayed out, you may need applicable function cards to work along with the project.
_8
8-22
8.2 Setting the Parameters in an AS Series CPU Module

8.2.1 System Settings – System Information
In the Edit Area, select the option System Settings and you can find two items, PLC Label and Comment under this
option. You can input up to 16 characters in the value field of PLC Label and 32 characters in the value field of
Comment. You can use all in the fields, including special characters and spaces. Note: One Chinese character
occupies two characters. characters
After the project is created, you can find the PLC label behind the product name in the project management area.
You can change the PLC label in HWCONFIG as it is mentioned above. The PLC label is very useful when you have
more than one PLC in the project. This label can be seen as the PLC identity. So that you will not change other PLC
parameters by mistake. To prevent errors, when you download/upload the program, the system will remind you to
check the name of the PLC CPU and the PLC label.
_8
8-23
8.2.2 System Settings – System Parameter
The parameters on System Parameter table are shown in the following window. You can set appropriate values via a
drop-down list or type the values in the box.
 Clear Non-latched area when Stop Run
This determines whether the states and values of the non-latched devices are cleared when the PLC changes
from Stop to Run.
 Disable: All the states and values in the non-latched devices stay the same.
 Enable: All the states and values in the non-latched devices are cleared and restored to defaults.
 Y keeps outputting when RUN Stop
This determines the states of the Y devices when the CPU module begins to run or stop.
 Off: All Y devices are set to OFF.
 Keep: The states of the Y devices stay the same.
 I/O allocation setting when Power On
This determines whether the CPU module is automatically configured, or you configure the parameters in
HWCONFIG.
_8
 Auto: Operates based on actual connected modules without any module and parameters set.
 Manual: You configure the parameters in HWCONFIG and PLC checks the parameters automatically once it
is supplied with power.
 Manual + Flags (only I/O module of CPU module): This function is available for PLC with firmware
V1.06.00 or above and you need to use ISPSoft V3.07 or above to execute this function. Firstly you can
create the largest possible module allocation design and use this option along with the SM flags (refer to
Chapter 2 in AS Series Programming Manual for more information on SM flags) to activate or deactivate the
modules on the right-side of the PLC CPU to set up a smaller I/O application without changing the PLC
program, the original I/O allocation table or its corresponding device address.
8-24
 Manual + Flags (I/O module of CPU and Remote module): This function is available for PLC with
firmware V1.08.50 or above and you need to use ISPSoft V3.12 or above to execute this function. Selected
this option, you can control both the right-side modules of the PLC CPU and the remote modules. The
operation is the same as the operation of the option above, Manual + Flags (only I/O module of CPU
module). Refer to the explanation on Manual + Flags (only I/O module of CPU module) for more details.
 Select Action when I/O Module Parameter with Manual CONFIG Different
This determines which action is taken when the actual settings are NOT the same as the parameters that you
manually set when the previous setting option is set to Manual.
 Auto update: the CPU module is automatically configured.
 Show error: the CPU module shows an error.
 CPU module Stop when I/O Module No Response
This determines how the CPU module and other modules react when a connected extension module is not
responding.
 Stop: the CPU module stops running and sends an error.
 Keep Run: the CPU module and I/O modules keep running.
 CPU module Stop when I/O Module Occurred Error
This determines how the CPU module reacts when a minor module error occurs.
 Stop: the CPU module stops running and sends an error.
 Keep Run: the CPU module keeps running and sends an error.
 Setting delay time to detect I/O Module
This sets the timing when to start detecting the connected I/O module after CPU module is power-on.
Normally the CPU module detects its connected I/O module once it is supplied with power. But you can set the
delay time (unit: 0.1 second) for the CPU module to postpone detecting. This function is very useful when it takes
time for the supply power to be stable or when the remote I/O module is not supplied with power at the same
_8
time as the CPU module is. With a set delay time, the detection on the connected sets can be more accurate.
Refer to the image below for the time frame.
8-25
On
Power
Switch Off
24Vdc
Power
Supply 0Vdc
Setup Ready
IO Module
status Start to detect IO
Setup
CPU Module
status
Time
 

 When the power is switched from OFF to ON, the power supply will be unsteady for a short time. During this
short period of time, the CPU module and I/O module are not ready to operate normally.
 When the supply power for the CPU module and the I/O module is stable, the system starts to initialize for
about 1 second. After that the I/O module is ready to be detected by the CPU module.
 The CPU module starts to wait for the set delay time to pass. Once the delay time is up, it starts to detect the
connected I/O modules locally and remotely.
It is suggested using  +  to set the delay time. Default delay time is 2 seconds.
 Non-Retain Symbol Initial Value Take Effect When Stop  RUN
This determines whether the states and values of the non-latched devices are restored to initial values when the
PLC changes from Stop to Run.
 Disable: All the states and values in the non-latched devices stay the same.
 Enable: All the states and values in the non-latched devices are restored to initial values when the PLC
changes from Stop to Run. .
Retain Symbol Initial Value Take Effect When Stop  RUN

_8 
This determines whether the states and values of the latched devices are restored to initial values when the PLC
changes from Stop to Run.
 Disable: All the states and values in the latched devices stay the same.
 Enable: All the states and values in the latched devices are restored to initial values when the PLC changes
from Stop to Run. .
 Assign X Input Point Control Run/Stop
This assigns an input point to have the CPU module run or stop.
 Disable: Run or stop the CPU module by the dip switch of the CPU module.
8-26
 Enable: Run or stop the CPU module by the assigned input point, and the dip switch of the CPU module still
controls the run stop state of the CPU module.
 Select X Input Point
If you select Enable in the previous option, you can select one input point to control the Run or Stop state of the
CPU module from the dropdown list.
 Constant Scan Cycle Time
This sets the minimum scan cycle time.
 Disable: Disables this function.
 Enable: When the actual scan cycle time is less than the setting time, the CPU module waits until the setting
time is met, and then starts the next scan. When the actual scan time is longer than the setting time,
the CPU module starts the next scan after the actual scan time completes.
 Input Constant Time
If you selected Enable in the previous option, you set the scan cycle time here. If the actual scan time is less
than the setting time, the CPU module waits to begin the next scan until the setting time is met. If the actual scan
time is larger than the setting time, the CPU module ignores the setting time and operates according to the
actual scan time. If you set the scan time longer than the watchdog timeout set, a watchdog timeout occurs when
the CPU module operates.
 Setting Watchdog Time
This parameter sets a timeout during which the program is scanned. The CPU module sends an error if the
program execution exceeds the watchdog time.
 Show Battery Low Voltage Error (BAT.LV)
This parameter sets whether to show an alarm when the lithium battery for the real-time clock has low voltage or
is not installed in the AS Series PLC.

_8
 Enable: Enables the alarm by keeping the low voltage LED ON when the lithium battery has low voltage or is
not installed.
Note: If the PLC self-checks and finds an error in the RTC, this low voltage LED will be ON, even if this option is
disabled.
8-27
 Save Error History Info
This specifies where to store the error log.
 PLC: Store error logs in the PLC. The PLC can store up to twenty error logs. If there are more than twenty
error logs, the oldest error log is overwritten by the latest error log.
 PLC & SD Card: When there are more than twenty error logs, the oldest error log is backed up to the memory
card before the oldest error log is overwritten in the PLC.
 COM Communication Error Record
This parameter sets whether to enable the error record when there is an error at the COM port.
 Enable: Enables this function and starts recording COM errors in the error log.
 Select Action When 24Vdc Input Unstable
What to do when the 24Vdc power is unstable
 Continue Running when power stable: When the power is unstable, the AS Series pauses, and after the
power stabilizes, the PLC continues running.
 Into Error Status: When the power is unstable, the error LED blinks and the AS Series stops running. The
voltage is unstable and the communication will also be affected.
 Communication Module Refreshed Priority
 Scan time first: Only refresh the data that is different from the original ones to save scan time.
 Synchronous Data first: Scan and refresh all the data to ensure all data are synchronized.
 AS remote module updated method
 PLC Scan cycle first: update according to PLC program scan cycle
 Update one remote module by one scan time: update one remote module at one scan time
 Update all remote modules at one scan time: update all remote modules at one scan time
_8
 I601 Timer interrupt Setting Time Base
Sets the interval for triggering the 1601 timer interrupt. This function is used together with Timer Interrupt 0.
8-28
8.2.3 System Settings – Device Range Setting
The parameters on Device Range Setting table are shown in the following window.
Click to open the parameter dialog box to set the start and end address. In the dialog box, click Default to
restore the setting to the default values; click Clear to clear the set values; click OK to save the values and close the
dialog box; click Cancel to discard the setting and close the dialog box.
_8
8-29
8.2.4 System Settings – Input Point Filter Time
On the Input Point Filter Time page, you can set the input point filter time for each input. If the duration of the received
signal time is less than the filter time setting value, it is processed as noise and filtered out. Select an appropriate
filter time according to your needs.
 X Input Point Filter for CPU module
 Default Setting: uses the default values in the input point filter.
 Manual Setting: uses the values you enter for the filter time for each X input point.
 X0.0–X0.15 Input Point Filter Time
If you select Manual Setting for the previous parameter, you can set the filter time individually for X0.0–X0.15.
_8
8-30
8.2.5 System Settings – Position Control Parameter
The parameters on Position Control Parameter table set to specify input points as the positive and negative limits of
axis 1~ axis 6 channels. 12 limit points can be set at most. Axis No. 1~6 can also be set as Z phase triggers, home
function finish points and clear output selects or positive/negative limited position.
 Axis1 (Y0.0/Y0.1) Positive/negative Limited Select ~ Axis 6 (Y0.10/Y0.11) Positive/negative Limited
Select.
Select the rising or falling edge trigger and X input point on the drop-down list.
 Axis1 (Y0.0/Y0.1) Z Phase Trigger ~ Axis6 (Y0.10/Y0.11) Z Phase Trigger
 Axis1 (Y0.0/Y0.1) Home Function Finish and Clear Output Select ~ Axis6 (Y0.10/Y0.11) Home Function
Finish and Clear Output Select
 Axis1 (Y0.0/Y0.1) Positive/negative Limited Position ~ Axis6 (Y0.10/Y0.11) Positive/negative Limited
Position
Set up the number of pulses as the positive or negative limited position in axis 1~6; setting range is -
2147483647～2147483647.
_8
8-31
8.2.6 System Settings – Daylight Saving Timing
The parameters on Daylight Saving Timing table are used to enable or disable the function of daylight saving time
and set the date when the daylight saving is conducted. The clock will automatically set the daylight saving time in
advance based on the period of time set after the function is enabled.
 Disable/Enable D.S.T Function
The parameter sets to enable or disable daylight saving time.
 Start date- month
The parameter sets the month from which the daylight saving time starts.
 Start date- day
The parameter sets the date on which the daylight saving time starts.
 End date- month
The parameter sets the month in which the daylight saving time ends.
 End date- day
The parameter sets the date on which the daylight saving time ends.
 Saving time
_8
The parameter is used to adjust to the earlier daylight saving time with the unit of minute.
Example explanation: example from the above image and all the options are enabled.
PLC time
Date shown in SR Time shown in SR Remarks
(Real Time Clock)
3/31 23:59:58 23:59:58

Normal
3/31 23:59:59 23:59:59
4/01 01:00:00 00:00:00
4/01 01:00:01 00:00:01 Shown after 60 minutes
: (to) : (to) : (to)
8-32
9/30 23:59:59 22:59:59
10/01 00:00:00 (9/30) 23:00:00
: (to) : (to) : (to)
10/01 00:59:59 (9/30) 23:59:59
10/01 00:00:00 00:00:00

Normal
10/01 00:00:01 00:00:01
8.2.7 Options - COM1 Port Setting & COM2 Port Setting
PLC modules are equipped with one or two COM ports based on different models. COM1 and COM2 parameters are
set by clicking COM1 Port Setting and COM2 Port Setting in the list on the left-side of the following window. And the
setting items for the two COM ports are the same.
 Set a station address. You can identify a device on a network by the station address. The station address cannot
be the same as the station address for another device on the same network. If the communication port functions
as a slave, and there are other slaves, the station address of the communication port cannot be 0. Station
address 0 broadcasts to all slaves in a communication protocol. If a master specifies in a data packet that data _8
must be sent to station address 0, the data is sent to all slaves. No matter what the station address of these
slaves are, these slaves receive the data packet addressed to station address 0.
 Set when the communication port runs. Select Stop --> Run, and communication works when the CPU module
switches from Stop to Run. If you instead select Power-on, the communication starts working when you Power-
on the module.
 Select a communication speed in the Baud Rate list, or select Custom and enter a new rate.
 Set the communication parameters for the port.
 Set the Delay Time to Sending when the AS CPU is in Slave mode, after receiving communication, the time you
set here indicates the time it waits before responding. For AS CPU (FW V1.08 or later), this function also works
8-33
for data exchange application. You can set the time it waits before exchanging any data. This is useful for some
Slaves with slower responses in communication. Received Data Timeout applies when the AS Series CPU
module acts as a server to send out communications. The timeout is how long the module waits before the
received data times out.
 Set COM1 LED to show: when COM1 is selected from the drop-down list, it shows the RS485 communication
status of the COM1. If CARD1 is selected, it shows the CARD1 communication status.
Set COM2 LED to show: when COM2 is selected from the drop-down list, it shows the RS485 communication
status of the COM2. If CARD2 is selected, it shows the CARD2 communication status.
8.2.8 Options - Ethernet Port Basic Setting
The communication parameters can be set for the Ethernet port in the CPU module in this page. Refer to other related
documents or manuals for more information about Ethernet.
Mode sets the addressing mode of the IP of the CPU module.
If users select Static, they can specify an IP address directly. If DHCP or BOOTP is selected, the IP address is assigned
dynamically by a DHCP/BOOTP server.
_8
8-34
8.2.9 Ethernet Port Advance Setting – IP Filter
IP Filter sets the filter function of network devices. Devices whose IP addresses are listed in the table are allowed to
communicate with the CPU module; the CPU module discards data packets sent from devices whose IP addresses
are not in the table. Devices on a network are filtered. This setting ensures that objects communicating with the CPU
module are known devices. You can set up to 8 address ranges for allowed devices.
Select IP Filter Function Enable checkbox to enable the IP filter function and type the start address and end address
of group 1~8 IP.
8.2.10 Ethernet Port Advance Setting – NTP
You can use NTP table to enable the CPU module and adjust time via NTP server. Relevant parameters are set here.
For more information on NTP, refer to related literature and manuals.
_8
 Select NTP Client Function Enable checkbox to enable the function.
 Set the address of NTP server and cycle of constant update. Take the figure above as an example. The CPU
module connects to the NTP server every 30 minutes.
 Set up the time zone for the daylight saving time area.
8-35
8.2.11 Ethernet Port Advance Setting – Email
Email table is for users to set the email-related functions. The email will be sent to the set email address after the
email function is enabled. Total four groups of email sending conditions and four groups of email addresses can be
set.
 Select Email Function Enable to enable the function and then start setting the following parameters.
 Set an IP address of SMTP server. Set the COM port of SMTP server at the COM port and set the sender’s
email box at local email address. Type a mail subject as the start of the subject of every email.
 Select Account identification checkbox to enable the function. Users can set to authenticate themselves with
a user name and a password before logging in to an SMTP server.
 Type the target email address of a receiver.
Type a trigger name in Trigger Name box and a minimum interval in Trigger Min Cycle in the Trigger Setting table.
And then select a trigger condition on the drop-down list. When the sending condition is met, the system will send an
email every a period of time. But the same email will not be sent again within the set interval.
_8
8-36
Trigger modes can be set as follows.
 CPU Error
If an error occurs in the CPU module, the condition of triggering the sending of an email is met. Please refer to
operation manuals for more information about errors occurring in CPU modules. After users select the CPU Error
option button, they have to select Fatal Error Only or All Errors in the drop-down list at the right side of the option
button.
a) Fatal Error Only: If a fatal error occurs in the CPU module, the condition of triggering the sending of an email is
met and an email will be sent.
b) All Errors: If an error occurs in the CPU module, the condition of triggering the sending of an email is met and
an email will be sent.
 CPU (RUN<=>STOP)
When the CPU module begins to run, or when the CPU module stops running, the condition of triggering the sending
of an email is met and an email will be sent.
 Bit Status Change
If the state of a bit device specified meets a condition set, the sending of an email will be triggered and an email will
be sent. For example, if X0.0 is turned from OFF to ON, the condition of triggering the sending of an email will be
met. If users want to set a condition, they can click button in the following window.
 Device Name: Users can select a device type in the Device Name drop-down list box.
 Device Number & Bit: Users can type a device address in the Device Number box. If the device type selected is _8
X/Y, the users have to specify a bit number.
 State: Users can select Rising or Falling in the State drop-down list.
8-37
 Register Value Change
If the value in a device specified meets a set condition, the sending of an email will be triggered and an email will be
sent. For example, if the value in D0 is larger than 10, the condition of triggering the sending of an email will be met
and an email will be sent. If users want to set a condition, they can they can click button in the following window.
 Device Name: Users can select a device type in the Device Name drop-down list.
 Device Number: Users can type a device address in the Device Number field.
 State & Value: Users can set s condition of triggering the sending of an email here.
 Periodic Timer
An email is sent periodically. How often an email is sent depends on the interval typed in the Trigger Min Cycle box
in the Trigger Setting section.
Where any trigger mode is set, the user message and error log related parameters will show up.
_8
8-38
Select the Trigger User Message Enable box and then click button to the right side of Trigger User Message.
Type some content as the email text in the pop-up window.
If users select the Error Log Enable checkbox in the Trigger Setting table, the error log will be added to the email
content automatically.
The options on the drop-down menu of Trigger Attachment Mode decide whether to add an attachment to the email.
Please make sure the maximum size of the email file allowed before setting an attachment. For more information,
refer to relevant operation manuals.
 None
If this option button is selected, no attachment will be inserted.
 File
Users can select an error log in the memory card, or the system backup file in the memory card as the attachment of
the email.
 PLC Device
If this option button is selected, the system automatically retrieves the states of the devices, or the values in the
devices listed in the table as the attachment when the email is sent. After this option button is selected, users can
click button in the following window to open the Attachment window. Two groups of devices at most can be set.
For example, if the condition is met, the values in D0~D9 will be sent as an attachment.
_8
8-39
Select the target email address of a receiver when the condition of sending an email is met in Trigger Receiving
table. And the specific email box is set in the Email section.
8.2.12 Ethernet Port Advance Setting – Socket
In the Socket table, you can set COM port parameters for data transmission through Ethernet; however, you need to
use this function along with specific API instructions. For more details, refer to the AS Series Programming Manual.
The AS300 Series PLC supports data transmissions between the CPU module and other CPU module or device
through sockets and the communication protocols including TCP and UDP are supported; four groups of connections
can be set respectively for each protocol. As for AS200 Series PLC, two groups of connections are supported
respectively.
_8
8-40
The parameters in the TCP Socket Setting are the same as the parameters in the UDP Socket Setting except that
there is no Keep Alive Timer parameter in the UDP Socket Setting. The parameters in the TCP and UDP Socket
Setting are described below.
 Remote IP: Users can set a remote IP address.
 Remote Port: Users can set a communication port used by the remote device for this TCP connection. The port
number must be within the range between 0 and 65535.
 Local Port: Users can set a communication port used by the local CPU module for this connection. The port
number must be within the range between 0 and 65535.
 Send Address: Uses can set the initial device in the CPU module where data which will be sent is stored.
 Send Length: Users can set the length of data which will be sent by the local CPU module. The length must be
within the range between 0 and 200 bytes. For PLC CPU with FW V1.06.20 or later, the range is between 0 and
512 bytes.
 Receive Address: Uses can set an initial device in the CPU module where data which will be received is stored.
 Receive Length: Users can set the length of data which will be received by the local CPU module. The length
must be within the range between 0 and 200 bytes. For PLC CPU with FW V1.06.20 or later, the range is
between 0 and 512 bytes. _8

 Keep Alive Timer: Users can set a maximum keep alive time for the connection. If no data is transmitted, and
the keep alive period has elapsed, the CPU module will terminate the connection automatically.
The port number used by the local CPU module and the port number used by the remote device cannot be the same,
and the devices where data which will be sent is stored cannot overlap the devices where data which will be received
is stored. If the IP address of the remote device is 192.168.1.100, the port number used by the remote device is 65500,
and the port number used by the local CPU module is 65501, the remote device and the local CPU module can transmit
data through this TCP connection.
8-41
If the local CPU module wants to send 10-word data to the remote device, the data will be stored in D0~D9 before the
data is sent. If the local CPU module receives 20-word data from the remote device, the data will be stored in
D100~D119.
If the length of data received is larger than the length set, the first 20-word data will be stored in D100~D119, and the
data after the first 20-word data will be discarded. Likewise, if the length of data received is less than the length set,
the data will be stored in the devices starting from D100, and the values in devices where no new data is stored will be
retained.
If no data is transmitted, and 60 seconds have elapsed, the CPU module will close the socket, and terminate the
connection.
8.2.13 Ethernet Port Advance Setting – RTU Mapping
In the RTU Mapping table, users can set Delta RTU-EN01 slave in connection with PLC CPU. The remote device can
be controlled via Ethernet. For the setting and operation of RTU-EN01, refer to the operation manual.
Select RTU Mapping Enable checkbox to enable the function of connection between RTU module and PLC CPU. Set
the update cycle in Cycle box and a timeout in Timeout box. It means a timeout when RTU does not give a reply within
the timeout set.
The data mapping between each group of RTU-EN01 and PLC CPU is set in the RTU Mapping section. RTU-EN01
and I/O module connected to it are set via DCISoft. For more information on DCISoft, refer to the operation manual.
_8
8-42
 Users can select RTU1 Enable to enable this RTU function. Each RTU can be set individually.
 Users can set a station address and IP address.
 Users can set RX mapping address and RX mapping length to make the digital input points of DI module
connected to RTU mapped to X/M devices and length of PLC CPU. While, the RY mapping address and length
set is used for making the digital output points of DO module mapped to Y/M devices and length of PLC CPU.
 Users can set RCR Read mapping address and RCR Read mapping length to make the analog input points of
AI module connected to RTU mapped to D/SR devices and length of PLC CPU. While, the RCR Write mapping
address and length set is used for making the analog output points of AO module mapped to D/SR devices and
length of PLC CPU.
8.2.14 Function Card 1 Setting
The Function Card 1 Setting table is used for setting parameters of function card in AS300 series CPU module, which
is installed by inserting to the slot. For AS100 and AS200 Series PLC CPU, there is no Function Card 1 and thus there
is no settings for Function Card 1.
_8
 Users can select Auto in Card1 Detect mode box to detect the actual card model and setting or Manual to
select the AS--F232/ F422/ F485/F2AD/F2DA function card which need be configured in the Manual Select
Card box.
 For the setting of parameters in AS-F232/ F422/ F485.
 Users can set F2AD to receive the signal of 0~10V or 4~20mA in F2AD Analog Input Mode box and set F2AD
to send the signal of 0~10V or 4~20mA in F2DA Analog Output Mode box. The average times are set in F2AD
Sampling Time and Average Times boxes respectively.
8-43
8.2.15 Function Card 2 Setting
The Function Card 2 Setting table is used for setting parameters of Function Card 2 in AS300 Series PLC CPU, which
is installed by inserting to the slot. Besides settings for Function Card 2, settings for AS-FEN02 and IP filter are also
included. The only difference between Function Card 1 and Function Card 2 is the settings options of AS-FCOPM and
AS-FEN02 are added in Manual Select Card box for Function Card 2. For AS100 and AS200 Series PLC CPU, the
AS-FCOPM is used for internal communication port and no changes can be made. If you have inserted AS-FCOPM or
AS-FEN02 in AS300 Series PLC CPU, you can set up their parameters here. For AS-FCOPM card, the parameters
can be set as shown in the following window.
 Select AS Remote Control/Delta Servo Drives and AS Remote Module/CANopen DS301 from the AS-FCOPM
working mode box. The AS Remote Module and Delta Servo Drives adopts communication protocols exclusive
to Delta servo products and AC motor drives. In addition, the AS Remote Module and Delta Servo Drives are also
applied in connecting remote I/O AS series as well as CANopen DS301 for the application of DS301 standard
protocol.
 Set the address of the station when CANopen DS301 is selected from the AS-FCOPM working mode box.
 The remote I/O parameters can be set if AS Remote Mode is selected from the AS-FCOPM working mode box.
The AS Remote Module No. sets the number of remote I/O modules and each one can connect one expansion
_8 module.
 If AS Remote Mode/Delta servo drives and AS Remote Mode is selected from the AS-FCOPM working mode box,
you can set the followings:
The actions after detecting the remote modules in Select run mode after detect remote module: Run
connected remote module or All remote module stop.
The actions when the remote I/O module is disconnected during operation in AS CPU module keep or Stop
when slave node dis-connected: only Shows Error Message or PLC Stop & Show Error Message.
You can define after how long the remote I/O module does not give a reply can be seen as timeout in Remote
and CANopen Communication Timeout.
8-44
You can define the times of trying to connect after a timeout occurs in Auto Retry connection after Disconnected.
 All three AS-FCOPM working modes can set the AS-FCOPM Bit Rate.
Communication data sampling position: It is suggested to select Auto, but if the communication with the slave
is unstable, you can select the data sampling position in percentage.
 When CANopen DS301 protocol is selected from the AS-FCOPM working mode box, you can set
DS301 PDO Data Exchanged: Start after power-on or Start after CPU running
Insert AS-FEN02 by clicking the function card slot 2 and selecting AS-FEN02, as the image shown below.
_8
8-45
You can also set AS-FEN02 card in the Edit Area. Set AS-FEN02 as Manual Select Card (Note: If AS-FEN02 card is
selected from Manual Select Card, then Function Card 1 cannot be set.) After that you can set up Ethernet
communication parameters.
_8
8-46
The IP filter adds another layer of confirmation to ensure the devices for communication are permitted. This function
can also limit communication objects. When IP filter function enables, only the devices within the listed IP address
from the IP filter table are allowed to communicate with AS-FEN02. By selecting IP Filter Function Enable, users
can input the beginning and ending of 1-8 set of IP address.
8.2.16 Data Exchange
AS Series PLC CPU is equipped with the data exchange function through standard Modbus TCP. You can find the
relevant settings under the Data Exchange tab.
AS Series PLC CPU is built with two ports, two COM ports or one COM port and one Ethernet port varied by different
models. When acted as a Master and performs data exchange with a remote Slave, the data exchange through
_8
COM1 and COM2 is via the Modbus protocol; if the data exchange through Ethernet is via the Modbus TCP protocol.
The setting items for COM1, COM2 and Ethernet are the same.
8-47
 You can set the three Modes to start data exchange.

A. Program Control: PLC decides whether or not to execute the set flags for data exchange. Refer to
special flags (SM) descriptions for more details in AS Series Programming

Manual.
B. PLC Run: The set data exchange will be executed automatically when PLC is in RUN state. If the
PLC is in STOP state, the communication will stop.

C. Always Enable: The data exchange will be executed constantly after PLC is powered on.
 Function buttons and descriptions:

Function Button Description
Click Add to add a new data exchange item in area .
Click Edit to enter the selected data exchange setting
page.
Select the data exchange item and click Move Up and
Move Down to rearrange the order of data exchange
table.
Select the data exchange item and click Copy and the
copied item will be pasted to the last raw of the data
exchange table.
Select the data exchange item and click Delete to delete
the selected item.
Click Delete All to delete all data exchange items
presented.
Select this option to detect if the assigned slaves of the
data exchange table exist. If the slave does NOT exist,
the connection to the slave will stop to increase

_8 efficiency.
Note: It is suitable for applications that the time it takes
for the slaves to power-on is less than the master does.
If not, do not select this option.
8-48
 Items on the data exchange table:
Name Description
Item The number of the block for data exchange.
Enable Selects whether to enable the data exchange table when the data exchange is performed.
The slave station address for the data exchange table. You can set one address for
Station Address/
multiple data exchange tables. It is a station address under the COM1 and COM2 tabs,
IP Address
and an IP under the Ethernet tab.
Local Address The device address range used by the master in the data exchange table
: Input: the data block where the master reads from a slave
: Output: the data block where the master writes to a slave
This is the device address range used by a slave in the data exchange table.
Remote Address The device range is in hexadecimal if the slave in the data exchange table is a user-
defined Modbus Device.
This is the size of the data exchange table, which is consistent with the result calculated
Quantity
from the device range.
Data Exchange Setting Page

Under the Data Exchange Tab, you can set up data exchange for COM communication, Ethernet
communication and Function Card. Click Add and then Edit or double-click the data exchange table
to open the editing page.
_8
8-49
 Local Device Setting

Select the option Enable for data exchange to start. You can set the shortest update cycle and
connection timeout time in ms. If there is no response from the target device for a period of time that you have set
,that is considered as a timeout. If you select the option Support Read/Write Synchronization (Function Code:
0x17), the master PLC CPU can use Modbus function code to complete read and write synchronization at one
execution. However you need to make sure all the devices support Modbus function codes; otherwise, the slaves
devices may NOT recognize the function code and fail to complete read/write synchronization.
 Remote Device Setting

Slave Address: station number of the slave device for data exchange
IP Address: IP address of the slave device (only available for EtherNet)
Remote Device Type: slave device model type, such as Delta PLC or standard Modbus devices
 Read
Read: When PLC CPU reads data from the remote device: PLC CPU defines a device range to store data including
the device type, starting address and quantity which are read from the remote device. Define the device type, starting
address and quantity in the remote device that will be read by PLC CPU.
Local Start Address: Device type and start address of devices where PLC CPU store data
Remote Start Address: Device type and start address of the remote device to be read
Quantity: Data length of input
 Write
Write: PLC CPU writes data to a remote device; PLC CPU defines a device range for the remote device to read the
following data, the device type, starting address and quantity. Define the device type, starting address and quantity in
the remote device that will be written by the PLC CPU.
Local Start Address: Device type and start address of the source data of PLC CPU
Remote Start Address: Device type and start address of the remote device where data are to be written
Quantity: Data length of output
_8
8-50
9
Chapter 9. EtherNet/IP Specification and
Operation
Table of Contents
9.1 Introduction ............................................................................................... 9-4
9.1.1 EtherNet/IP ........................................................................................... 9-4
9.1.2 Definitions of Common Network Terms ...................................................... 9-4
9.1.3 Ethernet Features ................................................................................... 9-5
9.2 Installation ................................................................................................ 9-7
9.2.1 EtherNet/IP Device ................................................................................. 9-7
9.2.2 Network Cable Installation ....................................................................... 9-7
9.2.3 Network Communication Parameter Setting ..............................................9-10
9.3 Specifications ........................................................................................... 9-11
9.3.1 Ethernet Specification ............................................................................9-11
9.3.2 EtherNet/IP Specification ........................................................................9-12
9.3.3 PROFINET Specification ..........................................................................9-14
9.3.4 EtherNet Communication Port .................................................................9-14
9.4 EIP Builder ................................................................................................ 9-15
9.4.1 Run the EIP Builder................................................................................9-15
9.4.2 Set up the IP Address ............................................................................9-17
9.4.3 Network ...............................................................................................9-25
9.4.4 Data Mapping........................................................................................9-34
9.4.5 Diagnosis .............................................................................................9-42
9.5 Programming ............................................................................................ 9-44
9.5.1 Explicit Message .........................................................................................9-44
9.5.2 TAG ..........................................................................................................9-44
9.6 Troubleshooting ........................................................................................ 9-49
9.6.1 Error Code Classification ..............................................................................9-49
9.6.2 Error Codes & How to fix them .....................................................................9-49
9.6.3 AS-FPFN02 Error Codes & How to fix them.....................................................9-53
9.7 Studio 5000 Software Operation ............................................................... 9-54
9.7.1 Architecture ............................................................................................... 9-54

9.7.2 Create a New Project .................................................................................. 9-54
9.7.3 Create a Scanner ....................................................................................... 9-56
9.7.4 Connect to a Delta Adapter .......................................................................... 9-58
9.7.5 Editing Corresponding Addresses for AS300 ................................................... 9-63
9.7.6 Download .................................................................................................. 9-64
9.7.7 Data Mapping ............................................................................................ 9-65
9.8 CIP Object ................................................................................................ 9-67
9.8.1 Object List ................................................................................................. 9-67
9.8.2 Data Type .................................................................................................. 9-68
9.8.3 Identity Object (Class ID: 01 Hex) ................................................................ 9-71
9.8.4 Message Router Object (Class ID: 02 Hex) .................................................... 9-73
9.8.5 Assembly Object (Class ID: 04 Hex) ............................................................. 9-74
9.8.6 Connection Manager Object (Class ID: 06 Hex) .............................................. 9-78
9.8.7 Port Object (Class ID: F4 Hex) ..................................................................... 9-80
9.8.8 TCP/IP Interface Object (Class ID: F5 Hex) .................................................... 9-82
9.8.9 Ethernet Link Object (Class ID: F6 Hex) ........................................................ 9-85
9.8.10 X Register (Class ID: 350 Hex) ................................................................... 9-88
9.8.11 Y Register (Class ID: 351 Hex) ................................................................... 9-89
9.8.12 D Register (Class ID: 352 Hex) .................................................................. 9-90
9.8.13 M Register (Class ID: 353 Hex) .................................................................. 9-91
9.8.14 S Register (Class ID: 354 Hex) ................................................................... 9-92
9.8.15 T Register (Class ID: 355 Hex) ................................................................... 9-93
9.8.16 C Register (Class ID: 356 Hex) ................................................................... 9-94
9.8.17 HC Register (Class ID: 357 Hex) ................................................................. 9-95
9.8.18 SM Register (Class ID: 358 Hex) ................................................................ 9-96
9.8.19 SR Register (Class ID: 359 Hex) ................................................................. 9-97
9.9 Delta EIP Product List................................................................................ 9-98
9.9.1 Delta EIP Products ...................................................................................... 9-98
9.9.2 Delta EIP Products, DLR (Device Level Ring) supported ................................... 9-98
9.9.3 Delta EIP Products, Scanner supported ......................................................... 9-99
9.10 Operation and Monitor on the Web .......................................................... 9-100
_9 9.10.1 Getting Started ...................................................................................... 9-100
9.10.2 Device Information .............................................................................. 9-104
9.10.3 Network configuration .......................................................................... 9-104
9.10.4 Data Monitoring .................................................................................. 9-107
9.10.5 Diagnostic .......................................................................................... 9-112
9.10.6 Configurations..................................................................................... 9-114
9-2
Chapter 9 Ethernet Specification and Operation
9.11 Delta EIP Product Application (with OMRON Products) ......................... 9-114
9.11.1 Architecture ........................................................................................ 9-114
9.11.2 TAG Connection ................................................................................... 9-115
9.11.3 IO Connection ..................................................................................... 9-131
9_
9-3
9.1 Introduction
9.1.1 EtherNet/IP
EtherNet/IP (“IP” stands for “Industrial Protocol”) is an industrial Ethernet network managed by ODVA, Inc. (formerly Open
DeviceNet Vendors Association, Inc.), a global trade and standards development organization.
EtherNet/IP works on a TCP/UDP/IP based Ethernet network and uses the most widely deployed collections of Ethernet
standards to provide a broad range of applications in different industries that require high-speed and stability including
Factory Automation (FA), Building Automation (BA), Process Automation (PA) and many more.
Delta covers a full range of controller and drive products supported by EtherNet/IP, including Programmable Logic
Controllers (PLC), inverters, Human Machine Interfaces (HMI) and so on. Refer to Section 9.9 for a full product list that
support EtherNet/IP. In addition, you can also use EDS files to connect to other brands of EtherNet/IP devices. You can
run Delta EtherNet/IP software (EIP Builder) through the ISPSoft software. Download the ISPSoft software at:
Delta | Download Center (deltaww.com)
9.1.2 Definitions of Common Network Terms
Term Definition
ODVA Open DeviceNet Vendor Association for EtherNet/IP
EtherNet/IP, an industrial Ethernet network, provides interoperability for system providers.

EIP
IP stands for Industrial Protocol. The term “EIP” (EtherNet/IP) is used in this manual.
I/O Connection Use the I/O connection to connect to EtherNet/IP and to exchange data cyclically.
Connect to EtherNet/IP and to exchange data non-cyclically. Data is exchanged piece by

Explicit Message
piece through instructions.
Requested Packet Interval, through the I/O connection to connect to EtherNet/IP to

RPI
exchange data at regular time intervals.
ACD Address Conflict Detection to detect IP address duplications.
 You use TAGs for assigning and referencing memory locations for Rockwell PLCs,
the same as registers for Delta PLCs.
 Produced tag: A tag that a controller makes available for other controllers. Multiple
controllers can simultaneously consume (receive) the data. A produced tag sends
Produced/Consumed its data to consumed tags (consumers) without using logic.
_9 TAG (P/C TAG)  Consumed tag: A tag that receives the data of a produced tag. The data type of the
consumed tag and the produced tag must match (including any array dimensions).
 The data is transferred over Ethernet/IP. For example, PLC-A needs data from
PLC-B, so PLC-B sends the data to PLC-A. Therefore, PLC-B is the producer and
PLC-A is the consumer.
9-4
Electronic Data Sheets: EDS files are simple text files used by EtherNet/IP network
EDS configuration tools to help you identify EtherNet/IP products and easily commission them
on a network.
Data Mapping Exchanging data between devices
EIP Scanner The master station is called an EIP Scanner in EtherNet/IP.
EIP Adapter The slave station is called an EIP Adapter in EtherNet/IP.
Device Level Ring (DLR) provides fault-tolerant network design for daisy-chain and linear
topology. The DLR protocol provides high network availability in a ring topology. It was
DLR intended primarily for implementation in EtherNet/IP end-devices that have two Ethernet
ports and embedded switch technology, providing fast network fault detection and
reconfiguration to support the most demanding control applications.
Modbus TCP This is a Modbus variant used for communications over TCP/IP networks.
9.1.3 Ethernet Features
9.1.3.1 Delta EIP Architecture

This typical Delta EIP architecture includes an EIP Scanner and Adapters; data mapping is achieved between devices
through an I/O connection and explicit messaging. The AS Series supports single port Ethernet; thus you can install and
configure devices with embedded switch technology over EtherNet/IP.
9_
9-5
9.1.3.2 EIP Features

 Flexibility
- Flexible topology: EIP devices may include single port Ethernet as well as dual port Ethernet, and provide
applicable networks such as linear topology, ring topology and ring topology for faster expansion and easier
management.
- EtherNet/IP works on a TCP/UDP/IP based Ethernet network, uses most widely deployed collections of Ethernet
standards, and supports Wi-fi connection. Even personnel with no IT background can build the network easily.
- Applicable networks include linear topology, ring topology, star topology, Ethernet, EtherNet/IP, one or more
LANs, etc. You can set configuration through USB or an interface.
 Simplicity
- With a connector: Delta provides a full range of products, including human machine interfaces (HMI),
programmable logic controllers (PLC), and inverter drives for application in an industrial operation. You can build
a network simply through an RJ-45 connector, saving costs on cables and other connecting tools.
- Single network: in place of the 3-tier industrial architecture, single network architecture provides 100MB/bits
high-speed cyclical and non-cyclical data mapping functions, ensuring complete network diagnosis and
effectively shortening debugging time.
- Graphical user interface software: the EIP Builder uses a graphical user interface designed for intuitive operation.
 Integration
- Data mapping: the EIP Builder provides a consistent setting interface, allowing you to reduce the time to learn
and set up configurations.
- Listed device parameters: the EIP Builder presents the device parameters in a list. Instead of looking them up
in the user manual, you can quickly check on the parameters in the list.
- EDS file: you can connect to Delta and other brands of EtherNet/IP products with EDS files.
_9
9-6
9.2 Installation
9.2.1 EtherNet/IP Device
A Delta EtherNet/IP (EIP) device allows you to build a linear topology, ring topology, and star topology networks. A Delta
EIP device includes the EIP Builder software, EIP Scanner, EIP Adapter, EIP Tap, and an Ethernet switch. EIP Scanners
and EIP Adapters can be further divided into single port and dual port devices. The AS Series are single port devices.
Refer to Section 9.2.2.1 for the single port setup and refer to Section 9.2.2.3 for the software installation.
9.2.2 Network Cable Installation

Each EtherNet/IP device is connected to an Ethernet switch with a CAT 5e cable. Please use Delta standard cables and
the DVS series industrial switches. Refer to the Delta PLC/HMI Cable Selection Guide for more information.
9.2.2.1. Single Port Device

You can use a single port device to build up either a linear or a star network topology. An Ethernet switch and an Ethernet
tab are required to create a star topology or a ring topology.
Linear Topology
 Linear Topology 1
 Linear Topology 2
Star Topology
9_
9-7
9.2.2.2. Dual Port Device

You can use a dual port device to build a linear, a star or a ring network topology. A DLR function is required to create a
ring topology. Refer to Section 9.9.2 for DLR supported series.
Linear Topology
Star Topology
Ring Topology
A DLR function is required to create a ring topology. Refer to Section 9.9.2 for AS series that support DLR.
_9
When a switch is needed for the particular topology, the switch should support the DLR function. If not, the connection
might fail.
9-8
9.2.2.3 EIP Builder Software
Linear and star topology

Install the EIP Builder software on your PC to monitor and configure the EIP devices. You can also connect an EIP
device to your PCs directly, or use a switch to connect to the PCs.
Ring topology
Install the EIP Builder on your PC to monitor and configure the EIP devices. Be sure to save a network connection for
your PC to connect to the EIP device.
9_
9-9
Alternatively, you can use an EIP tap to connect your PC so that the ring topology stays intact.
9.2.3 Network Communication Parameter Setting

In ISPSoft you can edit, upload, download and monitor AS PLC CPU programs through Ethernet communication. Refer
to section 2.4.3.4 in ISPSoft User Manual for more details. Go to ISPSoft -> Help -> ISPSoft User Index and then find
section concerning Communication Parameter Setting – Ethernet for more details.
_9
9-10
9.3 Specifications
9.3.1 Ethernet Specification
Model AS300 & AS200 Series
Communication Protocols EtherNet/IP Scanner / Adapter、Modbus TCP
Protocols BOOTP, DHCP, SMTP, NTP, Socket, HTTP
Communication Speed 10/100 Mbps Auto-Detection
Communication Interface RJ-45 with Auto MDI/MDIX
Numbers of the Ethernet Port 1
Model AS-FEN02 ( work with AS300 Series)
Communication Protocols EtherNet/IP Scanner / Adapter, Modbus TCP
Protocols BOOTP, DHCP, SMTP, NTP, Socket, HTTP
Communication Speed 10/100 Mbps Auto-Detection
Model AS-FPFN02 ( work with AS300 Series)
Communication Protocols PROFINET RT
Protocols PROFINET IO
Communication Speed 100 Mbps Auto-Detection
Specification
Item / per transmission
AS300 AS200 AS-FEN02
Maximum connection quantity

32 16 8
for Client *1
9_
Modbus TCP
Maximum connection quantity
32 16 8
for Server*1
Max. data length 100 words
Socket TCP connection quantity 4 2 N/A
9 - 11
(communication port)*1 UDP connection quantity
Max. data length 200 bytes
SMTP (for emailing) Emailing quantity 4 4
*1: Numbering is used for connections via the communication port. You can use connection 1 in TCP mode or UDP
mode and up to 4 connections can be made per transmission. If connection 1 is used in TCP mode, the same connection
number cannot be used in UDP mode.
9.3.2 EtherNet/IP Specification
AS300 Series AS200 Series AS-FEN02

Item
Scanner Adapter Scanner Adapter Adapter
Device type Scanner / Adapter Adapter

General
Topology type Star topology Star, linear topologies
CIP connection
number 32 8 16 8 8
(data exchange)
TCP connection 16 8
8
number (Clients + Servers) (Clients + Servers)
Requested Packet
5 ms – 1000 ms 1 ms – 1000 ms
Interval (RPI)
Max. Transmission
3,000 pps 10,000 pps
CIP Network Speed
I/O
Max. Data Length/per
Connection 500 bytes 200 bytes
transmission
FMV1.08 FMV1.08
or or
previous previous
Supported devices, versions: D, X, Y, versions: D, X, Y,

D, X, Y, SR
registers, and flags D SR D SR
FW V1.10 FW
_9 or later: V1.10 or
D/M later: D/M
CIP Network Class 3

16 8 8 8 8
Explicit (Connected Type)
Message UCMM Total 16 Total 8 Total 8
9-12
AS300 Series AS200 Series AS-FEN02

Item
Scanner Adapter Scanner Adapter Adapter
(Non-Connected (for all connection (for all connection (for all connection
Type, only uses TCP types) types) types)
connections)
Identity Object (16#01)
Message Router Object (16#02)
Assembly Object (16#04)
CIP Objects Connection Manager Object (16#06)
Port Object (16#F4)
TCP/IP Interface Object (16#F5)
Ethernet Link Object (16#F6)
Max. Consumed TAG

32 16
Number
Max. Produced TAG

32 16
CIP Network Number
N/A
TAG 500 bytes (IO Connection)
Max. Data Length
400 bytes (Explicit Message)
Requested Packet
5 ms – 1000 ms
Interval (RPI)
Maximum number of connections when using AS300 to connect to other devices through Ethernet/IP:
 AS300 can act as a Scanner and an Adapter simultaneously. It can connected up to 16 devices (for example 8
Scanners and 8 Adapters).
 When AS300 acts as a Scanner, it can connect to up to 16 devices. Each device can establish up to 32
connections for data mapping. Data mapping types can be I/O connection and Consumed TAG. You can use
explicit message for data mapping at the same time, up to 16 explicit message connections can be created.
 When AS300 acts as an Adapter, it can connect to up to 16 devices. Each device can establish up to 8
connections for data mapping. Data mapping types can be I/O connection and Produced TAG. You can use explicit
message for data mapping at the same time, up to 8 explicit message connections can be created.
9_
 Using device D or device M takes 2 bytes (16 bits) as a unit in data length for IO connections, for example M0 to
M15 (16 bits), M12 to M43 (32 bits). If you need to store the data of 200 bits from M100, the data length should be
set in a value larger than 200 bits and in bytes it will be 26 bytes (26 bytes = 208 bits), the actual devices to be
mapped will be M100 to M307. D0.0 will be stored in M100 (the first bit).
9-13
9.3.3 PROFINET Specification

When AS-FPFN02 is installed on AS300 PLC CPU, this communication card can work independently and does NOT
occupy the communication port of PLC CPU. AS-FPFN02 can act as a PROFINET adapter and connect to a PROFINET
scanner to exchange data on the PROFINET Network (PN) Refer to section 10.2.8 of AS Module Manual for more
information.
Item Specification
Communication Protocol PROFINET
EtherNet/IP Interface 100 Mbit with 2 x RJ45
Device Type PROFINET Devices
Network Cable Length 100 meter
Error Indicator System Fail (SF): Red; Bus Fail (BF): Red
Max. IO Slot Supported 17
Register to Read and Write AS300 series data registers are supported to read and write
Minimum Time for Data Exchange to Operate 10 ms
Input: 250 words

Maximum Data Length/Per Transmission
Output: 250 words
PROFINET Configuration Download PROFINET Configurations from PN Controller
9.3.4 EtherNet Communication Port
9.3.4.1 Communication Port Pin Assignment

Delta EtherNet/IP devices use CAT5e industrial Ethernet cables and can be connected via RJ-45 communication port.
Pin Signal Description Pin Signal Description
1 Tx+ Transmit plus 5 -- N/C
2 Tx- Transmit negative 6 Rx- Receive negative
3 Rx+ Receive plus 7 -- N/C

_9
4 -- N/C 8 -- N/C
9-14
9.3.4.2 Communication LED Indicator

LED Indicator LED Status Description
 Communication port is connected.

ON
 Connected to Ethernet
LINK Green
 Communication port is not connected.
OFF
 Not Connected to Ethernet
 Packets transmitting/receiving
Blinking
 Packets transmitting/receiving over Ethernet
ACK Yellow
 No packets transmitting/receiving
OFF
 No packets transmitting/receiving over Ethernet
Note: The LED indicator is at the RJ45 connection.
9.4 EIP Builder

The Delta EtherNet/IP software, EIP Builder, is embedded in ISPSoft. You run it from the ISPSoft software (version 3.0
and above). Download the ISPSoft software at:
http://www.deltaww.com/services/DownloadCenter2.aspx?secID=8&pid=2&tid=0&CID=06&itemID=060301&typeID=1&d
ownloadID=,&title=--%20Select%20Product%20Series%20--&dataType=8;&check=1&hl=en-US
9.4.1 Run the EIP Builder

You can call EIP Builder from Delta EIP Scanner’s HWCONFIG in ISPSoft. You can also call it independently to set up
parameters for the Adapter. The Delta EIP Scanner is equipped with the EtherNet/IP communication PLC and the
EtherNet/IP module. Refer to Section 9.9.3 for a list of Delta EIP Scanner products supported by EIP Builder.
9.4.1.1 Run the EIP Builder via an EIP Scanner
 Steps to run EIP Builder
Run EIP Builder from an EIP Scanner product. When using a Delta EIP Scanner, you set up an EIP module through
HWCONFIG in ISPSoft. Make sure the current communication is via EtherNet in ISPSoft.
Sta rt
9_
Op en Cr ea te Op en Down lo a d O pe n
I S P So ft V3 . 0 X I S PS o ft Pr oj ect HW CO NF IG HW CO NF IG E I P Bui ld er
9-15
1. Open ISPSoft V3.0X: click the Start menu and go to Programs > Delta Industrial Automation > PLC >
ISPSoft 3.0X
2. Create a new project: on the File menu, click New to display the Create a New Project dialog box.
3. Select a PLC: in the Create a New Project dialog box, select a PLC product that is supported by EIP builder.
4. Open HWCONFIG: double-click HWCONFIG in the Project window.
_9
9-16
5. Save and download the settings from HWCONFIG：on the File menu click Save to save the settings and then
click the download button on the toolbar to download the file to PLC. You must save the configuration in
HWCONFIG before opening the other communication tools. While working in the communication tools, you
cannot work in HWCONFIG.
6. Open EIP Builder: right-click the CPU module in the system configuration area point to Communication
Software and then click EIP Builder. If EIP Builder is not available, check if the current communication is via
EtherNet in ISPSoft.
9.4.2 Set up the IP Address

This section provides an overview of how to set up IP address for AS Series modules. Set up the IP address before
configuring the EIP related parameters or data mapping settings.
9_
9-17
9.4.2.1 IP Address Types

The AS Series supports 3 types of IP addressing, BOOTP, DHCP and static IP address.
Type of IP Address Definition
Uses the TCP/IP Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) to set up the IP address, netmask and
BOOTP gateway. A BOOTP server may require some configuration. The BOOTP protocol is
designed for a network in which each host has a permanent network connection.
Uses the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) to automatically obtain IP address,
DHCP
netmask, gateway, main computer name and the WINS server.
Static IP You manually set the IP address, netmask and gateway.
9.4.2.2 Set the IP Address (Static IP)
 Steps to set the IP address
When using an EIP product with a static IP address, set up the IP address in HWCONFIG in ISPSoft. The following
example uses the AS Series.
Cre ate
I S PS o ft Pr oj ec t
Op en S et up Dow nl oa d
HWC O NFI G I P Ad dr ess HWC O NFI G
Refer to Section 9.4.1.1 for how to set up an EIP module in HWCONFIG.
1. Configure the network parameters
 Double-click the AS Series module in HWCONFIG to open the Device Setting dialog box.
 On the Options tab, set the IP address on the Ethernet Port Basic Settings page, and then click OK.
_9
9-18
2. Save and download the settings from HWCONFIG: on the File menu click Save to save the settings and then
on the Options menu, click Download or click the Download button on the toolbar.
9.4.2.3 Set the IP Address (BOOTP/DHCP)
 Steps to set the IP address

When using an EIP product with a BOOTP/DHCP IP address, users can set up the IP address through the IP
Manager in the EIP Builder.
O pe n
EIP B ui ld er
9_
Cr ea te O pe n Y Same I P as sign
Set up IP Disab le mode aft er each
MA C Ad dr ess IP M an ag er
BO OTP power-on
N Res et IP assign
mode aft er each
power-on
9-19
Descriptions for the IP Manager:
1
2
3
4 8
5 9
6 10
7
Item Definition
Stops the BOOTP/DHCP server; the IP manager does not request an IP

 Stop the Server
addresses from the BOOTP/DHCP server.
Opens a dialog box to set up the subnet mask, gateway, primary DNS,
 Network Settings
secondary DNS, and domain name.
 Clear List Clears the contents of the list.
 New Adds a new IP/MAC address.
 Delete Deletes the selected item from the list.
 Import Imports the IP/MAC address list; the file format is .CSV.
 Export Exports the IP/MAC address list; the file format is .CSV.
 Enable BOOTP Enables the BOOTP to assign an IP address for the selected item.
 Enable DHCP Enables the DHCP to assign an IP address to the selected item.
Disables the BOOTP/DHCP on the device; the device does not request an IP
 Disable BOOTP/DHCP
addresses from the server.
_9
9-20
 Steps to set the IP address:
1. MAC address: find the MAC address on the EIP device. The MAC address uniquely identifies the device.
2. Open the IP Manager
 In EIP Builder on the Tool menu, click IP Manager.
 The IP Manager can be the BOOTP/DHCP Server, receiving IP address requests from devices. The IP
Manager window is shown below.
9_
9-21
3. Set up the IP address
 Double-click the listed MAC address for your device to open the Input Data dialog box.
 Enter the IP address and click OK.
4. Disable DHCP/BOOTP
Click the device in the Mapping Table that you want to disable, then click Disable DHCP/BOOTP. The selected
device does not send DHCP/BOOTP requests. To change the IP address receiving mode, refer to Section 9.4.2.4
for more information.
_9
9-22
 Notes
 Enable BOOTP: when the IP address receiving mode is BOOTP (BOOTP is enabled), the IP address is
assigned, and the device sends out BOOTP requests for IP addresses during each power-on.
 Enable DHCP: when the IP address receiving mode is DHCP (DHCP is enabled), the IP address is assigned,
and the device sends out DHCP requests for IP addresses during each power-on.
 Disable DHCP/BOOTP: when BOOTP is disabled, the device does not send out any DHCP/BOOTP requests
for IP addresses during each power-on.
9.4.2.4 Re-enable BOOTP/DHCP

To enable the DHCP or BOOTP function again, use the device software to make the change. Using the AS Series as an
example: from the Start menu, start ISPSoft, then HWCONFIG, and then IP Manager. In IP Manager sets the IP address
to the receiving mode.
Open Set up Download

HWCONFIG parameters HWCONFIG
Open Open Set up I P

EI P Builder IP Manager receiving mode
 Steps to set device parameters
1. Refer to Section 9.4.1.1 for how to start HWCONFIG.
2. Set the parameters: enable the IP address receiving mode to BOOTP/DHCP.
◆ Double-click the device to open the Device Setting dialog box.
◆ Make changes to the items, such as IP address receiving modes and click OK to confirm the settings.
9_
9-23
3. Download the settings from HWCONFIG
◆ Refer to Section 9.4.1.1 for more information.
4. Open EIP Builder.
5. Open the IP Manager
6. Open the IP setup page
_9
9-24
9.4.3 Network
EIP Builder provides a graphical user interface, and you can see the devices and their EtherNet/IP connections in the
Network View. This section provides an overview of how to add your devices to the network connections.
IP Manager
(Set up IP)
Add Device Cr ea te Ne twor k Set up Device

EIP Builder ( Scan Network) (S et u p Co nn ecti on )
Settings
Add Devices
(Manually)
Descriptions of the EIP Builder Window
3
4
Item Definition
 Toolbar Toolbar buttons
 Network View Displays the connected devices and their connection status 9_
 Configuration Area Displays the configurations and allows you to set the parameters
 Product List Displays the available devices that can be connected to EtherNet/IP
9-25
 Toolbar buttons
Icon Name Definition
New Creates a new EIP Builder project
Open Opens an existing project
Save Saves the project
Help Opens the help file
Cut Cuts the selected item
Copies the selected item

Copy
Pastes the selected item

Paste
Deletes the selected item

Delete
Scan Network Scans the network for device availability
Check Checks if the project is planed properly
On-line Mode Switches to on-line mode
Uploader Uploads from a device
_9 Downloader Downloads to a device
Opens the communication setting; set up the path connecting the PC to the EIP
Setup Button
Scanner.
9-26
 Network View
2
Name Definition
 Station Name Name of the station
 Device Name Name of the device
Displays the number of devices with Ethernet communication ports.

 Ethernet COM Port
The last digit of the IP address is shown on the COM port.
Displays the connection status; devices on the same line indicate they are in the same
 Network_0
network.
 Configuration Area
Refer to Section 9.4.3.3 for more information.
 Product List
Name Definition
9_
Type the module name you want to find; if no match is found, that means there is no
 Search Bar
EDS file in the system matching the module name.
Categorizes the devices according to the EtherNet/IP definition; devices from third
 Product List
parties are in the Others folder.
9-27
9.4.3.1 Scan Network
2
3
Name Definition
 Selection checkboxes Select the devices you want to add to the network view.
 Refresh Refreshes the network view (scans the network again)
 Join Adds the selected device to the network view
 Operation Steps: Add new devices in (scan the network)
1. Click the Setup button to display the Communication Setting dialog box.
2. Once your PC is connected to the EIP Scanner, there are 3 ways to set up the network communication.
_9 (a) Select an existing driver: Select the driver from the COMMGR Driver list.
(b) Edit an existing driver: Click the setup button in the Common Setting section to edit the driver in the
Driver Properties dialog box.
(c) Add a new driver: Click the setup button+ in the Common Setting section to add a new driver in the
Driver Properties dialog box.
9-28
(c)
(b)
(a)
3. Click the Scan Network button to scan the network and list the scanned devices in the Device List dialog box.
4. Select the devices to add to the Network View, and then click Join to add the selected devices.
9_
AS332T
9-29
9.4.3.2 Add devices (Manually)
 Steps to add new devices manually
1. Select the devices to add from the Product List. You can also enter the module name in the search bar. Drag the
device onto the Network View.
2. Create the network
(a) Drag the Ethernet communication port of the device to the network to create a new connection.
_9
9-30
(b) Create network connections for the devices.
(c) Once the connection is established, click the network line “Network_0” to see all the connected devices in this
network in the Information window.
9_
9-31
9.4.3.3 Set EIP parameters

Click the tabs in the Information window to view and edit the EIP Parameter and the EDS Parameter.
 Information Tab
This tab contains the Module Name, Version, Rack, Slot, Slot, IP address, Mask, Network and Data Exchange
Setting.
 EIP Parameter Tab
This tab contains parameter information from the EDS file. When offline, you can check only the connection
parameters for setting up the EDS filtering rules.
 Disable Keying: Disable key checking the product information versions.

_9
 Compatible Keying: Check if the product information and its master version match and check the
minor version for compatibility.
 Exact Match: Check if the product information, and both the master version and minor version match.
9-32
When the device is connected, you can click the Upload button to upload the related parameters from the device.
Name Definition
 Identification: displays information regarding Vendor, Product
Type, Product Name, Revision, etc.
① Module Status  Status: displays connection status, including Major Fault,
Minor Fault, Internal State, Configuration Status, and Module
Identity.
 Port1: indicates port 1 of the device, for editing IP Address,
Subnet Mask, Gateway Address, and Host Name.

② IP Setting
Note: when there is a Port2, that means there are 2 Ethernet
communication ports.
 EDS parameters filtering rules include Disable Keying,

③ Connection
Compatible Keying, and Exact Match.
 Displays Link Status, Speed, Duplex, Negotiation Status and

④ Port Status
Hardware Fault.
9_
9-33
 EDS Parameter Tab: this is not supported for the AS Series modules; the software closes itself when this Tab
is selected.
9.4.4 Data Mapping

When the connection between devices is established, you can use data mapping to exchange data between devices.
This section provides an overview of how to create a data mapping table.
Data Ex change Data Exchange

Network View Download Data Exc hange
Table Set up
Descriptions for the Data Mapping:
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Name Definition
_9
Data mapping connection count; each row represents one
independent EtherNet/IP connection. The number of connections

 Connection Count cannot exceed the maximum number of connections for the
Scanner. For the AS Series, the maximum number of connections
32.
9-34
Name Definition
 Enable Enable and disable data mapping for the connection.
Use TAG to perform data mapping with adapters.
After selecting this check box,
 The directional arrow points left of () (READ only)
 Registers cannot be used in this row.

 TAG
 The length format is defined by the data format in the Global
Symbols; you cannot change the length format here.
 You must create a Consumed TAG in the Global Symbols in

ISPSoft before using this function.
The IP address of the Adapter to connect to. After the data mapping
connection is established, the system loads the connected device’s

 IP address
IP address. You can also select the device’s IP address from the list
to add and edit the connection.
Once you select the IP address, its name is displayed but cannot be
 Adapter name modified here. Refer to Section 9.4.3  for more information on
how to change the device name.
Starting address of the data mapping’s register.
FW V1.08 or previous versions support device D.

CPU register address
 FW V1.10 or later version support device D and M.
Using device D or device M takes 2 bytes as a unit in data length.
Select the TAG check box. Select the Consumed TAG name from the list.
Adapter address/parameter Target adapter’s register address / parameters
 Input the name of the Produced TAG for other connected EIP
Select the TAG check box.
devices. The default name is the same as the name shown in .
Set up the IN/OUT parameters. When there is no I/O representative

 I/O mapping table table presented for the Adapter, the parameters cannot be opened,
for example in some PLCs.
Set the data mapping length; unit: byte, the maximum is 500 bytes.
 Length
You cannot change the length format here when using TAG.
9_
 Property Set the advanced data mapping parameters.
9-35
 I/O Mapping Table

Delta EIP devices provide an I/O mapping table. You can use the table to edit the parameters if needed.
Name Definition
Select the connection from the list. Different connections may have
 Connection
different mapping parameters.
Input mapping parameters. The No. column shows the maximum

 In number of mapping parameters to input. Double-click the Name
column to open the mapping table to edit the parameters.
Output mapping parameters. The No. column states the maximum

 Out number of mapping parameters to output. Double-click the Name
column to open the mapping table to edit.
The parameter name; double-click the Name column to open the

 Name
mapping table to edit the parameters.
Values; after editing and downloading, the scanner stores the

 Value values. When the connection is established, the values are written
to the Adapter.
_9
9-36
 Property
Name Definition
 Requested Packet Interval (RPI) Time interval to request packets through the I/O connection, unit: ms
 Multicast Communication mode setup: Multicast or Point-to-Point
Sets the timeout according to the RPI or a multiple of RPI (RPI*X).
 Timeout The minimum value is 100 ms to reduce timeout occurrence When a
value that is less than 100 ms is treated as 100 ms.
Cyclic: renews data cyclically
 Trigger Mode Change of State: renews data once there is any change
Application: renews data according to the product setup
 Input Instance You can edit input instance, output instance and configure instance
 Output Instance in some of the EDS files. The instance number is the same as the
data mapping connection number. You can tell the mapped data is
 Configure Instance
from which corresponding device by the instance number.
9_
9-37
 Steps to set up and download parameters
1. Create a data mapping table (*):
 Right-click the COM port on the Ethernet Scanner, and click Data Mapping to open the Data Mapping Table.
The system creates a Data Mapping Tab, shown for Network_0.

Network_0 Data Mapping Tab
N e tw ork_ 0 D at a Ma pp i ng Ta b le
2. Set the Data Mapping Parameters
 Type the parameters in the data mapping table. See below for examples
a) Reading D500–D599 from the Adapter with the IP address 192.168.1.2 to the D10000–D10099 in the
Scanner.
_9
b) Writing D20200–D20299 from the Scanner to D100–D199 in the Adapter with the IP address
192.168.1.1
9-38
 Use TAG function in data mapping
a) Create a General Device in the Network View as shown below and then set the IP address to be used
as a Produced TAG. For adding a device, please refer to Section 9.4.3.
b) Start or switch to the data mapping page.
c) Once you select the TAG check box, the directional arrow is to the left with () (READ only)
9_
9-39
*You can also enter the IP address to be connected to other TAGs so that creating a General Device is not
necessary.
d) Selecting the Consumed TAG
Select the created Consumed TAG from the CPU register address /TAG column.
e) Enter the name for the to-be-connected Produced TAG.
After you select the TAG, the software shows the same TAG name in the register address / parameters /
address for the Adapter. You can modify the TAG name to have the same name as the Produced TAG
name.
 Set the properties
a) Click the … button to set the properties.
b) In the Property Setting dialog box, enter the data mapping parameters.
Set the Requested Packet Interval (RPI) to refresh the data between the Scanner and Adapter
periodically; for example, every 20ms.
_9
9-40
3. Download
 Click the Downloader button on the tool bar to open the Project Downloader window.
 Select the Scanner communication port in EIP Builder; every communication port can download a data
mapping table.
9_
9-41
9.4.5 Diagnosis
EIP Builder can provide diagnostic information on the connection and data mapping status. For the connection status,
refer to the Adapter connection status and indicator in the Network View tab; and for data mapping status and error
codes, refer to Network_0 in the data mapping tab.
 Steps to view network status

 Network View (Connection Status)
a) Click the Network View tab to check the device status from the indicators: for example RUN / STOP and
Error indicators for the PLC.
Network View
Status
The dotted line and the warning sign indicate a connection error, as shown below.
_9
9-42
 Network_0 (Data Mapping):
a) Click the On-line Mode button on the toolbar.
b) Click the Network _0 tab to check the data mapping status and the error codes for Network_0. For error
code definitions, refer to Section 9.6.2.
Co nn ec tio n Stat us
Error Codes
Connection Status
9_
9-43
9.5 Programming
9.5.1 Explicit Message
All connections in EtherNet/IP can be divided into explicit messaging connections and implicit (or I/O) messaging
connections. Explicit messaging uses TCP/IP and request/response communications or client/server connections,
requiring that the instruction include the memory location of the data to be sent to the client. Implicit messaging uses
UDP/IP, in which a server sends information from predefined memory locations to a client at a given interval, using a
requested packet interval (RPI) parameter to specify the interval. For details on using implicit messages, please refer to
Section 9.4.4. This section provides an overview of how the AS Series uses explicit messaging instructions.
When the AS Series acts a Scanner, you can use the EIPRW instruction (API 2208) to read and write Objects. When EIP
Builder uses Objects as parameters, each Object includes various parameters. For details on the EIPRW instruction,
please refer to the AS Programming Manual. For details on Objects that are supported by the AS Series, please refer to
Section 9.8.
9.5.2 TAG
EtherNet/IP can use TAGs to exchange data. A Delta PLC can use Global Symbols to define a TAG, and then Delta HMI
and third party devices can use the TAG. There are 2 types of EIP TAGs, Produced TAGs and Consumed TAGs.
1. Produced TAG: a PLC makes Produced tags that send data to Consumed tags in other EIP Scanners for data
mapping with other EIP devices.
2. Consumed TAG: EIP Scanners make Consumed tags to receive data from Produced tags for data mapping with
other EIP devices.
You can use tags to connect to other EIP devices. Before connecting a Consumed TAG, please check the IP
address of the device to be connected and the Produced TAG name. One device can have more than one Produced
TAG and Consumed TAG. See the following example.
Produced TA G
P roduced TAG 1
P roduced TAG 2 Consumed TAG
Consumed TAG 1
Consumed TAG 2
Consumed TAG
Produced TA G
Ot her EIP devices
_9 The following Delta products support TAG functions:

AS Series PLC CPU: V1.08.20 or later
ISPSoft software: V3.09 or later
DOPSoft software (Delta HMI editing software for DOP-100 series): V4.00.07 or later
9-44
9.5.2.1 Produced TAG
Creating a Produced TAG
1. In ISPSoft, in the Project tree, expand Global Symbols to see EtherNet/IP Table (Produced Tag).
2. Double-click EtherNet/IP Table (Produced TAG) to create a Produced TAG.
9_
9-45
3. Right click in the EtherNet/IP Table (Produced Tag) window and then click Add a Symbol to open the Add Symbol
dialog box.
4. Enter the required information in the table to create the Produced TAG.
After the settings are complete, download the TAG to the PLC. Other EIP devices can access the Produced TAG with
their Consumed TAG. For information on creating a Consumed TAG, refer to the EIP device manual.
_9
9-46
9.5.2.2 Consumed TAG
Creating a Consumed TAG
1. In ISPSoft, in the Project tree, expand Global Symbols to see EtherNet/IP Table (Consumed Tag).
2. Double-click EtherNet/IP Table (Consumed TAG) to create a Consumed TAG.
9_
9-47
3. Right click in the EtherNet/IP Table (Consumed Tag) window and then click Add a Symbol.
4. In the Add Symbol dialog box, enter the required information in the table to create a consumed tag.
5. You can use tags in the data mapping. Refer to Section 9.4.4 for more information.
 Descriptions for the Add Symbol dialog box
1 2 3 4 5
 Identifier Create Tags for a PLC; up to 40 characters.
Correspond to registers or bytes in a PLC; you can use a data register or M bit
 Address
device.
Supports data types such as BOOL, WORD, DWORD, INT, DINT, REAL, and
 Type
_9 ARRAY (one-dimensional array linear array, up to 512 bytes).
 Initial Value Not supported
 Comment Description for the TAG; up to 128 characters.
9-48
9.6 Troubleshooting
This section provides an overview of error codes and troubleshooting for the AS Series.
9.6.1 Error Code Classification

There are two types of error code categories for the AS Series: Configuration Errors, and Application Errors. These error
codes are defined by the ODVA for EtherNet/IP errors. Refer to the following table for AS Series error codes.
Error Code Classification

1st Phase 2nd Phase Description
Category Item
Mismatched EDS files lead to I/O connection
EDS files mismatched
failure. *
Configuration error
Data exchange setup error lead to I/O
Data exchange setup error
connection failure. *
Application error Ethernet/IP error EtherNet/IP communication failure *
* Only the last 2 bytes of the error code are shown; for example, only 011C appears for the error code H’1101011C.
9.6.2 Error Codes & How to fix them

9.6.2.1 Configuration Errors
(EIP Builder only shows Low word error codes)
Category Error Code Description How to fix them
The Transport Class field 1. Check if the product information and the EDS
values of the Transport Class file match.

H’1101011C
and Trigger in the EDS file 2. Reload the EDS file.
are mismatched. 3. Ask the vendor of the device for the EDS file.
1. Check if the product information and the EDS

The Vender ID or the Product
file match.
H’11010114 Code in the EDS file is
2. Reload the EDS file.
EDS Files mismatched.
3. Ask the vendor of the device for the EDS file.
Mismatched
The device type parameters
file match.
H’11010115 in the EDS file are
mismatched.
9_

The revision parameters in
H’11010116 file match.
the EDS file are mismatched.
9-49
The direction parameters in file match.

H’1101011E
the EDS file are mismatched. 2. Reload the EDS file.

The fixed / variable output
file match.
H’1101011F flag in the EDS file is
mismatched.

The fixed / variable input flag
file match.
H’11010120 in the EDS file is
mismatched.
The output priority in the file match.

H’11010121
EDS file is mismatched. 2. Reload the EDS file.
The input priority in the EDS file match.

H’11010122
file is mismatched. 2. Reload the EDS file.

The output connection type
file match.
H’11010123 parameters in the EDS file
are mismatched.

The input connection type
file match.
_9 are mismatched.
The redundant ownership 1. Check if the product information and the EDS
H’11010125 output parameters in the file match.
EDS file are mismatched. 2. Reload the EDS file.
9-50

The configuration size
file match.
are mismatched.

The configuration path
file match.
are mismatched.
The EDS file does not file match.

H’11010132
support Null forward open. 2. Reload the EDS file.
1. Check if the system has created the I/O
H’12010100 I/O connections duplicated connections.
2. Change the connection type to Listen Only.
1. Check the scanner owner.

Scanner ownership of I/O
H’12010106 2. Reconfigure the invalid scanner.
connections conflicts
3. Change the connection to multicast.
Incorrect adapter 1. Check the I/O connection status.

H’12010110
configuration 2. Activate the I/O connections again.
Data H’12010111 Adapter RPI not supported Check the RPI for the adapter.
Exchange 1. Check if the number of connections exceeds

Setup Error the limit.
H’12010113 Insufficient I/O connections
2. Reduce the number of the product connections.
1. Check if the system has created the I/O

The connection of non-Listen
H12010119 connections.
only is not established.
2. Check the scanner I/O connection status. 9_
Check the module number and the product setup
H’12010127 Incorrect adapter input size
file to see if they match.
Check the output size in the connection

H’12010128 Incorrect adapter output size
parameters.
9-51
Consumed TAG does not Check if the parameters in the Consumed tag are
H’1201012D
exist. set correctly.
Produced TAG does not Check if the parameters in the Produced tag are
H’1201012E
exist. set correctly.
No response from the adapter; check if the power

I/O connection connecting
H’12010204 and the network connection for the adapter are
timeout
working properly.
1. Check the I/O connection limit between the
Network bandwidth NOT scanner and the adapter.

H’12010302
available for data 2 . Increase the RPI value or reduce the number of
connections.
Incorrect adapter input/output Check the module number and the product setup
H’12010315
instance file to see if they match.
9.6.2.2 Application Error
1. Check the network connection status.

EtherNet/
H’00010203 I/O connection timeout 2. Check if the module is working properly.
IP Error
3. Increase the RPI value.
_9
9-52
9.6.3 AS-FPFN02 Error Codes & How to fix them

9.6.3.1 LED Indicators
Description Procedure
Check if the parameters downloaded to the Controller are the

System Fail (SF) indicator RED light ON
same as the actual placement
1. Check if the upper device is well-connected
2. Check if the device name set in the software is the same as
Bus Fail (BF) indicator RED light BLINKING the device name shown in the function card
3. Check if the MAC address and the device name are assigned
correctly
1. Check if the network cable is securely connected
Bus Fail (BF) indicator RED light ON 2. Check if the controller and the function card are both
supplied with power
9.6.3.2 Status Registers of Siemens S7-1500
Status Register
Description
(Siemens S7-1500)
If the value is TRUE, the input data is valid.

Input Data Available
If the value is 0, the input data is invalid.
%I0.0
Check if the AS300 firmware version is V1.08 or higher.
Indicates PN connection status of Slot 1 ~ Slot 8.

Connection Status
If the value is TRUE, the Slot is with a working PN connection (with IO module)
%I4.0 - %I4.7
If the value is FALSE, the Slot is without a working PN connection.
Indicates PN connection status of Slot 9 ~ Slot 16.

Connection Status
If the value is TRUE, the Slot is with a working PN connection (with IO module)
%I5.0 - %I5.7
If the value is FALSE, the Slot is without a working PN connection.
9_
9-53
9.7 Studio 5000 Software Operation

This section provides an overview using Ethernet/IP to connect to a Delta Ethernet/IP Adapter with third party software.
For this example we use the Rockwell Automation software Studio 5000.
9.7.1 Architecture
The Rockwell Automation (RA) EIP Scanner uses Ethernet to connect to a Delta Adapter. The PC connects to the RA
Scanner through Ethernet or USB.
※ Rockwell Software Studio 5000, ControlLogix, RSLogix are registered trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
 Operation Steps:
Data Ex change Data Exchange

Network View Download Data Exc hange
Table Set up
9.7.2 Create a New Project

 Open Studio 5000 and under Create, click New Project.
New
_9
9-54
 Select a PLC and select the chassis. This example uses a 1756-L71.
Select PLC
 Click Finish to create the new project.
Select a backplane
9_
9-55
 After creating the project, Studio 5000 displays the Controller Organizer and workspace.
9.7.3 Create a Scanner

Next, add the 1756-EN2TR Ethernet/IP module, and then connect to the Ethernet/IP devices through the Ethernet/IP
module.
9.7.3.1 Create a New Ethernet/IP Module
 Right-click 1756 Backplane 1756-A7 and then click New Module.
_9
9-56
 Type 1756-EN2TR in the filter field, click the 1756-EN2TR module, and then click Create.
 Type the Name, IP address and other required information, and then click OK to add the EtherNet/IP module.
9_
9-57
 The new 1756-EN2TR module appears in the Controller Organizer tree.
9.7.4 Connect to a Delta Adapter

This section provides an overview of connecting to a Delta Ethernet/IP Adapter with the Rockwell Automation software
Studio 5000.
9.7.4.1 Import an EDS file
 In Studio 5000, on the Tools menu, click EDS Hardware Installation Tool.
_9
9-58
 Select Register an EDS file(s) and click Next.
 Select Register a single file and click Browse to find the EDS file to import.
9_
9-59
 Follow the instructions in the wizard and then click Finish to complete importing the EDS file.
9.7.4.2 Create an Adapter
 In Studio 5000, in the Controller Organizer under 1756-EN2TR, right-click Ethernet and then click New Module.
_9
9-60
 Type the module number of the imported Delta EDS file in the filter field, click the Delta module, and then click
Create.
 Verify that the product name and IP address are the same as the information shown in the Module Definition
section.
9_
9-61
 Click Change if you need to make a change to the module definition.
 Modify the module definition

1) Name: Click the arrow button to select a valid connection.
2) Size: Rockwell PLC supports maximum 500 bytes data size. (Data for input contains 2 bytes of Serial Number
and for output contains 4 bytes 32-bit Run-idle header and 2 bytes of Serial Number.) If using AS300, you can set
the maximum data length 498 SINT for input and 494 SINT for output.
_9
※ In general, there is no need to change the parameters from the imported EDS files which can usually be used
without modification.
9-62
 In the New Module dialog box, click the Connection tab to modify the Requested Packet Interval and Input Type
settings. The RPI uses the I/O connection to a Scanner to exchange data at regular intervals, and the units are
micro-seconds. For Input Type select either Unicast or Multicast. The Input Type selections may vary for different
products.
 Click OK to create the adapter. The new Delta Adapter appears in the Controller Organizer tree.
9.7.5 Editing Corresponding Addresses for AS300

Refer to section 9.8.5 Assembly Object for defaults of mapping address. Refer to section 9.7.7 on how to open Program
TAG and modify the contents of TAG:C to edit the mapping addresses. Refer to section 9.8.5 Assembly Object for details
on TAG:C.
9_
9-63
9.7.6 Download
The next step is to download the project to the PLC and go online.
 In Studio 5000, on the Communications menu, click Who Active. To establish a connection, select the Scanner
connected to the PC, and then on the Communications menu click Download.
 After the connection is successfully established, the I/O status shows green by I/O OK.
_9
9-64
9.7.7 Data Mapping

In the Controller Organizer, you can map data, including Configuration, Input and Output parameters. When you create a
device I/O Configuration, the tags are added automatically.
 Click Program TAGs to display the Tags window.
 Tags are listed in the Name column. Tag names begin with a product name and end with C or I1 or O1, separated
from the name by a colon (:), for example CMCEIP01:C, CMCEIP01:I1, and CMCEIP01:O1.
 Tag name：C indicates the tag contains information from the Adapter EDS file, including Input and Output
parameters. You can edit these parameters in Studio 5000.
 Tag name：I1 indicates that the mapping starts from TAG：I1[0], and is mapped to the first parameters of the
Adapter output. The length is the output length provided by the Adapter.
 Tag name: O1, indicates that the mapping starts from TAG：O1[0], and is mapped to the first parameters of the
Adapter Input. The length is the input length provided by the Adapter.
9_
9-65
RA EIP Scanner Delta Adapter

1756-L71+1756-EN2TR EtherNet/IP VFD-C2000
Tag:I1[0] Parameter_0
Adapter
Tag:I1
Output
...
...
Tag:O1[0] Parameter_0
Adapter
Tag:O1
Input
...
...
_9
9-66
9.8 CIP Object

9.8.1 Object List
CIP requires objects (groups of related data and behaviors associated with this data) to describe a device, how it
functions, communicates, and to define its unique identity. Objects can be further defined by Class (a set of objects
representing the same type of system), Instance (a copy of an object), and Attribute (data values). An object’s instance
and class have attributes, providing services and implementing behaviors. Instance 0 contains the basic information for
every object, that is: version and length. Instance 1–N contains parameters for creating connections. You can get product
parameters from the supported service code through objects.
You can use API 2208 EIPRW instruction or explicit messages to read / write objects. The supported EtherNet/IP objects
are listed in the following table. Refer to Section 9.8.2 for the data type definitions. Refer to Section 9.8.3 ~ 9.8.19 for
object contents.
Object Name Function Class ID
Identity Object Provides identification of general information about the device. 1 (H’01)
Provides a messaging connection point through which a client
Message Router Object can address a service to any object class or instance residing in 2 (H’02)
the physical device.
Binds attributes of multiple objects, which allows data to or from
Assembly Object each object to be sent or received over a single connection and 4 (H’04)
can be used to bind input data or output data. 9_

Connection Manager Provides connection and connectionless communications,
6 (H’06)
Object including establishing connections across multiple subnets.
Describes the communication interfaces that are present on the

Port Object 244 (H’F4)
device and visible to CIP, including USB, Ethernet/IP and more.
9-67
Object Name Function Class ID
Provides the mechanism to configure a device’s TCP/IP
TCP/IP Interface Object network interface; examples of configurable items include the 245 (H’F5)
device’s IP Address, Network Mask, and Gateway Address.
Maintains link-specific counters and status information for an

Ethernet Link Object 246 (H’F6)
IEEE 802.3 communications interface.
X Register Bit/Word Register 848 (H’350)
Y Register Bit/Word Register 849 (H’351)
D Register Bit/Word Register 850 (H’352)
M Register Bit Register 851 (H’353)
S Register Bit Register 852 (H’354)
T Register Bit/Word Register 853 (H’355)
C Register Bit/Word Register 854 (H’356)
HC Register Bit/Word Register 855 (H’357)
SM Register Bit Register 856 (H’358)
SR Register Word Register 857 (H’359)
9.8.2 Data Type

This section provides an overview of the data types supported by objects.
Data Type Description
BOOL False (H’00) or True (H’01)
SINT (1 byte), INT (2 bytes), DINT (4 bytes), LINT (8 bytes)
Number 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th
SINT 0LSB
INT 0LSB 1LSB
SIGNED DINT 0LSB 1LSB 2LSB 3LSB
_9 INTEGER LINT 0LSB 1LSB 2LSB 3LSB 4LSB 5LSB 6LSB 7LSB
Example: DINT value = H’12345678
Number 1st 2nd 3rd 4th
DINT 78 56 34 12
9-68
USINT (1 byte), UINT (2 bytes), UDINT (4 bytes), ULINT (8 bytes)
Ex: UDINT value = H’AABBCCDD

UNSIGNED
Number 1st 2nd 3rd 4th
INTEGER
UDINT DD CC BB AA
ASCII CODES, 1 or 2 bytes/words
STRING: 2 bytes character count + 1 byte character
Contents (Char count) Contents (String contents)
STRING 04 00 4D 69 6C 6C
STRING2: 2 bytes character count + 2 byte character

STRING
STRING2 04 00 4D 00 69 00 6C 00 6C 00
SHORT_STRING: 1 bytes character count + 1 byte character
STRING 04 4D 69 6C 6C
BYTE (1 byte), WORD (2 bytes), DWORD (4 bytes), LWORD (8 bytes)
1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th
Fixed LENGTH Byte 7…0
BIT STRING WORD 7…0 15…8
DWORD 7…0 15…8 23…16 31…24
LWORD 7…0 15…8 23…16 31…24 39…32 47…40 55…48 63…56
A single string consists of multiple language representation
Name Data Type Meaning
The number of internationalized character

Number USINT
strings 9_
STRINGI
Array of: Array of individual internationalized character
Strings
Struct of: strings
The first ASCII character of the ISO 639-2/T

LanguageChar1 USINT
language
9-69
The second ASCII character of the ISO 639-2/T

LanguageChar2 USINT
language
The third ASCII character of the ISO 639-2/T

LanguageChar3 USINT
language
The structure of the character string, limited to
the Elementary Data type value 0xD0

CharStringStruct USINT
(STRING), 0xD5 (STRING2), 0xD9 (STRINGN)
and 0xDA (SHORT_STRING)
The character set which the character string is
CharSet UINT based on which comes from IANA MIB Printer
Code (RFC 1759).
Defined in An array of 8-bit octet elements which is the

International String
CharStringStruct actual international character string
ISO 639-2/T language:
Language First Character Second Character Third Character
English e n G
French f r e
Spanish s p a
Italian i t a
STRUCT of: Composed of any data types.
Ex.: STRUCT of { BOOL, UINT, DINT } = { TRUE, H’1234, H’56789ABC }

STRUCT
1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th
Byte 01 34 12 BC 9A 78 56
Array of: Composed of one data type.
Ex.: ARRAY of UINTs = { 1，2，3 }

ARRAY
Number 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th
Array 01 00 02 00 03 00
_9 A path that consists of multiple segments and references the class, instance and attribute of
EPATH another object.
Example：Identity Object, Instance attribute 5 = “ 20 01 24 01 30 05 “
9-70
9.8.3 Identity Object (Class ID: 01 Hex)

This object stores identity information that consists of the Vendor ID, Device Type, Product Code and Major Revision for
your device.
 Service Code
Service Attribute
Service Name Description
code Class Attribute Instance Attribute
H’01 Get_Attributes_All X V Read all attributes
H’05 Reset X V Resets the drive to the start-up state.
H’0E Get_Attribute_Single V V Read one attribute
 Class
 Class ID: H’01
 Instance
 H’00: Class Attribute
 H’01: Instance Attribute
 When Instance = 0, the Class Attributes are listed below.
Class Access
Name Data Type Values Description
Attribute Rule
H’01 Revision Get UINT H’1 Revision of this object
Maximum instance number of this

H’02 Max Instance Get UINT H’1
object
Number of object instances
H’03 Number of Instance Get UINT H’1 currently created at this class level
of the device
 When Instance = 0, the Instance Attributes are listed below.

9_
Instance Access
Attribute Rule
H’01 Vendor ID Get UINT H’31F Delta Electronics, Inc.
H’02 Device Type Get UINT H’0C Communication Adapter
9-71
Instance Access
Attribute Rule
H’03 Product Code Get UINT H’4000 Product Code
Revision of this device: Major /

Revision STRUCT --
Minor
H’04 Get
Major Revision USINT H’01 Major Revision Range: H’01–H’7F
Minor Revision USINT H’01 Minor Revision Range: H’01–H’FF
Status, refer to the following *1

H’05 Status Get WORD H’00
table
The last 4 characters of the MAC

H’06 Serial Number Get UDINT H’abcd
address, ab:cd
The maximum length of a product

H’07 Product Name Get STRING “AS300T”
name is 32 characters.
*1 Status Description (H’05)
Bit (s) Name Description
Does the device has an owner connection?.
0 Owned 0: No
1: Yes
1 Reserved 0，Always OFF
Is the device configured?
2 Configured 0: No
1: Yes
3 Reserved 0，Always OFF
0: Self-testing
1: Firmware update
2: At least one faulted I/O connection
3: No I/O connections established

_9 4-7 Extended Device Status
4: Non-volatile configuration error
5: Major fault
6: At least one I/O connection in run mode
7: At least one I/O connection established, all in idle
9-72
mode.
8-15: Reserved
0: No minor recoverable fault detected

8 Minor Recoverable Fault
1: Minor recoverable fault detected
0: No minor unrecoverable fault detected

9 Minor Unrecoverable Fault
1: Minor unrecoverable fault detected
0: No major recoverable fault detected

10 Major Recoverable Fault
1: Major recoverable fault detected
0: No major unrecoverable fault detected

11 Major Unrecoverable Fault
1: Major unrecoverable fault detected
9.8.4 Message Router Object (Class ID: 02 Hex)

This object provides a messaging connection point through which a client may address a service to any object class or
instance residing in the physical device.
 Service Code
Service Support
Code Class Attribute Instance Attribute
H’0E Get_Attribute_Single V V Read a single attribute
 Class
 Class ID: H’02
 Instance
Class Access
Attribute Rule
9_
9-73
Instance Access
Attribute Rule
The maximum number of

H’02 Number Available Get UINT H’0
connections
The number of connected

H’03 Number Active Get UINT H’0
connections
9.8.5 Assembly Object (Class ID: 04 Hex)

This object binds attributes of multiple objects, which allows data to or from each object to be sent or received over a
single connection and can be used to bind input data or output data.
 Service Code
Service Support
H’0E Get_Attribute_Single V V Read a single attribute
H’10 Set_Attribute_Single X V Edit a single attribute
 Class
 Class ID：H’04
 Instance
 H’00：Class Attribute
 H’64：I/O Connection Output 1
 H’65：I/O Connection Input 1
 H’67：I/O Connection Input 2
H’73：I/O Connection Input 8

_9 
 H’74-H’7A Reserved
 H’80：Configuration 1
9-74
 H’C：Listen-Only Connection Number
Class Access
Attribute Rule

H’02 Max Instance Get UINT H’C7
instances
 When Instance = 64–87, the Instance Attributes are listed below. (Length of input and output is editable. The
maximum length is 250 words; supports only even bytes)
I/O Message Connection
Connection No. Function Instance Attribute Length
Input (TO) 0x65 D1000~D1099
Connection 1 Output (OT) 0x64 D0~D99
Configuration 0x80 Refer to the table below
Input (TO) 0x67 D1100~D1199
Input (TO) 0x69 D1200~D1299
Input (TO) 0x6B D1300~D1399
Connection 4 Output (OT) 0x6A D300~D399
Input (TO) 0x6D D1400~D1499
Connection 5 Output (OT) 0x6C D400~D499 9_

Input (TO) 0x6F D1500~D1599

Connection 6
Output (OT) 0x6E D500~D599
9-75
Input (TO) 0x71 D1600~D1699
Input (TO) 0x73 D1700~D1799
 Instance Attribute
Instance Access
Attribute Rule

H’03 Data Set UINT H’0
connections

H’04 Size Get UINT H’0
connections
* For connection input data, WRITE function is not supported.
* When IO connection is established, and the status of CPU module is RUN, WRITE function cannot be executed.
Configure the contents of input and output to edit the mapping address.
Configuration Defaults
Data Type Contents
Address (Connection 1)
Input corresponding element

Word[0] UINT 0
0: D, 1:X, 2: Y
Word[1] UINT Reserved 200
Word[2-3] DWORD Input corresponding element number 1000
Output corresponding element

Word[4] UINT 0
0: D, 2: Y
_9 Word[5] UINT Reserved 200
Word[6-7] DWORD Output corresponding element number 0
9-76
 Examples of objects to be read and written
(1) Read data from connection 1 input:
Service code: H’0E
Class ID: H’04
Instance ID: H’65
Attribute ID: H’03
(2) Read data length of connection 2 output:
Class ID: H’04
Instance ID: H’66
(3) Read data from connection 2 output:
Service code: H’10
Class ID: H’04
Instance ID: H’66
Data byte [0 ~ 200]: 00112233
(The range of data length is determined by configurations; default: 100 words)
9_
9-77
9.8.6 Connection Manager Object (Class ID: 06 Hex)

Use this object for connection and connectionless communications, including establishing connections across multiple
subnets.
 Service Code
Service Support
H’0E Get_Attribute_Single V X Read a single attribute
H’4E Forward_Close X V Close a connection
Open a connection; the maximum

H’54 Forward_Open X V
data size is 511 bytes.
 Class
 Instance
 H’01：Instance Attribute
Class Access
Attribute Rule
H’01 Revision Get UINT 1 Revision of this object

H’02 Max Instance Get UINT 1
object

_9
Access
Attribute Name Data Type Values Description
Rule
Number of Forward Open service

H’01 Open Requests Get UINT H’0
requests received.
9-78
Access
Attribute Name Data Type Values Description
Rule
H’02 Open Format Rejects Get UINT H’0 requests that were rejected due to
bad format.

Open Resources
H’03 Get UINT H’0 requests that were rejected due to
Rejects
lack of resources.
requests that were rejected for

H’04 Open Other Rejects Get STRUCT H’0
reasons other than bad format or
lack of resources.
Number of Forward Close service

H’05 Close Requests Get WORD H’0
requests received.
H’06 Close Format Rejects Get UDINT H’0 requests that were rejected due to
bad format.
H’07 Close Other Rejects Get STRING H’0 requests that were rejected for
reasons other than bad format.
Total number of connection
timeouts that have occurred in

H’08 Connection Timeouts Get UINT H’0
connections controlled by this
Connection Manager.
9_
9-79
9.8.7 Port Object (Class ID: F4 Hex)

This section describes the communication interfaces that are present on the device and visible to CIP, including USB,
EtherNet/IP and more.
 Service Code
Service Support
Returns a predefined listing of this

H’01 Get_Attributes_All X V
objects’ attributes
Returns the contents of the

H’0E Set_Attribute_Single V V
specified attribute.
 Class
 Class ID：H’F4
 Instance
 H’N: Instance #N Attribute, the number of the Ethernet port
Class Access
Attribute Rule
H’01 Revision Get UINT 1 Revision of this object

H’02 Max Instance Get UINT 1
object

_9 1
H’03 Number of Instance Get UINT currently created at this class level
of the device
H’08 Entry Port Get UINT 1 Communication port for EtherNet/IP
ARRAY of Port Instance information: Port Type

H’09 Port Instance Info Get --
STRUCT of + Port Number
9-80
Class Access
Attribute Rule
Port Type UINT H’04 EtherNet/IP, refer to the following *1
Port Number UINT H’01 Identifies each communication port
Instance Access
Attribute Rule
H’01 Port Type Get UINT H’04 EtherNet/IP, refer to the following *1
H’02 Port Number Get UINT H’01 Identifies each communication port
Identifies Object attached to this

Link Object STRUCT of --
port. Path length + Link Path
H’03 Get
Path Length UINT -- Path length
Link Path EPATH -- Path segment
SHORT_
H’04 Port Name Get EIP1 Name of the communication port
STRING
Port Number and Communication port number and

H’07 Get EPATH 01 01
Node Address node number of this device on port.
*1 Communication Port Type
Communication Port Type Description
1 Self-defined
2 ControlNet
3 ControlNet Redundant
4 EtherNet/IP
5 DeviceNet
201 Modbus/TCP
9_
203 SERCOS III
9-81
9.8.8 TCP/IP Interface Object (Class ID: F5 Hex)

This object provides the mechanism to configure a device’s TCP/IP network interface. Examples of configurable items
include the device’s IP Address, Network Mask, and Gateway Address.
 Service Code
Service Support
H’0E Get_Attribute_Single V V Read one attribute
H’10 Set_Attribute_Single X V Write one attribute
 Class
 Class ID = H’F5
 Instance
 H’N: Instance #N Attribute, number of IP addresses that the device supported
Class Access
Attribute Rule

object
H’03 Number of Instance Get UINT H’2 currently created at this class level
of the device
_9
9-82
Instance Access
Attribute Rule
H’01 Status Get DWORD H’2 IP status, refer to the following *1
Configuration Configuration capability, refer to

H’02 Get DWORD H’15
Capability the following *2
Configuration Configuration Control, refer to

H’03 Get/Set DWORD H’0
Control the following *3
Physical Link
STRUCT of -- Path to physical link object
Object：
H’04 Path Size Get UINT H’0 Size of Path
Logical segments identifying the

Path EPATH --
physical link object
Interface TCP/IP network interface

STRUCT of --
Configuration： configuration.
The device’s IP address;

IP Address UDINT H’C0A80005
192.168.1.5
The device’s network mask:

Network Mask UDINT H’FFFFFF00
H’05 Get/Set 255.255.255.0
Default gateway address:

Gateway Address UDINT H’C0A80001
192.168.0.1
Name Server UDINT 0 Primary name server
Name Server 2 UDINT 0 Secondary name server
Domain Name STRING 00 00 Default domain name
H’06 Host Name Get/Set STRING AS300T Device name
EIP device active connection

Encapsulation
H’13 Get/Set UINT 120 time;
Inactivity Timeout
unit:0-3600 seconds
※ When the device is communicating with the CPU module, the Instance Attribute H’03 and H’05 cannot be 9_
written.
9-83
 Examples of objects to be read and written
(1) Read data from Instance Attribute H’03:
Class ID: H’F5
Instance ID: H’01
(2) Write data into Instance Attribute H’05:
Service code: H’10
Class ID: H’F5
Instance ID: H’01
Data Byte[0~3]: IP Address
Byte[4~7]: Network Mask
Byte[8~11]: Gateway Mask
Byte[12~15]: Name Server
Byte[16~19]: Name Server2
Byte[20~25]: Domain Name
(Ex: AS300, 05 41 53 33 30 30; the first byte indicates the string length, its following bytes is for ASCII data.)
*1 Interface Status
Status Description
0 The Interface Configuration attribute has not been configured.

_9
The Interface Configuration attribute contains valid configuration obtained from BOOTP, DHCP or non-
1
volatile memory.
2 The Interface Configuration attribute contains valid configuration obtained from hardware.
9-84
*2 Interface Capability Flags
Bit Description
0 BOOTP Client
1 DNS Client
2 DHCP Client
3 DHCP-DNS Update
4 Configuration Settable
5 Hardware Configurable
6 Interface Configuration Change Requires Reset
*3 Interface Configuration Control
Status Description
The device uses the interface configuration values previously stored (for example, in non-volatile
0
memory or through hardware switches).
1 The device obtains its interface configuration values through BOOTP.
2 The device obtains its interface configuration values through DHCP on start-up.
9.8.9 Ethernet Link Object (Class ID: F6 Hex)

This object maintains link-specific counters and status information for an IEEE 802.3 communications interface.
 Service Code
Service Support
H’0E Get_Attributes_Single V V Read one attribute
9_
 Class
 Class ID: H’F6
9-85
 Instance
 H’N: Instance #N Attribute, the number of the Ethernet port
Class Access
Attribute Rule

object
Number of object instances currently
H’03 Number of Instance Get UINT H’01 created at this class level of the
device
Instance Access
Attribute Rule
Interface speed currently in use
H’01 Interface Speed Get DWORD H’64 10(H’0A), 100(H’64), 1000(H’3E8)
Mbps
Ethernet port status, refer to the

H’02 Interface Flags Get DWORD H’F
following *1
ARRAY of By
H’03 Physical Address Get MAC address
6 USINTs Product
Define the name of the Ethernet port

SHORT_S
Interface Label NA For example: for port 1, the definition
_9 TRING
of the name in string is 01 31.
H’0A Get The maximum length of the name is

Length USINT NA
16 words.
SHORT_S Use ASCII characters to name the

Interface name NA
TRING Ethernet port name.
9-86
Instance Access
Attribute Rule
STRUCT Ethernet interface capability bits

Interface Capability --
of: table *2
H’0000000 Ethernet interface capability bits

Capability Bits DWORD
7 definition
STRUCT Ethernet interface capability speed &

Speed/Duplex Options --
of: duplex option definition
Speed/Duplex Array Ethernet interface capability speed &

USINT H’04
Count duplex array count
H’0B Get
ARRAY of
Ethernet interface capability speed &
Speed/Duplex Array STRUCT --
duplex array contents
of:
Ethernet interface speed; ex:

Interface Speed UINT NA
H’0A: 10 bps and H’64: 100 bps
Ethernet interface duplex mode;
Interface Duplex Mode USINT NA H’00: duplex mode and H’01: full
duplex mode
*1 Interface Flag Table
0 indicates an inactive link

0 Link Status
1 indicates an active link
0 indicates half duplex

1 Half/Full Duplex
1 indicates full duplex
0：Auto-negotiation in progress
1：Auto-negotiation and speed detection failed
2-4 Negotiation Status 2：Auto negotiation failed but detected speed
3：Successfully negotiated speed and duplex
4：Auto-negotiation not attempted. Forced speed and duplex. 9_

5 Manual Setting Requires Reset Set to zero
0: the interface detects no local hardware fault

6 Local Hardware Fault
1: a local hardware fault is detected
7-31 Reserved 0
9-87
※2 Interface Capability Bits
Bits Item Description
Indicates if the device requires a reset when instance attribute #6
Manual Setting Requires (Interface Control attribute) changes.

0
Reset 0 indicates the device does not require a reset
1 indicates the device requires a rest
0 indicates the interface does not support auto-negotiation

1 Auto-negotiate
1 indicates the interface supports auto-negotiation
0 indicates the interface does not support auto MDIX operation

2 Auto-MDIX
1 indicates the interface supports auto MDIX operation
0 indicates the interface does not support speed/duplex setting.
3 Manual Speed/Duplex (Instance attribute #6, Interface Control attribute)
1 indicates the interface supports speed/duplex setting
4-31 Reserved Should be 0
9.8.10 X Register (Class ID: 350 Hex)

 Service Code
Support
Service Code Service Name Instance Description

Class Attribute
Attribute
H’0E Get_Attribute_Single X V Read one attribute
H’32 Read_Parameter X V Read Parameter
 Class
 Instance
_9
 H’01：Instance Attribute, Bit Register
 H’02：Instance Attribute, Word Register
9-88
Instance Access
Attribute Rule
H’00 X0.0 Get BOOL H’00 X0.0 bit register
H’01 X0.1 Get BOOL H’00 X0.1 bit register
H’02-H’03FE X0.2-X63.14 Get BOOL H’00 X0.2 -X63.14 bit register
H’3FF X63.15 Get BOOL H’00 X63.15 bit register
Instance Access
Attribute Rule
H’00 X0 Get INT H’00 X0 word register
H’01 X1 Get INT H’00 X1 word register
H’02-H’3E X2-X62 Get INT H’00 X2-X62 word register
H’3F X63 Get INT H’00 X63 word register
9.8.11 Y Register (Class ID: 351 Hex)

 Service Code
Support

Class Attribute
Attribute
H’33 Write_Parameter X V Write Parameter
 Class
9_
 Instance
9-89
Instance Access Data

Name Values Description
Attribute Rule Type
H’00 Y0.0 Set BOOL H’00 Y0.0 bit register
H’01 Y0.1 Set BOOL H’00 Y0.1 bit register
H’02-H’03FE Y0.2-Y63.14 Set BOOL H’00 Y0.2-Y63.14 bit register
H’3FF Y63.15 Set BOOL H’00 Y63.15 bit register

Attribute Rule Type
H’00 Y0 Set INT H’00 Y0 word register
H’01 Y1 Set INT H’00 Y1 word register
H’02-H’3E Y2-Y62 Set INT H’00 Y2-Y62 word register
H’3F Y63 Set INT H’00 Y63 word register
9.8.12 D Register (Class ID: 352 Hex)

 Service Code
Support

Class Attribute
Attribute
 Class
_9
 Instance
9-90

Attribute Rule Type
H’00 D0.0 Set BOOL H’00 D0.0 bit register
H’01 D0.1 Set BOOL H’00 D0.1 bit register
H’02-H’752FE D0.2-D29999.14 Set BOOL H’00 D0.2-D29999.14 bit register
H’752FF D29999.15 Set BOOL H’00 D29999.15 bit register

Attribute Rule Type
H’00 D0 Set INT H’00 D0 word register
H’01 D1 Set INT H’00 D1 word register
H’02-H’752E D2-D29998 Set INT H’00 D2-D29998 word register
H’752F D29999 Set INT H’00 D29999 word register
9.8.13 M Register (Class ID: 353 Hex)

 Service Code
Support

Class Attribute
Attribute
 Class
9_
 Instance
9-91

Attribute Rule Type
H’00 M0 Set BOOL H’00 M0 bit register
H’01 M1 Set BOOL H’00 M1 bit register
H’02-H’1FFE M2-M8190 Set BOOL H’00 M2-M8190 bit register
H’1FFF M8191 Set BOOL H’00 M8191 bit register
9.8.14 S Register (Class ID: 354 Hex)

 Service Code
Support

Class Attribute
Attribute
 Class
 Instance

Attribute Rule Type
H’00 S0 Set BOOL H’00 S0 bit register

_9 H’01 S1 Set BOOL H’00 S1 bit register
H’02-H’7FE S2-S2046 Set BOOL H’00 S2-S2046 bit register
H’7FF S2047 Set BOOL H’00 S2047 bit register
9-92
9.8.15 T Register (Class ID: 355 Hex)

 Service Code
Support

Class Attribute
Attribute
 Class
 Instance

Attribute Rule Type
H’00 T0 Set BOOL H’00 T0 bit register
H’01 T1 Set BOOL H’00 T1 bit register
H’02-H’1FE T2-T510 Set BOOL H’00 T2-T510 bit register
H’1FF T511 Set BOOL H’00 T511 bit register

Attribute Rule Type 9_
H’00 T0 Set INT H’00 T0 word register
H’01 T1 Set INT H’00 T1 word register
H’02-H’1FE T2-T510 Set INT H’00 T2-T510 word register
H’1FF T511 Set INT H’00 T511 word register
9-93
9.8.16 C Register (Class ID: 356 Hex)

 Service Code
Support

Class Attribute
Attribute
 Class
 Instance

Attribute Rule Type
H’00 C0 Set BOOL H’00 C0 bit register
H’01 C1 Set BOOL H’00 C1 bit register
H’02-H’1FE C2-C510 Set BOOL H’00 C2-C510 bit register
H’1FF C511 Set BOOL H’00 C511 bit register

Attribute Rule Type
_9
H’00 C0 Set INT H’00 C0 word register
H’01 C1 Set INT H’00 C1 word register
H’02-H’1FE C2-C510 Set INT H’00 C2-C510 word register
H’1FF C511 Set INT H’00 C511 word register
9-94
9.8.17 HC Register (Class ID: 357 Hex)

 Service Code
Support

Class Attribute
Attribute
 Class
 Instance

Attribute Rule Type
H’00 HC0 Set BOOL H’00 HC0 bit register
H’01 HC1 Set BOOL H’00 HC1 bit register
H’02-H’FE HC2-HC254 Set BOOL H’00 HC2-HC254 bit register
H’FF HC255 Set BOOL H’00 HC255 bit register

Attribute Rule Type
9_
H’00 HC0 Set DINT H’00 HC0 word register
H’01 HC1 Set DINT H’00 HC1 word register
H’02-H’FE HC2-HC254 Set DINT H’00 HC2-HC254 word register
H’FF HC255 Set DINT H’00 HC255 word register
9-95
9.8.18 SM Register (Class ID: 358 Hex)

 Service Code
Support

Class Attribute
Attribute
 Class
 Instance

Attribute Rule Type
H’00 SM0 Set BOOL H’00 SM0 bit register
H’01 SM1 Set BOOL H’00 SM1 bit register
H’02-H’FFE SM2-SM4094 Set BOOL H’00 SM2-SM4094 bit register
H’FFF SM4095 Set BOOL H’00 SM4095 bit register
_9
9-96
9.8.19 SR Register (Class ID: 359 Hex)

 Service Code
Support

Class Attribute
Attribute
 Class
 Instance

Attribute Rule Type
H’00 SR0 Set INT H’00 SR0 word register
H’01 SR1 Set INT H’00 SR1 word register
H’02-H’7FE SR2-SR2046 Set INT H’00 SR2-SR2046 word register
H’7FF SR2047 Set INT H’00 SR2047 word register
9_
9-97
9.9 Delta EIP Product List

9.9.1 Delta EIP Products
Positioning Product Firmware Version
AHCPU501-EN, AHCPU511-EN, AHCPU521-EN, AHCPU531-EN V2.00
AHCPU560-EN2 V1.00
AH10EN-5A V2.00
AHRTU-ETHN-5A V1.00
Mid-range AH10EMC-5A V1.00
PLC AS300 Series V1.00
AS200 Series V1.00
AS-FEN02 communication card (V1.06) for AS300 Series (V1.00) V1.06
AS-FEN02 communication card (V2.02) for AS00SCM-A Series

V2.02
(V1.00)
DVP-ES2-E Series V3.60
Small PLC DVP26SE Series V1.00
DVP-ES3 Series V1.00
CMM-EIP01/02 Communication Card for VFD-MS300 Series V1.00
CMM-EIP03 Communication Card for VFD-MS300 Series V1.00

Inverter
CMC-EIP01 Communication Card for VFD-C2000 Series V1.06
9.9.2 Delta EIP Products, DLR (Device Level Ring) supported
AHCPU560-EN2 V1.00
Mid-range
AH10EN-5A V2.00
PLC
AHRTU-ETHN-5A V1.00
_9 CMM-EIP03 Communication Card for VFD-MS300 Series V1.00
Inverter
Ethernet
DVS-103I02C-DLR V1.00
Switch
9-98
9.9.3 Delta EIP Products, Scanner supported
AHCPU501-EN, AHCPU511-EN, AHCPU521-EN, AHCPU531-EN V2.00
Mid-range AHCPU560-EN2 V1.00
PLC AH10EN-5A V2.00
AS300 Series, AS200 Series V1.00
Small PLC DVP-ES3 Series V1.00
9_
9-99
9.10 Operation and Monitor on the Web

9.10.1 Getting Started
You can enter AS Series PLC IP address in the search bar of your browser to connect to your device. After that you can
set up and monitor AS Series PLC.
9.10.1.1 Exploring the webpage

After connected to the module, you can see the AS300 webpage with 5 sections as the image shown below.
Descriptions:
Section Contents
Banner Delta logo and the name of the connected device
Login Username and password
Sitemap is shown in tree diagram.

Menu (The menu shows data based on the permission of the current
user.)
Main contents; click an item on the menu section, its content

Context
appears here.
Bottom Copyright information and Delta webpage information
_9
9-100
9.10.1.2 Using the Webpage
List of browsers that support AS300 webpage:
Provider Browser Supported versions
Microsoft Internet Explorer V10.0 and later
Microsoft Edge V20 and later
Google Chrome V14 and later
Mozilla Firefox V17 and later
Apple Safari V5.1 and later
a. Open your browser, enter AS300 PLC IP address in the search bar to connect to AS300 PLC.
b. After the webpage appears, enter “Admin” in the User section and click Login without entering any password.
You can set up the password after login.
9_
9-101
9.10.1.3 Login
You need to login to your account to set up.
a. Provide the login information to login.
b. After login successfully, the user field shows your account name (read only). After setting up, you can click
Logout here to leave this webpage.
Item Description
User Your account name
Password Your password

Login: to enter the webpage
“Login” / “Logout”
Logout: to leave the webpage
9.10.1.4 Menu
The menu shows data based on the permission of the current user.
Permission
Nodes
Administrator Write/Read Read
Device information V V V
Account management V
Data monitor setup V

_9
Data monitor table 1 - 4 V V Read-only
Hardware status V Read-only Read-only
Save configuration V
9-102
 Log in as an Administrator, the following nodes appear.
 Log in with Write/Read permission, the following nodes appear.
 Log in with Read only permission, the following nodes appear.
9_
9-103
9.10.2 Device Information

Here provides AS Series PLC product information.
You do not need to log in to see the device information. This page is read only, not for editing.
Item Description
Device name Product name
Device description Device description that user defined in ISPsoft
Firmware version Firmware version
IP address Product IP address
MAC address Product MAC address
Serial number Product serial number
9.10.3 Network configuration

You can set network related configurations here.
9.10.3.1 Account management
You can set 3 kinds of access types for up to 8 user accounts.
_9
9-104
Item Description
To name your user ID, you can use up to 16 characters from the
following characters, A through Z (case-insensitive ), 0 through 9,
User ID
_ (underscore) , (comma) and . (dot) .
 The first default user ID is “Admin” (read only).
To name your password, you can use up to 16 characters from the

following characters, A through Z (case-insensitive ), 0 through 9,
Password _ (underscore) , (comma) and . (dot) .
 No password for the default user ID “Admin” (read only),
you can set up the password later.
Administrator: You can set up all parameters and have permission

to edit the password and permission.
Write/Read: You can open the data monitor pages and the
Access type diagnostic page. You can also edit the parameters.
Read: You can open the data monitor pages and the diagnostic
page. But you cannot edit parameters.
 Default user is “Administrator”.
“Delete” Use “Delete” to clear the user ID and password.
“Apply” Use “Apply” to save the settings.
a. After log in, double-click Account management to open the setting page.
9_
9-105
b. Set up the User ID, the password and the access type. After editing, click “Apply” to save the setting or click
“Delete” to clear the account.
c. Double-click Save configuration to open the setting page.
d. Click “Save” to save and download the settings to the device.
_9
9-106
e. After download is complete, it will be prompted with a Download successful message.
9.10.4 Data Monitoring

You can set monitoring related configurations here.
9.10.4.1 Data Monitoring Setup Page

You can set up 4 pages of monitoring data and up to 30 items can be monitored on each page.
9_
9-107
Item Description
To name your table, you can use up to 16 characters from the

Table name following characters, A through Z (case-insensitive ), 0 through 9,
_ (underscore) , (comma) and . (dot) .
Device quantity Device quantity to be monitored; default: read only
Default update cycle Set up the updated cycle time; default: 5 seconds; unit: second
Click “Edit” to edit the table and the table name column turns
“Edit”
green. The table contents appear below.
“Delete” Click “Delete” to delete the table and its contents.
Devices to be monitored; you can enter the following devices to

Device
monitor xX, yY, mM, sSmM, sSrR, dD, sS, tT, cC, hHcC and eE.
Positional numeral system to be shown on the monitoring page;

available formats are Signed decimal, Unsigned decimal,
Radix Hexadecimal, Octal, Binary, 32bit Signed decimal, 32bit Unsigned
decimal, 32bit Hexadecimal, 32bit Octal, 32bit Binary, 32bit Float
and 64bit Double
Read only Set up the monitored devices to read only or not.
Description Add a description here for the table.
“Apply” Click “Apply” to save the settings.
a. After log in, double-click Data monitor setup to open the setting page.
_9
9-108
b. Use “Edit” to edit the table name, device quantity, and update cycle time.
c. The corresponding table contents appear below.
d. Edit the devices to be monitored, radix to be shown, read only or not and the description. After editing, click
“Apply” to save the setting.
9_
9-109
e. Double-click Save configuration to open the setting page.
f. Click “Save” to save and download the settings to the device.
g. Once the download is complete, you can see the newly added table to be monitored under the Data Monitor
node.
_9
h. Note: The data monitor table must be downloaded to the device otherwise even if the data monitor table is
created, it cannot be monitored.
9 - 11 0
9.10.4.2 Data Monitor Table Pages
The setting results are shown as below.
Item Description
Table name Name of the table; read only
Status of the monitoring; read only

Monitor status Yellow light: reading, Green light: reading complete, Red light:
reading error
Update cycle time; default is what you set up in data monitor

Update cycle
setup page; unit: second
“-“ Minus; click once to decrease 1; the minimum value is 1
“+“ Plus; click once to increase 1; the maximum value is 60
Floating point setting; round down; default: round the number

Floating format setting
down to three decimal places
Device Devices to be monitored; read only
Positional numeral system to be shown on the monitoring page;

available formats are Signed decimal, Unsigned decimal,
Radix Hexadecimal, Octal, Binary, 32bit Signed decimal, 32bit
Unsigned decimal, 32bit Hexadecimal, 32bit Octal, 32bit Binary,
32bit Float and 64bit Double
Description Add a description here for the table; read only
Status of bit; read only

Status
Green LED: ON; No LED: OFF 9_
Values in devices to be monitored; read only
Signed decimal: K+ Number
Unsigned decimal: K+ Number
Value
Hexadecimal: H + hex Number
Octal: O + octal Number
Binary: B + binary Number
9 - 111
Item Description
32bit Signed decimal: K+ Number

32bit Unsigned decimal: K+ Number
32bit Hexadecimal: H + hex Number
32bit Octal: O + octal Number
32bit Binary: B + binary Number
32bit Float: float Number
64bit Double: float Number
“ON”: the status of Bit is ON.

“OFF”: the status of Bit is OFF.
“On” / ”Off”
 If the authority level for the logged in user is READ, this
column is read only.
Change the value for the device to be monitored

 Type the value in and click “SET” and the changed value
Set Value appears in the VALUE column as the image shown above.
 If the authority level for the logged in user is READ, this
Click “Set” to confirm the changed value.

“Set”  If the authority level for the logged in user is READ, this
9.10.5 Diagnostic
You can set diagnostic related configurations here.
9.10.5.1 Hardware Status Page
This page displays information on hardware status, CPU module, power module, and function cards. You can set CPU to
run or stop. Here also shows the CPU running status and error codes.
 For AS300, the hardware status page looks like below.
_9
9 - 11 2
 For AS200, the hardware status page looks like below.
Item Description
Refresh cycle Refresh cycle time; default: 10; unit: second
“-“ Minus; click once to decrease 1; the minimum value is 1
“+“ Plus; click once to increase 1; the maximum value is 60
Power module name Name of the power module; read only
CPU module name Name of the CPU module; read only
LED of CPU running status; read only
CPU Run LED Green light: RUN
LED Not Lit: STOP
CPU Error LED LED of CPU Error; read only
CPU Error code Error codes of CPU module; read only
Click “RUN” to set the running status to RUN
Click “Stop” to set the running status to STOP

“Run” / “Stop”
 If the authority level for the logged in user is WRITE/READ
or READ, this column is read only.
Name of the function card; read only
Function card name  For communication module, two extra rows for the names
of the communication function cards are shown here
Name of the module; read only

9_
Module name When the actual placement is not the same as the arrangement
in HWCONFIG, the background of this column will be in red.
Module Error LED LED of module error; read only
Module Error code Error codes of module; read only
9 - 11 3
9.10.6 Configurations
9.10.6.1 Save Configuration Page
You can save the configurations and download the parameters to your device here.
Item Description
“Save” Download the saved parameters to the device.
LED of PLC running status; read only

PLC Status Green light: RUN
LED Not Lit: STOP
Click “RUN” to set the running status to RUN

“Run” / “Stop”
Click “Stop” to set the running status to STOP
Note: The data monitor table must be downloaded to the device. If not, once you log out, close the page or restart the
PLC, all the temporary saved parameters will be cleared.
9.11 Delta EIP Product Application (with OMRON Products)

9.11.1 Architecture
Delta EtherNet/IP Scanner connects to OMRON EtherNet/IP Adapter through Ethernet communication. PC connects to
Delta EtherNet/IP Scanner through Ethernet communication or USB connection.
Software versions for AS300 and OMRON NJ501-1300:
 AS300 CPU
ISPSoft: V3.02.25
COMMGR: V1.06.05
HWCONFIG: V3.02.20
EIP Builder: V1.03.01

_9
 OMRON NJ501-1300:
Sysmac Studio : V1.15
Network Configurator : V3.59c
9 - 11 4
Et herNet /IP Dat a Mapping Connect ion

Network Set up Set up Download
S et up St atus
9.11.2 TAG Connection

EtherNet/IP can use TAGs to exchange data. Here AS300 CPU acts as Master and OMRON NJ501-1300 as a Producer
TAG to establish an EtherNet/IP communication.
 Create Produced TAG
1. Start the OMRON software Sysmac Studio. Select Connect to Device. Configure the parameters and then click
Connect.
9_
9 - 11 5
2. After the connection is successfully established, click Tools on the menu bar. And then select EtherNet/IP
Connection Settings to access the EtherNet/IP connection settings.
3. Right-click the cell of the Node Address you’d like to edit its EtherNet/IP settings and then select Edit to open
the EtherNet/IP communication setting window.
4. Double-click Global Variables under Programming - Data in the Multiview Explorer. Right-click in the global
variable table and select Create New from the menu.
5. Right-click in the global variable table and select Create New from the menu.
*Click Controller on the menu bar and change the Project to Disconnected before creating a new global
6. Set the Network Publish to Output.
And then with this attribute, you can access a variable from external devices through CIP communications or a
tag data link. For tag data links, this can be a variable for data output (from the local Controller to another
Controller).
7. Select the tab of Built-in EtherNet/IP Connection Settings and select the Tag Set from the left. Right-click in
the editing area and select Create New Tag Set from the menu and then name the tag set as ToAS .
_9
9 - 11 6
8. Right-click on the created Tag Set and select Create New Tag from the menu.
9. The tag is added in the created tag set.
10. Click Controller and then Synchronize…from the menu bar to synchronize the setting with OMRON Scanner.
9_
9 - 11 7
11. Create Tag sets in Network Configurator. Open Network Configurator and select Option-> Select Interface->
Ethernet I/F.
12. Select Network -> Connect
13. Select Interface and click OK to confirm the setting.
_9
9 - 11 8
14. The blue light indicates the connection is working normally.
15. Drag OMRON NJ501-1300 from the EtherNet/IP Hardware section to the network view.
16. Right-click OMRON NJ501-130 (the scanner) and select Parameter -> Edit from the menu.
9_
9 - 11 9
17. Click Edit Tags on the Tag Sets tab and click New on the Out-Produce tab to create a new tag with the same
name and length as the one from the “output” tag set in Sysmac .
18. The new tag is created as shown below.
_9
9-120
19. After setting, click Network -> Download.
20. After downloading, the Network Configurator dialog box is displayed.
9_
9-121
 Create a Consumed TAG
1. Start ISPSoft and click Tools -> Communication Settings and select a driver with Ethernet communication.
※ Before setting the communication, make sure COMMGR is working normally and save the driver settings.
2. Click Global Symbols to expand the tree node and see the options. Double-click EtherNet/IP Table (Consumed
Tag) from the Project section on the left. Right-click the blank area and select Add a Symbol.
_9
9-122
3. Set the data type to ARRAY[200] OF WORD and then click OK to confirm the setting.
※ Data size should be the same as the Produced Tag data size
A symbol is added, as the image shown below.
9_
9-123
4. Go to PLC-> Transfer -> Download to download the parameters to the Scanner.
5. Double-click HWCONFIG from the Project section on the left to start HWCONFIG.
_9
9-124
6. Right-click the PLC and select Communication Software - > EIP Builder to start EIP Builder.
7. Click Tool-> DDF(EDS) Manager to import the EDS File.
9_
9-125
8. Drag and drop the device from the Product List on the right to add have it added in the Network View.
※ You can select the device and click the Information tab to edit its IP address.
9. Drag and drop the red spare to have the Ethernet communication port connected to the network.
_9
9-126
10. Right-click the CPU’s communication port and select Data Mapping to create a data mapping table.
11. Make sure the data below CPU Address/TAG and Adapter/TAG is correct.
※ CPU Address/TAG: Consumed TAG
Adapter /TAG: Produced TAG, created by Producer
9_
9-127
12. Click Operate-> Downloader to download the parameters to the Scanner.
 Connection Check
1. Click to have the project in On-line Mode and see if the network lines are solid ones.
_9
9-128
2. The solid network lines indicate the data mapping is being monitored successfully.
 Data Mapping
1. Start Sysmac Studio and make sure the project is in Online Mode. Go to View -> Watch Tab Page on the menu
bar. Click Watch Tab Page to monitor.
2. Select Watch (Table) 1 and input a name for the tag.
9_
9-129
Modify the values according to the display format. Make sure the value in the Online Value column is the same as the
value in the Modify column.
3. Start ISPSoft, and select Device Monitor Table -> New to create a new device monitor table.
4. Double click the blank area in the Monitor Table and then select the Identifier tab. Set up the Object (variable
name) and the Name (source) and then click OK to confirm the setting.
_9
9-130
5. After setting up, switch to Online Mode.
6. Make sure the values in Consumed Tag are the same as the ones in Produced Tag.
9.11.3 IO Connection
 Set up an IO Connection from a slave station
1. Create two variables and set the rule of one variable as input and set the rule of the other variable as output. Set
the data type and length as Array[0..99] of word.
2. Go to Tools -> Export Global Variables -> Network Configurator on the menu bar.
9_
9-131
3. Start Network Configurator and then add and edit NJ501-1300 from the Ethernet Hardware List on the left.
Select Parameter -> Edit and click To/From File -> Export to File on lower right corner of the Tag Sets page.
4. After the file is imported, make sure the input and output variables are imported in In-Consume and Out-Produce
sections.
_9
9-132
5. Click the variable in In-Consume section and select Edit.
6. Click Advanced button in the Edit Tag Set window and set the Instance ID to Manual and then input the Instance
ID you’d like to use for IDs in In-Consume section.
9_
9-133
7. Use the same method to set the Instance ID manually for IDs in In-Consume section as you have set for IDs in
Out-Produce section.
8. When the settings for Instance ID are done, click OK to confirm the settings on Edit Device Parameter.
9. Click Network -> Download to download the parameters to the slaves.
_9
9-134
 Set up an IO Connection from a Master station
1. Start EIP Builder and drag and drop a General Device into the Network View area and set up network connection.
2. Click slave icon and set up its IP address and then configure the parameters in the EIP Parameter tab.
3. Set up the slave IO connection:
a. Master Output Instance ID = Slave Input (In-Consume) Instance ID
9_
b. Master Input Instance ID = Slave Output (Out-Produce)Instance ID
※ Refer to slave’s operation manual for more information on Instance IDs.
9-135
4. Set up the connection and start data mapping.
5. Download the EIP parameters to the master.
_9
9-136
 Connection status
1. After the parameters are downloaded, change the project to Online Mode. And make sure the monitoring on
the network and the data mapping table is normal.
Network View
Data mapping status
9_
9-137
 Data Mapping
1. Start ISPSoft and create a new Monitor Table. Add devices that correspond to the master in the table.
2. Change the project to Online Mode and start to monitor the data mapping.
Monitoring from the master
5555 00005555 0.000

7CB6 00007CB6 0.000
Monitor from the slave
Master_Address Slave_Address
ToAS_IO
D0 
（Instance ID=110)
_9
FromAS_IO
D500 
（Instance ID=100)
9-138
10
8
Chapter 10 CANopen Function and Operation
Table of Contents
10.1 Introduction to CANopen ................................................................. 10-2

10.1.1 CANopen Function Descriptions...................................................... 10-2
10.1.2 The Input/Output Mapping Areas ................................................... 10-4
10.1.3 Refreshing Mechanism in the Input/Output Mapping Areas ................ 10-5
10.2 Installation and Network Topology.................................................. 10-9

10.2.1 The Dimensions of AS-FCOPM ........................................................ 10-9
10.2.2 AS-FCOPM on AS300 PLC .............................................................. 10-9
10.2.3 Configure the AS-FCOPM with HWCONFIG ...................................... 10-10
10.2.4 The CAN Interface and Network Topology ....................................... 10-11
10.3 The CANopen Protocol ................................................................... 10-16

10.3.1 Introduction to the CANopen Protocol ............................................ 10-16
10.3.2 The CANopen Communication Object ............................................. 10-17
10.3.3 The Predefined Connection Set ..................................................... 10-22
10.4 Sending SDO, NMT and Reading Emergency Message through the Ladder
Diagram ......................................................................................... 10-24
10.4.1 Data Structure of SDO Request Message ........................................ 10-24
10.4.2 Data Structure of NMT Message .................................................... 10-27
10.4.3 Data Structure of EMERGENCY Request Message ............................ 10-28
10.4.4 Example of Sending SDO through the Ladder Diagram .................... 10-30
10.5 Troubleshooting ............................................................................ 10-32

10.5.1 CANopen Network Node State Display ........................................... 10-32
10.6 Application Example ...................................................................... 10-35
10.7 Object Dictionary ........................................................................... 10-43
10-1
10.1 Introduction to CANopen

1. Because of its simple wiring, immediate and stable communication, strong debugging ability, and low
cost, the CANopen network is widely used in fields such as industrial automation, the automotive
industry, the medical equipment industry, and the building trades.
2. The AS300 Series PLC is compatible with CANopen when using the AS-FCOPM function card for the
CAN port, and can work in master mode or slave mode. The CAN port conforms to the basic
communication protocol CANopen DS301. It supports master and slave modes.
3. AS200 Series PLC is built with CAN communication port. The CAN port conforms to the basic
communication protocol CANopen DS301. It supports master and slave modes.
4. This chapter explains the functions of CANopen. In master mode, CANopen can support up to 64 slaves,
station addresses 1~64.
5. CANopen Builder is the CANopen network configuration software for the AS Series. You set the
CANopen station address and the communication rate with this software. ISPSoft is the programming
software for the AS Series.
6. This chapter mainly focuses on the CANopen functions. Refer to Section 10.3 for more information.
10.1.1 CANopen Function Descriptions

The CAN port has the following functions when acting as a master.
1. It supports the standard CANopen protocol DS301 V4.02.
2. It supports the NMT (network management object) service.
 It supports NMT state control.
Use NMT state control to control the state of a slave in the CANopen network.
 It supports NMT error control.
Use NMT error control detect the disconnection of a slave. The NMT error control is classified into
two types; Heartbeat and Node Guarding. The AS Series PLC does not support Node Guarding.
3. It supports the PDO (Process Data Object) service.
 Use PDO messaging to transmit immediate input and output data.
 It supports up to 256 RxPDO and 1894 bytes.
 It supports up to 256 TxPDO and 1894 bytes.
 It supports synchronous and asynchronous modes for the PDO transmission type.
4. It supports the SDO (Service Data Object) service.
 Use SDO to read, write, or configure the slave parameters.
 It supports standard SDO transmission mode.
 It supports automatic SDO functions. You can write up to 20 pieces of data to a slave.
 It supports using the SDO service in a PLC ladder diagram to read the data from a slave or write
_10 the data to a slave.
10-2
5. It supports the reading emergencies from a slave service.
 Use this service to read an error or an alarm from a slave.
 You can store up to 5 emergencies in a slave.
 You can read emergencies from a slave through a PLC ladder diagram.
6. It supports the SYNC object (synchronous object) service.
7. Several devices can operate synchronously through the synchronous object service.
8. The supported CANopen communication rates are: 20K, 50K, 125K, 250K, 500K, and 1Mbps.
The supported mapping data types are:
Storage Data type

8-bit SINT USINT BYTE
16-bit INT UINT WORD
32-bit DINT UDINT REAL DWORD
64-bit LINT ULINT LREAL LWORD
The CAN port has the following functions when acting as a slave.
 It supports the standard CANopen protocol DS301 V4.02.
 It supports the NMT (network management object) service.
 It supports the NMT state control.
The state of the AS series in the CANopen network is controlled by a master.
 It supports the NMT error control.
The AS Series supports Heartbeat but not Node Guarding.
 It supports the PDO (process data object) service.
 The PDO message transmits the immediate input data and output data.
 It supports up to 8 TxPDO and 8 RxPDO.
 The PDO transmission type: synchronous mode and asynchronous mode
 It supports the emergency service.
If an error or an alarm occurs in the AS series, the master is notified through the emergency service.
10
10-3
10.1.2 The Input/Output Mapping Areas

The following table lists the CANopen DS301 specifications for the AS series PLC.
Type Item Description

Maximum slave nodes Up to 64 nodes
Master Maximum transfer size of
Up to 2000 Bytes (including some system configurations)
a PDO (Read + Write)
Maximum transfer size of Up to 8 PDOs; each PDO with up to 8 bytes can be transferred
Slave
a PDO (Read + Write) at a time
When the AS Series PLC acts as a Master, the output mapping areas are D25000-D25999, and the input
mapping areas are D24000-D24999, as the following table shows.
Device in the PLC Mapping area Mapping length

SDO request information, NMT service information, and
D25000–D25031 64 bytes
Emergency request information
D24000–D24031 SDO reply information, and Emergency reply information 64 bytes
D25032–D25978 RxPDO mapping area (Master  Slave) 1894 bytes

D24032–D24978 TxPDO mapping area (Master  Slave) 1894 bytes
When the AS Series PLC acts as a Slave, the output mapping areas are D25032–25063, and the input
mapping areas are D24032–24063 as the following table shows.
Device in the PLC Mapping area Mapping length

D24032~24063 RxPDO mapping area (Slave  Master) 64 bytes
D25032~25063 TxPDO mapping area (Slave  Master) 64 bytes
_10
10-4
10.1.3 Refreshing Mechanism in the Input/Output Mapping Areas

When AS PLC CPU acts as a Master, the factors including PLC scan time and the synchronization options
affect the refreshing mechanism for data mapping in the input/output mapping area. Here we list three
scenarios in synchronous mode and one scenario in non-synchronous mode for your reference.
 Synchronous mode
Scenario A: ½ synchronization cycle time (for the slave to send data) > PLC scan time
A half of the synchronization cycle time is longer than a PLC scan time: at lease one PDO will be sent within
one synchronization cycle time.
          
½ Sy nc ½ S yn c ½ Sy nc ½ Sy nc ½ S ync
Sy nc cyc le Sy nc cyc le S yn c cy cle Sy nc cyc le
    

Explanation:
: Once the synchronization cycle starts, the timer starts to count. The counted time should be longer than a
half of the set synchronization time (a rounded-down number) for Master to send PDO to Slave.
: After PLC scan time ends, PLC CPU refreshes to update the synchronization task:
PLC CPU sends PDO and then clears the counted time.
: After PLC scan time ends, PLC CPU refreshes to update the synchronization task:
The counted time of the synchronization cycle is less than half of the synchronization cycle time (for the slave
to send data), or the PDO had already been sent before, the PDO here cannot be sent and the time of the
synchronization cycle continues to be counted.
: From the cases in the green section, we know that the time for the PDO to be sent does NOT equal to the
time to perform synchronization, but what we can be sure is that a Master can send at lease one PDO within
every synchronization cycle.
10
10-5
Scenario B:
Synchronous mode; ½ synchronization cycle time (for the slave to send data) < = PLC scan time <
synchronication cycle time
A half of the synchronization cycle time is less than a PLC scan time and the PLC scan time is less than or
equals to a whole synchronization cycle time: it is possible that zero PDO will be sent during a
synchronization cycle.
  #1   

½ S ync ½ S yn c ½ Sy nc ½ S yn c ½ Sy nc
S ync cy cle S ync cy cle S yn c cycle Sy nc cyc le
    
Explanation:
#1: There was no PDO sent from the previous synchronization cycle. Before PLC scan time ends, the next
synchronization cycle comes and the counted time is longer than a half of the set synchronization time (a
rounded-down number), PLC CPU sends PDO and then clears the counted time.
to send data), the PDO here cannot be sent and the time of the synchronization cycle continues to be
counted.
time to perform synchronization, and it is possible that Master can send zero PDO during a synchronization
cycle.
_10
10-6
Scenario C:
Synchronous mode; synchronization cycle time < = PLC scan time
The synchronization cycle time is less than a PLC scan time: it is possible that zero PDO will be sent during a
synchronization cycle.
  #1 
 
S yn c cycle S ync cy cle Sy nc cyc le S yn c cy cle S yn c cy cle

    
Explanation:
#1: There was no PDO sent from the previous synchronization cycle. Before PLC scan time ends, the next
synchronization cycle comes and the counted time is longer than a half of the set synchronization time (a
rounded-down number), PLC CPU sends PDO and then clears the counted time.
to send data), the PDO here cannot be sent and the time of the synchronization cycle continues to be
counted.
time to perform synchronization, and it is possible that Master can send zero PDO during a synchronization
cycle. The chance of Master not sending any PDO during a synchronization cycle is higher than what
happened in scenario B.
10
10-7
 Non-synchronous mode
   
X X
P L CS c anc yc le P L C S can cy cle P L C S can cy cle P L C S canc yc le P L C S can cy cle

    
Explanation:
: After PLC scan time ends, PLC CPU refreshes to update the task of sending PDO.
: If the data in PDO changes, PLC CPU sends PDO.
: The data in PDO remains the same, the PDO here is NOT sent.
Note: You can use the function of setting up the PLC scan time to ensure PLC CPU checks the task of
sending PDO in every set scan time.
_10
10-8
10.2 Installation and Network Topology

This section introduces the physical dimensions of AS-FCOPM function card, the HWCONFIG settings of the
AS Series, the CAN interface, the CANopen network framework, and the maximum communication distance.
10.2.1 The Dimensions of AS-FCOPM
61.3
59.3
37 23.9
Unit: mm
10.2.2 AS-FCOPM on AS300 PLC
Note: the AS-FCOPM card can only be installed in the Card 2 slot in the AS series
10
10-9
10.2.3 Configure the AS-FCOPM with HWCONFIG

Before using the AS-FCOPM card in an AS300 Series PLC, use HWCONFIG in ISPSoft to configure the AS-
FCOPM card. If you are using an AS200 Series PLC, the first two steps can be ignored.
1. You can only install the AS-FCOPM in the card 2 slot as marked in red below. Double click the function
card 2 slot to go to the Device Setting dialog box.
2. Select Manual for Card 2 Detect mode and select AS-FCOPM Card for Manual Select Card.
3. Select the working mode, node ID and the bit rate for AS-FCOPM.
* Working mode: CANopen DS301
* Node ID: 1
* Bit rate: 125k bps (the default, or you can select your own bit rate)
_10
10-10
4. When finished, click the Download button on the toolbar to download the settings to the PLC.
10.2.4 The CAN Interface and Network Topology

10.2.4.1 Definitions of the CAN Signal and Data Types
The CAN signal is a differential signal. The voltage of the signal is the voltage difference between CAN+ and
CAN-. The CAN+ and CAN- voltages take SG as a reference point. The CAN network can be in one of two
states. One state is a dominant level, and is indicated by the logical “0”. The other state is a recessive level,
and is indicated by the logical “1”. The CAN signal level shows below.
Recessive Dominant
The following picture shows the data frame format. The CAN nodes transmit the CAN messages to the
network from left to right.
10
1 0 - 11
10.2.4.2 The CAN Network Endpoint and the Topology Structure

In order to make the CAN communication more stable, the two endpoints of the CAN network are connected
to 120 ohm terminal resistors. The topology structure of the CAN network appears below.
10.2.4.3 The Topology Structure of the CANopen Network
1) Use standard Delta cables when wiring the CANopen network. These cables are the thick cable UC-
DN01Z-01A, the thin cable UC-DN01Z-02A, and the thin cable UC-DN01Z-02A. Separate the
communication cables from any power cables to avoid interference.
2) Connect the CAN+ (white) and CAN- (blue), which are at the endpoints of the network, to 120 ohm
resistors. The AS-FCOPM card is equipped with a 120 ohm resistor switch; you can enable the resistor
with the switch. Purchase the standard Delta terminal resistor for use with the other devices and the RJ45
connecter.
3) Note the limitation on the length of the CANopen network. The transmission distance of the CANopen
network depends on the transmission rate of the CANopen network. The following table shows the
relation between the transmission rate and the maximum communication distance.
Transmission rate
20K 50K 125K 250K 500K 1M
(bit/seconds)
_10 Maximum
communication distance 2500 1000 500 250 100 25
(meters)
10-12
4) The list below shows the Delta network products for the CANopen network.
Product Model Function
AS332T-A
AS332P-A The AS300 series PLC can function as the
CANopen master or slave when you install an
AS324MT-A
AS-FCOPM function card. The AS-FCOPM is
AS320T-B
equipped with a 120 ohm resistor controlled
AS320P-B by a switch.
AS300N-A
AS200 Series PLC is built with CAN

AS228T-A communication port. The CAN port conforms
AS228P-A to the basic communication protocol
AS228R-A CANopen DS301. It supports master and
AS218TX-A slave modes. The CAN communication
AS218PX-A terminal is equipped with a 120 Ω resistor.
AS218RX-A You can use a short circuit to use this
resistor.
The DVP-ES2-C series PLC has a built-in

DVP32ES200RC
CAN interface. It can function as the
DVP32ES200TC
CANopen master or slave.
DVPCOPM-SL is a module connected to the

left side of an S series PLC. It can function
as the CANopen master or slave. The PLCs
DVPCOPM-SL
that you can connect to the DVPCOPM-SL
are the DVP-28SV, DVP-28SV2, DVP-SX2,
DVP-SA2, and DVP-EH2-L.
The IFD9503 gateway converts CANopen to

Modbus, and connects a device (with an RS-
232 or RS-485 interface) that conforms to
IFD9503
the standard Modbus protocol to a CANopen
network. You can connect up to 15
devices.
The CANopen slave module is connected to

the right side of an EH2 series PLC. It can
DVPCP02-H2
connect the EH2 series PLC to a CANopen
network.
This analyzes CANopen network data, and

has ports both ends for a CAN interface and
IFD6503 a USB interface. Use it to monitor CAN
10
network data, or allow CAN nodes to
transmit the data. The product is used with
10-13

the Netview Builder software.
This servo driver has a built-in CANopen

ASD-A2-xxxx-M
interface. It controls positioning, speed, and
servo driver
torque.
This AC motor drive has a built-in CANopen

function, and controls positioning, speed,
VFD- and torque. For the C2000/CP2000 series
C2000/CP2000/C200 AC motor drives, you must purchase a
series AC motor drives CMC-COP01 to provide the CAN interface.
Only the C200 series AC motor drive has the
built-in CANopen interface.
The EC series AC motor drive has a built-in

VFD-EC series AC motor
CANopen interface. It controls speed and
drive
torque.
This CANopen network topology distribution

TAP-CN01 box has a 120 ohm resistor enabled with a
switch.

TAP-CN02 box has a 120 ohm resistor enabled with a
switch.

TAP-CN03 box has a 120 ohm resistor enabled with
switch.
_10
10-14

These CANopen sub cables have RJ45
UC-CMC003-01A connectors at both ends.
UC-CMC005-01A UC- UC-CMC003-01A: 0.3 meters
CMC010-01A UC-CMC005-01A: 0.5 meters
UC-CMC015-01A UC-CMC010-01A: 1 meter
UC-CMC020-01A UC-CMC015-01A: 1.5 meters
UC-CMC030-01A UC-CMC020-01A: 2 meters
UC-CMC200-01A: 20 meters
CANopen network cable

UC-DN01Z-01A
UC-DN01Z-01A: CANopen main cable
UC-DN01Z-02A
UC-DN01Z-02A: CANopen sub cable
This 120 ohm resistor has an RJ45

TAP-TR01
connector.
10
10-15
10.3 The CANopen Protocol

10.3.1 Introduction to the CANopen Protocol
The CAN (controller area network) fieldbus only defines the physical layer and the data link layer of a network.
See the ISO11898 standard for information. The CAN fieldbus does not define the application layer. In practice,
the hardware contains the physical layer and the data link layer. The CAN fieldbus itself is not complete, and
needs a superior protocol to define the use of 11/29-bit identifier and 8-byte data.
The CANopen protocol is the superior protocol based on the CAN fieldbus. It is one of the protocols defined
and maintained by CiA (CAN-in-Automation) and was developed on the basis of the CAL (CAN application layer)
protocol, using a subset of the CAL communication and service protocols.
The CANopen protocol contains the application layer and the communication profile (CiA DS301). It also
contains a framework for programmable devices (CiA 302), recommendations for cables and connectors (CiA
303-1), and SI units and prefix representations (CiA 303-2).
In the OSI model, the relation between the CAN standard and the CANopen protocol is described in the following
diagram.
Device profile CiA Device profile CiA Device profile CiA
OSI seventh layer

Communication profile CiA DS-301
Application layer
OSI second layer CAN controller CAN 2.0A

Data link layer
OSI first layer

+ -
ISO 11898
Physical layer + -
CAN network
1. The object dictionary
CANopen uses an object-based method to define a standard device. Every device is represented by a set
of objects and can be visited by the network. The diagram below illustrates the CANopen device model.
The object dictionary is the interface between the communication program and the superior application
program.
The core concept of CANopen is the device object dictionary (OD). It is an orderly set of objects. Every
object has a 16-bit index for addressing and also defines an 8-bit subindex. Every node in the CANopen
network has an object dictionary that includes the parameters that describe the device and the network
_10 behavior. The object dictionary of a node is also described in the electronic data sheet (EDS) for the device.
10-16
10.3.2 The CANopen Communication Object

The CANopen communication protocol contains the following communication objects.
1. PDO (process data object)
 The PDO provides the direct channel for the device application object, and transmits the real-time
data. It has high priority. Every byte in the PDO CAN message data list transmits data, and the
message usage rate is high.
 There are two kinds of uses for PDOs; data transmission and data reception. They are distinguished
by Transmit-PDOs (TxPDOs) and Receive-PDOs (RxPDOs). Devices supporting TxPDOs are called
PDO producers, and devices that receive PDOs are called PDO consumers.
 The PDO is described by the “producer/consumer mode”. The data transmits from one producer to one
or many consumers. The data that can be transmitted is limited to between 1-byte and 8-byte data.
After the producer transmits the data, the consumer does not need to reply to the data. Every node in
the network detects the transmitted data and decides whether to process the received data .
 Every PDO is described by two objects in the object dictionary: the PDO communication parameters
and the PDO mapping parameters
PDO communication parameters: the COB-ID used by PDO, the transmission type, the prohibition
time, and the counter cycle
PDO mapping parameters: the object list in an object dictionary. These objects are mapped into the
PDO, including the data length (in bits). To explain the contents of the
PDO, the producer and the consumer both have to understand the
mapping.
The PDO transmission modes: synchronous and asynchronous
Synchronous mode: synchronous periodic and synchronous non-periodic
Asynchronous: The producer transmits the PDO when the data changes, or after a trigger.
The following table lists supported transmission modes.
Type PDO transmission

Periodic Non-periodic Synchronous Asynchronous RTR
0 X X
1 – 240 X X
254 X
10
255 X
10-17
Mode 0: The PDO information is transmitted only when the PDO data changes and the synchronous
signal is received.
Modes 1–240: One piece of PDO information is transmitted every 1–240 synchronous signals.
Mode 254: The trigger is defined the manufacturer. The definition in the PLC is the same as mode
255.
Mode 255: The PDO is transmitted when the data changes, or it is transmitted after a trigger.
All the data in the PDO has to be mapped from the object dictionary. The following diagram shows an
example of PDO mapping.
Object dictionary PDO_1 mapping

xxxxh xxh Application object A 0 3
1 yyyyh yyh 8
yyyyh yyh Application object B 2 zzzzh zzh 16
3 xxxxh xxh 8
zzzzh zzh Application object C
Application object B Application object C Application object A

PDO_1
The following table shows the data format for RxPDO and TxPDO.
COB-ID Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7
Object
Data
identifier
2. SDO (service data object)
 The SDO builds the client/server relation between two CANopen devices. The client device can read
the data from the object dictionary on the server device and write the data into the object dictionary on
the server device. The SDO visit mode is “client/server” mode. The mode which is visited is the SDO
server. Every CANopen device has at least one service data object that provides the visit channel for
the object dictionary of the device. SDO can read all the objects in the object dictionary, and write all
objects into the object dictionary.
 The SDO message contains the index and subindex information used to position the objects in the
object dictionary, and the composite data structure can easily be passed by the SDO visit. After the
SDO client sends the reading/writing request, the SDO server replies. The client and the server can
stop SDO transmission. The requested message and the reply message are separated by different
COB-IDs.
_10  The SDO can transmit the data in any length. If the data length is more than 4 bytes, the data must be
transmitted by segment. The last segment of the data contains an end flag.
10-18
 The following table shows the structures of the SDO requested message and reply message.
The format of the requested message:

600（hex） Requested Object index Object Requested data
+Node-ID code LSB MSB subindex bit7-0 bit15-8 bit23-16 bit31-24
The definition of the requested code in the requested message:
Request code (hex) Description

23 Writing 4-byte data
2B Writing 2-byte data
2F Writing 1-byte data
40 Reading data
80 Stopping the current SDO function
The format of the reply message:

580（hex） Reply Object index Object Reply data
+Node-ID code LSB MSB subindex bit7-0 bit15-8 bit23-16 bit31-24
The definition of the reply code in the reply message:
Reply code (hex) Description

43 Reading 4-byte data
4B Reading 2-byte data
4F Reading 1-byte data
60 Writing 1/2/4-byte data
80 Stopping the current SDO function
3. NMT (network management object)
The CANopen network management conforms to the master/slave mode. Only one NMT master exists in
the CANopen network, and all other nodes are considered to be slaves. NMT includes three services:
module control, error control, and boot-up services.
 Module control services
The master node in the CANopen network controls the slave by sending commands. The slave
receives and executes the command, and does not need to reply. All CANopen nodes have internal
NMT states. The slave node has four states: initialization, pre-operational, operational, and stop
states. The following diagram illustrates the device states.
10
10-19
(1)
Initializing
Initialization (15)
Reset application
(16)
Reset communication
(11)
(2)
(14)
Pre-operational
(7) (10)
(3) (4)
(5)
(13) Stopped
(6)
(8)
(12) (9)
Operational
(1) After power is supplied, the device automatically enters the initialization state.
(2) After the initialization is complete, the device automatically enters the pre-operational state.
(3)(6) The remote node starts.
(4)(7) The device enters the pre-operational state.
(5)(8) The remote node stops.
(9)(10)(11) The application layer resets.
(12)(13)(14) The communication resets.
(15) After the initializing is complete, the device automatically enters the reset application state.
(16) After the reset application state is complete, the device automatically enters the reset
communication state.
The following table shows the relation between the communication object and the state. You can only
execute the communication object service in the correct state. For example, you can only execute
SDO in the operational state and pre-operational states.
Initialization Pre-operational Operational Stopped

PDO X
SDO X X
SYNC X X
Time Stamp X X
EMCY X X
Boot-up X
NMT X X X
_10
10-20
The control message format for the node state:
COB-ID Byte 0 Byte 1

Slave address
0 Command specifier (CS)
(0: Broadcast)
The command specifiers:
Command specifier
Function
(hex)
01 Start the remote node
02 Stop the remote node
80 Enter the pre-operational state
81 Reset the application layer
82 Reset the communication
 Error control services
The error control service detects the disconnection of a network node. The error control services are
classified into two types: Heartbeat and Node Guarding. The AS Series PLC only supports Heartbeat.
For example, the master can detect the disconnection of the slave only after the slave enables the
Heartbeat service.
The following illustrates the Heartbeat principle. The Heartbeat producer transmits the Heartbeat
message according to the set Heartbeat producing time. One or many Heartbeat consumers detect the
message transmitted by the Heartbeat producer. If the consumer does not receive the message
transmitted by the producer within the timeout period, there is a problem in the CANopen
communication or the producer is disconnected.
Heartbeat producer Heartbeat consumer
Request Receiving
Receiving
Heartbeat Receiving
producing
time Heartbeat
timeout
period
Request
Heartbeat
timeout
period
Heartbeat event 10
10-21
 Boot-up services
After the slave completes the initialization and enters the pre-operational state, it transmits the Boot-
up message.
1. Other predefined CANopen communication objects (SYNC and EMCY)
 SYNC Object (Synchronous object)
The synchronous object is the message that the master node periodically broadcasts on the CANopen
network. This object recognizes the network clock signal. Every device decides whether to use the
event use synchronous communication with other network devices depending on its configuration. For
example, when controlling a driving device, the devices do not act immediately after they receive the
command sent by the master. They do act when they receive the synchronous message. This makes
multiple devices act synchronously.
The format of the SYNC message:
COB-ID
80 (hex)
 Emergency object
The emergency object is used by a CANopen device to indicate an internal error. When an emergency
error occurs in the device, the device sends the emergency message (including the emergency error
code), and the device enters an error state. After the error is eliminated, the device sends another
emergency message with emergency error code 0, and the device enters the normal state.
The format of the emergency message:

Emergency error
80 (hex) Error
code Factory-defined error code
+Node-ID register
LSB MSB
Note: The value in the error register is mapped to index 1001 (hex) in the object dictionary. If the value is
0, no error occurred. If the value is 1, a normal error occurred. If the value is H’80, an internal error
occurred in the device.
10.3.3 The Predefined Connection Set

In order to decrease the configuration workload of the network, CANopen defines a default identifier. In the
predefined connection set, the structure of the 11-bit identifier is as follows.
Function code Node ID
_10
10-22
The following tables list the objects that are supported and the COB-IDs that are assigned to the objects.
1. The broadcast object in the predefined connection setting
Index of the
Object Function code COB-ID
communication parameter
NMT 0000 0 -
SYNC 0001 128 (80h) 1005h, 1006h, 1007h
Time stamp 0010 256 (100h) 1012h, 1013h
2. The corresponding object in the predefined connection set
Index of the
Object Function code COB-ID
communication parameter
Emergency 0001 129 (81h)–255 (FFh) 1014h, 1015h
PDO1 (TX) 0011 385 (181h)–511 (1FFh) 1800h
PDO1 (RX) 0100 513 (201h)–639 (27Fh) 1400h
PDO2 (TX) 0101 641 (281h)–767 (2FFh) 1801h
PDO2 (RX) 0110 769 (301h)–895 (37Fh) 1401h
PDO3 (TX) 0111 879 (381h)–1023 (3FFh) 1802h
PDO3 (RX) 1000 1025 (401h)–1151 (47Fh) 1402h
PDO4 (TX) 1001 1153 (481h)–1279 (4FFh) 1803h
PDO4 (RX) 1010 1281 (501h)–1407 (57Fh) 1403h
SDO (TX) 1011 1409 (581h)–1535 (5FFh) 1200h
SDO (RX) 1100 1537 (601h)–1663 (67Fh) 1200h
NMT Error Control 1110 1793 (701h)–1919 (77Fh) 1016h, 1017h
10
10-23
10.4 Sending SDO, NMT and Reading Emergency Message

through the Ladder Diagram
You can edit the request message mapping area to affect the transmission of SDO, NMT and Emergency
messages. The following table shows the corresponding relations between the request message mapping
area, response message mapping area, and PLC device.
PLC device Mapping area Mapping length
D25000-D25031 SDO request message, NMT service message and

64 bytes
Emergency request message
D24000-D24031 SDO response message and Emergency response message 64 bytes
The CANopen master can only send one SDO, NMT, or Emergency request message to the same device at a
time. Clear the request message mapping area to zero when sending SDO, NMT, or Emergency request
message through the WPL program.
10.4.1 Data Structure of SDO Request Message

Sending SDO through the ladder diagram reads or writes the slave parameter.
1. The data format of the SDO request message:

Request message
PLC device
High byte Low byte
D25000 ReqID Command (Fixed to 01)
D25001 Message Header Reserved Size
D25002 Type Node ID
D25003 High byte of main index Low byte of main index
D25004 Reserved Sub-index
D25005 Message Data Datum 1 Datum 0
D25006 Datum 3 Datum 2
D25007 - D25031 Reserved
 ReqID: the request ID. Whenever an SDO request message is sent out, the message is given a ReqID
for CANopen master to identify. When reading/writing another SDO message, the original ID number
must be changed. In other words, reading/writing SDO is triggered by changing of the value of
“ReqID”. The ReqID range is between 00–FF (Hex).
 Size: the length of the message data. The counting starts from D6253 with a byte as the unit. When
reading, it is fixed to four and when writing, it is four plus the byte number of data types of index and
subindex and the maximum value is eight. But when writing, if the data type of the index and subindex
is word, the data length is six. The data length is file if the data type is byte.
 Node ID: the node address for the target equipment on a CANopen network.
 Type: 01 indicates the read access; 02 indicates the write access.
_10
10-24
The following table shows the data format of the SDO response message.
Response message
PLC device
High byte Low byte
D24000 ResID Status code
D24001 Message Header Reserved Size
D24002 Type Node ID
D24003 High byte of main index Low byte of main index
D24004 Reserved Sub-index
D24005 Message Data Datum 1 Datum 0
D24007~D24031 Reserved
 Status code:
The following table lists the status code values in the response message.
Status code Explanation

0 No data transmission request
1 SDO message transmission succeeds.
2 SDO message is being transmitted.
3 Error: SDO transmission time-out
4 Error: Illegal command code
5 Error: the length of the transmitted data is illegal.
6 Error: the length of the response data is illegal.
7 Error: Equipment to be sent messages is busy.
8 Error: Illegal type
9 Error: Incorrect node address
0A Error message (See the error code for SDO response message)
0B-FF Reserved
 ResID: the same as the request ID in the request message.
 Size: the length of the message data, maximum of 20 bytes. The unit is bytes. When writing, the
maximum is four; the data length is decided by the data type of index and subindex when reading.
 Node ID: the node address of the target equipment on CANopen network.
 Type: in the SDO response message, 43 (Hex) refers to reading four bytes of data; 4B (Hex) refers to
reading two bytes of data; 4F (Hex) refers to reading one byte of data; 60 (Hex) refers to writing 1/2/4
byte(s) of data; 80 (Hex) refers to stopping SDO command.
10
10-25
Example 1: write 010203E8 (hex) to (Index_subindex) 212D_0 in slave of No. 3 through SDO; the data type of
(Index_subindex) 212D_0 is double words (32 bits).
 Request data:
Request message
PLC device
High byte(Hex) Low byte(Hex)
D25000 ReqID=01 Command =01
Message
D25001 Reserved =0 Size =8
Header
D25002 Type =02 Node ID =03
D25003 Main index high byte =21 Main index low byte =2D
D25004 Message Reserved =0 Subindex =0
D25005 data Datum 1=03 Datum 0=E8
D25006 Datum 3=01 Datum 2=02
 Response data:
Response message
PLC device
D24000 ResID =01 Command =01
Message
Header
D24005 data Datum 1=00 Datum 0=00
D24006 Datum 3=00 Datum 2=00
Example 2: read the value of (Index_subindex) 212D_0 in slave of No. 3 through SDO; the data type of
(Index_subindex) 212D_0 is double words (32 bits).
 Request data:
Request message
PLC device
D25000 ReqID =01 Command =01
Message
Header
D25005 data Datum 1=0 Datum 0=0
D25006 Datum 3=0 Datum 2=0
_10
10-26
10.4.2 Data Structure of NMT Message

Use the NMT service to manage the CANopen network such as start, operation, reset of nodes, etc.
The following table shows the data format of the NMT request message.
Request message
PLC device
High byte Low byte

Message
D25001 Reserved Size (Fixed to 04)
Header
D25002 Type (Fixed to 03) Node ID
D25003 Message Reserved NMT service code
D25004 data Reserved Node ID
 Command: Fixed to 01.
 ReqID: the request ID. Whenever an NMT request message is sent, the message is given a ReqID for
the CANopen master to identify. Before another NMT request message is sent out, the original ID
number must be changed. In other words, change the value of ReqID. The ReqID range is between
00–FF (Hex) to trigger sending the NMA request message.
 Node ID: the node address for the target equipment on the CANopen network (0: Broadcast).
 NMT service code:
NMT service code (Hex) Function

01 Start remote node
02 Stop remote node
80 Enter the pre-operational state
81 Reset application
82 Reset communication
The following table shows the data format of the NMT Response message.
Response message
PLC device
High byte Low byte
Message
D24001 Reserved Reserved
header
D24002 Reserved Node ID
 When status code is 1, the NMT operation has succeeded. When status code is not equal to1, the
NMT operation has failed and you should verify that the data in NMT request message is correct.
 Node ID: the node address for the target equipment on the CANopen network.
10
10-27
Example 1: Stop slave of No. 3 through NMT
 Request data:
Request message
PLC device
D25000 ReqID =01 Command =01
Message
header
D25003 Message Reserved NMT service code =02
D25004 data Reserved Node ID =03
 Response data:
Response message
PLC device
D24000 ResID=01 Status code =01
Message
D24001 Reserved =0 Reserved =0
header
D24002 Reserved =0 Node ID =03
10.4.3 Data Structure of EMERGENCY Request Message

The Emergency request message communicates the slave error and alarm information.
The following table shows the data format of the Emergency request message.
Request message
PLC device
High byte Low byte
Message
D25001 Reserved Size (Fixed to 0)
header
Message
D25003~D25031 Reserved
data
 Command: Fixed to 01.
 ReqID: the request ID. Whenever an Emergency message is sent, the message is given a ReqID for
the CANopen master to identify. Before another Emergency request message is sent out, the original
ID number must be changed. In other words, change the value of ReqID. The ReqID range is
between 00–FF (Hex) to trigger the sending the Emergency request message.
 Node ID: the node address of the target equipment on CANopen network.
The following table shows data format of the Emergency response message.
Response message
PLC device
Message
D24001 Reserved Size Fixed to 2A
header
D24003 Total number of data Number of data stored
Message
_10 D24004
data
Datum 1 Datum 0
10-28
Response message
PLC device
D24008-D24011 Emergency2
D24024-D24031 Reserved
 Command: Fixed to 01(Hex).
 When status code is 1, reading the Emergency message has succeeded. When status code is not
equal to1, reading the Emergency message has failed and you should verify that the data in the
Emergency message is correct.
 Node ID: the node address for the target equipment on the CANopen network.
 Total number of data: the total number of Emergency messages CANopen master receives from the
slave.
 Number of data stored: the latest number of Emergency messages CANopen master receives from the
slave (5 messages at most).
 An Emergency 1 consists of the data in D6004-D6007 and every Emergency message consists of 8
bytes of data.
The following table shows the data format of Emergency messages on the CAN bus. Datum 0–datum
7 in Emergency response message correspond to byte 0–byte 7 respectively.

80（hex） Emergency error Error storage
Vendor custom error code
+Node-ID code register
Example 1: read the Emergency message from the slave No.2, and the Emergency messages the slave
sends out successively.

82（hex） 43 54 20 14 0 0 0 0

82（hex） 42 54 20 15 0 0 0 0
 Request data:
Request message
PLC device
High byte Low byte
D25000 ReqID=01 Command =01
Message
D25001 Reserved Size =0
header
10
10-29
 Emergency response data
Response message
PLC device
High byte Low byte
D24000 ResID=01 Status code =01
Message
D24001 Reserved =0 Size =2A (Hex)
header
D24003 Total number of data =1 Number of data stored =1
D24004 Datum 1=54 Datum 0=42
Message
D24005 Datum 3=20 Datum 2=14
data
10.4.4 Example of Sending SDO through the Ladder Diagram

1. Control Requirement:
Read the value of P0-09 from the servo through SDO.
2. Hardware Connection:
3. The Corresponding Relation between Slave Parameter and Index/Subindex
The index_subindex corresponding to P0-09 in servo is 2009_0. In the CANopen Builder network
configuration software, right click the servo icon, and then click Parameter Edit. In the Parameter Edit
dialog box, you can see the index_subindex corresponding to the servo parameter.
For more details on how to operate the network configuration interface, refer to Section 11.1.1 in the
CANopen Builder software help file
_10
10-30
4. The Structure of the Request Message Devices:
Content Explanation
PLC device
(Hex) High byte(Hex) Low byte(Hex)
D25000 0101 ReqID = 01 Command = 01
SDO
request D25001 0004 Reserved Size = 04
message D25002 0102 Type = 01 Node ID = 03
mapping D25003 2009 Index high byte = 20 Index low byte = 09
area
D25004 0000 Reserved Subindex = 00
5. Editing the Ladder Diagram in ISPSoft
When M2=ON, after reading succeeds, the program stores the data from the target device in D24000–
D24005. The value of D24005: 100（hex）is the value read from P0-09.
6. The Structure of the Response Message Devices:
Content Explanation
PLC device
(Hex) High byte(Hex) Low byte(Hex)
D24000 0101 ResID = 01 Status code = 01
SDO D24001 0006 Reserved Size = 08
response D24002 4303 Type = 43 Node ID = 03
message
D24003 2009 Main index high byte = 20 Index low byte = 09
mapping
area D24004 0004 Reserved Subindex = 00
D24005 0100 Datum 1= 01 Datum 0= 00
10
10-31
10.5 Troubleshooting
10.5.1 CANopen Network Node State Display
1. In the AS Series PLC, while you enable the CANopen function, it uses SR825–893 as the special registers
as shown in the following table.
Special register Function

SR825 Displays the state of AS300 series PLC.
SR830–SR893 Displays the state of 64 nodes in the network
SR826 Flag for the state of the slave 1–16

SR821 Version of CANopen DS301
SR822 Displays the CANopen baud rate (unit: 1kpps)
2. As a master, the AS series PLC supports a maximum of 64 slaves ranging from node 1 to node 64. You
can use SR826–829 to monitor the state of the nodes in the network. The 16 bits in SR826 correspond to
16 slaves and their corresponding relations are shown in the following table.
Bit b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Node Node 8 Node 7 Node 6 Node 5 Node 4 Node 3 Node 2 Node 1
Bit b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
Node Node16 Node15 Node14 Node13 Node12 Node11 Node10 Node 9
When the node in the master node list is normal, the corresponding bit is OFF; when the node in the master
node list is abnormal (for example, initializing fails or the slave is offline for some reason), the
corresponding bit is ON.
3. The error code of every node is displayed through the corresponding special register (SR830–893) and
the relations between special register and corresponding node (1–16) is shown in the following table. (You
can also judge for other correspondings that are not listed here.)
Special
SR830 SR831 SR832 SR833 SR834 SR835 SR836 SR837
register
Node Node 1 Node 2 Node 3 Node 4 Node 5 Node 6 Node 7 Node 8
Special
SR838 SR839 SR840 SR841 SR842 SR843 SR844 SR845
register
Node Node 9 Node10 Node11 Node12 Node13 Node14 Node15 Node16
_10
10-32
4. Node codes displayed in SR830–893 when the ASSeries PLC is the master:
Code Indication How to correct

The node is error free or the node is
0 N/A
not configured.
ASSeries PLC master module
E0 receives the emergency message Read the relevant message with the PLC program
sent from slave.
PDO data length returned from the
Set the PDO data length of the slave and re-
E1 slave is not consistent with the
download.
length set in the node list.
E2 PDO of slave is not received. Check and ensure the setting is correct.
E3 Downloading auto SDO fails. Check and ensure auto SDO is correct.
Configuration of PDO parameter
E4 Ensure that the PDO parameter setting is legal.
fails.
Ensure that the connected slave device is
E5 Error in key parameter setting. consistent with the configured slave in the
software.
The slave does not exist in the
E6 Ensure that the power supply of slave is normal
network
and slave is correctly connected to the network.
E7 Slave error control is timed-out.
The node IDs of master and slave Set the node ID of the master and slave again and
E8
repeat. ensure their node IDs are unique.
5. Codes displayed in SR825 when the AS300 Series PLC is the master:

In CANopen DS301 mode: the PLC
works as master and is working
normally.
0 N/A
Not in CANopen DS301 mode: the
master mode function is not
activated.
Add slave into the node list and then re-download
F1 No slave in the list
the configuration data.
The data are being downloaded to
F2 Wait to finish downloading the configuration data.
AS Series PLC
The configuration receiving error in
F3 Download parameter configuration again.
AS Series PLC
Check that the CANopen bus cables are properly
F4 Bus-OFF is detected. connected and ensure that all the node devices run
at the same baud rate before you reboot.
AS Series PLC setting error such as The node address in the AS300 Series PLC should
F5
incorrect node address be between: 1–127.
Internal error; the error is detected in If the same error occurs after cycling the power,
F8
the internal memory replace it with a new AS300 PLC.
The sending buffer in the AS Series Check that the CANopen bus cable is properly
FB
PLC is full. connected and then reboot.
The receiving buffer in the AS Series Check that the CANopen bus cable is properly
FC
PLC is full. connected and then reboot. 10
10-33
6. Codes displayed in SR825 when the AS Series PLC is the slave:

N/A
Note: When the heartbeat alam function is not
activated, if the connection is normal before a
0 Working normally
disconnection occurs, the code for the slave will
still be working normally after the connection is
back on.
A0 AS Series PLC is being initialized. --
Check if the CANopen bus cable is properly
A1 AS Series PLC is pre-operational. connected. If the master communication is not
activated, no handling is needed.
The data are being downloaded to
A3 Wait to finish downloading the configured data.
AS Series PLC
Check if the CANopen bus cable is properly
B0 Heartbeat message time-out
connected.
PDO data length returned from the
Reset the PDO data length in the slave and
B1 slave is not consistent with the
download the new setting to the AS Series PLC.
length set in the node list.
Check if the CANopen bus cables are properly
F4 BUS-OFF state is detected. connected and ensure that all the node devices run
at the same baud rate before you reboot.
The sending buffer in the AS Series Check if the CANopen bus cable is properly
FB
The receiving buffer in the AS Series Check if the CANopen bus cable is properly
FC
_10
10-34
10.6 Application Example

The AS300 Series PLC can control Delta A2 servo rotation, and monitor the actual rotation speed of the motor
in real time. It does this by mapping the relevant servo drive parameters to the corresponding PDO, and reads
or writes the relevant servo drive parameters through the CAN bus.
1. Connectting the Hardware
Note:
 Use a standard communication cable such as UC-DN01Z-01A / UC-DN01Z-02A / UC-CMC010-01A.

and connect the terminal resistors (Delta standard terminal resistor TAP-TR01) to both ends of the
network when you construct the network.
 M of ASD-A2-xxxx-M refers to the model code and currently only the M-model servo supports
CANopen communication.
2. Setting Servo Parameters:
 Set servo parameters as shown in the following table.
Parameter Setting Explanation

3-00 03 Node ID of the A2 servo is 2
3-01 400 CAN communication rate is 1Mbps.
1-01 04 Speed mode
0-17 07 Drive displays the motor rotation speed (r/min)
2-10 101 Set DI1 as the signal for Servo On
2-12 114 Set DI3 as the signal _SPD0 for speed selection
2-13 115 Set DI4 as the signal _SPD1 for speed selection
3. Setting the CANopen Baud Rate and Node ID of AS300 Series PLC
The AS300 Series PLC uses the default setting values: Node ID: 1 and baud rate: 1Mbps.
You set the CANopen Node ID and baud rate for the AS300 series PLC in the CANopen Builder
software, as shown in the following steps.
10
10-35
A. Right click the AS300 Series PLC icon in HWCONFIG, then click Communication Software, and
then click CANopen Builder.
B. IF AS300 is in master mode, you can skip this step. If not, you can go to Properites and set it in
Master mode. After that download the parameter to AS300. Set AS300 Power off for 2 seconds
and supply power again and then proceed to the next step.
_10
10-36
C. Click the Online button on the Toolbar to enter on-line mode.
D. Click the Scan Network button on the Toolbar to scan the network.
E. On the Network menu, click Master parameter to display the Master Configuration dialog box.
10
10-37
Item Explanation Default

Node ID of AS300 series PLC on the CANopen
Node ID 1
network
Baud rate CANopen communication rate 1M bit/second
Work mode CANopen master/slave mode Master
Cycle period Cycle time for sending one SYNC message 50ms
Interval time for sending the master heartbeat
Master heartbeat time 200ms
message
Configure the CANopen communication stations and rates in HWCONFIG.
F. After you complete the previous steps, click the Download button on the Toolbar to download
the parameters to the PLC.
Note: you must reboot the AS300 Series PLC to enable the downloaded parameters.
_10
10-38
4. Scanning the Network:
On the Network menu, click Online or click the button to scan for the master and slaves on the
CANopen network. The master and slave found by the scan appear in CANopen Builder. For more
information, refer to Section 11.1.1 in the CANopen Builder software help file.
5. Configurating Nodes:
Double click the slave icon in CANopen Builder to display the Node configuration dialog box.
 Error Control Protocol
Sets the error control protocol for the master to monitor if the slave is offline.
 Auto SDO Configuration
Perform one write action to the slave parameter with SDO. The write action is finished when the slave
enters the operational state from the pre-operational state. You can configure up to 20 SDOs by clicking
Auto SDO configuration.
 PDO Mapping and Properties
Sets the mapping parameter and transmission type for the PDO.
For more details on the function of these buttons, refer to Section 11.1.1 in the CANopen Builder
software help file.
10
10-39
 PDO Mapping:
RxPDO1: mapping parameter P1-09; transmission type 255.
RxPDO2: mapping parameter P3-06, P4-07; transmission type 255.
TxPDO1: mapping parameter P0-09; transmission type 1.
 PDO transmission type :
PDOs can be classified into RxPDO or TxPDO. RxPDO data are sent from master to slave and TxPDO
data are sent from slave to master.
The PDO transmission types can be synchronous or asynchronous. In synchronous transmission, the
master sends out the SYNC message in a fixed cycle. You set the length of the cycle in the Master
Properties dialog box (default is 50ms). In asynchronous transmission, the message is sent out when
the PDO mapping parameter changes.
The following table describes the PDO Transmission types.
Transmission Type Description Remark

When any change in the mapped data happens,
RxPDO data is sent out immediately. The data
RxPDO the slave receives is valid only when receiving
the next SYNCH message. RxPDO data is not
sent out if there is no change in the data. SYNCH
0 When any change in the mapped data happens non-cycle
and the slave receives the SYNC message, the
data are sent out immediately. The TxPDO data
TxPDO
are valid immediately after master receives them.
TxPDO data is not sent out if there is no change
in the data.
After N messages are sent out, and regardless of
whether the mapped data changes, the data that
RxPDO
the slave receives is valid only when receiving SYNCH
N
the next SYNCH message. cycle
(N:1–240)
After N messages are sent out and regardless of
TxPDO whether the mapped data is changed, the data
that the master receives is valid at once.
The mapped data is sent out immediately when it
changes and is valid when the slaves receives it.
254 RxPDO ASYNCH
RxPDO data is not sent out if there is no change
_10 in the data.
10-40
Transmission Type Description Remark

The slave sends out the data once every one
Event timer time. After that, the TxPDO data is
not allowed to be sent out within an inhibit timer
time.
TxPDO When the Event timer and Inhibit timer are both
equal to 0, the slave sends TxPDO data to the
master immediately when the data changes, and
the data that master receives is immediately
valid.
255 Same as Type254
Note:
 Synchronous transmission type can fulfill multi-axis motion at the same time.
 If you monitor a real-time changing parameter such as the actual rotation speed of the motor, set
the TxPDO to the synchronous transmission type; otherwise the frequent change in the slave data
can block the CANopen network.
After you finish setting the above parameters, double click the master device to display the Node List Setting
dialog box. Select ASDA-A2 Drive, and click > to move the A2 drive to the right-side list, and then download the
configured data.
The mapping relation between master and slave:
Data transmission on CANopen

AS300 Series PLC master register A2 device
bus
Low word of P1-09 of
D25032
servo
High word of P1-09 of
D25033
servo
D25034 P3-06 of servo
D25035 P4-07 of servo 10
10-41
Data transmission on CANopen

AS300 Series PLC master register A2 device
bus
Low word of P0-09 of
D24032
servo
High word of P0-09 of
D24033
servo
6. Program control: D25032 is given the value 256 in ISPSoft; that is, the speed command is set as
256r/min in the following diagram.
7. Program explanation
When the AS300 Series PLC runs for the first time, set the parameter P3-06 for servo drive to F.
 When M0 switches from OFF to ON, the instruction writes 256 to D25032 and then writes the value to
the servo parameter P1-09 through RxPDO1.
 When M1 switches from OFF to ON, change P4-07 to 5. DI1 and DI3 are ON. DI1 means the SERVO is
ON and DI3 calls the speed specified by parameter P1-09 for servo rotation.
 When M1 switches from ON to OFF, the speed command becomes 0 and the motor stops running.
_10
10-42
10.7 Object Dictionary

The following table lists the communication objects in the object dictionary.
Default
Index Subindex Object name Data type Attribute
value
H’1000 H’00 Device type Unsigned 32 bits R 0x00000000
H’1001 H’00 Error register Unsigned 8 bits R 0
H’1005 H’00 COB-ID SYNC Unsigned 32 bits RW 0x00000080
AS300 Series
H’1008 H’00 Manufacturer device name Vis-String R
PLC
H’1014 H’00 COB-ID EMCY Unsigned 32 bits R 0x80 + Node-ID
-- Consumer heartbeat time
H’1016 H’00 Number of valid subindex Unsigned 8 bits R 1
H’01 Consumer heartbeat time Unsigned 32 bits RW 0
H’1017 H’00 Producer heartbeat time Unsigned 16 bits RW 0

-- Identity Object
H’00 Number of valid subindex Unsigned 8 bits R 3

H’1018
H’01 Vendor-ID Unsigned 32 bits R 0x000001DD
H’02 Product code Unsigned 32 bits R 0x00000055
H’03 Revision number Unsigned 32 bits R 0x00010002
RxPDO1 communication
--
parameter

H’1400
0x00000200+No
H’01 COB-ID of RxPDO1 Unsigned 32 bits RW
de-ID
H’02 Transmission mode Unsigned 8 bits RW 0xFF
H’03 Inhibit time Unsigned 16 bits RW 0
--
parameter

H’1401
H’01 COB-ID of RxPDO2 Unsigned 32 bits RW 0x80000000

--
parameter

H’1402 H’03 Inhibit time Unsigned 16 bits RW 0
10
H’1403 --
parameter
10-43
Default
value

--
parameter

H’1404

--
parameter

H’1405

--
parameter
H’1406

--
parameter

H’1407

H’1600 -- RxPDO1 mapping parameter
H’00 Number of valid subindex Unsigned 8 bits RW 4
H’01 The first mapped object Unsigned 32 bits RW 0x20000110

H’1600
_10 H’01 The second mapped object Unsigned 32 bits RW 0x20000210
10-44
Default
value
H’02 The third mapped object Unsigned 32 bits RW 0x20000310
H’03 The fourth mapped object Unsigned 32 bits RW 0x20000410
-- RxPDO2 mapping parameter
H’01 The first mapped object Unsigned 32 bits RW 0

H’1601
H’01 The second mapped object Unsigned 32 bits RW 0
H’02 The third mapped object Unsigned 32 bits RW 0
H’03 The fourth mapped object Unsigned 32 bits RW 0

H’1602
H’1603

H’1604

H’1604
H’1605 H’01 The first mapped object Unsigned 32 bits RW 0
10
10-45
Default
value
H’1606
H’1607
TxPDO1 communication
--
parameter
H’1800 0x00000180+No
H’01 COB-ID of TxPDO1 Unsigned 32 bits RW
de-ID
H’1800 H’05 Timer Unsigned 16 bits RW 100
--
parameter
H’1801 H’01 COB-ID of TxPDO2 Unsigned 32 bits RW 0x80000000

H’05 Timer Unsigned 16 bits RW 100
--
parameter

--
parameter

H’01 COB-ID of TxPDO4 Unsigned 32 bits RW 0x80000000
_10
10-46
Default
value
--
parameter

--
parameter

H’01 COB-ID of TxPDO6 Unsigned 32 bits RW 0x80000000
H’1805
--
parameter

--
parameter

-- TxPDO1 mapping parameter
H’01 The first mapped object Unsigned 32 bits RW 0x20010110
H’1A00
H’02 The second mapped object Unsigned 32 bits RW 0x20010210
H’03 The third mapped object Unsigned 32 bits RW 0x20010310
H’04 The fourth mapped object Unsigned 32 bits RW 0x20010410
H’1A01
10
10-47
Default
value
H’1A02
H’1A02
H’1A03 H’01 The first mapped object Unsigned 32 bits RW 0
H’1A04
H’1A05
H’1A06 H’02 The second mapped object Unsigned 32 bits RW 0
H’1A07 -- TxPDO8 mapping parameter

H’1A07 H’02 The second mapped object Unsigned 32 bits RW 0
_10 H’03 The third mapped object Unsigned 32 bits RW 0
10-48
MEMO
_10
10-50
11
Chapter 11 CPU Module Operating Principles
Table of Contents
11.1 CPU Module Operations ............................................................. 11-2

11.1.1 Procedure ................................................................................... 11-2
11.1.2 I/O Refreshing and Communication Service ..................................... 11-3
11.1.3 Interrupts ................................................................................... 11-3
11.2 CPU Module Operating Modes ................................................... 11-4
11.2.1 Operating Modes .......................................................................... 11-4
11.2.2 Status and Operation under Different Operating Modes ..................... 11-4
11 - 1
11.1 CPU Module Operations

11.1.1 Procedure
The following diagram describes the operation of the CPU module.

_11
The CPU module is supplied with power.
The system enables the initialization.

 The non-latched memory is initialized.
 The downloaded program is checked.
 The parameters in the CPU module are checked.
 The parameters in the module table are checked.
 The module table in the CPU module is compared
with the actual I/O configuration.
 The I/O setting is downloaded to the I/O module.
 If the memory card is installed, whether to execute
the system copy procedure or not is checked.
Diagnosis processing:
 The memory card and other setting are checked.
 The I/O bus is checked.
 The system parameter is checked.
The data sent to the I/O module is refreshed.

 The data sent to the digital I/O module is refreshed.
 The data sent to the analog I/O module is refreshed.
 The data sent to other modules are refreshed.
Program execution:
 The user program is executed.
 The interrupt subroutine is executed.
The data sent from the I/O module is refreshed.

 The data sent from the digital I/O module is
refreshed.
 The data sent from the analog I/O module is
refreshed.
 The data sent from other modules are refreshed.
Communication service:
 The communication through the CPU module
 The communication through other I/O modules
 The internal communication between the CPU
module and the I/O module
11 - 2
C h a p t e r 11 C P U Mo d u l e O p e r a t i n g P r i n c i p l e
11.1.2 I/O Refreshing and Communication Service
 Refreshing I/O
The CPU module reads external I/O data periodically or outputs data to an external I/O. Refreshing the
11
I/O includes the following.
 Refreshing data in a digital I/O module
 Refreshing data in an analog I/O module, temperature measurement module, loadcell module,
positioning and counter module
 Refreshing data in a network module
All I/O refreshing executes in the same loop. The data in an input device refreshes before a program
executes, and the data in an output device refreshes after the program executes.
Unit Maximum data exchange Data exchange area
Depends on the number of input/output

Digital I/O module Input relay/Output relay
channels in the unit.
Analog I/O module,
temperature measurement
Depends on the number of input/output
module, loadcell module, Data register
channels in the unit.
positioning and counter
module
Network module Depends on the unit. Data register
 Communication service
Communication service is the unscheduled communication service for a network module. It includes the
communication requests sent from external equipment to a CPU module, and the communication requests
sent from the CPU module to the external equipment. The communication requests may be received from
time to time but the data or state refreshing on the devices or components will only start afer the END
instruction is scanned and executed if the coummunicaiton is concerning the internal devices or
components of the PLC CPU.
11.1.3 Execution Timing of Interrupts
Interrupts can be categorized into three types, periodic interrupts, timer interrupts, and condition interrupts. The
timing to execute any interrupt is after the current executing instruction is complete and the position and state of
the next to be executed instruction is retained. After the interrupt is executed, the execution of the next
instruction will resume.
11 - 3
11.2 CPU Module Operating Modes

11.2.1 Operating Modes
_11 There are two operating modes. They can be used to control a user program and all tasks.
STOP mode: A program is not executed in this mode. Users can download a module table, initialize CPU
configuration and other setting, download a program, check a program, and force a bit ON/OFF.
RUN mode: A program is executed in this mode. Users can NOT download a module table, and initialize CPU
configuration and other setting.
11.2.2 Status and Operation under Different Operating Modes
The following table lists the status and operation states for RUN and STOP modes.
 Basic operation
Program memory
CPU I/O
Program External output Non-latched Latched
mode refreshing
area area
OFF. If you set the I/O
module so that the final
The execution state of the external output

I/O refreshing The data in the program
STOP of the program on the I/O module is
executes. memories is retained.
stops. retained, the final state of
the external output on the

I/O module is retained.
The program I/O refreshing The program controls the The program controls the
RUN
executes. executes. external output. program memories.
 Relationship between the operating modes and tasks
Mode Loop task Interrupt task
Execution of an interrupt task

STOP Execution of a loop tasks stops.
stops.
 The tasks that have not been executed are in the
HALT state.
If the condition of the interrupt is
RUN  If a task is active, or the instruction TKON is
met, the interrupt task executes.
executed, the task executes.
 If a task is not active, or the instruction TKOFF
11 - 4
C h a p t e r 11 C P U Mo d u l e O p e r a t i n g P r i n c i p l e
executes, the task does not execute.
 Relationship between changing modes and the program memory

11
Change of the mode Non-latched area Latched area
Data is cleared or retained depending

STOP→RUN The data is retained.
on your setting.
RUN→STOP The data is retained. The data is retained.
11 - 5
12
Chapter 12 Troubleshooting
Table of Contents
12.1.1 Basic troubleshooting steps ............................................................12-3
12.1.2 Clear the Error States ....................................................................12-3
12.1.3 Troubleshooting SOP .....................................................................12-4
12.1.4 Viewing System Log and Error Step ................................................12-5
12.2 Troubleshooting for CPU Modules .................................................... 12-7

12.2.1 ERROR LED Indicators Are ON ........................................................12-7
12.2.2 ERROR LED Indicators Blinking Every 0.5 Seconds ............................12-7
12.2.3 ERROR LED Indicators Blinking Rapidly Every 0.2 Seconds .................12-9
12.2.4 ERROR LED Indicators Slow Blinking Every 3 Seconds and Lighting up for
1 Second .....................................................................................12-9
12.2.5 BAT. LOW LED Indicators Are ON ....................................................12-9
12.2.6 BAT. LOW LED Indicators Blinking Every 0.5 Seconds ........................12-9
12.2.7 The LED RUN and ERROR Indicators are Blinking Simultaneously Every
0.5 Seconds ............................................................................... 12-10
12.2.8 The RUN and LED Indicators are Blinking One After Another Every
0.5 Seconds. .............................................................................. 12-10
12.2.9 Other Errors (Without LED Indicators) ........................................... 12-10
12.3 Troubleshooting for I/O Modules .................................................. 12-18

12.3.1 Troubleshooting for Analog Modules (AD/DA/XA) and Temperature Modules
(RTD/TC) ................................................................................... 12-18
12.3.2 Troubleshooting for the Positioning Module AS02/04PU .................... 12-19
12.3.3 Troubleshooting for the High-Speed Counter Module AS02HC ........... 12-19
12.3.4 Troubleshooting for the Load Cell Module AS02LC ........................... 12-20
12.3.5 Troubleshooting for the Module AS04SIL IO-Link as a Communication
Module ...................................................................................... 12-21
12.3.6 Troubleshooting for the Module AS00SCM as a Communication Module12-24
12.3.7 Troubleshooting for the Module AS00SCM as a Remote Module ......... 12-25
12.3.8 Troubleshooting for AS01DNET Modules......................................... 12-26
12.4 Error Codes and LED Indicators for CPU Modules .......................... 12-27
12.4.1 Error Codes and LED Indicators for CPU Modules ............................ 12-27
12.4.2 Error Codes and LED Indicators for Analog/Temperature Modules ..... 12-33
12.4.3 Error Codes and LED Indicators for Positioning Module AS02 / 04PU .. 12-34
12.4.4 Error Codes and LED Indicators for High Speed Counter Module
AS02HC ..................................................................................... 12-34
12.4.5 Error Codes and LED Indicators for Load Cell Module AS02LC ........... 12-34
a Communication Module ............................................................. 12-35
Communication Module................................................................ 12-36
12.4.8 Error Codes and LED Indicators for Module AS00SCM as a Remote
12-1
Module ...................................................................................... 12-36

(Master/Slave Mode) ................................................................... 12-36
(RTU Mode) ............................................................................... 12-38
_12
12-2
C h a p t e r 1 2 Tr o u b l e s h o o t i n g
12.1 Troubleshooting
12.1.1 Basic troubleshooting steps
This chapter includes the possible errors the can occur during operation, their causes, and corrective actions.
(1) Check the following:
 The PLC should be operated in a safe environment (consider environmental, electronic, and vibration safeties).
 Connect power supply correctly to the PLC.
 Secure the module, terminal, and cable installations. 12_

 All LED indicators show correctly.
 Set all switches correctly.
(2) Check the following operational functions:
 Switch the RUN/STOP state
 Check the settings for the AS Series to RUN/STOP
 Check and eliminate errors from external devices
 Use the System Log function in ISPSoft to check system operation and logs
(3) Identify possible causes:
 AS Series or external device
 CPU or extension modules
 Parameters or program settings
12.1.2 Clear the Error States

Use the following methods to clear the error states. If the error source is not corrected, the system continues to show errors.
(1) Switch the CPU model state to STOP and then to RUN.
(2) Turn off the CPU and turn it on again.
(3) Use ISPSoft to clear the error logs.
(4) Reset the CPU to the default settings and download the program again.
12-3
12.1.3 Troubleshooting SOP

An error
occ urred
Bas ic
troub les hoot in g No Refer to section 12. 1 .1 for
s teps Basic troubleshooti ng steps
done
Yes
_12 CP U mo d u le e r ro r
Mo dule
error
1. Refer to s ec ti on 1 2.1.4 for the s ys tem log
2. Refer to s ec ti on 1 2.4 for error codes and
L ED indic ators for CPU modules
o r mo d u le s er r or 3. Refer to s ec ti on 1 2.3 for troubles hooting for
I/O modules
CP U module
error
1. Refer to s ection 1 2.1 .4 for the sys tem log
Yes 2. Refer to s ec ti on 1 2.4 for error codes and
ERRO R L E D O N L ED indic ators for CPU modules
3. Refer to s ec ti on 1 2.2 for troubles hooting for
C PU modul es
No

E RROR L ED b li nki ng Yes 2. Refer to s ec ti on 1 2.4 for error codes and
n or mal ly L ED indic ators for CPU modules
( eve ry 0 .5 se c.) 3. Refer to s ec ti on 1 2.2 for troubles hooting for
C PU modul es
No
1. Refer to s ection 12 .1 . 4 for the s ys tem log

ERRO R L E D b l in kin g Yes 2. Refer to s ec ti on 1 2.4 for error codes and
fast L ED indic ators for CPU modules
( eve ry 0 .2 se c.) 3. Refer to s ec ti on 1 2.2 for troubles hooting for
C PU modul es
No

E RR O R LE D bl in k in g Yes 2. Refer to s ec ti on 1 2.4 for error codes and
sl o wl y (e ve r y 1 se c. , L ED indic ators for CPU modules
sto p fo r 3 se c.) 3. Refer to s ec ti on 1 2.2 for troubles hooting for
C PU modul es
No

Yes 2. Refer to s ec ti on 1 2.4 for error codes and
Oth er LE D b li nki ng L ED indic ators for CPU modules
3. Refer to s ec ti on 1 2.2 for troubles hooting for
C PU modul es
No
Afte r g oi ng t hr ou gh
tro ub le sho oti ng s tep s,
Yes If the p roblem per sis ts , pleas e c ontact
the i ssu es a re s til l n ot s upport.
r eso lve d.
No
The system runs normally.
12-4
12.1.4 Viewing System Log and Error Step

If ISPSoft is connected to an AS Series, you can view actions and errors in the AS Series by clicking System Log on the
PLC menu. The CPU can store up to 20 error log sets. After the 20 sets are stored, the 1st log is replaced with the 21st if
there are new logs coming in, and the old logs are replaced with the new ones sequentially. When the memory card is
installed in the CPU module, 20 sets of the old logs are backed up in the memory card and up to 1000 logs can be recorded.
If the stored logs exceed 1000, the oldest 20 logs are replaced with the newest 20 logs in the memory card.
(1) On the PLC menu, click System Log.
12_
(2) The System Log window appears. Click Clear Log to clear the error log in the window and the error log in the CPU
module, and reset the CPU module.
 Group No.: The number 1 indicates that the error occurred in the CPU module or the right-side module 1. The
numbers 2–16 indicate the error occurred in the remote modules 1–15.
 Module No.: The number 0 indicates that the error occurred in the CPU module or the remote module. The
numbers 1–32 indicate the error occurred in the right-side module of the CPU module / remote
module. The number 1 represents the closest module to the CPU module or the remote module. This
number increases from the closest to the furthest from the CPU module or the remote module. Note:
up to eight extension modules can be connected to the right-side of the remote module.
 PLC/Module name: Model names of the CPU, remote, and extension modules.
12-5
 Error Code: Error codes in the error log.
 Date & Time: The date and time the error occurred. The most recently occurring error is listed on the top.
 The last column shows the descriptions for the error.
(3) If the error occured is an exceeding device ragne error (SM0 = ON) or a program syntax error (SM5 = ON), you can
use the following steps to see the problematic step in the program.
 SM0 = ON: Check the value (32-bit) in SR1 to see the latest exceeding device range error in the program.
 SM5 = ON: Check the value (32-bit) in SR5 to see the latest syntax error step in the program.
_12
 After knowing which the problematic step is, go to ISPSoft -> Edit -> Step positioning and then enter the number
of the problematic step, the system will take you to the specified step in the program.
12-6
12.2 Troubleshooting for CPU Modules

Check the LED indicators and the error codes from the CPU module and refer to the following table for troubleshooting.
V in the Log column indicates the error is recorded in the log. X in the Log column indicates the error is not recorded in
the log. H in the Log column indicates whether or not you can set recording the error in the log in HWCONFIG.
12.2.1 ERROR LED Indicators Are ON

Error
Code Description Solution Flag Log 12_
(16#)
1. Check the setting of the watchdog timer in HWCONFIG.

000A Scan timeout SM8 V
2. Check whether the program causes a long scan time
12.2.2 ERROR LED Indicators Blinking Every 0.5 Seconds
Error
Code Description Solution Flag Log
(16#)
The program in the PLC is

000C Download the program again. SM9 V
damaged.
If the problem persists, contact the local authorized
0010 CPU memory access is denied. SM9 V
distributors.
CPU external memory access is If the problem persists, contact the local authorized
002E SM9 V
denied. distributors.
PLC programs are not consistent
002F Download the program again. SM34 V
with the system logs.
The arrangement of the function
Check whether the settings in HWCONFIG are
0070 cards is not consistent with the SM10 V
consistent with the arrangement of the function cards.
settings.
The interrupt number exceeds the
0102 SM5 X
range.
The MC instruction exceeds the
0202 SM5 X
range.
The MCR instruction exceeds the Check the syntax error step in the program. Modify and
0302 compile the program and then download the program SM5 X
range.
again.
The operands used in DHSCS are
0D03 SM5 X
not used properly.
The operands HCXXX used in
0E05 SM5 X
DCNT are not used properly.
1300
Errors occurred in the remote Refer to Section 12.3.7 for more information on the error
- SM30 V
modules codes for the remote modules.
130F
The arrangement of the I/O
Check whether the settings in HWCONFIG are
1402 modules is not consistent with the SM10 V
consistent with the arrangement of the I/O modules.
settings.
140B communication modules exceed the Check the total number of communication modules. SM10 V
maximum number 4.
12-7
Error
(16#)
The number of connected extension
140D modules exceed the maximum Check the total number of extension modules. SM10 V
number 32.
More than eight remote modules on Check the total number of remote modules on the right
140E SM30 V
the right side of the CPU module. side of the CPU module (maximum is 8).
1. Make sure the module is properly connected to the
_12 1600
The extension module ID exceeds CPU module and turn the modules on again.
SM10 V
the range. 2. If the problem persists, contact the local authorized
distributors.
The extension module ID cannot be CPU module and turn the modules on again.
1601 SM10 V
set. 2. If the problem persists, contact the local authorized
distributors.
The extension module ID is CPU module and turn the modules on again.
1602 SM10 V
duplicated. 2. If the problem persists, contact the local authorized
distributors.
The extension module cannot be CPU module and turn the modules on again.
1603 SM10 V
operated. 2. If the problem persists, contact the local authorized
distributors.
Extension module communication CPU module and turn the modules on again.
1604 SM10 V
timeout 2. If the problem persists, contact the local authorized
distributors.
1605 Hardware failure SM10 V
distributors.
Errors on the communication Make sure the function card is properly connected to the
1606 SM10 V
module function card CPU module and turn the modules on again.
Check whether the external 24 V power supply to the
1607 The external voltage is abnormal. SM10 V
module is normal.
The Internal factory calibration or If the problem persists, contact the local authorized
1608 SM10 V
the CJC is abnormal. distributors.
1609
- Reserved (Error codes for the extension modules)
160F
Check the syntax error step in the program. Modify and
200A Invalid instruction compile the program and then download the program SM5 V
again.
The number of MODBUS TCP SM
6010 Check the number of superior devices (maximum is 32). V
connections exceeds the range. 1092
The number of EtherNet/IP SM
6011 Check the number of connections (maximum is 16). V
connections exceeds the range. 1093
C000
Save the PLC program and hand the file to the company
- The program syntax is incorrect.
or the technicians.
CFFF
12-8
12.2.3 ERROR LED Indicators Blinking Rapidly Every 0.2 Seconds

The blinking happens when the power supply 24 VDC of the CPU module is disconnected, or the power supply is not
sufficient, not stable or abnormal.
Error
(16#)
Check whether the external 24 V power supply to the
002A The external voltage is abnormal. SM7 V
module is normal.
12_
12.2.4 ERROR LED Indicators Slow Blinking Every 3 Seconds and
Lighting up for 1 Second
Error
(16#)
1500 Connection lost in the remote
Check the network connection cable. SM30 V
modules
1502
Errors occurred in the remote Refer to Section 12.3.7 for more information on the
- SM30 V
modules remote module error codes.
150F
1800
Errors occurred in the extension Refer to Section 12.3 for more information on the
- SM10 V
modules extension module error codes.
180F
1900 1. Check the CANopen connection cable.

Heartbeat errors occurred in the
- slave for the Delta ASD-A2 2. Check if the specific slave is working properly. - V
Note: The last 2 digits of the error code represent the ID
191C control.
number of the slave (convert hexadecimal to decimal).
12.2.5 BAT. LOW LED Indicators Are ON

The blinking happens when there is no battery (CR1620) or the power is low. Turn this option off in the HWCONFIG >
CPU > Device Setting > Show Battery Low Voltage Error CPU when you don’t need the RTC function to keep track of the
current time (default is enabled).
Error
(16#)
0027 Battery Low Change battery or turn this option off SM219 X
12.2.6 BAT. LOW LED Indicators Blinking Every 0.5 Seconds

The blinking happens when RTC cannot keep track of the current time.
Error
(16#)
RTC cannot keep track of the If the problem persists, contact the local authorized
0026 SM218 V
current time distributors.
12-9
12.2.7 The LED RUN and ERROR Indicators are Blinking

Simultaneously Every 0.5 Seconds
The blinking happens when the firmware of the CPU module is being upgraded. If this happens once the power is
supplied to the CPU module, it means errors occurred during the previous firmware upgrade. Users need to upgrade the
firmware again or contact your point of purchase.
12.2.8 The RUN and ERROR LED Indicators are Blinking One After
Another Every 0.5 Seconds.
_12
The blinking happens when the CPU module memory card is backing up, restoring, or saving.
If you are using AS218 Series CPU and without engaging any SD card, the RUN and LED indicators blinking indicates
the AIO firmware is being updated. If the blinking happens at the instant when the CPU is supplied with power, the
blinking means AIO firmware update failed and you need to update the firmware again. If you are not updating the AIO
firmware, the blinking indicates CPU error and you need to contact the local authorized distributors.
12.2.9 Other Errors (Without LED Indicators)

Error
(16#)
0011 The PLC ID is incorrect. Check the PLC ID. SM34 V
0012 The PLC password is incorrect. Check the PLC password. SM34 V
The PLC maximum password attempts Reset the CPU module or restore the CPU module
002D SM34 V
exceeded. to its default settings.
1. Reset the CPU module or restore the CPU
module to its default settings, and then download
The memories in the latched special
0050 the program and the parameters again. SM6 V
auxiliary relays are abnormal.
2. If the problem persists, contact the local
authorized distributors.
The latched special data registers are
abnormal.
The memories in the latched auxiliary
relays are abnormal.
0054 The latched counters are abnormal. the program and the parameters again. SM6 V
The latched 32-bit counters are
abnormal.
12-10

The latched special auxiliary relay is
abnormal.
The latched data registers are
abnormal.
The CPU module does not detect a Check that the memory card is inserted correctly 12_
005D SM453 V
memory card. into the CPU module.
The memory card is initialized
005E Check whether the memory card is broken. SM453 V
incorrectly.
An error occurs when data is written to Check whether the file path is correct or whether
0063 SM453 V
the memory card. the memory card is malfunctioning.
A file in the memory card cannot be Check whether the file path is correct, or whether
0064 SM453 V
read. the file is damaged.
The initialization of the Delta ASD-A2 1. Check the CANopen connection cable.
control has not yet been completed, the 2. Check if the specific slave is working properly.
1950 - V
CANopen instructions cannot be 3. If nothing is wrong, initialize the Delta ASD-A2
executed. again.
Heartbeat timeout occurred in the slave
19B0 Check the CANopen connection cable. - V
mode
The data length of PDO (process data
Revise the PDO data length setting in the slave
19B1 object) in the slave mode is not - V
mode and download the setting again.
matched with the setting.
The data length of PDO (process data
object) in the slave mode is not
matched with the setting of the scan list.
Revise the PDO data length setting in the slave
19E1 Refer to CANopen communication - V
mode and download the setting again.
related descriptions in AS Series
Operation Manual for more details on
the error codes 19E1 to 19E8.
19E2 PDO in the slave mode is not received. Check if the configurations are correctly set. - V
The function of auto downloading SDO Check if the SDO contents for auto downloading
19E3 - V
fails at the first startup. are correct.
19E4 PDO configurations are set incorrectly. Make sure to set the PDO configurations correctly. - V
The main settings are not consistent Check ifthe main settings are consistent with the
19E5 - V
with the connected slave. connected slave.
This slave does NOT exist in this Make sure power of the slave is working properly
19E6 - V
network. and the network cable is well-connected.
Control timeout occurred in the slave Make sure power of the slave is working properly
19E7 - V
mode and the network cable is well-connected.
Revise IDs for mater and slave. Make sure no
19E8 The master ID is duplicated. - V
duplications.
1. Download the configuration table again.
19F3 Incorrect configuration table 2. If the problem persists, contact the local - V
1 2 - 11
1. Check if the network cable is normal and the

shielded cable is grounded.
2. Check if the start and end of the network cable
CANopen communication is in the BUS-
19F4 are both connected with a 121Ω terminal - V
OFF state.
resistor.
3. Check ifall the nodes share the same baud rate
on the network.
The sending registers exceed the Revise the time to synchronize (suggested to use a
19FB - V
range. longer time).
The receiving registers exceed the Revise the time to synchronize (suggested to use a
_12 19FC
range. longer time).
- V
1. Use the FCOMP card in the function card slot to

Not using the FCOMP card or not in the
check if the operation mode is correct.
right mode for the ASDA-A2 while using
2001 2. Check the syntax error step in the program. SM0 V
the CANopen communication
Modify and compile the program and then
instruction.
download the program again.
The device used in the program
2003 SM0 V
exceeds the device range.
The operand n or the other constant
200B SM0 V
operands K/H exceed the range.
200C The operands overlap. SM0 V
The binary to binary-coded decimal
200D SM0 V
conversion is incorrect.
200E The string does not end with 00. Check the syntax error step in the program. Modify SM0 V
2012 Incorrect division operation and compile the program and then download the SM0 V
program again.
The value exceeds the range of values
2013 that can be represented by the floating- SM0 V
point numbers.
The task designated by the TKON or
2014 YKOFF instruction is incorrect or SM0 V
exceeds the range.
The instruction BREAK is written
2017 SM0 V
outside of the FOR-NEXT loop.
1. Check the syntax error step in the program.
No such position planning table number Modify and compile the program and then
2027 SM0 V
or the format is incorrect. download the program again.
2. Check the settings of the position planning table.
High speed output instruction is being
Refer to SR28 for the record of the axis number
2028 executed. Only one instruction can be - V
and rearrange the output control procedures.
executed at a time.
During the execution of CSFO
2030 instruction, the output frequency - V
exceeds the upper limit.
Modify the ratio of input / output frequency or lower
During the execution of CSFO the inut frequency value.
instruciotn, when the output frequency
2031 - V
is set to 0, but even after 2 seconds, the
output is still not complete.
Set the Ethernet parameter for the CPU module in
6004 The IP address filter is set incorrectly. SM1108 X
HWCONFIG again.
600D RJ45 port is not connected. Check the connection. SM1100 X
12-12
1. Check if there are devices using the same IP

There are devices using the same IP address.
6012 SM1101 V
address. 2. Check if there is more than 1 DHCP or BOOTP
server on the network.
Retry the email connection later. This error does
not cause the PLC to stop running. Solve the
6100 The email connection is busy. SM1113 X
problem by means of the related flag in the
program.
Set up the trigger attachment mode in HWCONFIG
The trigger attachment mode in the > CPU Module > Device Setting > Options >
6103
email is set incorrectly. Ethernet Port Advanced > Email > Trigger Setting
SM1113 X
12_
> Trigger Attachment Mode.
The attachment in the email does not Check whether the attachment exists in the
6104 SM1113 X
exist. memory card.
The attachment in the email is Check the size of the attachment. If the size is over
6105 SM1113 X
oversized. 2 MB, the file cannot be sent as an attachment.
Check for the correct address and set up the
There is an SMTP server response SMTP server in HWCONFIG > CPU Module >
6106 SM1113 X
timeout. Device Setting > Options > Ethernet Port
Advanced > Email again.
1. Check whether the status of the SMTP server is
normal.
There is an SMTP server response 2. Retry sending of the email later. This error does
6107 SM1113 X
timeout. not cause the PLC to stop running. Solve the
problem by means of the related flag in the
program.
Check for the correct ID/Password and set up in
6108 SMTP verification failed HWCONFIG > CPU Module > Device Setting > SM1113 X
Options > Ethernet Port Advanced > Email again.
1. Check the program and the related special data
registers.
The remote communication IP address 2. Set the Ethernet parameter for the CPU module
6200 - X
set in the TCP socket function is illegal. in HWCONFIG CPU Module > Device Setting >
Options > Ethernet Port Advanced > TCP
Socket.
registers.
The local communication port set in the 2. Set the Ethernet parameter for the CPU module
6201 - X
TCP socket function is illegal. in HWCONFIG CPU Module > Device Setting >
Socket.
registers.
The remote communication port set in 2. Set the Ethernet parameter for the CPU module
6202 - X
the TCP socket function is illegal. in HWCONFIG CPU Module > Device Setting >
Socket.
registers.
The device from which the data is sent 2. Set the Ethernet parameter for the CPU module
6203 - X
in the TCP socket function is illegal. in HWCONFIG CPU Module > Device Setting >
Socket.
12-13

registers.
The device which receives the data in 2. Set the Ethernet parameter for the CPU module
6206 - X
the TCP socket function is illegal. in HWCONFIG CPU Module > Device Setting >
Socket.
registers.
The data received through the TCP 2. Set the Ethernet parameter for the CPU module
6208 - X
socket exceeds the device range. in HWCONFIG CPU Module > Device Setting >
_12 Options > Ethernet Port Advanced > TCP
Socket.
registers.
The remote communication IP address 2. Set the Ethernet parameter for the CPU module
6209 - X
set in the UDP socket function is illegal. in HWCONFIG CPU Module > Device Setting >
Options > Ethernet Port Advanced > UDP
Socket.
registers.
The local communication port set in the 2. Set the Ethernet parameter for the CPU module
620A - X
UDP socket function is illegal. in HWCONFIG CPU Module > Device Setting >
Socket.
registers.
The device from which the data is sent 2. Set the Ethernet parameter for the CPU module
620C - X
in the UDP socket function is illegal. in HWCONFIG CPU Module > Device Setting >
Socket.
registers.
The device which receives the data in 2. Set the Ethernet parameter for the CPU module
620F - X
the UDP socket function is illegal. in HWCONFIG CPU Module > Device Setting >
Socket.
registers.
The data received through the UDP 2. Set the Ethernet parameter for the CPU module
6210 - X
socket exceeds the device range. in HWCONFIG CPU Module > Device Setting >
Socket.
There is no response from the remote
6212 Make sure that the remote device is connected. - X
device after the timeout period.
registers.
2. Set the Ethernet parameter for the CPU module
6213 The data received exceeds the limit. - X
in HWCONFIG CPU Module > Device Setting >
Socket.
The remote device refuses the
6214 Make sure the remote device operates normally. - X
connection.
6215 The socket is not opened. Check whether operational sequence in the - X
12-14
program is correct.
Check whether operational sequence in the
6217 The socket is opened. - X
program is correct.
The data has been sent through the Check whether operational sequence in the
6218 - X
socket. program is correct.
The data has been received through the Check whether operational sequence in the
6219 - X
socket. program is correct.
Check whether operational sequence in the
621A The socket is closed. - X
program is correct.
The device communication function

1. Check the communication setting in the master 12_
7011 and the slave. - H
code in COM1 is incorrect.
2. Check the communication cable.
1. Check the communication setting in the master
The device communication address
used in COM1 is incorrect.
The device used in COM1 exceeds the
device range.
The device length of the communication
data in COM1 exceeds the limit.
The device checksum for the 1. Check the communication setting in the master
7017 communication serial port of COM1 is and the slave. - H
incorrect. 2. Check the communication cable.
code in COM2 is incorrect.
used in COM2 is incorrect.
The device used in COM2 exceeds the
device range.
data in COM2 exceeds the limit.
7027 communication serial port of COM2 is and the slave. - H
code in the Ethernet is incorrect.
used in the Ethernet is incorrect.
The device used in the Ethernet
data in the Ethernet exceeds the limit.
12-15
7037 communication serial port of the and the slave. - H
Ethernet is incorrect. 2. Check the communication cable.
code in the USB is incorrect.
used in the USB is incorrect.
_12 The device used in the USB exceeds

and the slave.
7043 - H
the device range.
data in the USB exceeds the limit.
7047 communication serial port of the USB is and the slave. - H
70B1 and the slave. - H
code in function card 1 is incorrect.
used in function card 1 is incorrect.
The device used in the function card 1
The device length of the communication 1. Check the communication setting in the master
70B4 data in function card 1 exceeds the and the slave. - H
limit. 2. Check the communication cable.
70B7 communication serial port of function and the slave. - H
card 1 is incorrect. 2. Check the communication cable.
70C1 and the slave. - H
code in function card 2 is incorrect.
used in function card 2 is incorrect.
The device used in function card 2
The device length of the communication 1. Check the communication setting in the master
70C4 data in function card 2 exceeds the and the slave. - H
limit. 2. Check the communication cable.
70C7 communication serial port of function and the slave. - H
card 2 is incorrect. 2. Check the communication cable.
1. Refer to the function codes defined by the
7203 Invalid communication function code communication protocols. - H
2. Check if the product firmware and the software
12-16
used are the most updated versions.

3. Make a note of the operation procedures and
screenshots of the error windows and hand this
note to the company or the technicians from the
agents.
1. Download the program and parameters again.
The contents of the program
3. Save all the projects and compress the projects
8105 downloaded are incorrect. - H
into one compressed file and then hand this file
The program syntax is incorrect.
to the company or the technicians from the
agents. 12_
downloaded are incorrect.
8106 into one compressed file and then hand this file - H
The length of the execution code
exceeds the limit.
agents.
downloaded are incorrect.
8107 into one compressed file and then hand this file - H
The length of the source code exceeds
the limit.
agents.
1. Check if the product firmware and the software
used are the most updated versions.
8000
Errors occur between software and 2. Make a note of the operation procedures and
-
PLC. screenshots of the error windows and hand this
8FFF
note to the company or the technicians from the
agents.
12-17
12.3 Troubleshooting for Other I/O Modules

 Introduction to troubleshotting modules
Digital I/O, analog I/O, temperature measurement, positioning, counter, load cell, and network modules can be
installed in an AS Series system. There are 2 types of error codes; error and warning. The CPU module and its
modules stop operating when errors occur. The CPU modules and its modules do not stop operating when warnings
are triggered.
_12 12.3.1 Troubleshooting for Analog Modules (AD/DA/XA) and

Temperature Modules (RTD/TC)
12.3.1.1 ERROR LED Indicators Are ON

You can set up HWCONFIG to have the following errors appear as warnings when they occur. Otherwise, when an error
occurs, only an error message appears.
Error
Description Solution
Code
16#1605 Hardware failure
distributors.
16#1607 The external voltage is abnormal. Check the power supply.
The factory calibration or the CJC is If the problem persists, contact the local authorized
16#1608
abnormal. distributors.
12.3.1.2 ERROR LED Indicators Blinking Every 0.2 Seconds

The following errors are specified as warnings to ensure that the CPU can still run even when the warnings are triggered
by its modules. If you need the CPU STOP running immediately when the first 4 errors occur, you need to set the them
as errors.
Error
Code
distributors.
16#1804 The factory calibration is abnormal.
distributors.
16#1807 The CJC is abnormal.
distributors.
The signal received by channel 1
16#1808 exceeds the range of analog inputs Check the signal received by channel 1
(temperature).
16#1809 exceeds the range of analog inputs Check the signal received by channel 2
(temperature).
16#180A exceeds the range of analog inputs Check the signal received by channel 3
(temperature).
16#180B exceeds the range of analog inputs Check the signal received by channel 4
(temperature).
12-18
Error
Code
16#180C exceeds the range of analog inputs Check the signal received by channel 5
(temperature).
16#180D exceeds the range of analog inputs Check the signal received by channel 6
(temperature).
16#180E exceeds the range of analog inputs Check the signal received by channel 7
(temperature).
12_
16#180F exceeds the range of analog inputs Check the signal received by channel 8
(temperature).
When power-on, the module is not Check if the connection between module and CPU
-
detected by CPU module. module is working. If not, connect again.
12.3.2 Troubleshooting for the Positioning Module AS02/04PU

Error
Code
distributors.
12.3.3 Troubleshooting for the High-Speed Counter Module AS02HC

Error
Code
Counted data is lost. Switch the module power OFF
Counted result in the latched area is not and ON again. The error code is cleared by the
16#1605
retainable (major error) system. If the problem persists, contact the local
Module setting data is lost. Switch the module power
Module settings in the latced area is not OFF and ON again. Download the HWCONFIG
16#1606
retainable. (major error) settings again to clear the error code. If the problem
persists, contact the local authorized distributors.
Check if the setting in HWCONFIG is consistent with
Module setting error
16#1607 the actual placement. If the problem persists, contact
(major error)
the local authorized distributors.
12-19

The following errors are specified as warnings to ensure that the CPU module can still run even when the warnings are
triggered by its AIO modules.
Error
Code
16#1800 Check the counter result. If the alarm is not required,

Counter overflow / underflow on CH1
disable the alarm output function in HWCONFIG. Use
any of the followings to clear the error code: clear,
reset, preset the counter, restart the module, or
_12 16#1801 Counter overflow / underflow on CH2
execute DHCCNT instruction again.
Linear count exceeding the set Check the signal received by channel 1 and 2.
16#1802
upper/lower limit on CH1 Hardware counter is still counting; when the number is
Linear count exceeding the set accumulated to the maximum and go back to the
16#1803
upper/lower limit on CH2 minimum, the error code will be cleared.
The variation in relation to a SSI encoder Check if there is any interruption and check the device
16#1804
position exceeding the limit on CH1 specification to see if the offset setting is matching with
The variation in relation to a SSI encoder the actual placement. When the next reading is normal,
16#1805
position exceeding the limit on CH2 the error code will be cleared.
16#1806 Check the execution of DHCCNT instruction. If it is

Abnormal SSI communication on CH1
parity check, check is there is any interruption and
check if the data format is correct. Check if the device
16#1807 Abnormal SSI communication on CH2 wiring is secure, and if the encoder power supply is
normal.
Check the SSI absolute encoder specification and
SSI absolute position cross zero point on
16#1808 modify the setting accordingly. If the alarm is not
CH1
required, disable the alarm output function in
HWCONFIG. Use any of the followings to clear the
SSI absolute position cross zero point on
16#1809 error code: clear, reset, preset the counter, restart the
CH2
module, or execute DHCCNT instruction again.
12.3.4 Troubleshooting for the Load Cell Module AS02LC

You can set up HWCONFIG to have the following errors appear as warnings when they occur. Otherwise, when an error
occurs, only an error message appears.
Error
Code
16#1605 Hardware failure (that is, the driver board)
distributors.
12-20

The following errors are specified as warnings to ensure that the CPU module can still run even when the warnings are
triggered by its modules. The following first 3 error codes are set as warnings by default in HWCONFIG; CPU must
STOP running immediately when the first 3 errors occur.
Error
Code
distributors.
12_
16#1807 Diver board failure
distributors.
Check the signal received by channel 1 and the cable
16#1808 exceeds the range of analog inputs or the
connections.
SEN voltage is abnormal.
The signal received by channel 1 Check the value input to channel 1 and the maximum
16#1809
exceeds the weight limit. weight setting.
The factory calibration in channel 1 is
16#180A Check the weight calibration in channel 1.
incorrect.
Check the signal received by channel 2 and the cable
16#180B exceeds the range of analog inputs or the
connections.
SEN voltage is abnormal.
The signal received by channel 2 Check the value input to channel 2 and the maximum
16#180C
exceeds the weight limit. weight setting.
The factory calibration in channel 2 is
16#180D Check the weight calibration in channel 1.
incorrect.
When power-on, the module is not Check if the connection between module and CPU
-
detected by CPU module. module is working. If not, connect again.
12.3.5 Troubleshooting for the Module AS04SIL IO-Link as a

Communication Module
12.3.5.1 ERROR LED Indicators (Module Status) Blinking Every 0.2 Seconds
The following error codes identify possible errors when the AS04SIL module is installed on the right side of the CPU
module or RTU and acts as a communication module.
Error
Code
1. Check that the module is securely installed.
16#1605 Hardware failure 2. Install a new AS04SIL or if the problem persists,
contact the local authorized distributors.
24VDC power supply is not sufficient and Check whether the 24 V power supply to the module is
16#1606 then recovered from low-voltage for less normal.
than 10 ms.
12-21
12.3.5.2 ERROR LED Indicators (Network Status) Are ON

The following error codes identify possible errors when the AS-SIL module is installed on the right side of the CPU
module or RTU and acts as a communication module.
Error
Code
16#1802 No external power supply Check the external power supply
12.3.5.3 ERROR LED Indicators (Network Status) Blinking Every 0.1 Seconds
The following error codes identify possible errors when the AS-SIL module is installed on the right side of the CPU
_12 module or RTU and acts as a communication module.
Error
Code
See the following IO-Link Event Code table for more
16#1800 Error occurs in IO-Link Master
information.
See the following IO-Link Event Code table for more
16#1801 Error occurs in IO-Link device
information.
Error in the download of IO-Link device
16#1803 Redownload the configuration by the software.
mapping tables
Failure to switch the process data Check if the configurations of the actual connected
16#1804
parameter set device are the same as the ones in the software.
A connection error occurs in IO-Link via 1. Cut the external power off for 3 seconds and then
16#1805 communication port 1 put the power back on.
A connection error occurs in IO-Link via 2. Redownload the configuration by the software.
16#1806 communication port 2
A connection error occurs in IO-Link via
A connection error occurs in IO-Link via
1. Cut the external power off for 3 seconds and then
Device scanning error and the scanning is
16#1809 forced to stop put the power back on.
2. Scan all device again
IO-Link Event Code Table

You can find the IO-Link event codes in the module data exchange area where the device sates of communication port
1~4 are stored. Check the IO-Link device operation manual if the event occurred is from IO-Link devices.
IO-Link Type Source
Event Notifica- Event Solution IO-Link IO-Link
Codes Warning Error
tion Master Device
Device temperature over-
16#4000 V Lower load V
load
Device temperature over-
16#4210 V Clear source of heat V
run
16#5101 V Device fuse blown Change fuse V
Power supply voltage
16#5110 V Check tolerance V
over-run
Power supply voltage
16#5111 V Check tolerance V
under-run
Check device
16#6320 V Parameter error V
specificaitons
Check device
16#6321 V Parameter missing V
specifications
16#7710 V Device short circuit Check installation V
12-22
IO-Link Type Source

Event Notifica- Event Solution IO-Link IO-Link
Codes Warning Error
tion Master Device
Process variable range
16#8C10 V Check process data V
over-run
Measurement range over-
16#8C20 V Check application V
run
Process variable range
16#8C30 V Check process data V
under-run
16#8CA0 V
No connected IO-Link
Check installation V
12_
device
The version of the IO-Link
Use matching IODD file
16#8CA1 V protocol is different from V
and configured again.
the one configured.
Connected device is
Check configurations and
16#8CA2 V different from the one V
installation
configured in the software
16#8CA3 Reserved V
IO-Link device process
16#8CA4 V Check installation V
cable short circuit
Master temperature
16#8CA5 V Clear source of heat V
exceeds 135°C
Master temperature Clear source of heat and
16#8CA6 V V
exceeds 160°C lower load
Device power supply Check the external power
16#8CA7 V voltage under-run L+ supply V
(<18V)
Device power supply Check the external power
16#8CA8 V V
voltage under-run L+ (<9V) supply
Check device
16#8CA9 V Illegal device ID V
specifications
IO-Link process data Check device
16#8CAA V V
range over-run specifications
Scan the device and
Process data range over-
16#8CAB V download the configuration V
run
again
If the problem persists,
16#8CAC V Data storage error contact the local V
0xFF21 V New connected device V
0xFF22 V Device disconnected Check installation V
Set the Data Storage
access locked and set it to
Data storage identification
0xFF23 V backup / restore and then V
mismatch
backing up data according
to actual placement.
Check device
0xFF24 V Data storage not sufficient V
specifications
Data storage parameter Check device
0xFF25 V V
access denied specifications
12-23
12.3.6 Troubleshooting for the Module AS00SCM as a Communication

Module
The following error codes identify possible errors when the AS00SCM module is installed on the right side of the CPU
module and acts as a communication module.
Error
Code
1. Check that the module is securely installed.
_12 16#1605 Hardware failure 2. Install a new AS00SCM or if the problem persists,
1. Check if the function card is securely installed.
2. Install a new function card or if the problem persists,
16#1606 The function card setting is incorrect. 3. Check if the setting in HWCONFIG is consistent with
the function card setting.
4. Install a new AS00SCM or if the problem persists,

The following error codes identify possible errors when the AS00SCM module is installed on the right side of the CPU
module and acts as a communication module.
Error
Code
Check the parameter in HWCONFIG. Download the
16#1802 Incorrect parameters
parameter again.
1. Check whether the communication cable is
properly connected.
2. Check if the station number and the
16#1803 Communication timeout
communication format are correctly set.
3. Check if the connection with the function card is
working correctly.
1. Check the settings of the UD Link.
16#1804 The UD Link setting is incorrect.
2. Check the warning settings in the PLC.
The following error codes can only be viewed with SCMSoft; when the following errors occur, they are not shown on the
LED indicators and the system does not send the error messages to the CPU module.
Error
Code
The settings in HWCONFIG and manual Check the settings in HWCONFIG and manual
16#0107 settings are not consistent with function settings for function card 1.
card 1.
The settings in HWCONFIG and manual Check the settings in HWCONFIG and manual
16#0108 settings are not consistent for function card settings for function card 2.
2.
parameter again.
12-24
Error
Code
16#0301 Function card 1 communication timeout
working correctly.
16#0302 Function card 2 communication timeout
working correctly.
1. Check the UD Link settings. 12_
16#0400 Invalid UD Link Group ID for function card 1
1. Check the UD Link settings.
16#0401 Invalid UD Link Group ID for function card 2
16#0402 Invalid UD Link Command for function card 1
16#0403 Invalid UD Link Command for function card 1
12.3.7 Troubleshooting for the Module AS00SCM as a Remote Module

Errors from the remote modules are regarded as warnings for AS Series CPU modules. The LED indicator of the CPU
module blinks and the CPU module can still operate. Use flag SM30 to manage error presentation in the remote
modules.

Error codes:
Error
Code
1. Check if the module is securely installed.
2. Change and install a new AS00SCM or if the
problem persists, contact the local authorized
distributors.
1. Check if the function card is securely installed with
the AS-FCOPM card.
2. Change and install a new function card or if the
problem persists, contact the local authorized
16#1302 The function card setting is incorrect. distributors.
3. Check if the setting in HWCONFIG is consistent
with the function card setting.
4. Install a new AS00SCM or if the problem persists,
More than eight remote modules on the Check the total number of remote modules on the right
16#1304 right side of the CPU module. side of the CPU module (maximum is 8).
12-25

Warning type of error codes:
Error
Code
This error code should work with AS Series Remote
Module Setting in ISPSoft. When this error code shows
up, it indicates the remote module had been stopped:
Master Disconnected, Master Reconnected, IO Module
16#1506 Remote module had been stopped.
Alarm, or IO Module Timeout. Check and clear the
problem and then power-off and then power-on the
_12 remote module to refresh its state. Refer to section 9.4.3
in AS Series Module Manual for more details.

Warning type of error codes:
Error
Code
16#1500 Remote module communication timeout Make sure the communication cable is well connected
parameter again.
Make sure the communication cable is well connected
Remote extension module communication
16#1503 and the module is properly connected to the CPU
timeout
module and turn the modules on again.
The actual placement of the extension Check if the parameter in HWCONFIG is the same as
16#1505
modules is NOT the same as it is set. the actual placement.
Extension module communication CPU module and turn the modules on again.
16#1604
timeout 2. If the problem persists, contact the local authorized
distributors.

This happens when the 24 VDC power supply for the remote module is not sufficient. Check the power supply. If the
power supply is normal, remove the extension module from the CPU module and then check if the SCM remote module
is out of order. Error codes:
Error
Code
24VDC power supply is not sufficient and Check whether the 24 V power supply to the module is
16#1303 then recovered from low-voltage for less normal.
than 10 ms.
12.3.8 Troubleshooting for AS01DNET Modules

Refer to sections 12.4.9 and 12.4.10 for more details.
12-26
12.4 Error Codes and LED Indicators for Modules

12.4.1 Error Codes and LED Indicators for CPU Modules
A. Columns
a. Error code: If an error occurs in the system, an error code is generated.
b. Description: The description of the error
c. CPU status: If the error occurs, the CPU stops running, keeps running, or shows the status you defined for the
error.
12_
 Stop: The CPU stops running when the error occurs.
 Continue: The CPU keeps running when the error occurs.
d. LED indicator status: If the error occurs, the LED indicator is ON, OFF, or blinks.
 ERROR: System error
 Descriptions
Module Type LED indicator Descriptions

There are five types of error indicator states for of the CPU module errors,
including LED indicator ON, OFF, blinking fast, blinking normally, and blinking
slowly. When the LED indicator is ON, blinking fast/normally, clear the problems
first in order to run the CPU module. When the LED indicator is blinking slowly,
indicating a warning type of error codes, it does not require immediate action.
Clear the problems when the module is powered off.
Error type:
ON: A serious error occurs in the module.
Blinking fast (every 0.2 seconds): unstable power supply or hardware
CPU Error LED Failure.
Blinking normally (every 0.5 second): system program errors or system
cannot run.
Warning type:
Blinking slowly (every 1 second and off for 3 seconds): a warning is
triggered, but the system can still run.
OFF:
A warning is triggered, but the system can still run. You can modify the rules
and use ISPSoft or SM/SR to show the warnings, instead of using indicators to
show the errors.
12-27
Note: refer to Section 12.2 for the status descriptions of the Error LED indicators.
ERROR LED indicator

Error CPU
Description
code status Blinking Blinking Blinking
ON OFF
fast normally slowly
000A Scan timeout Stop V
000C The program in the PLC is damaged. Stop V

0010 CPU memory access is denied. Stop V
_12 0011 The PLC ID is incorrect. Continue V
0012 The PLC password is incorrect. Continue V
RTC cannot keep track of the current time
0026 Continue
(the battery LED is blinking.)
0027 Battery low (the battery LED is ON.) Continue
24VDC power supply is not sufficient and then is
002A Continue V
recovered from low-voltage for less than 10 ms.
002D The PLC maximum password attempts exceeded. Continue V
The access to the external memory of the CPU is
002E Stop V
denied.
PLC programs are not consistent with the system
002F Stop V
logs.
The memories in the latched special auxiliary relays
0050 Continue V
are abnormal.
0051 The latched special data registers are abnormal. Continue V
The memories in the latched auxiliary relays are
0052 Continue V
abnormal.
0054 The latched counters are abnormal. Continue V
0055 The latched 32-bit counters are abnormal. Continue V
0056 The latched special auxiliary relay is abnormal. Continue V
0059 The latched data registers are abnormal. Continue V
005D The CPU module does not detect a memory card. Continue V
005E The memory card is initialized incorrectly. Continue V
An error occurs when data is written to the memory
0063 Continue V
card.
0064 A file in the memory card cannot be read. Continue V
The actual placement of the function cards is not
0070 Stop V
consistent with the settings.
0102 The interrupt number exceeds the range. Stop V
0202 The MC instruction exceeds the range. Stop V
0302 The MCR instruction exceeds the range. Stop V
The operands used in DHSCS are not used
0D03 Stop V
properly.
The operands HCXXX used in DCNT are not used
0E05 Stop V
properly.
1300
- Errors occurred in the remote modules Continue V
130F
12-28
ERROR LED indicator

Error CPU
Description
ON OFF
The arrangement of the I/O modules is not
1402 Stop V
consistent with the settings.
Number of communication modules exceeds the
140B Stop V
limit of four.
Number of extension modules exceeds the limit of
140D Stop V
32. 12_
Number of remote modules exceeds the limit of
140E Stop V
eight on the right side of the CPU module.
1500 Connection lost in the remote modules Continue V
1502
- Errors occurred in the remote modules Continue V
150F
1600 The ID of the extension module exceeds the range. Stop V
1601 The ID of the extension module cannot be set. Stop V
1602 The ID of the extension module is duplicated. Stop V
1603 The extension module cannot be operated. Stop V
1604 Extension module communication timeout Stop V
1605 Hardware failure Stop V
1606 Errors on the communication module function card Stop V
1607 The external voltage is abnormal. Stop V
The Internal factory calibration or the CJC is
1608 Stop V
abnormal.
1609
- Reserved (Error codes for the extension modules) Stop V
160F
1800
- Errors occurred in the extension modules Continue V
180F
1900
Heartbeat errors occurred in the slave of the Delta
- Continue V
ASD-A2 control.
191C
The initialization of the Delta ASD-A2 control has
1950 not yet been completed, the CANopen instructions Continue V
cannot be executed.
Not using the FCOMP card or not in the right mode
2001 for the ASDA-A2 while using the CANopen Continue V
communication instruction.
The device used in the program exceeds the device
2003 Continue V
range or is illegal.
200A Invalid instruction Stop V
The operand n or the other constant operands K/H
200B Continue V
exceed the range.
200C The operands overlap. Continue V
12-29
ERROR LED indicator

Error CPU
Description
ON OFF
The binary to binary-coded decimal conversion is
200D Continue V
incorrect.
200E The string does not end with 00. Continue V
2012 Incorrect division operation Continue V
The value exceeds the range of values which can
2013 Continue V
_12 be represented by the floating-point numbers.
The task designated by the TKON or YKOFF
2014 Continue V
instruction is incorrect, or exceeds the range.
The instruction BREAK is written outside of the
2017 Continue V
FOR-NEXT loop.
No such position planning table number or the
2027 Continue V
format is incorrect.
The high speed output instruction is being
2028 executed. Only one instruction can be executed at Continue V
a time.
During the execution of CSFO instruction, the
2030 Continue V
output frequency exceeds the upper limit.
During the execution of CSFO instruciotn, when
2031 the output frequency is set to 0, but even after 2 Continue V
seconds, the output is still not complete.
6004 The IP address filter is set incorrectly. Continue V
600D RJ45 port is not connected. Continue V
The number of MODBUS TCP connections
6010 Continue V
exceeds the range.
The number of the EtherNet/IP connections
6011 Continue V
exceeds the range.
6012 There are devices using the same IP address. Continue V
6100 The email connection is busy. Continue V
The trigger attachment mode in the email is set
6103 Continue V
incorrectly.
6104 The attachment in the email does not exist. Continue V
6105 The attachment in the email is too big. Continue V
6106 There is an SMTP server response timeout. Continue V
6107 There is an SMTP server response timeout. Continue V
6108 SMTP verification failed Continue V
The remote communication IP address set in the
6200 Continue V
TCP socket function is illegal.
The local communication port set in the TCP socket
6201 Continue V
function is illegal.
The remote communication port set in the TCP
6202 Continue V
socket function is illegal.
The device from which the data is sent in the TCP
6203 Continue V
The device that receives the data in the TCP socket
6206 Continue V
12-30
ERROR LED indicator

Error CPU
Description
ON OFF
The data that is received through the TCP socket
6208 Continue V
The remote communication IP address set in the
6209 Continue V
UDP socket function is illegal.
The local communication port set in the UDP socket
620A Continue V
function is illegal. 12_
The device from which the data is sent in the UDP
620C Continue V
The device that receives the data in the UDP socket
620F Continue V
The data that is received through the UDP socket
6210 Continue V
There is no response from the remote device after
6212 Continue V
the timeout period.
6213 The data received exceeds the limit. Continue V
6214 The remote device refuses the connection. Continue V
6215 The socket is not opened. Continue V
6217 The socket is opened. Continue V
6218 The data has been sent through the socket. Continue V
6219 The data has been received through the socket. Continue V
621A The socket is closed. Continue V
The device communication function code in COM1
7011 Continue V
is incorrect.
The device communication address used in COM1
7012 Continue V
is incorrect.
The device used in COM1 exceeds the device
7013 Continue V
range.
The device length of the communication data in
7014 Continue V
COM1 exceeds the limit.
The device checksum for the communication serial
7017 Continue V
port of COM1 is incorrect.
The device communication function code in COM2
7021 Continue V
is incorrect.
The device communication address used in COM2
7022 Continue V
is incorrect.
The device used in COM2 exceeds the device
7023 Continue V
range.
7024 Continue V
COM2 exceeds the limit.
7027 Continue V
port of COM2 is incorrect.
The device communication function code in
7031 Continue V
Ethernet is incorrect.
The device communication address used in
7032 Continue V
Ethernet is incorrect.
12-31
ERROR LED indicator

Error CPU
Description
ON OFF
The device used in Ethernet exceeds the device
7033 Continue V
range.
7034 Continue V
Ethernet exceeds the limit.
7037 Continue V
_12 port of Ethernet is incorrect.
The device communication function code in USB is
7041 Continue V
incorrect.
The device communication address used in USB is
7042 Continue V
incorrect.
7043 The device used in USB exceeds the device range. Continue V
7044 Continue V
USB exceeds the limit.
7047 Continue V
port of USB is incorrect.
The device communication function code in function
70B1 Continue V
card 1 is incorrect.
The device communication address used in function
70B2 Continue V
The device used in function card 1 exceeds the
70B3 Continue V
device range.
70B4 Continue V
function card 1 exceeds the limit.
70B7 Continue V
port of function card 1 is incorrect.
The device communication function code in function
70C1 Continue V
The device communication address used in function
70C2 Continue V
The device used in function card 2 exceeds the
70C3 Continue V
device range.
70C4 Continue V
function card 2 exceeds the limit.
70C7 Continue V
port of function card 2 is incorrect.
7203 Invalid communication function code Continue V
The contents of the downloaded program are
8105 incorrect. Continue V
The program syntax is incorrect.
The length of the execution code exceeds the limit.
The length of the source code exceeds the limit.
12-32
ERROR LED indicator

Error CPU
Description
ON OFF
8000
- Errors occur between software and PLC. Continue V
8FFF
12.4.2 Error Codes and LED Indicators for Analog/Temperature 12_

Modules
ERROR LED indicator status
Error code Description AD/

DA/ ERROR
A ↔D
16#1605 Hardware failure OFF ON
16#1607 The external voltage is abnormal. OFF ON
16#1608 The factory calibration or the CJC is abnormal. OFF ON
16#1801*1 The external voltage is abnormal. OFF Blinking
16#1802*1 Hardware failure OFF Blinking
RUN: Blinking
16#1804*1 The factory calibration is abnormal. Blinking
STOP: OFF
16#1807*1 The CJC is abnormal. OFF Blinking
The signal received by channel 1 exceeds the range of
16#1808
analog inputs (temperature).
16#1809
16#180A
16#180B
analog inputs (temperature). RUN: Blinking
Blinking
The signal received by channel 5 exceeds the range of STOP: OFF
16#180C
16#180D
16#180E
16#180F
Blinking once
When power-on, the module is not detected by CPU or twice and
- OFF
module. after 2 seconds, it
blinks repeatedly
*1: The errors are specified as warnings to ensure the CPU module can still run even when the warnings are triggered by
its AIO modules. Set up HWCONFIG to have the following first 4 error codes appear as errors when they occur.
12-33
12.4.3 Error Codes and LED Indicators for Positioning Module AS02 /
04PU

Error code Description
AD ERROR
16#1802 Hardware failure OFF Blinking
_12 12.4.4 Error Codes and LED Indicators for High Speed Counter Module
AS02HC

ON Blinking
Counted result in the latched area is not retainable (major

16#1605 V
error)
Module settings in the latced area is not retainable. (major V
16#1606
error)
Module setting error
16#1607 V
(major error)
16#1800 Counter overflow / underflow on CH1 V
16#1801 Counter overflow / underflow on CH2 V
16#1802 Linear count exceeding the set upper/lower limit on CH1 V
16#1803 Linear count exceeding the set upper/lower limit on CH2 V
16#1804 The variation in relation to a SSI encoder position

V
exceeding the limit on CH1
The variation in relation to a SSI encoder position
16#1805 V
exceeding the limit on CH2
16#1806 Abnormal SSI communication on CH1 V
16#1807 Abnormal SSI communication on CH2 V
16#1808 SSI absolute position cross zero point on CH1 V
16#1809 SSI absolute position cross zero point on CH2 V
12.4.5 Error Codes and LED Indicators for Load Cell Module AS02LC
ERROR LED indicator

AD ERROR
16#1605 Hardware failure (the diver board included) OFF ON

16#1607 The external voltage is abnormal. OFF ON
16#1801*1 The external voltage is abnormal. OFF Blinking
16#1802*1 Hardware failure OFF Blinking
16#1807*1 Diver board failure OFF Blinking
16#1808 RUN: Blinking Blinking
analog inputs or the SEN voltage is abnormal.
12-34
ERROR LED indicator

AD ERROR
16#1809 The signal received by channel 1 exceeds the weight limit. STOP: OFF
16#180A The factory calibration in channel 1 is incorrect.
16#180B
analog inputs or the SEN voltage is abnormal.
16#180C The signal received by channel 2 exceeds the weight limit.
16#180D The factory calibration in channel 2 is incorrect. 12_
*1: The following errors are specified as warnings to ensure the CPU module can still run even when the warnings are
triggered by its AIO modules. You can set up HWCONFIG to have the following first 3 error codes appear as errors when
they occur.
a Communication Module
MS Status LED indicator

Error Code Description
ON Blinking
16#1605 Hardware failure V

24VDC power supply is not sufficient and then recovered from
16#1606 V
low-voltage for less than 10 ms.
NS LED indicator
ON Blinking
16#1800 Error occurs in IO-Link Master V

16#1801 Error occurs in IO-Link device V
16#1802 No external power supply V
16#1803 Error in the download of IO-Link device mapping tables V
Failure to switch the process data V
16#1804
parameter set
16#1805 A connection error occurs in IO-Link via communication port 1 V
16#1809 Device scanning error and the scanning is forced to stop V
12-35

Communication Module

ON Blinking

16#1606 The setting of the function card is incorrect. V
_12 16#1802 Incorrect parameters V

16#1803 Communication timeout V
16#1804 The setting of the UD Link is incorrect. V

Remote Module

Blinking Blinking
ON Blinking
slow fast
16#1302 The setting of the function card is incorrect. V
24 VDC power supply is not sufficient and then is recovered
16#1303 V
from a low-voltage less than 10ms situation.
More than eight remote modules on
16#1304 V
the right side of the CPU module.
16#1500 Remote module communication timeout V
16#1502 Incorrect parameters V
16#1503 Extension module communication timeout V
The actual placement of the extension modules is NOT the
16#1505 V
same as it is set.
16#1506 Remote module had been stopped. V
16#1604 Extension module communication timeout V

(Master/Slave Mode)
Code Explanation Correction
Node address of AS01DNET-A
0~63 --
(in normal operation)
80 AS01DNET-A is in STOP status. Turn the PLC to RUN and start I/O data exchange
The node ID of AS01DNET is the
1. Ensure that the node address of AS01DNET is unique.
F0 same as that of other node or
2. Re-power AS01DNET.
exceeds the allowed range.
Configure the scan list and then download the configuration to
F1 No configured slave in Scan List.
AS01DNET.
Too low voltage of the work
F2 Check if the power supply for AS01DNET and the PLC is normal.
power
12-36

Switch the function switch IN1 from On to Off and re-power
F3 AS01DNET enters the test mode
AS01DNET-A.
1. Check if the network cable is normal and the shielded cable is
grounded.
2. Check if the baud rates of all nodes in the network are same.
F4 BUS-OFF
3. Check if the start and end of the network cable are both connected
with a 121Ω terminal resistor.
4. Re-power AS01DNET-A.
1. Check if the network cable is normal.
F5 No network power
2. Ensure that the network power is normal.
12_
Internal error; Flash or RAM If the error still exists after re-power, send AS01DNET-A back for
F6
check error repair.
Error produced in factory If the error still exists after re-power, send AS01DNET-A back for
F8
manufacturing repair.
Internal error; EEPROM access If the error still exists after re-power, send AS01DNET-A back for
F9
failure repair.
1. Configure the network correctly and re-download it to AS01DNET-
A.
FA Invalid configuration data
2. Check if the node address of one slave in the scan list is the same
as that of AS01DNET-A.
1. Check if there is any change in node ID of the slave in the
Identification parameters returned
network.
E0 from the slave do not match the
2. Check if some node device in the network is replaced.
configuration data.
3. Re-configure the network.
I/O Data size returned does not Re-configure I/O data size of the slave, download the configuration to
E1
match that in the scan list. AS01DNET-A and run the PLC.
The slave device in the scan list
does not exist or is offline when 1. Check if there is a change in the node address of the slave.
AS01DNET-A is in master mode. 2. Check if the communication cable is disconnected or connected
E2 The I/O connection between the loosely.
slave AS01DNET-A and the 3. Check if the bus cable length exceeds the maximum transmission
distance. If so, the system may not be stable.
master is broken when
AS01DNET-A is in slave mode.
1. Make sure that the connection between AS01DNET-A and the
AS01DNET-A fails to transmit network is normal.
E3
data. 2. Check if the baud rate of AS01DNET-A is the same as that of
other node in the network.
Error detected in sequence of
E4 fragmented I/O data from the Check if the slave is operating normally.
slave device.
The slave device returns error
E5 when AS01DNET-A attempts to Check if the slave is operating normally.
communicate with it.
IO data size returned from the
Check that the IO data size of the slave should be the same as that
E6 slave is bigger than that
configured in Scan List.
configured in Scan List.
AS01DNET-A is checking MAC If the code is displayed long, do the troubleshooting according to the
E7
ID. following steps.
12-37

1. Make sure that at least two nodes work normally in the network.
2. Check if either end of the network is connected with the terminal
resistor of 121Ω.
3. Check if the baud rates of the node devices in the network are
same.
4. Check if the communication cable is normal so as to avoid that
the cable is disconnected or connected loosely.
5. Check if the bus cable length exceeds the maximum transmission
distance. If so, the system may not be stable.
6. Check if the shielded wire of the network cable is grounded.
_12 7. Re-power AS01DNET-A scanner module.

(RTU Mode)
Code Indication How to deal with
Node ID of the scanner module
0~63 No correction needed
(When in RUN state)
1. Ensure that the node ID of AS01DNET (RTU) is unique in
The node ID is repeated or
F0 the DeviceNet network within the range of 0~63.
exceeds allowed range.
2. Repower it on after changing the node ID.
No I/O module is configured to Add I/O modules in AS01DNET (RTU) in the DeviceNet
F1 AS01DNET (RTU) in the Builder software and download the configuration data to
DeviceNet Builder software. AS01DNET (RTU) after the configuration is finished.
The work voltage of AS01DNET Check if the power supply for AS01DNET (RTU) works
F2
(RTU) is too low. normally.
AS01DNET (RTU) enters the
F3 Repower AS01DNET (RTU).
test mode.
1. Check if the network communication cable is normal and
the shielded cable is grounded.
AS01DNET (RTU) is the Bus- 2. Ensure the baud rates of all network nodes are same.
F4
Off state. 3. Check if the two ends of the network are both connected
4. Repower the scanner module.
1. Check if the network cable is normal.

No network power supply for 2. Check if the network power supply is normal. (The external
F5
AS01DNET(RTU) 24V DC network power supply is connected between red
V+ and black V- of AS01DNET (RTU) .)
Internal error;
Return the product for repair if the error still exists after re-
F6 An error in the internal storage
power on.
units of AS01DNET (RTU)
Internal error;
F7 An error in the data exchange
power on.
units of AS01DNET (RTU)
F8 Manufacture error
power on.
12-38
Code Indication How to deal with
Internal error;
F9 An error in the access of the
power on.
Flash of AS01DNET (RTU)
Check if an error occurs in the modules connected to the

right side of AS01DNET (RTU);
Check if the module exists;
E4 Module error
Check if current module matches that configured in the
software;
Check if the unconfigured module is added.
12_
If the code has emerged for a long time, please shoot troubles
in the methods below.
1. Ensure that there are at least two nodes working normally
in the network.
2. Check if the two ends of the network are both connected
3. Ensure that the baud rates of all network nodes are same.
Repeated node ID detection 4. Check if the network cable has a problem such as being
E7
disconnected and loosened.
5. Check if the bus communication cable length exceeds
maximum transmission distance. If the maximum
transmission distance is exceeded, the stability of the
system can not be ensured.
6. Check if the shielded wire of the network communication
cable is grounded.
7. Turn on the power of AS01DNET (RTU) again.
The number of I/O modules

Check if the number of I/O modules connected to AS01DNET
E9 connected to AS01DNET (RTU)
(RTU) is more than 8.
exceeds the maximum 8.
1. Check if the RUN/STOP switch of the PLC connected to
AS01DNET (RTU) is in STOP the DeviceNet master is turned to RUN.
80
state. 2. Check if the value of control word of AS01DNET (RTU) is
1. For details, refer to section 11.5.4.3.4.
The AS01DNET (RTU)
Wait until the download of AS01DNET (RTU) configuration
83 configuration in the software is
data is completed.
being downloading.
12-39
MEMO
_12
12-40
13
10
Chapter 13 Data Tracer and Data
Logger
Table of Contents
13.1Data Tracer ......................................................................................... 13-2

13.1.1 About Data Tracer .........................................................................13-2
13.1.2 Example ......................................................................................13-4
13.2 Data Logger ..................................................................................... 13-5

13.2.1 About Data Logger ........................................................................13-5
13.2.2 Related SM Flags and SR Registors .................................................13-7
13.3 Delta Drive Parameters Backup and Restore ................................... 13-8

13.3.1 System Requirement .....................................................................13-8
13.3.2 The Architecture Overview for Backup and Restore ...........................13-8
13.3.3 Steps to Backup Delta Device Parameters ........................................13-9
13.3.4 Steps to Restore Delta Device Parameters ..................................... 13-12
13.3.5 FAQ .......................................................................................... 13-17
13-1
13.1 Data Tracer

13.1.1 About Data Tracer
Data Tracer is used for the real-time collection of variable symbols, values, states in devices, after some trigger condition
is met so as to draw curve charts for analysis of value trends. Refer to Section 22.2 in ISPSoft User Manual for more
details.
Operation 1
 Compile the current project before using the function. Click Wizard> Data Tracer to open the Data Tracer window as
shown below.
_13
 Click the button of Symbol Name to open the Add Sample Source window.
 Click the button of Symbol Name in the Add Sample Source window and select the variable symbol name to
be added in the Choose Symbol window or directly type a device name in the Device Name box.
13-2
C h a p t e r 1 3 D a ta L o g g e r a n d D a ta Tr a c e r
 Set up the sample period and trigger setting.
 After setting up the parameters, click on the icon toolbar to have the system in the online mode. Then click
to download the settings to the PLC.
13
 After the sample parameter settings in the data tracer are completed and downloaded, any of the following three
modes on the icon toolbar can be used for watching curves in the online mode.
 Click on the icon toolbar to export the data to your computer for future use.
13-3
13.1.2 Example
If X0.0 is a signal to open/close externally. Use Data Trace to measure the width of time when X0.0 is ON.
 Steps:
 Open Data Tracer and enter X0.0 for monitoring.
 Set the Customized Time to 100 ms to take samping, set the trigger device to X0.0, set the trigger position to 10,
and then set the compare condition to ON as the image shown below.
_13
 Set the mode to One-shot trigger and wait for the trigger (ON). Once it is triggered, it displays the recorded curve
data.
 The value in I ∆ X1 is 2500 ms, the time measured between two vertical lines, X1 and X2. for X0.0.
13-4
13.2 Data Logger

13.2.1 About Data Logger
Data logger is used for the long-term recording of variable symbols, values, states in devices, and drawing curve charts.
The data is stored in the PLC and the memory card of the PLC for analysis of value trends. Refer to Section 22.3 in
ISPSoft User Manual for more details.
Operation A
 Compile the current project before using the function. Click Wizard> Data Logger to open the Data Logger window
as shown below.
13
 Click the button of Symbol Name to open the Add Sample Source window.
 Click the button of Symbol Name in the Add Sample Source window and select the variable symbol name to
be added in the Choose Symbol window or directly type a device name in the Device Name box.
13-5
 After setting up the parameters, click on the icon toolbar to have the system in the online mode. Then click
to download the settings to the PLC. And then click to record data.
Note: From here you can also follow Operation B to complete the recording and saving.
 When the recording is done, click the uploade button to update the data for later viewing.
_13  Click on the icon toolbar to export the data to your computer for future use.
 Click on the icon toolbar or use SM and SR to save the data to the SD Card installed on the PLC.
Operation B
You can also use SM flags or SR registors to complete the data recording, data saving or set to store data on a SD card
permanently. See the example below for reference.
Example:
 Check if the flag SM457 is ON. If the flag SM457 is ON, it indicates the valid recorded parameters are downloaded in
data logger. And that means the operation A is done correctly.
 Use inputs to enable/disable or set the flag SM454 to ON for the PLC to start recording. If you need to store data on
a SD card, set SR902=16#5AA5.
 When SM455 is ON or when the quantity of data has met the value set in SR900 (32-bit value), the system start
saving data on a SD card.
NOTE: While sending data to the SD card for storage, the PLC needs a period of undisturbing time, approximately
tens of milliseconds. During this period, the PLC is not allowed to execute interrupts. Make sure the PLC is NOT
executing any interrupts, especially the external input ones before starting to send data to the SD card for storage.
13-6
 When SM455 is switching from OFF to ON, set SM456 ON. And the PLC starts to store the recorded data on the SD
card. The default path and the file name are as shown below:
 Default saving path
AS200: \SDCard\PLC CARD\AS200\Log
AS300: \SDCard\PLC CARD\AS300\Log
 Default file name

DATA_LOGGER_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.log
EX: DATA_LOGGER_20181108_161901.log
13.2.2 Related SM Flags and SR Registors

SM / SR Attr. Description
Check here to see if a SD Card is installed in the PLC. 13
SM450 R ON: SD card inside
OFF: No SD card
Check here to see if data is being stored on the SD card.
SM452 R ON: In the operation of storing
OFF: Not in the operation of storing
Check here to see if there is any SD card operational error.
SM453 R ON: Abnormal
OFF: Normal
Check here to see the last operational error code of the SD card.
SR453 R
Note: Only available when SM453=ON
Set this flag to ON/OFF to start or stop recording. The system will not set this flag to OFF
SM454 R/W
automatically even if the space for recording is full. You need to set the flag to OFF manually.
Check here to see if the recorded number has reached the set limit.
SM455 R
ON: The quantity of recordings has reached the set number or the SD card is in cycle recording.
Used with SR902 to activate the settings in SR902 for the SD card.
SM456 R/W Note: Set the flag from OFF to ON and the PLC starts to store the recorded data on the SD card
when SR902=16#5AA5.
Check here to see if there is any valid, downloaded, recorded parameters in the data logger.
SM457 R
ON: The valid recorded parameters are downloaded in data logger.
Check here to see the quantity of the recorded data (32-bit value).
SR900 R
Note: It increments the number of the recorded data by 1 for each record.
Control codes for recorded data.
 16#5AA5: Store data to a default root and specified file name on the SD card.
SR902 R/W  0: The storing is done.
 Others: Invalid numbers
Note: Used with SM456 to activate this setting.
Note: “R” in the column of attribute (Attr.) indicates the item is read only and the status can be read here.
“W” in the column of attribute (Attr.) indicates you can set, delete or write a value for this item.
13-7
13.3 Delta Drive Parameters Backup and Restore

Delta device parameters can be backed up and restored. This function allows you to backup and restore the device
parameters, including parameters of inverters and servo drives that are connected to the PLC CPU. You can backup the
device parameters for later use. If a device is not funcitoing, you can change to a new one and use the backup the
parameters to set up the new device quickly. Here we use AS Series PLC CPU as an example to backup and restore
Delta device paratmeters. Refer to EIP Builder User Manual for detailed information on operation of other series.
13.3.1 System Requirement

Software: ISPSoft V3.10 or later, EIP Builder V1.07 or later
PLC CPU: AS Series PLC firmware V1.08 or later
Drive: C2000 Series inverter firmware V2.06 or later
EIP Communicaiton Card: CMC-EIP01 firmware V1.08 or later
_13
13.3.2 The Architecture Overview for Backup and Restore
Through EIP Builder, you can backup device parameters and store them in the SD card that is installed in AS Series PLC
CPU. For restoration, you can use HMI to manage the SR from AS PLC CPU to restore the drive parameters to the Delta
drive that is connected to the AS Series PLC CPU.
For AS300 Series PLC CPU, you can deloy back up and restoration for up to 16 Delta drives at the same time.
For AS100 and AS200 Series PLC CPU, you can utilize back up and restoration for up to 8 Delta drives at the same time.
Find the architecture overview for back up and restoration below. Refer to Chapter 9 for details on the EtherNet/IP
operation.
Software HMI
192.168.1.99 192.168.1.98
AS300
192.168.1.11
Ethernet Switch
Delta Driver
C2000_No.1 C2000_No.2
192.168.1.9 192.168.1.10
13-8
13.3.3 Steps to Backup Delta Device Parameters

Step 1: Open EIP Builder and make sure AS Series PLC CPU is well-connected and ready to communicate. And then
make sure AS Series PLC CPU is also connected to the Delta drives and they are also ready to communicate.
13
Step 2: Make sure a SD Card is installed in the AS Series PLC CPU and the AS Series PLC CPU is at the state of STOP.
Step 3: Click the Uploader icon on the tool bar for backup.
Step 4: Select the paremeters that you need to store for backup and click Start.
13-9
Step 5: Once all the selected parameters are uploaded to the computer, you can see the information “All done”.
_13
Step 6: Click the Downloader icon on the tool bar to download the backup file from the computer to the SD card of
AS Series PLC CPU.
Step 7: Select the paremeters that you need to download and click Start.
13-10
Step 8: Once all the selected parameters are downloaded to the SD card of the AS Series PLC CPU, you can see the
information “All done”.
OK
Step 9: Use your computer to check if the backup file is saved in the SD card.
Remarks:
 Default backup file path
AS300: \SDCard\PLC CARD\AS300\DevPara 13
AS200: \SDCard\PLC CARD\AS200\DevPara
 File naming: mmmm_nn_tt_pppppppppppppppp.par

mmmm: device or module code (e.g. PLC CPU is 0000.)
nn: communication port number (e.g. PLC Ethernet communication port is 03.)
tt: communication protocol type (e.g. Ethernet communication is fixed to 01.)
pppppppppppppppp: device information (IP + ID + 000000 in the hexadecimal format)
For example: If the device IP is 192.168.1.9 and its ID is 9, the device information is C0A80109
(IP: 192 = 16#C0, 168=16#A8, 1=16#01, 9=16#09) + 09 (ID) + 000000 = C0A8010909000000.par
Step 10: You can use ISPSoft to set the Delta drive’s number in SR1601 and SR1602 for easier operation when it is
required to use the restoration function on site.
1 3 - 11
13.3.4 Steps to Restore Delta Device Parameters

Two ways you can use to restore the Delta device parameters. One is to use ISPSoft to perform the restoration and the
other way is to send commands (SM/SR) to the SD card of the AS Series PLC CPU through HMI. Refer to section
3.1.4.16 Delta Device Parameters Backup and Restore from ISPSoft User Manual for more information. Here we focus on
the operation of sending commands (SM/SR) to the SD card of the AS Series PLC CPU through HMI.
Use SM/SR devices to appoint which Delta drive should be restored. Refer to the table below. After you have set the
configurations, the PLC executes the restorations when the PLC is Power-On or from Stop to Run.
SM / SR Function Description Retainable
0: No action (default)
1: The AS Series PLC CPU executes the
_13 SR1600 Parameter restoration code restoration when the PLC is Power-On or from Stop Yes
to Run. When the restoration is complete, reset the
value to 0.
SR1601.0 SR1601.0: corresponding to target device #1

~ SR1601.1: corresponding to target device #2
SR1601.15 ︙
Target device number to perform
and SR1601.15: corresponding to target device #16 Yes
parameter restoration
SR1602.0 OFF: No action (default)
~ ON: Execute restoration on the appointed target
SR1602.15 device.
0: No error occurred
The total number of Delta drives that
SR1603 1~16: The total number of Delta drives that error No
error has occurred during restoration
has occurred during restoration
0 ~ 255: The last digit of the device’s IP address
The last digit of the device’s IP
that a most recent error occurred during restoration.
SR1604 address that a most recent error No
(Only valid when SM1161 is switched to ON. Find
occurred during restoration
SM1161 description below.)
The error code of the last device that
SR1605 Refer to the error code table below. No
error occurred
OFF: When the value in SR1600 changes from 1 to
0, reset SM1160 to OFF.
SM1160 Parameter restoration complete No
ON: When the restoration is complete and
successful, SM1160 switches to ON.
OFF: When the value in SR1600 changes from 1 to
Error occurred during parameter 0, reset SM1160 to OFF.
SM1161 No
restoration ON: If any error occurred during restoration,
SM1161 switches to ON.
13-12
In HWCONFIG, you can set up the handling method: what to do if an error occurs while restoring.
 Execution delay time when power on:
You can set up how logh should the PLC CPU wait before the restoration begins. The default is 3 seconds. It means
after power on, and after the PLC CPU detects its modules, it will wait for 3 seconds before executing restoration.
But if the value in SR1600 is 0, the action here will be ignored.
 When error occurs, CPU module:

You can set up if an error occurs during restoration, the PLC CPU stops or keeps running (default). If an error occurs
during restoration, the PLC CPU will show warning error LED and stores the error message “H’0021”. Refer to the
error code table below.
13
 Delta Device Parameter Restore Setting:

For the connected Delta devices, you can set up more configuraitons for security, including IP address, ID Number,
Password Protecton, and Compatibile Check.
Note: Delta devices will also check for the compatibility, even if you have selected the option “Ignore Checks if
Possible” here.
13-13
Example: Back up parameter from Delta drives, number 1, 3, 6 and 16 and execute restorations.
Backup
Step 1: Select the devices that you need to backup in EIP Builder. Here we select device 1, 3, 6 and 16.
_13
Step 2: Download the backup file from the computer to the SD card of AS Series PLC CPU.
13-14
Step 3: Make sure you have the backup file ready and the IP addresses and Slave IDs in the backup file of the SD card
are identical to the ones that need to be restored.
SD Card:
File naming: mmmm_nn_tt_pppppppppppppppp.par
mmmm: device or module code (e.g. PLC CPU is 0000.)
(IP: 192 = 16#C0, 168=16#A8, 1=16#01, 101=16#65) + 01 (ID) + 000000 = C0A8016501000000.par
13
Step 4: You can use ISPSoft to set the Delta drive’s number in SR1601 and SR1602 for easier operation when it is
required to use the restoration function on site.
Restoration
Step 1: Check and make sure you have set the IP addresses, Slave IDs, and passwords of the Delta drives to be restored.
Step 2: Use the HMI, e.g., Delta DOP series HMI to set up SR1601=16#8025 (SR1601.0, SR1601.2, SR1601.5,
SR1601.15; these 4 bits set to ON and others set to OFF.)
Note: You can use ISPSoft to set the Delta drive’s number in SR1601 and SR1602 beforehand, it would be easier
for personeels to execute restoration on site.
Step 3: Make sure a SD Card is installed in the AS Series PLC CPU and the AS Series PLC CPU is at the state of STOP.
Step 4: Use HMI to set SR1601 to 1. Switch PLC CPU from STOP to RUN.
Step 5: Check if the value in SM1160 of the PLC CPU. If it is ON, it indicates the restoration is complete. If it is not ON, go
check if the value in SM1161 is ON. If it is ON, it indicates an error has occurred during restoration.
13-15
Troubleshooting
 When SM1161 is ON and the value in SR1603 is not 0.
 Read the value in SR1604 to find the last digit of the device’s IP address that a most recent error occurred during
restoration to find out which device is not functioning.
 Read the value in SR1605 or use the PRST_ErrRead to read the error code. See the table below for
troubleshooting.
Error Code
Type Error Message Solution
in SR1605
Make sure SD card is installed
H'0001 CPU module can NOT detect SD card
securely. Unplug it and plug it in again.
Make sure there is a backup file in SD
H'0002 No backup file in SD card.
card.
Error occurred while reading data from
H'0003 SD card. For instance, failed to read or Check if SD card is damaged.
_13 the file is corrupted.
PLC setting Check if SD card is written proof or if it
H’0004 Failed to write data into SD card.
and operation is damaged.
error Restoration setting error
(For example, the IP address to be Check if the naming of IP address and
H’0008 restored is set as a broadcasting one. ID is the same as what is set in
For restoration, the IP address should be HWCONFIG.
one on one, not broadcasting.
Check if the network cable is
H’000A Connection lost well-connected and the wiring is
correct.
Check if the Delta drive’s firmware
H’1000 Not supported parameter settings version in the backup file is matched
with the one to be restored.
Check if the Delta drive’s series in the
H’1001 Device series not matched backup file is matched with the one to
be restored.
Check if the Delta drive’s firmware
H’1002 Device version not matched version in the backup file is matched
with the one to be restored.
Check if the Delta drive’s voltage level
H’1003 Incompatible device voltage level in the backup file is matched with the
one to be restored.
Check if the Delta drive’s power in the
Backup and H’1004 Incompatible device power backup file is matched with the one to
restoration be restored.
error Check if the Delta drive’s model in the
H’1010 Device model not matched backup file is matched with the one to
be restored.
Check if the Delta drive’s password is
H’1011 Incorrect device password
the same as what is set in HWCONFIG.
H’1100 Device communication timeout well-connected and free from noise
interference.
If the problem persists, contact the
Currently the device can NOT execute
H’1101 local authorized distributors of the
backup or restoration. Delta drive.
Currently the device can NOT compete
the execution of backup or restoration. Delta drive.
H’1106 Device responds with incomplete data If the problem persists, contact the
13-16
Error Code
Type Error Message Solution
in SR1605
for backup/restoration local authorized distributors of the
Delta drive.
Device responds with an unexpected
H’1108 well-connected and free from noise
error.
interference.
H’2000 Parameters exceed the upper limit. local authorized distributors of the
Delta drive.
H’2001 Parameters are less than the lower limit. local authorized distributors of the
Delta drive.
H’2002 Parameters can NOT be written. local authorized distributors of the
Delta drive.
Restoration H’2003
Currently the device is at the state of
Switch the device to the state of STOP.
13
RUN.
error
Currently the device is at the state of Refer to the drive user manual for more
H’2004
error. information.
H’2005 Incorrect device file local authorized distributors of the
Delta drive.
Number of device parameters not
matched. Delta drive.
Execution of backup or restoration
timeout Delta drive.
13.3.5 FAQ
Question 1: Is Ethernet/IP the only communication protocol for backup and restoration?
Answer: Yes, currently Ethernet/IP is the only communication protocol supported. RS485 communicaiton will also be
available in the near future.
Question 2: Are the file name and the folder path editable?
Answer: The file name of the backup file contains to 4 sections, PLC Ethernet communication port, Ethernet
communication protocol, and device information. Only the device information can be edited according to the device to be
restored. See below for more details on the file naming.
File naming: mmmm_nn_tt_pppppppppppppppp.par
(IP: 192 = 16#C0, 168=16#A8, 1=16#01, 101=16#65) + 01 (ID) + 000000 = C0A8016501000000.par
Question 3: Can backup and restoration be executed when PLC CPU is at the state of RUN?
Answer: No. Backup and restoration can only be executed when PLC CPU is at the state of STOP. Since AS Series PLC
CPU reads data from or writes data into the SD card, it affects the PLC scan time and may further affect the PLC
operation.
13-17
MEMO
_13
13-18
12
A
Appendix A Installing a USB Driver
Table of Contents
A.1 Installing the USB Driver for an AS Series CPU module in Windows XP with SP3
.......................................................................................................................... A-2
A.2 Installing the USB Driver for an AS Series CPU module in Windows 7 .......... A-6
A.3 Installing the USB Driver for an AS Series CPU module in Windows 8 ........ A-11
A.4 Installing the USB Driver for an AS Series CPU module in Windows 10 ...... A-13
A.5 Notes on Utilizing USB Communication ...................................................... A-16
A-1
A.1 Installing the USB Driver for an AS Series CPU module in

Windows XP with SP3
The instructions below show how to install the USB driver for an AS Series CPU module on Windows XP. To
install the USB driver on another operating system, refer to the instructions in the operating system for
information on installing new hardware.
Before you install the USB driver, you must install ISPSoft version 3.00 or above on your computer.
(1) Supply power to the AS Series CPU module. Connect the AS Series CPU module to a USB port on your
computer with a USB cable. In the Found New Hardware Wizard, select No, not this time and then click
Next.
_A
(2) The wizard displays the name of the detected USB device. Select Install from a list or specific location
(Advanced) and then click Next.
A-2
A p p e n d i x A I n s ta l l i n g a U S B D r i ve r
(3) After you install ISPSoft version 3.00 or above, the driver for the AS CPU module is under the folder where
you installed ISPSoft: ...\ISPSoft\drivers\Delta_PLC_USB_Driver\.
Select Include this location in the search and enter the correct path, or click Browse to browse for the
correct folder. Click Next to continue the installation.
A_
A-3
(4) The system installs the driver. If the Hardware Installation message appears during the installation, click
Continue Anyway.
_A
(5) Click Finish.
A-4
(6) Open the Windows Device Manager window. If the Delta PLC port for the USB device is under Ports
(COM & LPT), the installation of the driver is successful, and Windows assigns a communication port
number to the USB device.
A_
Additional remarks
 If you connect the PLC to a different USB port on the computer, the system may ask you to install the driver
again. Follow the steps above, and install the driver again. After you install the driver, the communication
port number that the operating system assigns to the USB device may have changed.
 If Windows XP has not been updated to the version SP3 on the computer, an error message stating the
missing files will appear during the installation. Resolve this issue with one of the following steps.
(a) Cancel the installation, install Windows XP SP3 on the computer, and reinstall the driver according to
the steps above.
(b) Get the file needed, and specify the path where the file is stored for the missing file in the error
message window.
A-5

Windows 7
This section describes the steps to install the USB driver for an AS Series CPU module on Windows 7. To
install the USB driver for an AS Series CPU module on another operating system, refer to the instructions in the
operating system for information about installing new hardware.
Before you install the USB driver, you must install ISPSoft version 3.00 or above on your computer.
Supply power to the AS Series CPU module. Connect the AS Series CPU module to a USB port on the
computer with a USB cable.
(1) Windows detects the module. From the Windows Control Panel, open the Device Manager. The name of
_A the USB device appears in the Device Manager window. Double-click the AS300.
A-6
(2) In the AS300 Properties dialog box, click Update Driver…..
A_
(3) Click Browse my computer for driver software.
A-7
(4) After you install ISPSoft version 3.00 or later, the driver for the AS Series CPU module is under the folder
where you installed ISPSoft ...\ISPSoft\drivers\Delta_PLC_USB_Driver\. Enter the path to the driver, or
click Browse to browse to the correct folder.
Specify the correct path. If you installed the driver for the AS series CPU module to another location,
specify the corresponding path. Click Next to continue the installation.
_A
A-8
(5) Click OK. The system installs the driver. If the Windows Security window appears during the installation,
click Install this driver software anyway.
A_
(6) When the installation completes, click Close.
A-9
(7) Open the Device Manager window again. If the name of the Delta USB device appears under Ports (COM
& LPT), the installation of the driver is successful. The operating system assigns a communication port
number to the USB device.
_A
Additional remarks
 If you connect the PLC to a different USB port on the computer, the system may ask you to install the driver
again. Install the driver again. After you install the driver, the communication port number that the operating
system assigns to the USB device may have changed.
A-10

Windows 8
Windows 8 driver signature enforcement provides a way to improve the security of the operating system by
validating the integrity of a driver or system file each time it is loaded into memory. Because the Delta PLC USB
driver does not include the driver signature, this section shows you how to disable driver signature enforcement
in Windows 8 to successfully install the Delta PLC USB driver. Once you disable the driver signature
enforcement setting, it returns to its original state after you restart Windows.
Follow these steps to disable driver signature enforcement in Windows 8.
1. Press the Windows button 【WIN】+【I】 on your keyboard to display the Settings window. Click
A_
Change PC settings.
2. The PC settings window appears. Click General and then click Restart now under Advanced startup.
A - 11
3. After the computer restarts, under Choose an option, click Troubleshoot. Under Troubleshoot, click
Advanced options.
_A
4. On the Advanced options page, click Startup Settings, and then on the Startup Settings page, click
Restart to restart the computer.
5. Press the 7 or F7 key on your keyboard to choose Disable driver signature enforcement. Press Enter
and the system directs you back to the Windows 8 operating system. Install the Delta PLC USB driver now
by connecting the AS Series CPU module to your computer’s USB port. Refer to Section A2 for the steps
to install the USB driver.
A-12

Windows 10
Windows 10 driver signature enforcement provides a way to improve the security of the operating system by
validating the integrity of a driver or system file each time it is loaded into memory. Because the Delta PLC USB
driver does not include the driver signature, this section shows you how to disable driver signature enforcement
in Windows 10 to successfully install the Delta PLC USB. Once you disable the driver signature enforcement
setting, it returns to its original state after restarting Windows.
This section describes the steps to disable driver signature enforcement in Windows 10.
1. Click the Windows Start button and then click Settings.
2. In the Settings window, click Update & Security. A_
A (Setting) B (Update & Security)
A-13
3. In the Settings window, click Recovery, and then click Restart now.
C (Recovery) D (Restart now)
_A
4. After the computer restarts, under Choose an Option, click Troubleshoot, and then click Advanced
options.
5. On the Advanced options page, click Startup Settings. On the Startup Settings page click Restart to
restart the computer.
A-14
6. On your keyboard, press 7 or F7 to choose Disable driver signature enforcement, and the system
directs you to the Windows 10 operating system page. Install the Delta PLC USB driver.
A_
7. Install the USB driver for the AS Series CPU module by connecting the AS Series CPU module to your
computer’s USB port. Refer to Section A2 for the steps to install the USB driver.
A-15
A.5 Notes on Utilizing USB Communication

 Suggested to use USB communication in the following occasions: PLC program upload / download,
PLC parameters monitoring, and firmware upgrade.
 Suggested NOT to use USB communication for applications that require long time communication and
without any connection drop.
 When experiencing connection lost, you can unplug the USB cable and then plug it back in and try the
communication again.
 For the first time USB communication user, you need to install the USB driver for the AS Series PLC
CPU.
_A
 If the communication is still not working after unplugging and plugging, you need to open the Devices
(Windows settings -> Devices) to see if the USB driver is still valid. The USB driver may be lost due to
Windows updates. If your USB driver is invalid, install the USB driver again.
A-16
B
Appendix B Device Addresses
Table of Contents
B.1 Standard Modbus Device Addresses ...................................................... B-2
B.2 Function Codes and Number of Devices Supported for Modbus ProtocolsB-3
B-1
B.1 Standard Modbus Device Addresses

Applicable to AS300 and AS200 series PLC
Modbus address AS Address

Device Type Format Device range
(Decimal number) (Hexadecimal number)
Bit DD.DD X0.0-X63.15 124577-125600 6000-63FF

X
Word DD X0-X63 332769-332832 8000-803F
Bit DD.DD Y0.0-Y63.15 040961-041984 A000-A3FF

Y
Word DD Y0-Y63 440961-441024 A000-A03F
M Bit DDDD M0-M8191 000001-008192 0000-1FFF
SM Bit DDDD SM0-SM4095 016385-020480 4000-4FFF
SR Word DDDD SR0-SR2047 449153-451200 C000-C7FF
D Word DDDDD D0-D29999 400001-430000 0000-752F
S Bit DDDD S0-S2047 020481-022528 5000-57FF
Bit DDD T0-T511 057345-057856 E000-E1FF

T
_B Word DDD T0-T511 457345-457856 E000-E1FF
Bit DDD C0-C511 061441-061952 F000-F1FF

C
Word DDD C0-C511 461441-461952 F000-F1FF
Bit DDD HC0-HC255 064513-064768 FC00-FCFF

HC
DWord DDD HC0-HC255 464513-464768 FC00-FCFF
E Word DD E0-E9 465025-465039 FE00-FE09
B-2
Appendix B Device Address
B.2 Function Codes and Number of Devices Supported

for Modbus Protocols
Applicable to AS300 and AS200 series PLC
Number of devices Number of devices

Function supported supported
Name Description
code (FW V1.06.00 or (FW V1.06.10 or
later) later)
01 Read Coil Status X, Y, M, SM, S, T, C, HC 1~256 bits 1~1600 bits
Read Discrete Input

02 X, Y, M, SM, S, T, C, HC 1~256 bits 1~1600 bits
Status
1~100 words, 1~100 words,

03 Read Holding Registers X, Y, SR, D, T, C, HC, E
(1~50 for HC) (1~50 for HC)
04 Read Input Registers X 1~100 words 1~100 words
05 Force Single Coil Y, M, SM, S, T, C, HC 1 bit 1 bit
06 Preset Single Register Y, SR, D, T, C, HC, E 1 word 1 word
0F Force Multiple Coils Y, M, SM, S, T, C, HC 1~256 bits 1~1600 bits
1~100 words, 1~100 words,

10 Preset Multiple Register Y, SR, D, T, C, HC, E
(1~50 for HC) (1~50 for HC)
Read/Write Multiple 1~100 words, 1~100 words,

17 Y, SR, D, T, C, HC, E
Register (1~50 for HC) (1~50 for HC)
B-3
MEMO
_B
B-4
C
Appendix C EMC Standards
Table of Contents
C.1 EMC Standards for an AS Series System ........................................................ C-2
C.1.1 AS Series System EMC Standards ............................................................... C-2
C.1.2 Installation Instructions to meet EMC Standards ........................................... C-4
C.1.3 Cables ..................................................................................................... C-5
C-1
C.1 EMC Standards for an AS Series System

C.1.1 AS Series System EMC Standards
The EMC standards that are applicable to an AS series system are listed in the following tables.
 EMI
Port Frequency range Level (Normative) Reference standard
Enclosure port 30-230 MHz 40 dB (μV/m) quasi-peak
(radiated)
IEC 61000-6-4
(measured at a 230-1000 MHz 47 dB (μV/m) quasi-peak
distance of 10 meters)
79 dB (μV) quasi-peak
0.15-0.5 MHz
AC power port 66 dB (μV) average
IEC 61000-6-4
(conducted) 73 dB (μV) quasi-peak
0.5-30 MHz
60 dB (μV) average
 EMS
Environmental Reference
Test Test level
phenomenon standard
Electrostatic Contact ± 4 kV
IEC 61000-4-2
_C discharge Air ± 8 kV
Radio frequency 2.0-2.7 GHz 1 V/m

80% AM,
electromagnetic field IEC 61000-4-3 1.4-2.0 GHz 3 V/m
1 kHz sinusoidal
Amplitude modulated 80-1000 MHz 10 V/m
Power frequency 60 Hz 30 A/m

IEC 61000-4-8
magnetic field 50 Hz 30 A/m
C-2
A p p e n d i x C E M C Sta n d a r d s
 Conducted immunity test
Fast transient Radio frequency

Environmental phenomenon High energy surge
burst interference
Reference standard IEC 61000-4-4 IEC 61000-4-5 IEC 61000-4-6
Specific
Interface/Port Test level Test level Test level
interface/port
Data Shielded cable 1 kV 1 kV CM 10 V
communication Unshielded cable 1 kV 1 kV CM 10 V
AC I/O 2 kV CM
2 kV 10 V
(unshielded) 1 kV DM
Digital and analog Analog or DC

1 kV 1 kV CM 10 V
I/O I/O(unshielded)
All shielded lines

1 kV 1 kV CM 10 V
(to the earth)
2 kV CM
AC power 2 kV 10 V
1 kV DM
Equipment power
0.5 kV CM
DC power 2 kV 10 V
0.5 kV DM
AC I/O and AC 2 kV CM
I/O power and 2 kV 10 V
auxiliary power 1 kV DM C_
auxiliary power
DC I/O and DC 0.5 kV CM
output 2 kV 10 V
auxiliary power 0.5 kV DM
C-3
C.1.2 Installation Instructions to meet EMC Standards

You must install an AS Series PLC in a control box. The control box protects the PLC and isolates
electromagnetic interference generated by the PLC.
(1) Control box
 Use a conductive control box. Remove the paint on the plate bolts to ensure good contact between the
inner plate and the control box.
 Connect the control box with a thick wire to ensure that the control box is well-grounded, even if there
is high-frequency noise.
 The diameter of holes in the control box must be less than 10 millimeters (3.94 inches). Radio
frequency noise may be emitted if the hole diameter is larger than 10 millimeters.
 Minimize the distance between the door of the control box and the PLC to prevent radio waves from
leaking. You can also prevent radio waves from leaking by putting an EMI gasket on the painted
surface.
(2) Connecting a power cable and a ground
Connect the PLC system power cable and the ground as described below.
 Provide a ground point near the power supply module. Use thick, short wires to connect the terminals
LG and FG with the ground. The length of the wire should be less than 30 centimeters (11.18 inches).
Noise generated by the PLC system is passed to the ground through LG and FG; therefore, the
_C impedance should be as low as possible. Although the wires are used to reduce noise, they
themselves carry a lot of noise. Using short wires can prevent the wires from acting as antennas.
 Twist the ground and the power cable together; the noise flowing through the power cable is then
passed to the ground. The ground and the power cable do not need to be twisted if you install a filter
on the power cable.
C-4
A p p e n d i x C E M C Sta n d a r d s
C.1.3 Cables
Grounding a shielded cable
Cables drawn from the control box carry high-frequency noise. When they are outside of the control box, they
are like antennas emitting noise. The cables connected to digital input/output modules, analog input/output
modules, temperature measurement modules, network modules, and motion control modules should all be
shielded cables to prevent the emission of noise. Using shielded cables also increases the resistance to
external noise. You improve the resistance to noise if the signal cables that are connected to the digital
input/output modules, analog input/output modules, temperature measurement modules, network modules,
and motion control modules are all shielded cables that are grounded properly. If you do not use shielded
cables or ground the shielded cables correctly, noise resistance will not improve. Make sure the shield of any
connected cable contacts the control box. You must scrape any paint off of the control box at the contact point.
All fastening must be metal, and the shield must contact the surface of the control box. Use washers to correct
any unevenness or use an abrasive to level the surface.
Ground the shield of a shielded cable as close to a module as possible. Ensure that there is no electromagnetic
induction between grounded cables.
C_
C-5
MEMO
_C
C-6
D
Table of Contents
D.1 Cautions .................................................................................................... D-2

D.2 Daily Maintenance ....................................................................................... D-3
D.2.1 Required Inspection Tools ........................................................................... D-3
D.2.2 Daily Inspection ........................................................................................ D-3
D.3 Periodic Maintenance .................................................................................. D-4
D3.1 Required Inspection Tools ............................................................................ D-4
D.3.2 Periodic Inspection .................................................................................... D-5
D-1
D.1 Cautions
Observe the following precautions before performing maintenance and inspection. Incorrect or careless operation
will lead to injury or equipment damage.
 To prevent a breakdown of an AS Series system or a fire, ensure that the ambient environment
does not contain corrosive substances such as chloride gas, sulfide gas or flammable substances
such as oil mist, cutting powder, or dirt.
 To prevent the connectors from oxidizing and to prevent electric shock, do not touch the
connectors.
 To prevent electric shock, turn off the power before pulling the connectors or loosening the
screws.
 To prevent cable damage, and to prevent the connectors from being loosened, do not put weight
on the cables or pull on them.
 Ensure that the input voltage is within the rated range.
 To prevent product breakdown, fire, or injury, do not disassemble or alter the modules.
 To prevent a controlled element from malfunctioning, ensure that the program and parameters
are written into a new CPU module before restarting the AS Series system.
 To prevent incorrect output or equipment damage, refer to the related manuals for more
information about operating the modules.
 To prevent damage to the modules, touch grounded metal or wear an antistatic wrist strap to
release static electricity from your body before working on a module.
 To prevent noise from causing system breakdown, keep a proper distance from the system when
_D using a cell phone or communication device.
 Do not install an AS Series system in direct sun or in a humid environment.
 To prevent the temperature of an element from being too high, maintain a proper distance
between the AS Series system and heat sources such as coils, heating devices, and resistors.
 To protect an AS Series system, install an emergency stop switch and an overcurrent protection
device.
 Inserting and pulling a module several times can loosen the contact between the module and the
backplane.
D-2
 To prevent an unexpected shock from resulting in damage to the AS Series system and a
controlled element, ensure that the modules are correctly and firmly installed.
D.2 Daily Maintenance

To keep an AS series system operating normally, ensure that the ambient environment and the AS series system
conform to the cautions listed in section D.1. You can then perform the daily inspection described below. If you find any
problems, follow the solution and perform any necessary maintenance.
D.2.1 Required Inspection Tools
 A screwdriver
 Industrial alcohol
 A clean cotton cloth
D.2.2 Daily Inspection
No. Item Inspection Criterion Remedy
Dirt must not be

1 Appearance Check visually. Remove the dirt.
present.
Check whether the set Tighten the
screws are loose. screws.

The backplane must
2 Installing of a backplane Check whether the Install the
be installed firmly.
backplane is installed on backplane on the
the DIN rail properly. DIN rail properly.
Check whether the The projection under
module is loose that the the module must be
3 Installing of a module
projection is inserted into inserted into the hole Install the module D_
the hole on the backplane, in the backplane, and firmly.
and that the screw is the screw must be
tightened. tightened.
Check whether the The removable

Install the terminal
removable terminal block terminal block must
block firmly.
is loose. not be loose.
4 Connection
Tighten the
Check whether the The connector must
screws on the
connector is loose. not be loose.
connector.
D-3
Power POWER Check whether the

The POWER LED
supply LED POWER LED indicator is
indicator must be ON.
module indicator ON.
When the CPU module is

RUN LED The RUN LED
running, check whether
indicator indicator must be ON.
the RUN LED is ON.
Check whether the

ERROR LED The ERROR LED Please refer to
ERROR LED indicator is
indicator indicator must be OFF. Chapter 12 for
CPU OFF.
5 more information
module BUS FAULT Check whether the BUS
The BUS FAULT LED about
LED FAULT LED indicator is
indicator must be OFF. troubleshooting.
indicator OFF.
SYSTEM Check whether the

The SYSTEM LED
LED SYSTEM LED indicator is
indicator must be OFF.
indicator OFF.
Check whether the LED If the LED indicators

LED indicators on an
indicators on the are ON, the module is
extension module*
extension module are ON. operating normally.
* Please refer to the Module Manual for more information related to the LED indicators on the extension modules.
D.3 Periodic Maintenance

In addition to daily inspection, you should perform periodic maintenance depending on the actual operating
environment. After making sure that the ambient environment and the AS Series system conform to the cautions listed
in Section D.1, perform the periodic inspection described below. If you find any problems, follow the solution and
_D perform any necessary maintenance.
D3.1 Required Inspection Tools
 A screwdriver
 Industrial alcohol
 A clean cotton cloth
 A multimeter
 A thermometer
 A hygrometer
D-4
D.3.2 Periodic Inspection
The ambient
temperature and the
ambient humidity must

To ensure that the
The ambient temperature conform to the
system operates
Ambient and the ambient humidity specifications for the
Ambient environment
in a stable
temperature/hu are measured by a modules or the
environment,
1 midity thermometer and a backplane. If the
determine why the
hygrometer. specifications are
environment
different, the strictest
varies, and
specifications have
resolve the issue.
priority.
Corrosive gas must

Atmosphere Measure corrosive gas.
not be present.
The power supply
Measure the AC power should meet the Check the power

2 Supply voltage
supply. specifications for the supply.
power supply module.
Please refer to
Chapter 4 for
Check whether the module The module must be
Looseness more information
Installation
is loose. installed firmly.

3 on installing the
module.
Adhesion of Dirt must not be
dirt
Check the appearance.
present.
Remove the dirt. D_
Looseness of
Tighten the screws with a The screws must not Tighten the
terminal
screwdriver. be loose. screws.
Connection
screws
4
Tighten the
Looseness of The connectors must
Pull the connectors. screws on the
connectors not be loose.
connectors.
Please refer to
PLC system
5 Check the error logs. No new error occurs. section 12.1.3 for
diagnosis
more information.
D-5
The maximum scan

Check the states of SR413 Determine why
cycle must be within
and SR414 through the the scan time
6 Maximum scan time the range specified in
device monitoring table in exceeds
the system
ISPSoft. specifications.
specifications.
_D
D-6

Delta Ia-Plc As Hom en 20210225

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Delta Ia-Plc As Hom en 20210225

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Delta Ia-Plc As Hom en 20210225

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AS Series Hardware and Operation Manual

Industrial Automation Headquarters

DACH: Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.

AS Series Hardware and

Chapter 1 Product Introduction

1.1 Overview ........................................................................................... 1-2

1.2 Overview ......................................................................................... 1-13

1.3 Characteristics ................................................................................. 1-14

Chapter 2 Specifications and System Configuration

2.1 General Specifications ....................................................................... 2-3

2.2 CPU Module Specifications ................................................................. 2-4

2.3 Digital Input/Output Module Specifications .................................... 2-18

2.4 Analog Input/Output Module Specifications .................................... 2-36

2.5 Temperature Measurement Modules Specifications ......................... 2-44

2.6 Positioning Module Specifications.................................................... 2-50

2.7 Counter Module Specifications ........................................................ 2-54

2.8 Network Module Specifications ....................................................... 2-59

2.9 Load Cell Module Specifications ....................................................... 2-67

2.10 Extension Card Specifications.......................................................... 2-70

2.11 Power Supply Module Specifications ............................................... 2-77

2.12 Power Supply Module Adapter Specification .................................... 2-83

Chapter 3 Installing Software

3.1 Installing and Uninstalling ISPSoft ................................................... 3-2

3.2 Installing and Uninstalling COMMGR ................................................. 3-9

4.1 AS Series Hardware Framework ........................................................ 4-2

4.2 Installation Notes .............................................................................. 4-5

4.3 Installation ........................................................................................ 4-6

4.4 Wiring.............................................................................................. 4-13

4.5 Connecting Power Cables ................................................................ 4-15

4.6 Wiring CPU Modules ........................................................................ 4-20

4.7 Wiring Digital Input/Output Modules .............................................. 4-39

4.8 Wiring Digital Input/Output Terminals ........................................... 4-60

4.9 Wiring Analog Input/Output Modules ............................................. 4-68

4.10 Wiring Temperature Measurement Modules .................................... 4-74

4.11 Wiring Positioning Modules and Counter Modules ........................... 4-77

4.12 Load Cell Modules ............................................................................ 4-82

4.13 Wiring Network Modules ................................................................. 4-83

4.14 Wiring Function Cards ..................................................................... 4-89

5.1 Introduction of Devices ......................................................................... 5-2

5.2. Device Functions .................................................................................. 5-6

5.3. Assigning I/O Addresses for Modules ................................................. 5-22

5.4 Module Addresses Defined by Software ............................................... 5-23

Chapter 6 Writing a Program

6.1 Quick Start ........................................................................................ 6-2

6.2 Procedure for Creating a Project in ISPSoft....................................... 6-3

6.3 Creating a Project.............................................................................. 6-4

6.4 Hardware Configuration .................................................................... 6-5

6.5 Creating a Program ........................................................................... 6-6

6.6 Testing and Debugging a Program .................................................. 6-23

6.7 Setting a Real-time Clock ................................................................ 6-36

7.1 Overview of Memory Cards ................................................................ 7-2

7.2 Before using a Memory Card .............................................................. 7-3

7.3 Installing and Removing a Memory Card ........................................... 7-4

7.4 Memory Card Contents ...................................................................... 7-5

7.5 Introduction to the CARD Utility ........................................................ 7-7

7.6 Backing Up a Project ....................................................................... 7-10

7.7 Restoring a Project .......................................................................... 7-15

7.9 CPU Error Log .................................................................................. 7-20

Chapter 8 Hardware Configuration and Data Exchange Setups